Vic «desi Medie at a udi v P att he aes nes abe d 


-- "e 
choi w Mei he Bey acf 


dni ird er ES F 
vies m 

Tie ot efr nin IS 
gie uia Tum amie 


Lr 
Nasfte lene ni 


DEAE ICE 
a 


Return this book on or before the 
Latest Date stamped below. 


..  ... University of Illinois 1 of Illinois Library CO 


L161—H 41 


SEP 17 1994 


A 
| t bos 
p 


Pane N DU CTIV B 
LATIN PRIMER 


BY 


S2 


WILLIAM R2HARPER, Pu.D. «^ 


PRESIDENT OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, LATE OF YALE UNIVERSITY. 


AND 


ISAAC B. BURGESS, A.M. 


BOSTON LATIN SCHOOL , 


NEW YORK .. :- CINCINNATI .:- CHICAGO 


V 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 


COPYRIGHT, 1891, BY 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 


ENTERED AT STATIONER’S HALL 


[AU rights reserved ] 


Printed by Wm. Ivison 
New York, U.S.A. 


PREFACE. 


= Turis volume while intended, like the * Inductive Latin Method ” 
of the same authors, for a first Latin book, is more elementary in 
.j character, and is suited to pupils less mature or less thoroughly 
j trained than those to whom the ** Method " is adapted. Pupils begin 
© the study of Latin at such different ages and with such a difference 
" in mental equipment that no one book can meet the needs of all. 
4 — Those who have used the ** Method " will find that the ** Primer,” 
= while retaining all the prominent features of the former, differs from 
it in the following particulars : — 

1. The Lessons are shorter. 

2. Formal grammar is reduced toa minimum, and is introduced 
more slowly. 

3. No reference is made to the grammar during the early Lessons, 
and the book may be used without a separate grammar, if desired. 

4, The exercises are easier and more copious, 

5. More prominence is given to conversation upon the text, 

6. The subject-matter is illustrated by maps, plans, and pictures. 

7. A brief but comprehensive treatment of English Grammar, 
inductive in character and adapted to those who have never studied 
English Grammar before, and to the needs of those studying Latin, 
is bound with the Latin Lessons. This is constantly referred to in 
explaining Latin forms and syntax. 

For the benefit of those who are unfamiliar with the inductive 
__ method or with its application to language work the following outline 

of the order of work laid down in this book is presented : 

| l. A sentence of the original text is placed before the pupil. The 
2. pronunciation and exact translation of each word are furnished him. 
£35 By the aid which the teacher gives him in advance, and with the help 
‘2given in the book, he thoroughly masters the words and phrases of 
ic this sentence. His knowledge is tested by requiring him to recite or 
 &write the Latin sentence, with only the translation before his eye. 
E 2. In connection with this mastery of the words and phrases of the 


2X5. V4 2- 


i» PREFACE. 


sentence assigned, the pupil reads and digests the contents of the 
“Notes” on these words. This study accomplishes two things: 
first, the careful examination of each remark, with its application to 
the work in hand, aids in fixing more firmly in mind the word sought 
to be mastered ; second, grammatical material is being collected from 
the very beginning of his work. 

3. The “Text” and ‘ Notes" having been learned, the next step 
is one of a more general character. Out of the material which has 
thus far been mastered, those principles which are of most impor- 
tance, and which the pupil himself will be most likely to recoguize, 
are pointed out under the head of “Observations.” The pupil should 
be brought to see these principles for himself before reading the state- 
ment of them in the ** Observations.” 

4. The words of the sentence are now separated from their context 
and placed in alphabetieal order. Thus separated, they form the 
basis of additional study. . 

5. In order to prevent the memorizing of the Latin text without a 
clear idea of the force of each word, to impress more firmly on the 
mind the words and phrases of the text, and to drill the pupil in 
prose composition, — “ Exercises," Latin into English and English 
into Latin, are given. These are always based upon the sentence 
‘which furnishes the basis of the ** Lesson." 

6. Once more the leading points of the entire lesson, whether 
suggested in the ** Notes," the **Observations," or the ** Vocabulary," 
come up for consideration under the head of **Topies for Study." 
Upon each topie the student is expected to make a statement of what 
HE KNOWS (not of what has been said in the book). If his statement 
is not sufficiently full, it will be criticised by the class. 

From this outline the idea of the method will be apparent. Tt 
proposes : first, to gain from the classic text an accurate knowledge of 
some of the facts of the language; second, to learn from these facts 
the principles which thev illustrate, and by which they are regulated ; 
third, to apply these principles in the further progress of the work. 
A few words in explanation of this statement are needed : 

l. It is not to be supposed that the elementary student will 
perform unaided the complete inductive process of the mature 
investigator. He cannot, of course, search through hundreds of 
pages of Latin literature for possible exceptions to a prineiple which 
appears in the few facts before him, but must receive his teacher's 


PREFACE. * 


assurance that these facts are fairly REPRESENTATIVE of the whole 
great class of faets to which they belong. It is believed, however, 
that under proper guidance both his powers of observation and his 
reasoning faculties will be greatly stimulated and a large amount of 
independent work will be doue. 

2. It is not to be supposed that a long time must elapse before the 
beginner is ready to take hold of principles. As a matter of fact, he 
is taught important principles, and that, too, inductively, during the 


first hour’s work. The three processes are all the while going on 


together. He is increasing the store of facts at his command, 
learning new principles from the facts thus acquired, and applying 
these principles to the new forins continually coming to his notice. 

3. The memorizing of the facts of a language, before a knowledge 
of the principles has been acquired, is, indeed, a piece of drudgery, 
and yet not so great as is the memorizing of grammar without a 


knowledge of the facts. Nor will it long remain drudgery ; for very 


soon the student begins to see analogies, to compare this word with 
that, and in short to make his own gramunar. 

4. A writer in the London “Journal of Education,” speaking of 
recent educational changes in Germany, says: “ The chief feature of 
the reform programme is the ewphasis laid on making grammar the 
handmaid of literature, on mastering the text, and gaining a knowl- 
edge of grammar by study of it rather than making grammar an aim 
in itself.” These words are an exact statement of the spirit and 
method of this manual. Grammar is not neglected, but it is treated 
as a means, not as an end. The book is complete in itself; but 
those who believe that reference to a Latin Graminar should be mace 
during the first vear in preparation for later work will find references 
to Harkness’s, and Allen and Greenough’s Grammars in the later 
* Lessons " of the book. Attention is called to the summary state- 
ments of grammar in the first four ** Review Lessons." 

5. By basing the work of the pupil strictly upon the connected 
text of Caesar, a very large amount of time, usually given to learning 


forms and syntax not required in translating Caesar, is saved. In the 


smallness of his vocabulary, the slight variety of his forms, and the 
simplicity of his syntax, Caesar offers surprising advantages as a first 
Latin author. He uses but 950 words in the whole Helvetian war, 
employs scarcely more than 40 of the 150 forms of the Latin verb, 
and avoids almost entirely the use of the subjunctive in conditions. 


i PREFACE. 


The English-Latin Vocabulary included in the **Latin Method” 
has been omitted in this book because it is very difficult, if not 
impossible, to induce beginners to learn from the text the words 
and usages required in writing the English-Latin Exercises, if the 
Vocabulary is so conveniently supplied. To those who wish it, 
however, an English-Latin Vocabulary will be furnished by the 
publishers. 

The attention of teachers is specially called to the preface of the 
“Inductive Studies in English Grammar" (p. 1) and to the “Sug- 
gestions for Teachers ”’ (p. 66). 

This ** Primer," like the ** Method," teaches the pupil to read Latin 
by following the order of the original, and we again express our 
indebtedness to Prof. W. G. Hale, of Cornell University, who has 
explained this method very clearly in his * Art of Reading Latin." 
We also extend our thanks to Dr. E. A. Sheldon, of the Oswego 
Normal School, N. Y. ; to Mr. William Simons, of Charleston, S. C. ; 
to Miss Gertrude E. Hale, of the Packer Institute, Brooklyn; to Dr. 
E. G. Sihler, author of a ** Lexicon to Caesar's Gallic War ;" and to 
Mr. J. W. Seudder, of the Albany Academy, Albany, N. Y., for 
kind suggestions. The editors of the American Book Company 
have rendered constant and efficient aid iu the preparation of the 
book for publication. 

We have been most fortunate in securing the help of several 
fellow-teachers in the work of reading the proof. Such aid has been 
rendered by Mr. John K. Richardson, Mr. Henry C. Jones, and’ Mr. 
Francis De M. Dunn, of the Boston Latin School ; by Mr. Frank M. 
Bronson, of Cornell University ; and by Dr. Herbert C. Tolman, of the 
University of Wisconsin. We feel ourselves under lasting obligation 
to these gentlemen for constant suggestions during many months. 
We have profited not a little by their accurate scholarship and 
discriminating judgment. They are not, however, responsible for any 
errors of fact or reasoning which the book contains. Further ac- 
knowledgments will be found in the preface to the “ Inductive Studies 
in English Grammar.” 


WILLIAM R. HARPER, 
ISAAC B. BURGESS. 


SEPTEMBER, 1891. 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. 


PREFACE . 

List oF ABBREVIATIONS 

INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN Exenis GRAMMAR . 
SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS 

Lzssows L-XCIII. 


GRAMMATICAL INDEX 


Text or Carsar, B. G. I. 1-29 
Wonp-roR-woRD PARALLEL 

Free TRANSLATION E 

AprPENDIX A. Metuop or Reaping Latin. 
APPENDIX DB. Notes on B. G. I. 21-29 
APPENDIX C. Worp-Lists 

LatiIn-EnGLIisH VOCABULARY . 


MAPS AND ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE 


Gallic Helmets . . . . . 99 | Soldier’s Pack 
Galle Swords . . . . . 155 | Roman Sword 
Gallic Coins . . . . . . 199 | Roman Shield 
MEAS e. ..3398 | Map of Gaul . , 
- Roman Soldier . . . . . 238 | Gallic Foot- Soldier 


Caesar's Wall and Trench . 251 | Seat of the Helvetian War 
Roman Army on the March . 269 | Defeat of the Helvetians . 


En CAMP 5. om 285 | Roman Spear . . 
Gallic Horseman . . . . 321 | Triple Line of Battle 


PAGE 
332 
335 
361 
362 
364 
369 
377 
378 
397 


A. & G. 


, abl. . 


accus. . 


act. . 


adj. . 


adv. 


antec. . 


Bk. . 
Chap. 
of. 
comp. 
conj. 
conjug. . 


const. . 


dat. 
decl. 
dem. 
dep. 
dir. 
disc. 
E. G. 


etc. . 


fem. 
fut. . 


gen. 


Gram. . 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


Allen and Greenough’s 
Latin Grammar 

ablative 

accusative 

active 

adjective 

adverb 

antecedent 

Book 

Chapter 

CONFER, compare 

comparative 

conjunction 

conjugation 

construction 

dative 

declension 

demonstrative 

deponent 

direct 

discourse 

Inductive Studies in Eng- 
lish Grammar, accom- 
panying this “Primer.” 

EXEMPLI GRATIA, for 
example 

English 

ET CETERA, and so forth 

feminine 

future 

genitive 

Grammar 


- 


H. 


neg. 
neut. 


nom. . 


obj. . 
Obs. 


ps pp. - 
partic. . 


pass. 
pers. 


pf. - 
Pl pf. 
plur. 
prep. 
pres. 
pron. 
sing. 
subj. 
subjv. 
sup. . 


traas. . 


vez. 


Vocab. . 


Harkness's Latin Gram. 
ID EST, that is 
imperfect 
indicative 
indirect 
infinitive 
Latin 
literal 
masculine 
Note 
negative 
neuter 
nominative 
object 
Observation 
page, pages 
participle 
passive 
person 
perfect 
pluperfect 
plural 
preposition 
present 
pronoun 
singular 
subject 
subjunctive 
superlative 
transitive 
namely 
Vocabulary 


The plur. has generally been formed by adding -s to the abbreviation. 


¥ 


INDUCTIVE STUDIES 


IN 


ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 


PREFACE. 


Tuts book, while suitable for any student of English, is designed 
especially for persons who intend to study Latin or some other for- 
eign language; its preparation seemed necessary for the following 


| reasons : — 


First. The grammar of English is necessary in learning that of 
a foreign language, on the principle that in study we must pass 
from the known to the unknown. Furthermore, there is not time 
to acquire a knowledge of English grammar after the pupil has 
plunged into the new vocabulary, the new inflections, and the new 
constructions, of a foreign tongue. 

Second. As a matter of fact, very many pupils come to our high 
schools with almost no practical mastery of English grammar. 

Third. The manual of English which we have just shown to be 
necessary in the high school, should be very readily accessible to the 
pupil, not only for connected study before taking up a foreign lan- 
guage, but also for reference after it is begun. It should therefore 
be brief enough to be bound with the Latin manual. Most of the 
existing grammars are too long for this purpose. 

Fourth. Very many of the existing grammars, though adequate 
for English alone, have but little regard for comparative gram- 


‘mar. Asa matter of fact, more than half the rules found in our 


Latin grammars have their counterparts in English; but so thor- 
oughly is this fact disguised in our English grammars by a narrow 
treatment, or by a difference in terminology or arrangement, that the 
beginner feels the Latin to be far more new and strange to him than 
it really is. 


9 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


Fifth. None of the existing manuals are thoroughly and consis- 
tently inductive. They first bring before the beginner, not the living 
language itself for his scrutiny, but a generalized statement about the 
language for his assent. 

The study of English grammar is well adapted for inductive treat- 
ment, for the pupil has already learned the simple facts of the English 
language, and has used them for years. It is the purpose of this 
book to show him that he knows these facts, and to guide him in 
organizing his knowledge so that he may apply it in new fields. 

These “studies”? in English grammar require the constant use of 
a note-book in recording the results of the pupil’s observation. The 
facts discovered by observation should be fixed in mind by constant 
practice in analyzing and parsing connected English, and in framing 
English sentences to illustrate grammatical forms or the rules of 
syntax. 

The authors do not believe that a pupil’s understanding of rules is 
effectively tested by classified groups of examples, each group being 
placed under its own rule, and therefore have not swelled the book 
with such collections of examples. The pupil’s knowledge of a prin- 
ciple will be best tested by requiring him to pick out concrete ex- 
amples of its application from several pages of connected English, 
such as he may find in his reading-book, his history, or any of the 
booklets of English classics which may now be obtained for a few 
cents. 

It is suggested that the freedom of arrangement required in poetry 
makes it somewhat superior to prose as a means of expelling from a 
pupil’s mind the delusion that word-order is a safe guide to gram- 
matical construction. 

A large part of the sentences on which inductions are based are 
taken from the story of ** The Golden Touch," in Hawthorne's ** Won- 
der Book." In the preparation of these pages reference has been 
made to the English Grammars of Professors Whitney, Meiklejohn, 
Salmon, and Welsh. Mr. Byron Groce, Mr. John K. Richardson, 
Mr. Henry C. Jones, Mr. Francis De M. Dunn, all of the Boston 
Latin School, and Mr. Charles F. Kimball, of the Rice Training 
School, Boston, have rendered very valuable assistance in reading the 
proofs. : | 


PRONUNCIATION. 3 


PRONUNCIATION. 


1. Vowels. — The letters a, e, i, o, u, and y when it has the sound 
- of i, are pronounced by a continuous flow of sound, and can be pro- 
. nounced when standing alone.! These letters are called vowErs. 

Norse. — When, as in be-hav’-ior, the letter i is preceded by an ac- 
cented syllable and followed by another vowel, it is a consonant with the 
sound of y. 


2. Consonants.— The other letters of the alphabet cannot be 
pronounced without checking the flow of sound by one or more of the 
. vocal organs, nor without the aid of a vowel. Thus, in pronouucing 
the letter f the sound is checked by the lips and teeth, and the sound 
of e is inserted before that of £; what we pronounce is really a com- 
bination of two letters, — ef. Such letters are called CONSONANTS. 
What, then, is the difference between a vowel aud a consonant ? 


3. Mutes and Liquids. — Those consonants in the pronunciation 
of which the sound is most completely checked, are called MUTEs. 
They are g, d, b, c, k,q,t, p. [Tt will be seen that these consonants 
are least like the vowels in their pronunciation. Those consonants 
which are most like the vowels in their pronunciation are called 
LIQUIDS; they are 1 and r. 


4. Diphthongs. — Study the sounds of ou and oi in the words 
oil, join, out, hound. Note that the vowels in ou and oi have 
practically combined to form a single sound. Such a combination 
of vowels is called a DIPHTHONG. 


Norz. — Consonants may combine to form a single sound. The letter 
 X€ is often equivalent in pronunciation to cs or ks. 


5. Syllables. — Any letter or combination of letters or sounds 
which may be completely pronounced by a single movement of tbe 


1 This and the following sections should be vocally illustrated by the teacher. 


4 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


voice, may be a SYLLABLE... All words consist of one syllable or 
more; thus, no-bod-y, my-self, a-way. 

Pronounce the following common words carefully, just as you have 
heard them pronounced by educated people, and then divide them by 
hyphens into the syllables which you have pronounced :? metal, 
chiefly, purpose, foolish, glistening, loved, maiden, planted. 
Is each syllable of these words pronounced with the same euergy ? 


6. Number of Syllables in a Word compared with the 
Number of Vowels. — In the following words compare the number 
of vowels and diphthongs with the number of syllables: pos-si-bly, 
bet-ter, fond-er, gar-den, mu-sic, more, loved, choose, be-cause, 
chief-ly, thought, be-hav-ior. 

1. In which of the above words is the number of vowels and diph- 
thongs the same as the number of syllables? 2. In which is the 
number of vowels and diphthongs greater than the number of syl- 


lables? 3. In the latter, are there any silent vowels? 4. If there. 


were no silent vowels in English, what would be the rule for the 
number of vowels and diphthongs in a word as compared with the 
number of svllables ? 


7. Accent. — In the pronunciation of all English words of more 
than one syllable, one syllable is made prominent by a special loud- 
ness, distinctness, and energy of utterance, callel ACCENT. Accent 
may be described as a stroke of the voice, and it is indicated in 
written or printed language by a down-stroke just at the end of the 
accented syllable; thus, syl'-la-ble, ex-ceed'-ing-ly. 


To the Teacher. — The pupil should have ample drill in distinct syl- 
labication and definite accentuation. Do not allow any slurring of final 
syllables in words or sentences. It may be a help to represent syllables 


1 May a vowel be a syllable, and if so, why? 

2 Care should be taken that each syllable is distinctly pronounced. Remember 
that there is a clear, though very brief, pause after each syllable. Oral spelling, 
provided each syllable is pronounced immediately after it is spelled, is an excellent 
means of cultivating the sense for syllables, which, for some reason, very many high- 
school pupils lack. 


PRONUNCIATION. 5 


and accents graphically; thus, ex.ceed ingly. Note that the lines 
_which represent the syllables do not touch one another. What does 
this mean ? 


Rules for Pronunciation of Vowels. 


8. When we know the pronunciation of a syllable, and wish to 
find the sound of a single letter or group of letters in that syllable, 


- we do so by gradually taking away the sound of the other letters, 


until only the letter or group in question remains; thus, mate, mat, 
ma, a. But we must be very careful not to change the sound of the 
letter in question during the process. 
1. Find and contrast the sound of the underlined vowels in the 
following familiar words : — 

a. mate Eve fine note use type 


6. mat end fin not us myth  bot.tom feeling 


The sound which we give to the vowels in the first line is called 
the long sound, and is indicated thus: mate. The sound which we 
give to the vowels in the second line is called the short sound, and is 
indicated thus: mát. Let the pupils, singly or in concert, be prepared 
to give the long and short sounds of all the vowels. 

9. Judging from the words above, what is the sound of all vowels 
in fiaal syllables ending in a consonant, counting one-syllable words 
as final syllables? 


9. Stuly the following words, noting particularly the sound of the 
underlined vowel in each : — 


Mary evil pining fogy flute 
marry elbow pinning foggy flutter 
Also 
. election flexile calendar rapture ringing construct 


1. Give the meaning of each of the above words. 2. Which of 
the vowels underlined above are immediately followed by two conso- 
nants before another vowel is reached? 3. Why should the first e 
in flexile be included in this list? 4. What is the sound of each of 


6 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


these vowels? 5. If these words represent the tendency in English 
pronunciation fairly, in what position may we expect to find short 
vowels ? ! 

6. Study the following examples for an exception to this rule: 


acre fragrant oblige idle 


7. Repeat the list of mutes and that of liquids, and then see if you 
can state this exception. 8. From the definition of a liquid, what 
reason can you suggest for this exception ? 


10. The next to the last syllable is called the penult. The sylla- 
ble before the penult is called the antepenult. 

Observe the sound and position of the vowel in the antepenultimate 
syllables of the following words: — 


ná'.tion-al (cf. nation)  créd/-i-ble (cf. cré-dence) 
vin'.e.gar (cf. vine) Már'-y-gold (cf. Ma-ry) 
par-tíc'-u-lar prdb/-a-ble victory 


And contrast 


di-'a-logue vi'-o-let de'-i-fy 
Also 

pá'tri-ot in-té'.ri-or mà'-ni-ac 
And also 

cü'-po-la ü'-ni-ty cü'cum-ber  |lü'.bri-cate 


1. What, from the above exainples, seems to be the rule for the 
length of vowels before one or more consonants in antepenultimate 
accented syllables? 2. What examples show that this rule does not 
hold when the vowel of the penult is followed immediately by another 
vowel? 38. What examples show that the vowel u does not conform 
to the rule? 


1 Note that the word “tendency” is used. While there are many exceptions 
to the tendencies of the language indicated in this and the following sections, still 
it is believed that a knowledge of these tendencies will be very helpful. While 
English pronunciation is a sore puzzle, it is not quite so lawless as is generally 
supposed. 


= 


PRONUNCIATION. T 


1l. The letter u in qu. — What letter represents the sound of u 
in the following words? 


equity liquid quick queen quantity 


By what consonant is u preceded in these words? 


Rules for the Pronunciation of Consonants. 
19. Study the sound of c, t, and s, when underlined in the follow- 
ing words: — | 
ar-ti-fi/.cial ^ con-fi-den'.tial na/-tion  spe'cies 


ex-cur’-sion  ap.pre-hen/-sion  so/.cial as-so/-ci-a'tion 


1. What sound is added to that of the underlined c or s in the 
above words? 2. In what respect is the sound of the underlined t 
similar to that of the underlined c ors? 3. What kind of a syllable 


|-invariably precedes c, s, or t? 4. What vowel invariably follows ? 


5. Why should the x in anxious and noxious follow the same rule ? 


13. Note the sound of c and g in the following words : — 


sagacity centre secrecy physic club region surgeon 
ague acid election cod physical cub edge 
grave go game gypsy gun cant mug 


1. What two sounds has c in the above words? 2. What two 
has g? 3. Pick out the words in which ce has its soft sound, or 
sound ofs. 4. Pick out the words in which g has its soft sound, or 
sound of j. 5. Before what three vowels only does the soft sound of 


|. c and g occur?! 


1 Only those principles of English pronunciation have been introduced which 
seemed most helpful to later study. It is believed that what has here been given 


|! will be useful, not only as a preparation for the English pronunciation of Latin, but 
| also in pronouncing the mother-tongue. The teacher should see to it that these 
| principles are applied to pronouncing English words never before seen by the 
| pupils. Too often pupils pronounce their mother-tongue wholly by imitation. 


8 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 


14. Once upon a time there lived a very rich man, 
and a king besides, whose name was Midas; and he 
had a little daughter whom nobody but myself ever 
heard of, and whose name I either never knew or 
have entirely forgotten. So, because I love odd names 
for little girls, I choose to call her Marygold. 


HawTHORNE : Wonder Book." 


l. Are there any THINGS which we know which cannot be learned 
through any of the five senses? Make a list of all the names of per- 
sons and things in the above extract.! Such names are called Nouns, 

2. What word in the above, containing only one letter, is used 
instead of the name of the person who is speaking? What ad- 
vantages are there in using such a word? Can you find any other 
words which take the place of nouns in the passage? For what noun 
does each stand ? Words which are used instead of nouns are called 
PRONOUNS. Pro, which is the first syllable, means instead of. 

3. What words in the passage assert some action? A word which 
asserts 1s called a VERB. Make as many assertions or statements as 
possible, using only the nouns, pronouns, and verbs which you have 
collected. See if you can make a statement without using a verb. 
See if you can make a statement without using a noun or pronoun. 

4. What words in the above passage are used to describe nouns? 
Such words are called Ap;yECTIVES. The pupil will observe that a word 
which describes a noun also limits the number of objects which that 
noun can name. Thus the words, RICH man, apply to a more limited 


number than the word man; the words, LrrrTLE daughter, to a more | 


limited number than daughter; THIs king to only one, while the 
word king may be applied to scores of people. Therefore an adjective 
is sometimes said to limit as well as describe. Indeed, some adjec- 
tives, like this, the, two, some, seem hardly to describe at all, but 
only to limit. 


1 [n answering this and the following questions the teacher may allow the pupil 
to omit the more difficult instances. 


PARTS OF SPEECII. 9 


5. There are also words which describe or limit the action of verbs. 
Pick them out in the above passage. Such words are called ADVERBS, 
"The word ADVERB means near a verb. In the expression, a VERY 
rich man, we have au adverb, vERY, limiting an adjective, rich; and 
we might say, Marygold loved her father vERY dearly, where 
dearly must be au adverb, because it describes loved, and yet is 
itself limited by the adverb very. Therefore au adverb may limit 
| an adjective or an adverb as well as a verb. 

6. Observe in the passage the use of UPON, in the expression upon 
| a time; BUT, in the expression but myself; and ror, in the expres- 
| sion for little girls. It will be seen that UPON connects time with 
lived, BUT connects myself with nobody, and FOR connects girls 
! with names, and that each of these words, UPON, BUT, and FOR, con- 
nects a noun or pronoun with something else, and shows some sort 
of a relation between the noun or pronoun which follows it and the 
| word with which that noun or pronoun is connected. What then is 
| & PREPOSITION ? 

7. Study the statement, There lived a very rich man, and he 
| had a little daughter. [t is evidently made up of two statements, 
| — There lived a very rich man and The man had a little daugh- 
| ter, united by the word AND. In like manner the statement, So, 
: because I love odd names for little girls, I choose to call her 
Marygold, is made up of two statements, —I choose to call the 
| little daughter Marygold, and I love odd names for little girls, 
connected by the word BECAUSE. Words which, like AND and BE- 
CAUSE, connect statements, are called coNJUNCTIONS. 

The conjunction seems many times to connect words used in the 
: same way, as in the sentence, He gave all his thoughts and all 
his time to this one purpose. What two words used in the same 
way does the conjunction here connect? Can you show, however, 
by inserting two omitted words, that there are really two complete 
| statements here? 


|. 25. Observe how all the different classes of words in the passage we 
have been studying are connected. The pronouns take the place of 
| ° ° 

| nouns, the verbs when united to nouns or pronouns make assertions, 


10 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


and no assertion can be made with noun or verb alone. The adjectives 
describe the nouns, the adverbs describe the verbs, the prepositions 
connect nouns or pronouns to something else, and, finally, statements 
are eounected by the conjunction. 

SPEECH often means the union of words to express ideas. Why 
then are nouns, verbs, adjectives, etc., called PARTS OF SPEECH ? 
In what respects is the statement of an idea like the human body ? 


16. Interjections. — Study the words Poh, Alas, 2 Ah in the 
following sentences : — 


Pou! my dear little girl, pray don't cry about it. 
ALAS! what had he done? 
Au! so you have made a discovery ? 


In what respects are the three words just mentioned used in the 
same way ? Under which of the classes called parts of speech may 
these three words be classified? What does the punctuation imme- 
diately after each show, as to their connection with the rest of the 
sentence? Such abrupt expressious of feeling are called INTERJEC- 
TIONS, which means ¢hrown into speech without being a part of it. 
Since these interjections go along with speech, however, they are 
usually called parts of speech. They seem to bear about the same 
relation to the statement which they accompany as a ring on the hand 
bears to the body. 


Number and Grouping of the Parts of Speech. 


17. Let us now group the parts of speech in two ways, in order to 
gain a more perfect understanding of them. First, as to their use or | 
office in a statement or assertion. | 

1. What two parts of speech are used as names? 2. What is the. 
asserter in every assertion?! 3. What are the two describers or 
limiters in an assertion? 4. What are the two connectors? 5. Is | 


1 The definition of the verb here given does not provide for interrogative and 
imperative sentences. Indeed, it is probably impossible to define the verb briefly 
and clearly so as to include such sentences. The interrogative and imperative | 
forms, however, may be so easily changed to declarative that this definition will 
not be found seriously inadequate. 


PARTS OF SPEECH. 11 


the tterjection properly a part of speech? 6. If not, why not? 

_.7. What reasons are there for classifying it as such? 8. How may 
we make out eight parts of speech? 9. How may we reduce this 
number to six? 10. Is there any reason for reducing the number to 
four? It is usual to give the number of parts of speech as eight. It 
seems more correct, however, to call it six. 


18. Let us now, in the second place, group the parts of speech in 
accordance with their relation to the noun and verb. 1. Why are the 
noun and verb cousidered the most independent and essential parts 
of speech? 2. What is the substitute for the noun? 38. What is 
the describer of the noun? 4. What is the connector of the noun? 
5. What is the describer of the verb? 6. What is the connector of 
two assertions ? 


19. Use, not Form, determines the Part of Speech. — Let us 
now return to the study of our passage. We found that in this pas- 
sage very was an adverb, rich was an adjective, name was a noun, 
but was a preposition. What are these same words in the following 
statements ? 


a. Midas was the VERY man. 

6. The RICH are envied. 

c. They NAME their daughter Marygold. 
d. He went away, BUT I stayed at home. 


We find — do we not ? — that exactly the same words have now in a 
different statement been quite differently used, and hence have become 
other parts of speech. Is not the lesson of this fact plain? It is 
that the spelling — or, as we would better say, the form — of a word 
does not show what part of speech it is. This is determined wholly by 
| its USE in a statement. Hence we must not try to tell the part of 
speech of a word until we see it UsED in a statement. Very, very 
many words, like the four we have taken from this short passage, are 
used as different parts of speech in different assertions. 


To the Teacher.— Too great emphasis can hardly be given to the 
above lesson. The pupil should have much practice in using one word 


12 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


as different parts of speech. A firm and consistent application of the 
principle that the part of speech is determined hy vsE, and not by Form, 
will do more to simplify English grammar than any other one thing. 

Such an expression as ** an adjective used as a noun” is a contradiction 
in terms. If any word is USED as a noun, it IS a noun, since USE alone 
determines the part of speech. ‘The expression quoted certainly implies 
that something else than vsE determines the part of speech, and the be- 
ginner concludes that it is the form of the word. It would be correct to 
say **a word usually an adjective, but here a noun,” though in many cases 
the use of a word is so various that it is impossible to say which part of 
speech it usually is. 


20. Words which do Duty as more than one Part of Speech. 
— Study the words in small capitals in the following sentences : 


a. RAISING his head, he looked the lustrous AERIS. in the 
face. 

ó. After carefully LOCKING the door, he took a bag of gold. 

c. If these flowers were golden, they would be worth the 
PLUCKING. 

d. I choose TO CALL her Marygold. 

e. Once there lived a king whose name was Midas. "Turis 
king was fonder of gold than of anything else. 

f. Tuoven he slay me, yet will I trust in him. 

g. He had a little daughter, AND he called HER Marygold. 

A. He had a little daughter WHOM he called Marygold. 


1. Observe that in a the word RAISING not only describes the follow- 
ing pronoun he like an adjective, but also expresses action and affects 
the noun head by its action. Furthermore, it is formed by adding 
an ending to the verb raise. Although it is like a verb in expres- 
sing action, it cannot be one, for it makes no assertion, like the verb 
looked, for instance, in the same sentence. An adjective which is 
similar in form and meaning to a verb is called a verbal adjective, and 
some verbal adjectives, like raising, are called PARTICIPLES. 

9. In sentences 6, c, and d, note that LOCKING, PLUCKING, and TO 
CALL are the names of actions expressed by the verbs LOCK, PLUCK, 
and cALL. They are, therefore, verbal nouns. Such verbal nouns 
as these are called INFINITIVES. 


PARTS OF SPEECH. 18 


3. In e, note that Tus limits the meaning of king, and is therefore 
an adjective. It refers, however, to King Midas mentioned in the 
preceding sentence, and has, therefore, to some extent the use of a 
pronoun, though it only refers to a noun and does not take its place. 
We therefore call it à PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVE. Make a sentence iu 
which this will be a pronoun. 

4. In sentence f, note that THOUGH not only limits the verb slay 
like an adverb, but also connects the statement in which it stands with 
the statement, yet will I trust in him. It is therefore both a con- 
junction and an adverb, aud is sometimes called a CONJUNCTIVE 
ADVERB. 

5. Note, in g and 5, that wHom in & takes the place of the con- 
junction AND, and the pronoun HER in g. A word which thus 
does the work of a conjunction and a pronoun is called a RELATIVE 
PRONOUN. 

6. From what immediately precedes, it will be seen that many 
" words discharge the office to soine extent of more than one part of 
speech. But note further that in at least three of these cases there 
is no doubt as to how we shall classify the word in question. The 
verbal adjective or participle is always an adjective and never a verb, 
because it always describes a noun and never asserts; see 14, 3. A 
verbal noun or infinitive is always a noun and never a verb, because it 
always names but never asserts; and a pronominal adjective is always 
an adjective and never a pronoun, because it always limits and never 
takes the place of, a noun ; see 14, 2. 

In the case of the conjunctive adverb and the relative pronoun, 


however, the single word seems clearly to do the work of two parts of 
speech. 


14 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


INFLECTION. 


21. Case. — Note the connection of each word in small capitals ir 
the following sentences with the other words in the same statemer’ 
or sentence: — 


a. The FATHER loves his daughter. 
6. Hx loves his daughter. 

c. The FATHER is loved by his daughter. 

d. The FATHER’S gold will be given to Hrs daughter. 
€. The daughter gives her FATHER a rose. 

J. The daughter gives HIM a rose. 

f. She loves HIM. 

hk. FATHER, may I go? 

2. She goes with HIM. 

She goes with her FATHER. 


>: 


1. We note that FaTHER iu a and e and ue in & are the per- 
sons made most prominent in these sentences: they are the sub- 
jects of discourse, and so are said to be the suB3EcTs of the sentence. 
In 7 and 7, however, 11M and FATHER are not the subjects, but are 
connected to a more important word by the preposition with. It is 
therefore plain that a noun or pronoun may have different relations 
to the other words of the sentence in which it stands. The relation 
in which it stands to the other words of the sentence is called its 
CASE. If a word is the subject of a sentence, it is said to be in the 
NOMINATIVE case; if it is the object! of a preposition, it is in the 
OBJECTIVE, OT ACCUSATIVE, case. 

The word raTHER is the same in spelling or form in both the - 
nominative and the accusative. How is it with the pronoun HE? 
Cf. (7. e. compare) 2. | ( 

2. There are still other cases or relations of nouns and pronouns. 
The words rATHER's and Hts before gold and daughter in d show 
that the father possesses the gold and a daughter. This relation is 


1 The meaning of this word when used of prepositions is explained five lines 
above. 


INFLECTION. 15 


therefore called the POSSESSIVE, or GENITIVE, case. How does mis 
differ in form from HE; FATHER’S from FATHER ? 

- 3. Again, the words FATHER and HIM in e and / have the 
action of the verb exerted indirectly, not directly, upon them. (The 
direct object in each case is rose.) This relation of indirect object is 
called the pATIVE case. Does the form of the dative differ from that 
of the accusative? See g, i, and J, 

4. In h, the word FATHER designates the person who is addressed. 
When so used, a noun is said to be in the vocaTIvE case. Is the 
vocative case closely connected with the rest of the sentence? How 
does its form compare with that of the nominative ? 


22. Number and Declension. — Let us again study the words 
in small capitals in the following sentences : — 


a. The FATHERS love their daughters. 

6. The FATHERS’ gold will be given to their daughters. 
€ The daughters give their FATHERS roses. 

d. They go with their FATHERS. 

€. FATHERS, love your daughters. 

jf. THEY love their daughters. 

g. THEIR gold will be given to their daughters. 

h. The daughters give THEM roses. 

i. They go with THEM. 


1. A noun which, like father, names a single person or thing, is in 
the SINGULAR NUMBER; à noun which, like fathers, names more 
than one, is in the PLURAL NUMBER. In what five different cases is 
the word FATHERS used in the sentences above? Pick out each dif- 
ferent use. In what four different cases is the proaoun of which 
THEY is the nominative plural used in the above sentences? Why 
is not this pronoun used in the vocative? 

2. Note that father is changed to father's to show that the father 
possesses something instead of does something (as in 21, a), and that 
fathers is changed to fathers' for the same reason. Therefore the 
form is changed, to indieate a difference of relation to the other words 
of the sentence. 

In the change from the nominative singular father to the nomina- 


16 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


tive plural fathers, however, there is no difference in relation, but 
there is a difference of meaning. A change in the form of a word to 
indicate either a change of relation or a change of meaning is called 
INFLECTION. The complete and orderly inflection of a noun or pro- 
noun is called its DECLENSION. 

8. In declining a noun or pronoun it is customary to write the 
cases iu the following order, — nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, 
vocative, — and to write the singular before the plural. Decline father 
aud he, selecting the different case-forms from the sentences we have 
just been studying. 


Singular Plural 
Nom. father he fathers they 
Gen. father's his fathers' their 
Dat. father him fathers them 
Accus. father him fathers them 
Voc. father fathers 


4. As to the cases which are alike, the word father is a fair 


sample of all nouns, and the word he is a fair sample of several pro- | 


nouns. (1) What cases then are always alike in nouns both in sin- 
cular and in plural? (2) Answer the same question in regard to 
the pronoun he. (3) What case differs in form from the nominative 
both in singular and in plural, and in both nouns and pronouns? 

(4) What case, though like the nomiuative in nouns, is different from 


the nominative in the pronoun he? (5) What is the exact difference - 


between the genitive singular and genitive plural of father? (6) Fill 


out the following blanks : 
Bo Singular 
Nom., Dat, Accus, Voc. father Nom. he 
Gen. Gen. 
Dat., Accus. 
Plural Plural 


Nom., Dat., Accus., Voc. Nom. 
Gen. —— Gen. — 
Dat., Accus. — 
(7) How many different forms has every English noun? (8) How 
many has the pronoun he? 


T 


""-————T——— M € C— MPO 


INFLECTION. 17 


23. Declension of Nouns. — Study the following declensions : } 


Sing. Sing. Sing. Sing. 
Nom., Dat, Accus, Voc. box lass ox child 
Gen. (box's)? lass’s ^ ox's child's 
Plur. Plur. Plur. Plur. 
Nom., Dat., Accus, Voc. boxes lasses oxen children 
Gen. (boxes lasses’  oxen's children's 


Sing. Sing. Sing. Sing. 
Nom., Dat., Accus., Voc. man mouse boy day 
Gen. man's mouse’s boy's day's 


Plur. Plur. Plur. Plur. 


Nom., Dat., Accus., Voc. men mice boys days 
Gen. men's mice’s boys’ days’ 
Sing. Sing. Sing. Sing. 
Nom., Dat., Accus., Voc. lady pony hoof calf 
Gen. lady’s pony's (hoof’s) calfs 
JE. Plur. Plur. Plur. 
Nom., Dat., Accus., Voc. ladies ponies hoofs’ calves 
Gen. ladies’ ponies’ (hoofs’) calves’ 


1. (1) How does the nominative plural of box and lass differ from 
that of father in ending? (2) Name other words which add -s to 
form the nominative plural. (3) Others which add -es. From these 
words it appears that as a rule we add -es when the nominative 
singular ends with such a sound that if -s is added, the sound of e is 
produced iu the effort to pronounce this s. 

2. What two letters (preceded by r in the case of child) are added 


1 A little investigation will convince the teacher that many pupils do not know 
the facts and rulcs here illustrated. Special attention should be given to the nom- 
inative and genitive plural. The great advantage to the pupil about to begin Latin 
of naming all the cases used in English and in arranging the declensions after the 
fashion of the Latin grammar, will be apparent. 

2 For reason for these marks of parenthesis, cf. 63, 4. 

2 


18 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


to ox and child to make the nominative plural? There are very few 
words thus declined. 

3. What marked difference between formation of the nominative 
plural of all the other words and that of man and mouse? — Give other 
words like these two. 

4. (1) In what respect are the four words boy, day, lady, and 
pony alike? (2) What difference in the formation of the nominative 
plural between the first two and last two? (3) What kind of a letter 
stands before y in boy aud day ? (4) What in lady and pony ? 
(5) What then scems to be the rule for the formation of the nomina- 
tive plural of nouns ending in y ? | 

5. (1) What is the likeness of ending between the nouns hoof 
aud calf? (2) What is the difference in the formation of their 
nominatives plural? Some nouns ending with sound of f form the 
plural like hoof, some like calf; but there is no rule regulating the 
matter, as in the case of nouns ending in y. 

6. (1) What difference between plurals like oxen, children, men, 
aud mice, and all the other plurals here given ? (2) What impor- 
tant difference in the genitives plural as compared with the other 
genitives plural ? 

7. It will be seen that while most nouns in English form their 
nominative plural by simply adding -s, there are several other ways 
of forming the plural. In other words, there are several different 
declensions in English. 


24, Declension of Pronouns. — Write eight sentences illustrating 
the use of the four singular and four plural cases of the pronoun she, 
just as was done with he in 21 and 22. Now decline she in singu- 
lar and in plural, selecting the proper cases from the sentences which 
you have written. Repeat this process in the case of the pronouns 
it, I who, which, that (as in all that glitters is not gold), 
what, this, that (as in I know that), and in the case of thou, but 
write ten cases of thou. Why can we write ten cases of thou, but only 
eight of the other pronouns? Compare the plurals of he, she, and it. 

l. I, thou, he, she, it are called PERSONAL pronouns; this, and 
that (when used like this) DEMONSTRATIVES. 


INFLECTION. 19 


250. The Form of Adjectives. — Are adjectives inflected! for case 
aud number? Since the adjective is not an independent part of 
| speech, but ouly describes or limits some noun or pronoun, if in- 
flected at all, it seems natural that its inflection should correspond 
or agree with that of the noun which it describes. 

To see whether people are accustomed to do this, let us use any 
adjective we may choose, with every case and both numbers, of the 
word father in the sentences for study of 21 and 22. If we use, for 
instance, the adjective rich, we shall find that we say rich father, 
rich father's gold, with her rich father, rich fathers, etc., and 
that no change is made in the form of rich to correspond with changes 
in the form of father. This is so with all adjectives but this and 
that. What change is made in these adjectives when a change 
in the case of the noun is made? What, when the number of their 
nouns is changed ? 

Why should not the form of all adjectives be varied to correspond 
with different cases and numbers of the nouns which they describe, 
just as the form of this varies for singular and plural? — It certainly 
would not be strange if they did so, and we know that this was 
formerly the case in English, and is now the case in many other 
languages.? 


Comparison of Adjectives. 
26. Study the adjectives in small capitals below : — 
a RICH man a RICHER man the RICHEST man 


(1) What changes have been made above in the form of rich? 
(2) What changes have been made in the meaniug by the added 
endings? (3) Why should richer be called the cowPaRaTIVvE? 
degree, and richest the sUPERLATIVE? (4) Why do we say 
4 rich man, but THE richest man? Rich is sail to be in the 


1 What is the meaning of this word? See 22, 2. 

2 The writer knows a little boy, just learning to talk, who uses such expressions 
asfreights cars, flowers gardens. ‘This shows, perhaps, a feeling on his 
part that the adjective ought to agree with the noun. 

8 Let the pupil look up the meaning of these words in the dictionary, if necessary. 


20 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


POSITIVE degree, and the process of changing the form of an adjec- 
tive, as it is done above, is called COMPARING. 


27. Study the adjectives in small capitals below : — 


a BEAUTIFUL child 

a BEAUTIFULER child 

the BEAUTIFULEST child 

a MORE BEAUTIFUL child 
the MOST BEAUTIFUL child. 


(1) Is there any difference of meaning between beautifuler and 
more beautiful? The latter is preferable. Contrast the two 
methods of comparison illustrated above. (2) To what word is the 
ending -er equivalent in meaning? (3) To what, the ending -est ? 
(4) What parts of speech are more and most? Cf. 14, 5, very 
rich. Long words are usually compare. by more and most. 


28. Study the following adjectives. They show the comparison of 


all adjectives ending in -e, -y, and in a consonant preceded by a short 
vowel. 


PURE water, PURER, PUREST 
a WISE man, WISER, WISEST 
the EARLY bird, EARLIER, EARLIEST 
the UGLY creature, UGLIER, UGLIEST 
a SAD sight, SADDER, SADDEST 
a BIG boy, BIGGER, BIGGEST 


(1) Are the adjectives above compared, like rich, by adding -er 
and -est to the positive? (2) If not, give the rule for comparing 
adjectives ending in -e. (3) For those ending in -y. (4) For 
those ending in a consonant preceded by a short vowel. 


29. 1. Several adjectives are irregularly compared. The following 
are the commonest of these : — 


good, better, best many, or much, more, most 
bad or ill, worse, worst near, nearer, nearest or next 
little, less, least. 


INFLECTION. 21 


2. Name several adjectives which from the nature of their meaniug 
-are used only in the positive. 

9. In such colloquial expressions as we had a most agreeable 
visit, the words a most agreeable do not have the proper superla- 
tive force of preémiuence to all others, as is shown by the use of the 
article a instead of the; they seem to be equivalent to a VERY 
agreeable. 


30. Comparison of Adverbs. — In the following sentences, pick 
out the adverbs : — | 

He came soon. He came soonerthan was expected. He 
wrote well. She wrote best. They crossed the ocean more 
safely than their friends. 

(1)-Are any adverbs compared? (2) How are those given above 
compared ? 


3l. Inflection of Verbs. — Stuy the verb-endings in the follow- 
ing short sentences : — 
a, He loves, they love. ó. Thou lovest, I love. 
c. They love, they loved. 


1. (1) What is the oaly difference in the form of the two verbs 
under a? The only difference in the meaning of he loves and they 
love is that in the first example the assertion is made of one person, 
in the second, the assertion is made of more than one. (2) To what, 
then, is the difference in the form of the verbs owing? (3) Is the 
verb always inflected to show a difference in number? Cf. I love and 
we love. 

2. In 4, however, there is certainly no difference in the number 
of the subject, and the assertions state that the acts described in each 
case are in present time. — To what, then, is the difference in the form 
of the verb owing ? 

That difference in the form of the pronoun which shows whether it 
refers to a person (or persons) speaking, to a person spoken to, or a 
person spoken of, is called a difference of PERsON. The person speak- 
ing is called the first person ; the one spoken to, the second; and the 
one spoken of, the third. 


99 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


od 


Name the pronouns of each person. See 24. Which person of the 
verb is used with all nouns? Let the pupil put several nouns into 
sentences, and answer from his own observation. Which person of 
the verb is most used ? 

3. Inc there is no difference of number or of person, and yet the 
verbs differ in form. (1) To what is this difference in form owing ? 
A difference in the form of a verb which shows a difference in the time 
of the action denoted by the verb is called a difference of TENSE. 
(2) What are the only three possible distinctions or divisions of time 
which can be made? (3) What two of these appear in the sentences 
of c? 

The study which precedes shows that the verb is inflected in order 
to show differences 1u time, or tense, and also because of differences 
in the number and person of its subject. b 

Name the three inflectional endings which you have just learned, 
and state very definitely the use of each. 


32. Participles and Infinitives. — Study the meaning, use, and 
form of the words in small capitals below : — 


a. A LOVING daughter. d. To LovE! God is the duty of man. 
b. A LOVED daughter. e. LOVING is better than hating. 
c. He was LOVED by all. 


Note that the words in small capitals, though evidently formed 
from the verb love, are not verbs, for they do not assert anything; 
see 14,3. (1) What part of speech is each? See20,1,2. (2) What 
difference is there in time, or tense, between loving and loved? 
(3) What difference in form? (4) . Compare the form of the past tense 
and that of the past participle. (5) Give several other verbs which 
form their past tense and past participle by adding -d or -ed to the 
simple infinitive. 


33. Summary of Verbal Inflection. — Study the following verb- 
forms, comparing those above the horizontal line with those below : 


1 Tn the expression he will love, love is an infinitive. To is not a neces- 
sary part of the infinitive. Judging from the sentence he will love and from | 
d and e, what three forms of the infinitive may we have ? 


INFLECTION. 23 


PRESENT TENSE. 


Sing. Sing. Sing. 
I love I call I learn 
thou lovest thou callest thou learnest 
he loves he calls he learns 
Plur. Tut. Plur. 
we love we call we learn 
you love you call you learn 
they love they call they learn 
PAST TENSE. 
Sing. Siug. Sing. 
I loved I called I learned or learnt 
thou lovedst thou calledst thou learnedst  '' learntest 
he loved he called he learned * learnt 
(Plur. Plur. Plur. 
we loved we called we learned or learnt 
you loved you called you learned '* learnt 
they loved they called they learned * learnt 
PRESENT TENSE. 
Sing. Sing. Sing. 
I write I sing I dig 
thou writest thou singest thou diggest 
he writes he sings he digs 
Plur. Plur. Plur. 
we write we sing we dig 
you write you sing you dig 
they write they sing they dig 
PAST TENSE. 
Sing. Sing. Sing. 
I wrote I sang I dug 
thou wrotest thou sangest thou duggest 
he wrote he sang he dug 
Plur. Plur. Plur. 
we wrote we sang we dug 
you wrote you sang you dug 
they wrote they sang they dug 


1 Tt seems best to defer the subject of mode until syntax is reached, since the 
imperative and subjunctive have no forms not found in the indicative, and the 
inodal idea is difficult for beginners. 


24 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISII. 


VERBAL FORMS. 


INFINITIVES. 
love call learn write sing dig 
tolove to call to learn to write to sing to dig 
loving calling learning writing singing digging ? 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
loving calling learning writing singing digging 
PAST PARTICIPLE. 


loved called learned written sung dug 
or learnt 


34. The systematic arrangement of all the forms of the verb, as in 
the preceding article, is called coNJUGATION. What is the similar 
arrangement of the forms of the noun and pronoun called? See 
22, 2, .9. 

1. The verb love represents a large class of verbs ending in -e 
silent. Note that such verbs add -d in the past tense and past parti- 
ciple instead of -ed, as in called, and -st in second person singular 
of the present tense instead of -est, as in callest. Note, however, 
that the ending of the forms called and loved is the same. 

2. Learned aud learnt are substantially the same in form, for in 
learned the e before d is silent, the -ed does not form an additional 


syllable, and the -d has nearly the sound of t. There is a tendency, - 


at present, to write the ending -t instead of -ed in such cases. 

3. Those verbs which, like love, call, and learn, have the past 
tense and past participle alike, and regularly form both by the ad- 
dition of -d, -ed, or -t to the infinitive, are said to belong to the 


NEW conjugation, or, as it is sometimes called, the regular, or weak 1 


conjugation. 
4. Bearing in mind the suggestions of 1 and 2, write all the differ- 
ent forms of love, call, and learn, including infinitives and parti- 


1 The following forms, though not strictly verbs (see 14, 3, and 32), are usually 


classed with them. 
2 The g is doubled in the middle of the word on ihe principle illustrated by 


sad, sadder, in 28. 


; 
i 


INFLECTION. 25 


ciples. How many are there? Write the same forms of write, sing, 
and dig. Why is there oue more of these forms in write and sing 
than iu the other verbs? Verify from your own observation of the 
six verbs above the followiug statements : — 

The past tense sometimes differs from the past participle; the second 
person singular of the present teuse, the third person singular of the 
same tense, and the present participle, may always be formed by adding 
-est, -s, and -ing respectively, to the simple infinitive or to the simple 
infinitive less a final silent -e; and the second person singular of the 
past tense 1s formed by adding -est or -st to the first or third person 
singular of the same tense. Therefore if the simple infinitive, the past 
tense, and the past participle are known, all the other inflectional 
foris of the verb can be formed. From this fact and from the fre- 
quency with which these three forms are used, they are called the 
PRINCIPAL PARTS of the verb. 


35. The Old Conjugation. — The three verbs write, sing, and 
dig belong to what is called the OLD conjugation. At first sight these 
verbs seem to have nothing in common. They are, however, alike in 
two or three particulars. Learn thoroughly the following list of very 
common verbs of the old conjugation, and tell in what respects they 
are alike, Specially important or difficult verbs are in small capitals. 


7 Infinitive. Past tense. Past participle. 
BEAR, £o give birth to BORE BORN 
BEAR, to carry BORE BORNE 
beat beat beaten 
blow blew blown 
BREAK BROKE BROKEN 
bite bit bitten or bit 
choose chose chosen 
come came come 
DO pIDp! DONE 
draw drew drawn 


1 The final d is not here -d added to do, but the word did is formed by placing 
_ the letters di before the d of do and dropping the o. 


INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


infinitive. Past tense. Past participle. 
drive drove driven 
eat ate! eaten! 
fall fell fallen 
fight fought fought 
FLY (cf. flee, 36) FLEW FLOWN 
freeze froze frozen 
get got got, gotten 
give gave given 
GO WENT? GONE 
hold held held 
know knew known 
LIE (cf. lay, 36) LAY LAIN 
ride rode ridden 
ring rang rung 
rise rose risen 
SEE SAW SEEN 
shake shook shaken 
SIT (cf. set, 36) SAT SAT 
speak spoke spoken 
stand stood stood 
steal stole stolen 
swim swam swum 
take took taken 
tear tore torn 
wear wore worn 
win won won 


1. From an examination of the above list, it appears that the verbs 
of the old conjugation, (1) always change (at least in pronunciation) 
the vowel of the infinitive in either the past tense or past participle, 
or in both; (2) never add anything to the infinitive to form the 
past tense (except sometimes a silent final e); and (3) if they add 
anything to form the past participle, add -en or -n. How, then, is 


1 There is also a past tense and past participle eat, pronounced ét. 
? Really the past tense of wend regularly used as the past of go. 


E 


INFLECTION. 91 


‘the old distinguished from the new conjugation? Cf. 34, 3. The 
old conjugation is sometimes called the strong, or irregular, con- 
jugation. 

2. Note with care the fact that some of the verbs of the old conju- 
gation have the past tense and past participle alike, while in many 
they are differeat. A common mistake is to use the past tense instead 
of the past participle; to say, for instance, it is broke, instead of it 
is broken.! 


36. Irregular Verbs of the New Conjugation. — There are 
‘some verbs of the new conjugation which, while regular in having 
one form for past tense and past participle and in forming it by 
adding -ed, -d, or -t, are irregular in making some change in the 
vowel or vowels within the infinitive, or in suffering some contrac- 
tion. The most common and difficult of these are the following : 


Infinitive. Past tense. Past participle. 
bleed bled bled 
bring brought brought 
build built built 
buy bought bought 
cut cut cut 
feel felt felt 
FLEE (cf. fly, 35) LED FLED 
hurt hurt hurt 
keep kept kept 
Lay (cf. lie, 35) LAID LAID 
LEAD LED LED 
leave left left 
let let let 
light lit (or lighted) lit (or lighted) 
MAKE MADE (for maked) MADE 
meet met met 
pay (cf. say) paid paid 


1 The teacher can hardly insist too rigidly upon a mastery of the verb-forms in 
‘this and the following article, and upon a clear idea of the distinction between con- 
jugations. Such a distinction will help toward an understanding of conjugation in 
Latin, and particularly in German. Moreover, many pupils will be found who do 
not know the parts of many English verbs so as to use them correctly in sentences. 


28 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


Infinitive. Past tense. Past participle. 
put put put 21 
READ (cf. lead) READ READ! | 
say said said | 
seek sought sought | 
SET (cf. sit, 35) SET SET | 
sell (cf. tell) sold sold | 
shut shut shut? | 
sleep slept slept 
spread spread spread 
teach taught taught 
tell told told 
think thought thought 


37. Conjugation of Be, Have, Shall, and Will.— We hav 
now to learn the conjugation of four very useful and very commo! 
verbs, which are more or less irregular : — 


PRESENT TENSE. 


Sing. Sing. Sing. Sing. 
Iam I have I shall I will 
thou art thou hast thou shalt thou wilt | 
he is he has he shall he will 
Plur. Plur. Plur. Plur. 
we are we have we shall we will 
you are you have you shall you will | 
they ure they have they shall they will | 
PAST TENSE. | 
Siug. Siig. Sing. Sing. 
I was 5 I had I should I would | 
thou wast thou hadst thou shouldst thou woulds 
he was he had he should he would 
Plur. Plur. Plur. Plur. | 
we were we had we should we would 
they were they had they should they would 


1 Cf. the pronunciation of past tense and past participle with that of infinitive. 


| 

| 

| 

| 

| 

you were you had you should you would 
2 In what letters do all verbs, having all three parts alike, end ? | 
| 


INFLECTION. . 29 


| VERBAL FORMS. 
INFINITIVES. 
be, to be, being have,to have,having  (wauting) (Wanting) 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
being having (wauting) (wanting ?) 


PAST PARTICIPLE. 
been had (wanting (wanting) 


1. Give the principal parts of these verbs. 2. To what conjugation 
do have, shall, and will belong? 3. The verbs can, past could, 
and may, past might, also lack the infinitive and participles, like 
shall. 


|. 38. Inflection by Combination. — Compare the following sen- 


l'tences : — 


a. I love. c. I shall love. e. He will love. 
ó. I loved. d. Thou wilt love. 


l. What is the tense of a2 2 What of 02 3. What of c, d, 
and e? 4. How do we know, from its form, that loved in I loved 
| is past? 5. How do we know, from the form, that will love in he will 
| love is future? Note, then, that the word will in the combination will 
love expresses tine like the letter -d in the word loved. In our 
| previous study a change in the meaning or relation of the verb has 
‘been denoted by a change in the letters of which it is composed ; now 
we find that a change in meaning may be effected by combining two 
words. This process may be called INFLECTION BY COMBINATION, 
‘and is much employed in changing the meaning of verbs. 6. What 
j verb is used to express futurity'in the first person? 7. What in the 
second and third ? 


| 389. Perfect, Imperfect, and Indefinite Action.— Study the 
\ following sentences : — 

| a. He loves. 6. He is loving. €. He has loved. 

| 1. In what time is the action represented in each of these sentences ? 
|. 8. What difference is there between 6 and c as to the completeness of 


30  INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH, | 

| 
the action represented? The verb in a does not distinctly mark the 
action as either incomplete or complete; it is therefore called the 
preseut INDEFINITE. The combination is loving is called the present, 
progressive or present IMPERFECT, and has loved the present PER- 
FECT. It is manifest that in the past, and the future also, the action, 
may be represented as indefinite, imperfect, or perfect. So represent 
it in the case of the verb love. 3. Do the terms “ perfect ” aud 


“imperfect " when strictly used apply to the tense of the verb or to| 
its action ? | 


40. The Passive Voice. — Cf.! the three pairs of sentences which, 
follow : — | 


| 


| 
a. I love. c. I loved. €. I shall love. | 
ó. I am loved. d. I was loved. J. I shall beloved. | 
1. Is there any difference in tense, number, and person between à 
and à, c and d, e and f? 2. What, then, is the difference of mean- 
ing in each case? This difference lies in the relation of the sub- 
ject to the verb. The combinations am loved, was loved, and 
shall be loved, are sail to be in the PAssIVE VOICE; the word) 
passive meaning suffering, or enduring. 8. What is it that is suf- 
fering or enduring when a passive verb is used, — the verb, or its 
subject ? | 


41. Conjugation of Love and Write. — Below is given the con-. 
jugation of love and write in the third person singular, not only by 
simple inflection, but also by combination. Cf. 33 and 37. | 
PRESENT TENSE. 

Active Voice. 


[ndef. he loves. he writes. 
Imp. he is loving. he is writing. 
Pf. he has loved. he has written. 


1 Cf. = compare. 

? It is not claimed that the conjugation here given is exhaustive ; it is, how-| 
ever, complete for the three time divisions and the three possibilities as to com- 
pleteness or incompleteness of action. Cf. it with the Latin indicative, noting 
the Latin tenses which cover two of those here given. 


INFLECTION. 31 


Passive Voice. 


Ind.f. he is loved. it! is written. 
Imp. he is being loved. ~ it is being written. 
Pf. he has been loved. it has been written. 


PAST TENSE. 


Active Voice. 


Indef. he loved. he was writing. 

Imp. he was loving. he wrote. 

Pf. he had loved.” he had written. 
Passive Votce. 

Indef. he was loved. it was written. 

Imp. he was being loved. it was being written. 

Pf. he had been loved. it had been written. 


FUTURE TENSE. 
Active Voice. 


Luef. he will love. he will write. 
Imp. he will be loving. he will be writing. 
Pf. he will have loved. he will have written. 


Passive Voice. 
Indef. he will be loved. it will be written. 
Imp. (not in use.) (not in use.) 
Pf. he will have been loved. it will have been written. 


VERBAL FORMS. 


INFINITIVES. 
Active. . 
- Indef. love, to love, loving. write, to write, writing. 
Imp. to be loving. to be writing. 
Pf. to have loved. to have written. 


1 It is important to note that comparatively few verbs have such a meaning as 
to admit all persons in both active and passive. Let the pupil illustrate this with 
a number of verbs. 

2 The past perfect is often called the pluperfect tense. 


39 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


Passive. 
Indef. be loved, to be loved. be written, to be written. 
Imp. (not in use.) (not in use.) 
Pf. to have been loved. to have been written. 
PARTICIPLES. 
Active. 
Indef. (not in use.) (not in use.) 
Imp. loving. writing. 
Pf. having loved. having written. 
Passive. 
Indef. loved. written. 
Imp. (not in use.) (not in use.) 
Pf. having been loved. having been written. 


1. (1) What four verbs are combined with love and write to 
make the compound forms? — For a verb not given in this article, 
cf. 38. — (2) What verb enters into every passive combination ? 
(3) What is the voice of loved and written? (4) What is the 
exact difference, then, in meaning and in formation of he was 
loving and he was loved?! (5) What participle is invariably used 
in imperfect tenses? (6) What in passive forms? 

2. A word, letter, or syllable which invariably accompanies a tense 
and distinguishes it from other tenses, is called the sign of that tense, 
(1) What are the signs of the future in both voices? — Note that 
the sign differs in different persons. — (2) Of the present perfect ? 
(3) Of the past perfect or pluperfect ? (4) Of an imperfect ? (5) Is 
the verb be a sign of the passive? Cf. he is writing, he was 
loving. (6) What is the ending of the past passive participle in 
the new conjugation? (7) What in the old, whenever this participle 
has any ending ? 


1 This is a question of great importance. If it is thoroughly and clearly compre- 
hended and answered, a most prolific source of error will be at once removed. 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 30 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 


- 42. Nouns. — What is the whole difference of meaning between 

he and she, king and queen, boy and girl, son and daughter? 

He, king, boy, and son are said to be of the MASCULINE GENDER, 

because they designate males; and she, queen, girl, and daughter of 
‘the FEMININE GENDER, because they designate females, Most nouns 
have no gender, since they designate neither males nor females,? and 
“are sometimes called NEUTER, which means neither. The pronoun it 
is used in referring to nouns which have no gender. 


— ]l. Study the words: — 


act execute 
actor actress executor executrix 
found enchant 
founder foundress enchanter enchantress 


also god, goddess ; lion, lioness ; prince, princess. 


(1) What endings are used in the above words to change a mascu- 
line into a feminine noun? (2) What to denote the feminine AGENT? 
(3) What to denote the masculine agent ? 


2. Study the endings of the following words : — 


bullock, a little bull. lambkin, a little lamb. 
brooklet, a little brook. hillock, a little hill. 
babykin, a litile baby. hamlet, a little village. 
floweret, a little flower. cigarette, a little cigar. 
lancet, a little lance. sermonette, a (little sermon. 


i 
What is the meaning of DIMINUTIVE? Give five diminutive endings. 


^ 
: adornment, that which adorns ; 


: punishment, that which punishes ; 
atonement, that which atones ? 


3. What is the ending, and what 1s its force in — 


1 That is, English distinguishes only two genders, and the gender is based solely 
on sex. The Latin has the English gender distinction by sex, and in addition to it, 
but not in conflict with it, the system of gender distinction by endings. Only those 
| nouns which have no gender according to the English system are divided into mas. 
| euline, feminine, and neuter, by endings. 


84 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. | 
What is the likeness, and what the difference of meaning in atoner| 
and atonement, punisher and punishment? Cf. 42, 1. Note, 
however, that this ending in the above words may also name an action, 
or the result of an action. 


4. Study the following endings : — 


He creates —a creation. He feels — a feeling. 
He inclines — an inclination. He covers — a covering. 
He possesses — a possession. 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


What endings above express the action of the verb? | 
5. Study the endings and meanings of the following words: 
bright, brightness true, truth wise, wisdom safe, safety | 


good, goodness wide, width free, freedom frail, frailty. 


(1) What derivative endings name a quality ? (2) From what part 
of speech are the nouns here given derived? (3) What likeness in| 
meaning between this part of eet) and these nouns ? 


i g putes D— 


] 

| 
foolish golden wonderful lustrous (from lustre) 
Turkish wooden beautiful grievous ( “ grief) | 
whitish royal blamable furious ( “ fury) | 
smallish brutal laughable horned manly 
hearty helpless despotic turreted lovely | 
misty heartless historic sugared lowly | 


1. What two adjective endings above mean full of? 2. Which 
ending means provided or furnished with? 3. Which has the mean- 
ing somewhat, to a certain degree? 4. Which means made of, de 
noting material? 5. Which means Jide? 6. What endings mean 
simply delonging to? 7. How would you make an adjective mean- 
ing not to be resisted? 8. What adjectives above are like this ? This 
last ending, however, has sometimes the meaning simply Zike or 
belonging to. | 


44. Adverbs.— Note the ending of the adverbs merrily, care: 
fully. Is every word with this ending an adverb? 


Learn the following list of very common adverbs, with the exact 
meaning of each, comparing with the pronouns on the left : — 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 95 
: 
| 


Pronouns. | Place in which. Place to which. Place from which. 
h-e h-ere h-ither h-ence 

 th-at th-ere th-ither th-ence 
-wh-o wh-ere wh-ither wh-ence 


What is the first letter of each word on the first line horizontally ? 
What are the two first letters of those on second line? Of those on 
| third line? Give the meaning of each of the adverbs above by 
! using a preposition and its case, modified by an adjective. 

45. Verbs. — Note the endings of the verbs in 

They blacken their enemies’ reputations. 


They harden their hearts. 


What is the ending of both these verbs? What does this ending 
mean ? 


46. Letters or Syllables equivalent to Separate Words. — Cf. 
the letters in small capitals in the first column with the words in small 
capitals in the second column, and cf. 38. 


lionEss SHE-lion 

WOOGdEN MADE OF wood 

he callrp ! he DID call 

the boy’s hat the hat or the boy 
fondER MORZ fond 


Note that the letters in small capitals in the first column have the 
same meaning as the words in small capitals in the second. We thus 

' see that in inflection or derivation a letter or a syllable of a word has 
often the meaning of a whole word, and the latter may be substituted 
for it. We certainly ought not to be surprised if in other languages 
we find that only letters or syllables of inflection are used where the 


= lent 


English uses separate words. 


1 The -ed in the ending of the past tense is only another form of the word 
did ; cf. 68, 5. 


36 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


SYNTAX. 


ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 


47. Subject and Predicate. — As we have already seen, a sen- | 


tence is simply a statement of some fact or thought. 
Let us study the following sentence to see how it is made: — 


Midas paused. 


1. We have here the statement of a fact. Here the statement is. 
made about Midas, and it is clear that, if any statement is made, it 


must be made about some person or thing. That about which the 
statement is made is called the suBJjEcT of the sentence. 


9. The word paused asserts or says something about Midas. | 
That which is said about the subject of the sentence is called the | 


PREDICATE, which meaus simply ¢he thing said. Of how many words 


does this sentence consist? Let each pupil make five sentences con- | 
taining only two words each, and distinguish the subject and predi- | 


cate in each. 


48. Modifying Words, Phrases, and Clauses. — [f we turn to 


any book we shall find that very few of the sentences consist of but — 


two words. We shall find sentences like the following : — 

a. The stranger gazed about the room. 

6. It was a young man with a cheerful face. 

c. To err is human. 

d. He valued his royal crown chiefly because it was com- 
posed of precious metal. 

e. Once upon a time there lived a very rich man, and he had 
a little daughter. 


f. All the beautiful roses that had so many lovely blushes 


are blighted and spoilt. 

g. This fabric had been transmuted to what seemed a woven 
texture of gold. 

l. In sentence e, stranger gazed would have been a sentence, but 
we find other words which give us new ideas about stranger and 


SYNTAX. 37 


gazed. It was THE stranger, and the words about the room tell 
how he gazed. Any combination of words which does not contain 
a subject and a predicate is called a PHRASE. Since the phrase about 
| the room limits the verb gazed, to what part of speech is it equiv- 
alent? In seutence 5, the plrase with a cheerful face evidently 
describes the noun man. To what part of speech is it evidently 
| equivalent? What part of speech is the phrase to err in c? 
: 2. In sentence d, the words it was composed of precious 
, metal limit the verb valued, by telling why he valued the 
crown. If these words TELL us something, they must make a 
sentence. What is the subject aud what the predicate of this sen- 
tence? By what conjunction is it connected with the preceding 
sentence ? When two or more sentences are thus united, each is 
called a cLAusE. To what part of speech is this clause equivalent ? 
9. What two clauses does the sentence f contain? What word 
does the clause beginning with that describe? To what part of 
speech then is this clause equivalent? What clause is the object 
of the preposition to in 7? What part of speech is the object of a 
preposition? Then, what part of speech is this clause ? 


49. Simple, Complex, and Compound Sentences. — We have 
seen that every sentence must contain a subject and a predicate, and 
that it need contain only two words, though it does usually contain 
more than this, because both subject and predicate are ENLARGED, as 
it is called, by modifiers, which may be single words, phrases, or 
clauses. Again, we have learned that phrases and clauses may be 
adjectives or adverbs or nouns, just as single words are. Phrases 
and clauses are adjective, adverbial, or noun phrases and clauses, 
according to their USE (see 19). Noun clauses are often called 
SUBSTANTIVE clauses. 

1. Note now that sentences a, 6, c consist of words and phrases, 
but contain only one subject and one predicate apiece. Such sen- 
tences are called SIMPLE sentences. 

9. Note that in d the chief statement, He valued his royal 
crown, is described by the less important statement, it was com- 
| posed of precious metal, with which it is connected by the con- 


38 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


junction because. Which of these statements should be called 
PRINCIPAL, which SUBORDINATE?! A combination of a principal 


and a subordinate clause, or subordinate clauses, is called a COMPLEX 


| 


sentence. The subject or predicate without any enlargement is called | 


the SIMPLE subject or predicate. 

9. Note that senteuce e really contains two statements ; namely, 
Once upon a time there lived a very rich man, and Once 
upon a time a very rich man had a little daughter, united by 
the conjunction. and. Are these statements considered of equal 
importance, or is oue descriptive of the other, as in d? Such a 


sentence is called compounD. What is a compound sentence? | 


Show, from the above, how the device of uuiting two statements saves 
words. 

4. The sentence f is both complex and compound. Show that 
it is so. 


50. Declarative, Interrogative, and Imperative Sentences. — | 


Contrast the three sentences which follow : — 
a. What is your wish, Midas ? 
ó. Tell me your wish, Midas. 
c. Midas will tell me his wish. 


Which of the above sentences is a question? Which a coin- 
mand or request? Which a statement of fact? Which of them 
should be called DECLARATIVE? ? Which INTERROGATIVE? Which 
IMPERATIVE ?? 

1. Interrogative and imperative sentences must, of course, be 
addressed to somebody. What case and what person ought, then, 
to be expected in such sentences? Cf. 21, 4, and 31, 9. Pick out 
this case and this person in the sentences above. 

9. A verb, when used like the verb tell in 4, to express a command 
or request, is said to be in the IMPERATIVE mode. Iu English this 


1 The pupil should consult the dictionary if he does not know the meaning of 
words. 

2 The so-called exclamatory sentence may always be classified either as interrog- 
ative or declarative. For the use of do in interrogative and imperative sentences, 


ef. 68, 5. 


| SYNTAX. 39 


mode has but one form, and this is always the same as the second 
person plural of the present indicative. 
| 38. Construct several interrogative sentences, and make as large a 
list as you can of the words which stand first in such sentences. 
What short verb is often used to introduce them? Contrast the use 
of who in Wuo is there? aud The man wHo is there is my 
uncle. ‘The first who is called an INTERROGATIVE pronoun. What 
Other interrogative pronouns have we? (See the questions in this 
article.) Where do we find the word to which such pronouns refer ? 

4. Construct several imperative sentences. Where does the verb 
‘stand in such sentences? Note that the subject of a verb in the 
imperative is rarely expressed. | 

5. Strictly speaking, the interrogative and imperative sentences are 
not statements or assertions at all, and so not sentences according to 
the definition (see 47) ; but they can be so readily changed to the 
declarative form that this inaccuracy will cause but little difficulty.! 


51. Use of THERE and IT as Expletives. — Study the use of 
there and it in the following sentences: — 
qa. There lived a very rich man. 
| 6. He made it his custom to pass a portion of every day in 
a dark apartment. 
|" €. It was far more probable that he came to do Midas a 
favor. 

d. There was now a brighter gleam than before. 


Note that, in sentence a, there takes the place, at the beginning of 
the sentence, of the subject, a very rich mau, about whom the state- 
ment is made. In 5, it takes the place of the infinitive, to pass, fol- 
lowing, which is the real object of made. What are the real subjects 
of the verb was inc and 2? Note then that there and it are often 
used to anticipate a noun coming later in the sentence, and to suggest 
that the real subject or object is not yet reached. When so used, 


_ 1 The pupil should have much practice in changing declarative sentences to 
imperative and interrogative, and vice versa. He should also be required to select 
the interrogative and imperative sentences from continuous narrative, or colloquial 
prose. 


| 


! 


there and it are called EXPLETIVES; there retains its value as an 
adverb limiting the following verb, and it is a pronoun used as a 
substitute and temporary subject or object. 


40 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


52. The Noun Clause. — Study the noun clauses in the following 
sentences : 

a. It was far more probable that he came to do Midas a 
favor. 

6. This fabric had been transmuted to what seemed a woven 
texture of gold. | 

c. Whether Midas slept as usual that night, the story does 
not say. | 

d. He felt a presentiment that this stranger had come m i 
with the purpose of gratifying his wishes. 


€. My desire is that I may be faithful. 


1. Which clause is the subject of a sentence? 2. Which receives 
the action of a verb? 3. Which is used after the verb to be! ? 
4. Which is governed by a preposition ? 5. Which means the same, 
as another noun used immediately before it ? | 

A whole article has been given to the noun clause because of 
the difficulty which pupils have with it and because of its extreme. 
importance. The pupil who really understands that a clause may 
have almost allthe uses of a noun and also those of the adjective 
and adverb (see 48, 2, 3, and 49), will have little difficulty with the 
analysis of sentences. 


53. Construction of Sentences.— Study the connection of 
parts in the following sentences : — | 


a. The transparent crystals turned out to be plates of yellow. 
metal, and of course were worthless as spectacles, though. 
valuable as gold. | 

| 

1 This expletive use is very common and very much neglected. Let the pupil 
make many sentences like those above. A study of the pronoun it in its vaio 
very peculiar uses will prove very profitable. See this word in Webster's Interna- | 
tional Dictionary. | 

| 
| 
| 


à 


SYNTAX. 41 


6. He recognized the same figure which had appeared to 
|, him, the day before, in the treasure house, and had bestowed 
[2 him this disastrous faculty of the Golden Touch. 

c. The boiled egg immediately underwent a change similar 
to that of the trout and the cake. 


d. The solid metal so burnt his tongue that he roared aloud. 


.]. In a, what is the subject of the verb were? What cther verb 
has the same subject? What grammatical device enables us to use 
one subject with two verbs? Cf. 49, 3. What subject is used with 
two verbs in 62 What two nouus are connected with a pronoun by 
one preposition in c? The device (described in 49, 3) by which words 
are saved, makes long sentences a little less clear, and many pupils 
find it difficult to understand (what we have seen for ourselves in 
the above sentences) that two or more verbs may be used after one 
conjunction, or two or more nouns after one preposition. This 
difficulty is increased if one of the verbs is widely separated from its 
‘subject. 

2. The hearer or reader is sometimes helped to understand a sen- 
tence by the use in related clauses of words which suggest each other, 
such as so and that in d. Such words are called CORRELATIVES. 
Use neither and nor in a sentence as correlatives. Use in sentences 
all the other correlatives of which vou can think. 

3. The pupil must remember that every word in a sentence is con- 
nected in thought with some other word.! He has already seen this 
for himself; cf. 15. In taking up a new word, then, he must ask, 
“With what word is this word united in thought? With what does 
it go to make sense? " It is so evident that a sentence is a complete 
structure, made by fitting words together, that we speak of ** building 
a sentence," and use the word construction when we mean the 
relation which one word has to other words of the sentence in which 


, 


jit stands. 


| 54. Use of Diagrams. — The connection of the parts of a sentence 
may be indicated to the eye by what are called DIAGRAMS. 


|..1 What case and what so-called part of speech might be considered exceptions 
to this statement ? Are such words strictly “‘in a sentence "' ? 


| 


49 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


Sentence c, d, 6, and a in the preceding article may be thus 


arranged in diagrams : — 


The 
boiled immediately a 
€. egg underwent change 
similar 
El 
that 
z^ 


The 
solid so his 
d. metal burnt tongue 
* eM 
> 
at 
he roared 
aloud. 
2 
E P d 
- ex 
y S 
a X 
e, Lec x 
2 NS 
the à 
same » 
b. He recognized figure had appeared! 
4. 
3. E 
c = 
oe on this 
disastrous 


had bestowed _ faculty 
EFIE | 


I] 
him the golden touch.? 


1 For the present, verb phrases may remain unanalyzed. Later, however, after 


they have been studied, analysis should be required. 
? [t is suggested that subordinate clauses be not analyzed very minutely. Too | 


minute analysis may prove perplexing in complex sentences, and sufficient drill i in 
the analysis of phrases will be given by the simple sentences. | 
z 


SYNTAX. 49 


The yellow metal 
transparent "e| 


Iz m crystals turned out to be plates 


| The \- 5 
transparent z 
crystals were worthless 


| 2 iue 
"fa 


spectacles course 


imm 

o 

i=] 

O3 

> 

(they were) valuable 


| = 
nm 


gold. 


Note in the above diagrams that, while the word which receives 
the action of a verb, and the noun or adjective after the verb to be 
are regarded as a part of the bare predicate, they are not considered 
so essential to it as the principal verb. 1. How is this view indicated 

by the lines? 2. What, in general, is the position of a limiting 

word? 3. What of a connective? 4. How is the fact that two 
nouns follow one preposition or two verbs one conjunction indi- 
cated? 5. Why is the pronoun which partly on the connecting 
line and partly double underlined? Cf. 20, 5 and 6. 


RULES OF SYNTAX. 


59. Nominative. — Study the subjects of the following sen- 
penices : — 


a. He lifted the door-latch. 

6. Midas lifted the door-latch. 

€. Its weight made him sensible that it was gold. 

d. The solid metal burnt his mouth. 

e. She had been transmuted by the effect of his kiss. 


1. Which of the subjects above do you know to be nomina- 
tives from their forms? Which one of them is the subject of a 
passive verb? Note that it is nominative, although not acting but 


44 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 
acted upon. The subject of a verb! is always in the nominative 
case. | 
2. Which of the subjects above are names of inanimate objecti 
Note, then, that iuanimate objects are capable of action, though, of. 
course, not of voluntary, conscious? action. Make or find three other 
sentences in which things act. | 

3. For the clause as subject, cf. 52. 


96. Study the predicates of the following sentences : — 


a, They saw me. 

ó. It is I. 

c. Her little form grew hard and inflexible. 
d. I love odd names. | | 
e. Little Marygold ran to meet him. | 
J. Midas was called a happy man. 


1. Note that in some of the sentences above, the verb represeuts| 
an action as passing over from the subject to some other object, — as | 
being exerted upon something. Thus the word saw, in a, represents | 
action exercised by the subject they upon me. So also with love, 
in d. The other verbs in these sentences do not represent any action 
as being exerted upon the nouns or adjectives which follow them. | 
Such verbs are called INTRANSITIVE,® while those which do carry over | 
an action from subject to some other noun are called TRANSITIVE. | 

9. In what voice is the verb inf? Note that in this sentence the | 
word which is affected by the action of the verb, — viz., Midas, — is | 
the subject, and hence in the nominative case; while in the case of the | 
active verbs in a and d the word which is affected by the action is not | 
the subject. The noun or pronoun which receives the action of a; 


| 
1 Tt is not necessary to say a finite verb, for the English infinitive is not in this | 


| 


book regarded as a verb at all. 

2 Tf you do not know the meanings of * voluntary " and “conscious,” look 
them up in the dictionary, 

3 Note, however, that verbs usually intransitive are sometimes transitive; we 
may say, e. g., he ran a race. We caunot tell whether a verb is transitive or not 
until we see it USED; sce 19. 


SYNTAX. 45 


verb is called its oBJEcT. The object of an active verb is in the 
accusative case. This is evident, in a, from the form of me.! 

3. Note how necessary to the statements contained in these sen- 
tences are the pronoun I in 4, the adjectives hard and inflexible iu c, 
and the noun man in f. Because these words are so necessary in 
completing the assertion, or predication, of the verb, they are called 
PREDICATE nouns, pronouns, and adjectives. Note further that each 
of these words refers to the sume thing as the subject of the sentence. 
A noun, pronoun, or adjective used in the predicate, not as an object 
but to refer to the subject and describe it, is in the same case as the 
subject. 

4. Note that in verb phrases (like was called, iu /), formed by 
combining the verb be and a participle (see 39, 40, 41), the participle 
is a predicate adjective describing the subject.? 


57. Appositive, — Study the descriptive words in the following : 


Near him was seated John Alden, his friend and house- 
hold companion, writing with diligent speed. 


]. What is tlie relation of the nouns friend and companion to 
John Alden? A noun which is thus used to describe another 
without the aid of any other word is called an APPOsITIvE. Such a 
noun is in the same case as that which it describes. In what respect 
is it like the predicate noun? In what different ? 

2. What part of speech is writing? What does it limit? Note 

its position, following its noun. Such a word is called an apposi- 
tive adjective. Note further that such au adjective may be separated 
from its noun by several words. 

3. For clause as appositive, cf. 52, 


1 Pupils find much difficulty in distinguishing between the subject of the passive 
| and the object of the active. The subject of the passive is in reality both subject 
and object. 
|. ? The contents of this section are of very great importance. Before going far- 
ther, the pupil should have much drill upon transitive and intransitive verbs, direct 
objects, and predicate nouns, both by constructing sentences containing these con- 
| Atructions, and by picking them out of connected narrative. 


46 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


58. Absolute Construction. — Study the grammatical connection | 
in the following senteuces: — 


a. The rear-guard of his army retreated, THE FRONT GIVING | 
WAY TOO. 

ó. Open wide in her lap lay the well-worn psalm-book of} 
Ainsworth, printed in Amsterdam, THE WORDS AND THE MUSIC | 
TOGETHER. ! 

c. HE BEING SUCCESSFUL, his opponents were removed from | 
office. | 


1. Note that the phrases in small capitals have no grammatical con- | 
nection with the rest of the sentence. Words and phrases thus used | | 
are said to be in the ABSOLUTE construction, ** absolute" meaning sim-| 
ply loosed from the rest of the sentence. Note further that each of | 
these phrases contains a noun or pronoun, and that two of them con- | 
tain a participle. A noun or pronoun and a participle limiting it | 
most frequently combine to form this construction. Judging from ' 
c, in what case is this noun or pronoun? 

2. The participle in the absolute construction must be carefully | 
distinguished from the participle which is related to some word inti- 
mately connected with the rest of the sentence. "Thus printed, in 4, | 
limits psalm-book, which is the subject of iay. See 56, 4, and 57, 2.! | 


59. Study the objects of the verbs in the following sentences, and | 
the change from active to passive : — 


a. His soldiers made him king. 

ó. He was made king by his soldiers. 
c. He taught me Greek. 

d. I was taught Greek by nim. 

e. I asked him his name. 


Jj. Midas touched the rose. 
Á 


1. How many objects have the verbs in a, c, aud e? Note that | 
king in a is the result of the action of the verb made upon him, and 
that king and him refer to the same person. Is this so in the case. 


1 The narrative poems of Longfellow furnish excellent material for drill in the 
use of participles. 


SYNTAX. AT 


of the two objects of taught and asked, in c and e? What other 
verbs take the same construction as made? Note the changes in the 
passive, and for 4, cf. 56, . 

2. Change to the passive the sentence f above. What has the 
subject of the active become? What has the object of the verb be- 
come? How does the answer to the last question explain why an 
| intransitive verb cannot be changed to the passive, i. e., can have no 


| passive voice? Why should there be no accusative as object of a 
| passive verb? Cf. 56, 2, and foot-note. Note, however, that in the 
| ease of the verbs teach and ask, one of the two accusatives is retained 
| even in the passive; cf, Greek in d. 


60. Study the words which limit the verb in the following sen- 
Bences : — ; 


a. He threw the ball three hundred feet. 

ó. They fought the enemy five hours, 

c. They fought the enemy fiercely. 

d. The mountain was a mile high, 

€. Let us go home. 

f. Go west, young man. 

f. Then the disciples went away again to their own home, 
h. I go a fishing. 

i. All aboard. 

j. All on board were lost, 


1. Why cannot the words feet, hours, and mile, in e, 5, and d, be 
| the objects of the verbs in the sentences in which they stand? Note 
that hours, in 4, although a noun, has almost exactly the same limiting 
force upon the verb as fiercely in c, and that mile in d limits the 
adjective high like an adverb. Words used like feet, hours, and 
mile are called .ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVES OF MEASURE; they are 
employed to express duration of time or extent of space. 
|. 2. Are the words home and west, in e and jf, nouns or adverbs ? 
It is certain that they are used instead of a noun governed by a prep- 
osition, and in such sentences as gy, where home is preceded by two 
adjectives, the preposition to is still used. Note that home and 


48 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 
west are very commonly used in such expressions as that above, | | 
Owing to this frequency of use, the preposition has been dropped to | 
save time in speaking, or, as we might say, it has been wora away. | 
We might call home and west ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVES OF LIMIT| | 
OF MOTION. Why would this be an appropriate name ? Sometimes | 
in such expressions the preposition is not yet quite worn away, as in| 
a fishing and aboard, for on fishing and on board. We do | 
however, Let 's go fishing. 
61. Study the use of prepositious in the following sentences : — | 
a. The Golden Touch had come to him with the first | 
sunbeam. | 
ó, That was the breakfast of the king. Cf. c. | 
c. That was the king's breakfast. | 
d. He attempted to swallow it in a hurry. (f, e. | 
¢, He attempted to swallow it hurriedly. | 
J. He gave apples to John and me. | 


fj. He had a little daughter, whom nobody but myself ever. 


heard of. | 
| 


1. What nouns and pronouns in the above sentences are governed | 
by prepositions ? These nouns and pronouns are in the accusative 
case. | 

2. For what case of the noun is the prepositional phrase of the king, : 
in 6, a substitute? To what part of the word king’s is the prepo- | 

| 
| 


sition of equivalent in meaning? Cf. 46. 

3. What does the phrase, in a hurry, in d, limit? To what word. 
is it equivalent? Cf. a man of honor and an honorable man. 
To what is the phrase of honor equivalent ? 

4. Note that, in f, the conjunction and does not at all affect the. 
governing power of the preposition of, which affects the case of me as. 
much as that of John. A neglect of this truth as to the conjunction | 
leads to many mistakes. The nominative I, for instance, is often used 
in such a case as the above ; cf. 53, 1. 

5. Ry what preposition is whom in 7 governed? "Then does the 
preposition always precede its case? 


7 


SYNTAX. 49 


62. Dative. Study the words in small capitals in the following 
sentences : — 


a. Tell ME your wish. Cf. Tell your wish TO MF. 

6. He wished to bequeath HER an immense pile of yellow, 
glistening coin. 

c. He came to do Mrpas a favor. 

d. Forgive Us our debts, as we forgive our DEBTORS. 

e. This town was near (or next!) THEM. Cf. near TO THEM. 

f. The stranger's smile seemed to fill the room like an OUT- 
BURST of the sun. 

g. Alas ME! the pitcher was no longer earthen. Cf. Woe is 
ME! 


1. Considering only the form of the pronouns, what two cases are 
possible for me, iu a, and her, ind? Note that the USE, or FUNCTION, 
of these words is clearly different from that of the direct objects, 
wish, in e, and pile, in 4, since the action of the verb is only indirectly 
exerted upon them. Since the cases are distinguished, not by their 
FORMS, but by their FUNCTIONS (cf. 21, 1), this function should havea 
name of its own, The indirect object is said to be in the DATIVE 
case. The dative case is most frequently usea with verbs of giving 


and saying, and those of similar meaning. 


2. In e while the adjective near describes town, the quality which 
it expresses is of most interest to them, and is said to be directed 
toward them. With near and like, whether adjectives or adverbs, the 
object to which the quality is directed may be put in the dative. 
What construction is used with other adjectives which take an object 
for their quality, like good, easy, clear ? 

3. In all the above sentences, what prepositional phrase may be 
used as a substitute for the dative case? Cf. 46 and 61, 2, 3. 

4. In many sentences the dative is used in connection with an ac- 
cusative as direct object ; find an instance in the above sentences in 
which the dative is used alone after a verb. Be particularly careful 
in such instances not to mistake it for an accusative. 


1 See 29, 1. 
4 


50 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


w L ° D ^» . | 
5. We may frame a passive expression similar to a by saying I | 
2 I 


was told your wish. What does the dative me of a become in the 
passive? Note that wish is still retained as object, though the verb is 
passive, and cf. 59, 2. 


63. Genitive. — Study the genitive cases in the following 
phrases.? 
. Her dear father’s encircling arms. 
. The polished surface of the cup. 
The suit burdened him with its weight. 
A summer's day. 
. A year's pay. 
His mind was in the state of a child's. 
. The book is John's, 


eS SS eS & o0 c 8 


l. For definition of the genitive case, see 21, 2. 

9. Note that the word father's describes arms in just the same 
way that encircling does. Father's seems, then, like what part of 
speech ? Think of an adjective which often has the same meaning as 
father’s. Note, however, that father’s here retains so much of the 
nature of a noun that it is described by the adjective dear. What 
word would have to describe it, if it were an ordinary adjective? Cf. 
14, 5. 

3. For substitutes for the genitive, see 61, 2 and 3. 

4. Since a thing can hardly be said to possess anything, we do not 
commonly use the naines of things in the genitive. What similar 
construction is used with names of things? Cf. à above. Note, 
however, the use of its in c, and that of summer’s and year’s in d 
and e. In the last two words, the genitive seems to be DESCRIPTIVE 
rather than possessive. What prepositional phrases might be well 
substituted for summer’s and year’s. Cf. 46. 

5. Note that in f the genitive form child's has become indepen- 
dent, as an adjective sometimes does, and is used as the object of the 
preposition of. Then in what case is it? Note further the frequent 
use of a genitive as a predicate adjective, as in g. 


1 The pupil should here review the declensions in 22, 23, and 24. 


SYNTAX. 51 
: 64. Adjective. 1. For definition and use, see 14, 4. 
_. For the same form, used sometimes as adjective, sometimes as 
‘noun, see 19, 6. 
| 3. For the pronominal adjective, see 20, 3. 
4. For inflection and derivation of adjective, see 25-29 and 43. 
5. For thedefinition and use of verbal adjective, or participle, see 20, 1. 


| 
| 6. For the kinds and uses of participles, see 32, 33, and 41. 


7. For adjective phrases and clauses, see 48, 1 and 3. 
8. For predicate adjective, simple and verbal, see 56, c, 3 and 4. 
9. For appositive adjective and its position, see 57, 2. 
10. For participle in absolute construction, see 58. 
1l. For adjective force of the genitive, see 63, 2. 
12. What do the adjectives in the following seutence limit : — 
I saw her going and coming, patient, courageous and strong ? 
Owing to the fact that an adjective which limits a pronoun is never 
found immediately before it, pupils sometimes get the idea that an 
adjective cannot limit a pronoun at all. 
13. Study the use of the participle in the following sentences : — 


a. He had planted a garden. 
ó. He has fled. 


In a, we can easily explain the participle planted as a passive 
participle limiting garden, which is the object of had, — he had a 
garden which was planted ; but the participle flea, in 4, cannot be 

so explained, for the verb flee is intransitive, and therefore has no pas- 

sive (cf. 59, 2). The fact is that in verb phrases compounded with 
have, the participial form has lost its proper force, and cannot always 
be explained grammatically, In all other verb phrases the participle 
has its proper adjective force, 

65. Pronoun. — Study the pronouns in the following sentences, 
and find the words to which they refer, 7. e., their ANTECEDENTS ! : 
| 4. He valued his crown because it was composed of pre- 


1 


cious metal. 


b. Once there lived a very rich man whose name was Midas. 
c. I, that speak unto thee, am he. 


| 
1 The pupil should here review the definition of pronouns in 14, 2, their inflec- 
| tion in 24, and their gender in 42. 


| 


52 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


1. What is the gender, number, and person of it? What of its 
What is the case of it ? 


antecedent ? 


swer the same questions iu regard to whose, in 4, aud its antecedent, 
and in regard to that, in c, and its antecedent ? 
spects does a pronoun agree with its antecedent ? 


does it not agree? 


What of its antecedent ? Ans 


In what three re- 
In what respect 


2. The pronoun one in such sentences as any one will tell you, 


and whoever, as in whoever fails, I sball not, have no definite ante- 


cedents, and are therefore called INDEFINITE pronouns. 


3. To what two pronouns may what be equivalent in I know 


what he said ? 


also be an interrogative pronoun. 


4. Which of the pronouns may become adjectives ? 


using them in sentences. 


The word what inay, then, be a COMPOUND RELA- 
TIVE, and contain its own antecedent. 


Note, however, that it may 


Find out by 


5. For the double use of the relative, see 20, 5 and 6. 


66. Agreement of Verb. — As we have already seen from 31, the 


verb must agree with the subject in number and person. 


Show from 


this rule why we may say, I don't, but not he don't. 


67. Indirect Discourse. — Compare the sentences in parallel col- 


umns below. 


a. I don't care for such 
roses as this. 
r. He thought, ‘‘ The best 


thing I can do for this dear 
child wil be to bequeath 
her an immense pile of 
coin." 

e. How you have wet my 
nice frock ! 

g. What! then you are not 
satisfied ? 

1. Go, 
plunge 
glides past the bottom of 
the garden. 


then, Midas, and 


into the river that 


ó. Marygold said she did n’t 
care for such roses as that. 

d. He thought that the best 
thing he could do for this 
dear child would be to be- 
queath her an immense pile 
of coin. 

J. He sees or will see how 
he has wet her nice frock. 

h. He asked whether he was 
not satisfied. 7 

j. The stranger told Midas 
to go and plunge into the 
river that glided past the 
bottcm cf the garden. 


SYNTAX. 53 


l. The sentences on the left are fair samples of sentences in DIRECT 
DISCOURSE; those on the right, of sentences iu INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
Note that the former are the exact words of some speaker, writer, or 


thinker, in just the form in which he spoke or wrote or thought them ; 
while the latter are the same words closely connected and adapted, 
with as little change as possible, to the grammatical construction of a 
‘sentence in which they are quoted. In c the words directly quoted 
form a sentence which is the object of thought, but the direct quota- 
tion is neither closely counected nor adapted to tlie verb thought, as is 
indicated by the presence of the comma after thought. 

2. (1) What change in tense do you notice in passing from direct 
discourse to indirect, after a past tense? (2) Is there a change of 
tense in a quotation after a present or future? Cf. e and f. (3) Is 
the tense of the subordinate clause of the quotation changed after a 
past tense? Cf. i and j. 

9. What change of person do you notice? Note, however, that 
the third person is not the only one found in indirect discourse. 
Suppose, for instance, that the child mentioned in c should report 
her father's thought about her. What pronoun would she use in re- 
ferring to herself? 

4. After what kind of verbs, as to meaning, do we make quota- 
tions? 

5. Are interrogative and imperative sentences ever quoted? Can 
interjections or vocative cases be used in quotations? Cf. g with 4, 
and z with j. It will be noted that the indirect form is not only less 
animated and pictorial than the direct, but that it is also of necessity 
somewhat inaccurate in conveying a speaker's exact idea. Point out 
in these sentences two or three instances of this.! 


68. Infinitives. — Study the infinitives in the following sentences : 


a. Midas used to pass whole hours in fondly gazing at 
them. 


1 Let the pupil be drilled thoroughly in the peculiarities of indirect discourse 
both by framing and scrutinizing sentences. Such a drill will make the same sub- 
ject in Latin much easier. 


"e 


54 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


6. He could scarcely bear to.see! any object that was not 
gold. | 


c. Midas felt himself to be not quite so happy as he might 
be. Cf. d. 

d. Midas felt that he was not quite so happy as he might be. 

€. It would have been unreasonable to suspect him of in. 
tending any mischief. 

f. He was enraptured to see himself in a suit of gold cloth. 

g. Little Marygold ran to meet him. 

h. He beheld the bright glistening of the precious metal, 
EA 

i. He beheld the brightly glistening metal. 

J. She did not walk. Didshe run? She did (run). 
k. She walked not. Ran she? She ran.? 


l. For definition of infinitive, see 20, 2 and 6. 

9. For inflection, see 33 and 41. 

3. It will be noted that the infinitive in the above sentences, in 
one or another of its forms, is used in almost every one of the func- 
tions of the noun. In which sentence or sentences is it the sub- 
ject of a verb? In which the object? In which is it used as the 
object of a preposition? Note that in f and g it is an adverbial 
accusative. Why? Cf. 60. 

4. Note further that, though a noun, the infinitive has some of the 
functions of a verb. In which sentence or sentences is the infinitive 
modified by au adverb? In which has it a direct object ? But note 
also that the infinitive does not assert (cf. 20, 6), and that it is usually 
dependent on some other word. 

5. Note that certain verbs from their very meaning require an- 
other action to complete their own. Such are the verbs use, in the 
sense of be accustomed, a, can, 0, will, e, did, j. The infinitive is used 


! Note that for to see any object, the sight of any object might be 
substituted. 

? The infinitive is perhaps the most difficult subject in English grammar, on 
account of the great variety of its uses. All of these uses will be understood if these 
sample sentences are MASTERED. 


SYNTAX. 55 


| to complete the action of such verbs, and is then called the cowPrE- 
MENTARY, or filing out, infinitive. This kind of an infinitive is very 
common in verb phrases, such as those iu 41, aud is often more essen- 
| tial to the meaning of such phrases thau the independent verb with 
" which it is used. The verb do is common in expressions like those 
| underj; i.e. in negative sentences, and in questions and answers. 
| Note carefully, however, that the meaning of these expressions does 
| mot differ at all from that of the less common REPreSuOnS of & Why 
is the last word of 7 in parentheses ? 

6. Of. c and d, and. note that the infinitive with a subject in the 
accusative case sometimes stands in indirect discourse ; cf. 67. 

7. Note that in g the infinitive is equivalent in meaning to i» 
order that she might meet him, and expresses the PURPOSE of the 
running. “Note, too, that in f the infinitive tells why he was en- 
raptured, and is equivalent to the clause decause he saw himself. 
The infinitive then may express PURPOSE or CAUSE; cf. 69, 3, 5. 

8. Cf. and distinguish the word glistening in 2 and 7. If the 

word in in a were omitted, what would gazing become? Note 


further that glistening in 7 has much more nearly lost its verbal force 


than gazing in a, and cf. 42, 4. 


69. Temporal, Causal, Purpose, Result, Conditional, and Con- 
| cessive Clauses. — In the following sentences study the subordinate 
. elauses, and try to distinguish the different ways in which they limit 
. or enlarge the meaning of the principal clauses : — 


a. When he had saved enough money, he built a house. 
: 6, He built a new house, because his old house had been 
burned. 


c. He built a house to live in, or that he might live in it. 

: d. He built so good a house that he lived in it many 
| years, 

| . €, If he saved enough money, he built a house. 

j f. Though he had but little money, yet he built a house. 

| 

| 

: 


1. Note that the subordinate clause in a tells the time when the 
| house was built. Such a clause is called a TEMPORAL clause. What 


56 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


are some other conjunctions, besides when, which introduce temporal 
clauses ? 

2. Note that the subordinate clause in 6 states a fact which ex- 
plains the action of the principal clause, by telling us why that action 
was performed. Such a clause is called CAUSAL. 

3. Note that in c the subordinate clause states a thought, or more 
definitely a purpose, which explains the action of the principal clause 
by telling the motive which prompted it. Such a clause is called a 
PURPOSE clause. 

4. Note that the subordinate clause in d expresses the RESULT of 
the action of the principal clause. 

5. Pupils often find it difficult to distinguish between cause and 
purpose. Let this distinction be learned at once from these sen- 
tences. Note, then, that the causal clause states an actual FACT 
which has occurred, but that the purpose clause does not state a 
fact at all, but only a purpose, which may become a fact by being 
realized. Both the purpose clause and the causal clause state a reason 
by telling why he built the house; but in one case the reason is the 
burning of the old house, in the other it is the purpose to live in a 
new one. Can we have a purpose without a person? Can we have 
a cause without a person ? 

6. The result is the opposite of the cause. The cause must pre- 
cede the action of the principal verb. The result, of course, follows 
this action. The fact that both the purpose and the result clauses are 
introduced by the conjunetion that, will cause no trouble to the 
pupil who considers the MEANING of these clauses. 

Let the pupil think of other facts, like the building of a house, 
and then frame sentences giving causes, purposes, and results in con- 
nection with these facts. 

7. Note that, in e, we cannot tell whether he built a house or not, 
and that we are thus ignorant because we do not know whether he saved 
enough money or not; 7 e., the fulfillment of the action of the prin- 
cipal clause is dependent upon the fulfillment of that in the subor- 
dinate. Such a subordinate clause is called a CONDITIONAL clause, 
or CONDITION. Is there any other instance in these clauses where 
there is doubt about the occurrence of the principal action ? 


SYNTAX. 57 


8. Note that, in f, the action asserted in the principal clause is not 
what you would have expected from the statement of the subordinate. 
Yet granting or conceding the fact of the subordinate clause, the act 
of the principal clause did occur. Such a subordinate clause is called 
CONCESSIVE. Note that here, as well as in d, the connection between 
clauses is made clearer by the use of correlatives; see 53, 2. What 
are they in each case ? 

9. Note that, in a, the subordinate clause introduced by when, 
though expressing time as its primary idea, also suggests cause and 
condition. If we substitute for it the participle, thus: Having saved 
enough money, he built a house, the participle suggests about 
equally the three ideas conveyed in the subordinate clauses in a, 5, 
and e. Of course, in connected writing, the comparative prominence 
of these three ideas of time, cause, aud condition will depend largely 
upou the ideas suggested in the sentence which immediately precedes 
the one in question. 


70. Modes: Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive.  Condi- 
tional Sentences. — Study the verbs in the following sentences : — 


a. Thy will be done. 

6. How much would the orchard be worth if each of the 
trees were fruitful ? 

c How much would the orchard be worth if each of the 
trees were to become fruitful ? 

d. How much will the orchard be worth if each of the trees 
shall become fruitful ? 

e. The orchard would have been worth much if each of the 
trees had become fruitful. 


f. Though he slay me, yet will I trust in him. 


. 1. Note in a how the meaning is changed by using be instead of 
is. Thy will is done expresses a fact simply and directly; but Thy 
will be done does not express a fact at all, but our desire that a 
certain thing may become a fact. Here then are two ways or MODES 
of viewing an action, — as a fact, or as desired. 


2. A verb which presents an action as a fact is in the INDICATIVE 


58 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


mode; a verb which presents it as desired, or for any other reason 
doubtful, is often? in the suBJUNCTIVE mode; a verb which presents it 
as commanded or entreated is in the IMPERATIVE mode ; cf. 50, 2 and 4. 

3. Note that the subjunctive in the present tense, third singular, 
has be, where the indicative has is. This form is the same in all 
persons, both singular and plural. Note, in 4, that the verb were has 
a singular subject. It could not, then, be an indicative, for in the in- 
dicative were is plural. It is a past subjunctive, and is the same for 
all persons and both numbers. Note, in f, that slay has no final s, as 
it would have if it were an indicative. The subjunctive of verbs other 
than the verb be has only a present tense, and has the form of the - 
simple infinitive in all persons aud both numbers. 

4. Note very carefully the different ideas expressed in the sentences 
b,c, d, and e. Note that in each the principal clause 1s modified by 
a subordinate clause which shows that the fulfillment of the action in 
the principal clause is dependent on the fulfillment of another action 
expressed in the subordinate clause. Such a subordinate clause is 
called a CONDITIONAL clause, and the sentence containing it is called a 
conditional sentence. 

5. From sentence d, we cannot tell at all whether the condition 
will be fulfilled or not ; in other words, the sentence implies? nothing 
as to the fulfillment of the condition. Give other sentences referring 
to the present and the past which imply nothing as to the fulfillment . 
of the conditions contained in them. 

6. In e, however, it is implied that the fulfillment of the condition 
is unlikely, though not impossible. By what change in the words of 
dis the change of idea produced? What is implied in 6 and e? 
What is the difference in the time of these sentences? What mode 


1 The idea of desire, doubt, condition, possibility, etc., is very often expressed 
by combining the verbs may, can, should, would, etc., with an infinitive; thus, if he 
should go, they may go. 

? Let the pupil remember that many sentences contain enfolded within them, or 
in a single word rMPrLY, what they do not explicitly affirm. ‘hus if I say, Why 
did you go to Boston yesterday ? I imply not only that you went to 
Boston, but also that there is such a place as Boston, and that it is possible to go 
to it. _ Let the pupil illustrate further by other sentences of his own framing. 


SYNTAX. 59 


ds used in the conditional clause of 62? Contrast the form and mean- 
ing of à and c! 
_ 71. The Preposition or. Study the use of the preposition of in 


the following phrases and sentences : — 


a. A crown of gold. 


ex 


. The crown of the king. 

c. I never heard of her. 

d. Midas was fond of gold. 

. The very tip-top of enjoyment. 


e 

J. To suspect or to convict him of crime. 
g. He was possessed of this insane desire. 
h 


. A matter of course. 


i. Do you desire to rid yourself of this Golden Touch? 
. A heavy weight seemed to have gone out of his bosom. 


. All of us. 


L 
[. Within seven miles of Boston. 
l 
m. The city of London. 


l. It will be evident at ouce that the preposition of is used in a 
great variety of ways and with many different meanings. It will help 
| us in some cases to remember that the preposition of is simply a 
shorter form of off, and hence originally had the idea of separation 
conveyed by from. In which phrases or sentences is this separative 
, dea plainest ? | 


2. (1) In which phrase or senteuce 1s of with the accusative a sub- 
stitute for the possessive or genitive case? (2) In which one does of 
mean made of, — thus denoting material? (3) In which does it mean 
concerning? (4) 'u which is it used with an object to explain the 
application of an adjective? (5) In which does it mean by ? 

3. Contrast the use of the preposition of in eand /. Ine, the very 
| tip-top expresses a part of all enjoyment, while, in J, all is not a part 
of us, but refers to exactly the same people, and.all of us means the 
same as we all. So in m, city and London refer to the same thing, 


aste 


1 For the syntax of adverbs, see 14, 5’; for that of interjections, see 16. 


60 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


and the city of London means the same as the city London. Tlic 
use of the preposition of in e is called PARTITIVE, that in / and m is 
called APPOSITIONAL; cf. 57. 


72. The Word ror. Study the use of for in the following 
phrases and sentences : — 


a. A dozen oranges for a quarter. 

ó. To fight for one's country. 

€. To send for aid. 

d. Good for food. 

e. He valued the sunbeam for this reason. 

f. To this dismal hole — for it was little better than a dun- 
geon — Midas betook himself. 

fj. Tall for his age. 

h. To sail for England. 

i. You may for all me. 

j. Imprisoned for life. 


1. (1) In which phrase or sentence does for mean iz place cf, in 
return for? (2) In which does it mean iv behalf of ? (8) In which 
does it mean because of? (4) In which is it a conjunction meaning 
because? (5) In which does it mean ix proportion to, or considering ? 
(6) In which does it mean during ? 

2. Note that the meaning of for aid, in c, might be expressed by 
the words i» order to get aid ; the meaning of for food, in d, by £o de 
eaten ; and the meaning of for England, in 4, by i» order that England 
may be reached. To what, then, is the prepositional phrase introduced 
by for sometimes equal? Cf. 68, g and 7. 


73. The Preposition wiTH. — Study the use of with in the fol. 
lowing sentences : — 


a. The general fought with his men. 

— 6, The general fought with the enemy. 

- €. The soldiers fight with great bravery. 
d. The soldiers fight with lances. 


1. (1) In which of the above sentences docs with mean in company 
with, i. e.,, denote ACCOMPANIMENT? (2) In which does it denote 


SYNTAX. - 61 


HOSTILE UNION? (3) In which does it mean BY MEANS OF? 
(4) In which does the phrase introduced by with show the MANNER 
in which the action is performed ? 

2. The study of the prepositions of, for, and with, just made, cer- 
tainly shows that they are used in a surprising number of different 
senses. We certainly ought not to be surprised if we find that some 
of the meanings conveyed by these prepositions are conveyed in other 
languages by means quite different from those employed in English. 


74. Lack of Precision in the English Use of Prepositions and 
Tenses. — Compare the idiomatic English expressions on the left 
with the more accurate but less idiomatic expressions on the right : — 


d, He put it in the bag. ó. He put it into the bag. 

c. Where will you go? d. Whither will you go? 

e. Looking up, he beheld the f. Having looked up, he be- 
figure of a stranger. held the figure of a stranger. 

f. When he comes, I shall h. When he shall have come, 
go. I shall go. 

i. He hopes to come. j. He hopes that he will 

come. 


1. From examples a, 6, c, and d we see that an English verb clearly 
conveying the idea of motion is often used with an adverb or a prepo- 
sition conveying the idea of rest in a place. Sometimes the more 
accurate expression is not permissible in English ; we cannot say, they 
will meet to the corner, although meet clearly expresses motion 
toward, but must use the more indefinite phrase at the corner. 
Sometimes conventional English requires a preposition appropriate 
to motion toward where the sense requires one appropriate to motion 
from, as in the phrase averse to, — averse meaning turned away. 

2. In which of the sentences above does the English use a verbal 

| form referring to the present, where the sense is past? In which 


1 While we must not quarrel with the usage of the langage, the pupil should 

clearly understand that the usage here is arbitrary and conventional. If we expect 

our pupils to be intelligent, we must not rebuke them too sharply when they use 
their intelligence in saying averse from, and to meet to. 


62 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


does it use a present for a future perfect ? In which a present for a 
future ? 

3. The pupil will see from the above that our noble English is 
somewhat vague and inaccurate in its use of prepositions and. tenses. 
It is very necessary to remember this fact in translating English into 
other languages, or other languages into English. 


79. Omission of Words. — Supply omitted words in the following 
sentences, so that the grammatical construction of each word will be 
plain : — 

a. It was little better than a dungeon. 

6. And then would he reckon over the coins in the bag, 
toss up the bar, sift the gold-dust through his fingers, and look 


at the funny image of his face as reflected in the circumference | 


of the cup. 

c. The remotest corners were lighted up as with tips of 
flame. 

d. This is the day we celebrate. 

€. He is as old as I. 

f. Love thy neighbor as thyself. 

g. He said they were playing. 
"h.I am weary of collecting my treasures with so much 
trouble, and beholding the heap so diminutive. i 

7. * What is the matter, father?" ‘“ Nothing, child, nothing," 
said Midas ; «eat your bread and milk." 

j. Who carves his thought in marble will not scorn these 
pictured bubbles. 

Ll. He was born March 6, 1840. 


1. (1) What common verb is often omitted in the above sentences? | 


(2) What conjunction is used before an omission in several? (3) In 
which one is a relative pronoun omitted ? (4) In which two are con- 
junctions omitted? (5) In which is the antecedent of a relative 
omitted ? For the construction of 6 and A, cf. 53, 1. 

2. Note this important fact, — that the word or words to be E 
plied are very often suggested by words which precede. 


SYNTAX. ' 63 


3. We may see from the above sentences that the omission of 
words necessary to make complete seuse is bv no means uncommon 
in English. We ought not to wonder, then, if we find some instances 
of it in other languages which we may study 


ORDER OF WORDS. 


76. Study the order of words iu the following sentences and 
phrases, quoted from Hawthorne and Lowell: — 


a. He lay in a disconsolate mood, regretting the downfall of 
his hopes. 

6. He had a little daughter, whom nobody but myself ever 
heard of. 

c. He gave all. his thoughts and all his time to this one 
purpose. | 

d. He had planted a garden, in which grew the biggest and 
beautifulest roses that any mortal ever saw or smelt. 

e. He thought to himself that it was rather an extravagant 
style of splendor, in a king of his simple habits, to breakfast 
off a service of gold. | | 

f. Your own little Marygold, warm, soft, and loving, as she 
was an hour ago. 

f. Will you never regret the possession of it ? 

h. In those quiet old winter evenings, around our Roman 
fireside, it was not seldom, my dear Storg, that we talked of 
the advantages of travel. 

i. Whether Midas slept as usual that night, the story does 
not say. 

_ 4. Then would he reckon over the coins in the bag. 

k. All these things we debated. 

|. The child was so occupied by her grief for the blighted 
roses that she did not even notice the wonderful transmutation 
of her china bowl. 

m. But this was only a passing thought. | 


64 INDUCTIVE STUDIES IN ENGLISH. 


4. Whatever moulds of various brain 
E'er shaped the world to weal or woe, 
Whatever empires wax and wane, 
To him who hath not eyes in vain, 
His village-microcosm can show.’ (Quoted by Lowell.) 


1. (1) In which, and in how many, of the above clauses do the 
adverbial modifiers follow the verb? (2) In which do they precede ? 
(3) In which does the object precede the verb? (4) In which does 
it follow? (5) In which does the subject come first? (6) In which 
does it follow its verb? Note that in interrogative sentences this 
always occurs; note, too, that a relative always comes first in its 
clause, whether it is an object or subject. Cf. 4, d, and for the reason 
of this, cf. 20, 5. (7) In which do adjectives stand before their 
nouns? (8) In which, after? (9) In which does the preposition 
follow its case? 

2. (1) Note that result clauses, and clauses in indirect discourse 
usually follow the verb on which they depend ; cf. e and 7. (2) Note 
that adjectives and pronouns have a tendency to stand near their nouns, 
and that, if they are much removed, it must be where no obscurity 
would be caused thereby; cf. a, à, d, f£. (3) Note that the principal 
subject and verb are not likely to be much separated.? 

3. From the study of these representative English sentences, the 
pupil will see that much variation in English word-order is permissible, - 
and that the order is a very misleading guide to the grammatical con- | 
struction. The only way to succeed in giving the construction of the 
words in a sentence is to study intelligently the meaning of the 
sentence. 


74. Pick out the emphatic words in the following sentences : — 
a. The general deceived the king. 

6. It was the king who was deceived by the general. 

c. It was the general who deceived the king. 


1 The teacher will note the order here, — direct object, indirect object, sub- 
ject, verb; a somewhat unusual order, and yet the meaning is perfectly clear. The 
rigidity of English word-order is often much exaggerated ; it is hardly rigid at all. 

? Here is an important difference between English and Latin. 


— a Á"———————————À————————————————————————————— ————————————— Se eM MAMMA Ll 


aec 


SYNTAX. 65 


d. It was deception which the general practiced on the king. 
e. Very delicious was their fragrance. 

f. To him who, in the love of nature, holds communion with 
|, her visible forms, she speaks a various language. 

4. The wise man travels to discover himself; it is to find 
,. himself out that he goes out of himself. 

_h. After all, my dear Storg, it is to know THINGS that one 
| has need to travel, and not (to know) MEN. Those force us 
to come to them, but these come to us. 

7. Some years ago a ship was launched here with her rigging, 
' spars, sails, and cargo aboard. 

j. But, oh dear, dear me! What do you think has happened ? 
Such a misfortune! All the beautiful roses, that smelled so 
sweetly and had so many lovely blushes, are blighted and 
spoilt ! 


1. Note that the sentence a contains no emphatic word, and how 
each word is made emphatic in 4, c and d, by bringing it to the 
end of a clause introduced by the temporary subject it; cf. 51. 

2. Note that emphasis always suggests contrast, a strong affirmative 
| suggests an equally strong negative: thus in 4, it was the king, not 
| the people nor the prime minister; in /, it is the lover of nature 

to whom she speaks, not the man who cares little for her. 
3. In Z, the order indicates that for a ship to be launched with 
her spars aboard was remarkable, but to be launched with sails was 
, more remarkable, while to be launched with a cargo aboard was most 
remarkable. Note, too, how in 7 the interest of the reader is in- 
creased by exclamations and rapid statements until it reaches its 
height at the word spoilt. Such a ladder of ascending steps is called 
à CLIMAX. 

3. Note that the emphatic points in the above clauses are at the end 

or at the beginning. 


SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 


l. Use twenty minutes of every hour in directing the observation and thought | 


of the class to the new points of the advance-lesson ; and in no case ask a class to 
prepare a lesson which has not been thus introduced. 

2. Do not fail to require the pupil so to master the text that, with the English 
parallel (p. 880) before his eye, he can repeat or write the original with accuracy 
aad without hesitation ; and with every advance-lesson let the text of the ten or 
twelve preceding lessons be reviewed. 


3. Let every point referred to in the ** Notes” be called up in one form or | 


another in the class-room. It is not expected, however, that any pupil will need | 


to turn to all the references to previous * Lessons," which the ** Notes " contain. 
The faithful student will know the text so well that, in very many instances, he 
will at once recall what he has learned about the usage or the form referred to. — . 
4. In teaching the ** Observations," let the words or phrases which serve as 
the basis of the '* Observations " be written upon the board. 
5. Insist upon the thorough mastery of the ‘‘ Vocabularies,’ not only from 
the Latin iuto English, but also from the English into Latin. 


-6. In the translation-of-the English sentences into Latin, to insure accuracy, | 
much of the work should be in writing, both on the board and on paper. All the 


sentences of the English-Latin Exercises should be written out by each pupil and 
corrected before the whole class. In addition, written tests, occupying five or ten 
minutes, upon new but similar sentences, will ‘be found very profitable. 

7. The Review Lessons are very important, and should be dwelt upon until 
thoroughly mastered. 

8. Much time can be saved and much good accomplished by having the class 
do a portion of the work in concert. This is especially helpful in reproducagl 
the original text from the English parallel. 

9. It is unnecessary, indeed harmful, to tell the pupil everything that may be 
said concerning a word or form, when it first occurs. Nor should one feel obliged, 
when a general statement is made concerning a given point, to indicate all the 
exceptions which exist. 


10. Require the mastery of the paradigms, but not merely that they may bé | 


recited by rote. The pupil should study and compare them, with a view to 
ascertaining the principles in accordance with which they are constructed. As 
paradigms are commonly studied, they work more injury than benefit. . 


11. Introduce conversation in Latin upon the text, in addition to that which | 


the book contains; it relieves the monotony of a recitation ; it fixes the text more 
firmly in mind ; it teaches the pupil to think in the language which he is studying. 


13. The teacher need not. feel fettered by the division of the book into | 
* Lessons." He should assign for a recitation just so much as he finds. is suited | 


to the capacity of his class. . 
. .13.. Be careful to.see that your pupils use the frequent references to the 
“Inductive Studies in English Grammar." Most teachers will probably find it 
best to take up all these “Studies” in their order before beginning the Latin 
* Lessons," or in a parallel course while studying the Latin. 

14. It is further suggested, since the method of this book is essentially different 
from others, that it is wiser for most teachers to follow the above ** Suggestions ~ 


implicitly, at least during the first year of using the inductive method. The. 


99 


“* Suggestions" numbered 1, 2, and 9, are very likely to be neglected by those 
accustomed to the old method. : 


66 


1 


this subject. 


INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON I. 


NorE — In studying the “Text” and * Notes," the pupil will observe the 
following suggestions: — 
(1), Take up first the word Gal’-If 4, and notice the number of syllables, the 


‘marks over the vowels, and the meaning. After reading carefully what is said 


about the word in Note 1, pronounce it aloud several times, each time associating 
the meaning with the sound. 
(2) Treat in the same manner the remaining words of the lesson, but in no case 


take up a new word until the word preceding it has been thoroughly mastered. 


(3) Having mastered the words separately, study the sentence as a whole, pro- 
nouncing and writing out the Latin with only the English parallel (p. 380) before 
the eye. 

(4) Understand from the beginning that every word and sentence of the Latin 


text is to be mastered. Nothing short of absolute mastery will answer the purpose. 


IS FEXT, 
Gal’/-li-4  ést  ó'mnis di-vi’-sA in  páàr'tes tres. 
Gaul 18 all divided into parts three. 
2. NOTES. 


1. Gal, Gaul, an ancient country in Western Europe, occupy- 
ing about the same territory as modern France; cf. Galatia: (a) 
vowel sounds,! & as the a in father, shortened, 7. e., more quickly pro- 


.. 3. The teacher should pronounce these words for the pupils before they are re- 


_ ferred to the printed page, and, after the pupils have heard the words, they should be 


asked to describe the sounds which they contain. Those teachers who prefer the 


. English pronunciation of Latin will omit these notes on pronunciation, and refer 
their pupils to the sections upon the subject, contained in the English Grammar 


accompanying this work. Harkness’s Latin Grammar may also be consulted upon 


67 


68 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. ) | 
nounced; i as the i in machine, shortened ; (5) the down-stro | 
an accent-mark; cf. E. G.! 7. On which syllable is th*g -. | 
accented ? d thought | 
2. Sst, is; cf. French est, English is: (a) & has the soun? “ss to 
in they, shortened. (4). What is the subject of est? Cfe English | 
47, 1. (c) est, he, she, or it, is; Gallia est, Gaul, it is, or 2°CUray” 
je ten or | 
Gaul is. | 
3. ó'-mnis, all; cf. omnibus (for all): (a) 6 is pronou E | 
o in note, shortened, never as o in not; (5) for 1, cf. Gli? contain. | 
above, and note that we have already un to use what we 028 he. 
but a moment ago. (c) Which syllable is accented ? : | 
4. di-vi-sá, divided : (a) cf. the marks over the letter i in the | 
first two syllables of this word with the mark over i in Gallia, | 
Smnis. What is the difference? The i in divisá is pronounced long, 
that in Smnis is pronounced short; but the kind, or quality, of the 
sound is the same in each case; ? 1 is therefore pronounced like 4 in | 
machine; cf. 1,a. (6) v has the sound of w in we. (c) On which syl- | 
lable of di-vi'-sá is the accent? (7) What ending have Gallia and | 
divis& in common? What are the case and number of Gallia, as- | 
suming that they are the same as those of Gaul? Cf. E. G. 21, I, | 
and 22,1. Gallia is of the feminine gender. Is Gaul of the femi- | 
niue gender? Cf. E. G. 42 and foot-note. ] 
5. In, into; note that the meaning is not here the same as that of | 
English zz. | 
6. pár't&s, parts: (a) & has the sound of ey in they®; ef. 8, 2,25. 
(b) s has its proper hissing sound, not that of 2; (c) cf. the accent | 
of pár/-tés with that of 5/-mnts, the other two-syllable word in this | 
Lesson. On which syllable does the zccent come in both cases? 
| E. G., 7. e., the “ Inductive Studies in English Grammar” accompanying this | 
work. It is expected that many, perhaps most, teachers will find it best to have | 
their pupils study the whole of this outline of English Grammar in course. To such | 
pupils, therefore, references like this will review and apply knowledge already gained. | 
2 The teacher will find it necessary to emphasize this fact, since 1 and f in Eng | 
lish have quite different sounds. 
3 Those who use the English method must remember that, in pronouncing Latin, 
e and O are pronounced long (contrary to E. G. 8, 2) in final -6s, and in final -68 | 
of plural cases. See, also, foot-notes on page 73. E | 


LESSON I. 69 


ny words in this lesson (except those of but one syllable) 
sd on the final syllable ? 

"és, three: (a) What ending is common to párt&s and trés ? 
iat case is used after prepositions in English? Cf. E. G. 


ae same case is used in Latin. What, then, is the case of 
: 


3. OBSERVATIONS! 


"dy 
Nore ^ : - 
followin't 1ts sound is prolonged in pronunciation, the mark ~ indicates 


unat 1t is short in quantity. The short vowel requires one half as 


he mark ~ over a vowel indicates that it is long in quantity, 


much time for pronunciation as the long vowel. 

2. Vowel sounds in this Lesson: X as ; in machine, XY the same 
sound shortened ; 8 as ey in ¢hey, é the same sound shortened; á 
and 6 the sounds of a in father and o 1n zofe, shortened. 

3. The consonant v has the sound of w, and s always has its 
hissing sound, never that of z. 

4. Words of two syllables are accented on the first, and a final syl- 
lable is never accented. 

5. The ending -& is an ending of the nominative singular feminine. 

6. The ending -és is an ending of the objective or accusative case, 
plural number. 

7. AM the Latin words in this lesson have related words in 
English. 

8. Names of things are not always ueuter (7. e. neither masculine 

. mor feminine) in Latin. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. di-vi-s&, nom. sing. fem., divided. 5. 6-mnis, nom. sing. fem,, al/, 


| 2. ést, he, she, or it, is. every, as-a-whole. 
9. Gal-li-4, nom. sing. fem., Gaul. 6. p&r-tés, accus. plur., parts. 
4, in, prep. with accus. case, 2z£o. 7. trés, accus. plur., three. 


1 The pupil must justify each of these “‘ Observations " by the words in the text 
| and the explanations in the notes. 


TOT. INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l The marks ~ aud ~. 2. Difference between long and short 
vowels. 3. The sounds of i, í, 6, &é( 4. Of v and s. 5. Place of ac- 
cent in words of two syllables. 6. The endings -& and -és. 7. Eng- 
lish words related to words of the text. 8. A difference between 
gender in English and gender in Latin. 9. The accusative case. 


LESSON II. 


l. TEXT. 


Read again the suggestions for taking up the text, given in connection with 
Lesson I. 

Gallia est omnis  divisá in  partés  tres,! 
quà'rüm ü'-náàm in/-có-lünt Bél'-gae,?  à'l]tàám 
of -which one inhabit lhe-Belgians another 

A-qui-ta/-ni. | 
the-Aquitanians. 

2. NOTES. 

1. quà'rüm, of-which : (a) qu is pronounced like gu in quie, i. e. - 
like Aw; (b) à like a in father; cf. 1.2 N. 1. a; (c) & like 00 in moon, 
shortened, i. e. like oo in book ; (d) rule for accent? Cf. I. N. 6, c. 

2. ü'-nám, one; cf. unit: (a) à is pronounced like oo in moon ; cf. 
ü1,c. (5) What is referred to iu this word? One what ? 

3. in'.có-lünt, they-inhabit : (a) three vowel sounds, all learned. 
Iu what words have we had them? (6) On which syllable is the 
accent? (c) incolunt, they inhabit ; Belgae incolunt, the oa 
they inhabit, or better, the Belgians inhabit. 

4. B&l'-gae, the-Belyians : (a) g is hard, like g in go, not like g in 

1 Vowels unmarked are to be treated as short. 

2 Those who use the English method of pronunciation will pronounce the diph. 


thongs ae and oe like the first e in Eve. 
8 Roman numerals are used in referring to the “ Lessons " of this book. - — x 


y 
: LESSON II. 71 


gem ; (b) the diphthong ae is pronounced like i in kite. (c) Of what 
verb is Belgae the subject? What is the object of this verb? Cf. 
E. G. 56, 1 and 2. 

5. à'-1i Am, another ; cf. alien : (a) place of accent? (4) the object 
of the verb incolunt understood, as ünam is the object of incolunt 
expressed. What, then, is its case? (c) What ending is common to 
fimam and aliam? Cf. -& in Gallia. What letter is common to the 
endings of Gallia and inam? Both are feminine. 

6. A-qui-ta!-nt, the-Aquitanians : (a) Where have we met each of 
| these vowels before? (4) Forqu, cf. 1, a. (c) Cf. the meaning of this 
word with that of quarum and that of Belgae. How many English 


words are used to translate each ? 


3. OBSERVATIONS: 


1. New vowels à, ü, i; à is pronounced like a in father, à like oo 
in moon, like oo in ook. The diphthong ae is pronounced like i in 
kite; g is always pronounced hard, like 7 in go, never like g in gem; 
qu is pronounced like gu in quite. 
~ 2. The ending -& is found in the nom. sing. fem., -am, in the 
accus. sing. fem. 

3. The nom. is the case of the subject, the accus. 1s the case of the 
direct object, and is also used after prepositions. 

4 Two or more words are often required to translate one word of 
Latin. 
4. VOCABULARY. 


l. &-H-À, nom. sirg. fem., another. 4. in-cd-lint, they inhabit. 
2. A-qui-ta-ni, the- Aquitanians. 5. quà-rüm, of-which. 
3. Bél-gae, the-Belgians. 6. ü-ná, nom. sing. fem., ove. 
EU | Feminine nouns and adjectives. 
Nom. sing. Accus. sing. 

alia áliám 
| E divisá divisám 

Gallia Galliam 

üná ünám 


1 Do not forget to associate these ‘‘ Observations " with the facts of the text on 
rhich they are based. - . 


19 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. EXERCISES. 
Pronounce and translate. 


1. (a) Galli& est divisá. (4) Omnis Galli& est divis&. (c) Gallia 
est omnis divis in partés. (7) In partés trés. (¢) Belgae ünam 
(partem) incolunt. 

2. («) Aquitani aliam (partem) incolunt. (4) Belgae Galliam 
incolunt. (c) Iu ünam (partem). (4) Gallia est una. (e) In divi- 
sam Galliam. 

3. (7) Gaul is divided into parts. (4) Into three parts, of-which. 
the-Belgians inhabit one. (c) One (part) is divided. (d) The-Aqui-. 
tanians inhabit Gaul. | 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


]. Endings -á, -am, -és. 2. Pronunciation of ü and ü. 3. Of 
diphthong ae. 4. Two uses of the accus. 5. Latin for the Belgians, | 
of which. 6. Peculiarities of Latin word order in this Lesson. 
1. English derivatives of the words in this Lesson. | 


LESSON III. 


I TEXT, | 


Galliá est omnis divisá in partés trés quarum ünam | 
incolunt Belgae, aliam Aquitani, | 

tér’-ti-Am, qui  Ipso'-rüm lin- 

the third (part, those inhabit) who — of-themselves — in-the 


gua Céltae,! nédstra Galli  áp-pél.lán'-tür. 
language Celts, in-our (language) Gauls are-called. 


1 Henceforth only the harder words will be divided into syllables: by hyphens. ' 


LESSON III. 73 


2. NOTES. 


1. tér!-ti-am, the third; cf. tertiary : (a) t always has the sound 
of £in £i», never that of sh, like ¢ in action; (5) place of accent? 
(e) this word is the object of incolunt, and agrees with the Latin 
word meaning part, which, with incolunt, is supplied in thought 
from the preceding clauses; (4) for case form, cf. aliam, ünam. 

. 9. 1-psó'crüm, of-themselves, their-own : (a) 0 is pronounced like 
| 0 in note; (4) cf. ipsórum and quàrum II. How many letters 
of the endings are common to both? What word is found in the 
translation of each? What, then, seems to be the meaning of the 
‘common ending? Cf. E. G. 61, 2. What is the number of 
both ? 

3. lingua,’ in-the-language ; cf. linguist: (a) gu before the vowel 


a is pronounced like gw; (5) pronounced in two syllables, since u is 
not here a vowel. (c) What is the difference in the final letter of 
lingua, and Gallia I? What difference in the use and translation ? — 
4. C&ltae, (Ae-Celís : (a) c is pronounced hard like £; (6) cf. 
Celtae with Belgae. What ending have these two words in com- 
mon? This ending is that of the nom. plur.; (c) this ending is 
fem.; cf. -&, -am, -à. In what respect are these endings like that 
‘of Celtae? (d) Celtae and Belgae, though having a fem. ending, 
are masc. because the names of males ; names of males are always 
masc, in Latin as in English; cf. E. G. 42, foot-note. 
|, 5. nóstrà, in-our (language) ; cf. pater noster, our father ; agrees 
with lingua, to be supplied in thought ; cf. 3. 
6. Gli? Gauls: (a) cf. Aquitàni, qui. What ending have the 
three words in common? This 1s the ending of the nom. plur. masc. ;- 
(4) Gallia, Gaul, the country; Galli, Gauls, the people inhabiting 
it. 


ei 


1 Those who use the English method will note that the marks of quantity in 
Latin words have nothing to do with their pronunciation by that method ; lingua 
and Ec: have the same English pronunciation. 

? By the English method, final vowels in Latin, except final -a, are prono nced 
long. 


74 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


7. áp-pél-lán'-tür, they are called: (a) What is the voice of this 
verb? Cf. E. G. 40. (5) The subject is qui; qui appellantur, who 


are called. (c) On which syllable is theaccent ? What is the quantity 


of the vowel of the next to the last syllable? Cf. the accent of other 
words of more than two syllables with a short vowel in the next to 
the last syllable, Gal/-1i-4, in'-có-lünt, á'-li-ám, tér’-ti-am. On 


which syllable does the accent come in these words? The accent of | 


áp-péllán-tür is allowed on the penult (cf. E. G. 10), because 
although its vowel is short, this vowel is followed by two consonants, 
n and t. (d) On which syllable is the accent of di-vi'-sá, A-qui-ta/-ni, 


Lpsórüm? What is the quantity of the vowel of this syllable 


in each case? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The ending -& often indicates the nom. sing. fem.; but the 
ending -à, though indicating the sing. and fem., does not indicate 
the nom. case, and is sometimes translated by the Eng. prep. a 

2. The endings -&, -am, -à are all sing. and fem. 

3. The ending -rum is plur. and is often translated by the Eng. 
prep. of. 

4. The endings -ae and -1 belong to the nom. plur. For different 
noms. plur. in Eng., cf. E. G. 23. 


5. Galliis plur., and means ¢he Gauls ; Gallia is sing. fem., and. 


means the country of the Gauls. 
6. The Lat. t is pronounced like ¢ in éiz, never like sh; gu is 
pronounced like gw, c like £, and ó like o in note. 


| 


7. In words of more than two syllables, the penult is accented if _ 
its vowel is long ? in quantity, or if it is followed by two consonants | 


before the next vowel is reached. All other words of more than two 
syllables are accented on the antepenult. 


1 In reciting these observations the pupil should give from the text examples of 
the principles stated. 
? A diphthong should be treated as a long vowel. 


LESSON III. Ed 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. áp-p&l-lím-tütr, they are called | 4. ipsi, nom. plur. masc., /Aem- 


(by name). | selves. 
2. Céltae, nom. plur. masc., the | 5. lingua, nom. sing. fem., ¢he 
Celts. tongue, language. 


3. Gálli nom. plur. masc., the 6. nóstrá, nom. sing. fem., our. 
Gauls. qui, nom. plur. masc., who. 
8. tér-ti-á, nom. sing. fem., third. 


T 


5. EXERCISES. 
(1) Pronounce. (2) Translate. (3) Pick out the nominatives and accusatives. 


1. (az) Unam (partem) incolunt Belgae. (4) Aliam (partem) 
incolunt Aquitàni. (c) Tertiam (partem) incolunt Celtae. (d) 
Gall? ipsórum lingua Celtae appellantur. 

2. (a) Celtae, qui nostra lingua Galli appellantur, tertiam. (par- 
tem) incolunt. (6) Galli provinciam (province) nostram incolunt. 
(c) Linguárum üna est nostra. 

3. (a) The-Gauls are-called Celts. (6) The-Gauls, who in-their- 
own language are-called Celts, inhabit the-third (part). (c) The- 
Celts, who in-our language are-called Gauls, inhabit one (part). 

4. (a) Gaul is divided into three parts, one of-which the-Belgians 
inhabit, another the-Aquitanians, the-third (those) who in-their-own 
language are-called Celts, in-ours Gauls. (4) Gaul is the country 
(terra) of-the-Gauls. (c) The-Belgians and the-Aquitanians. and’ 
the-Celts inhabit three parts. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Pronunciation of t, gu, c, and 6. 2. The English prepositions 
| equivalent to the endings -rum and -à as used in this Lesson. 
8. The use of the nom. and accus. 4. Fem. endings. 5. Plur. 
endings. 6. Masc. ending. 7. Principles of accent illustrated by 
incdlunt, Gallia, appellíntur, ipsórum. 8. Words to be supplied 
in thought in the text of this Lesson. 9. Three parts and three 
| peoples of Gaul. 


76 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON IV. 


1. TEXT. 


Hi  omnés lingua,  in-sti-tü-tis,  le.gi-bus, inter 
These all in-language, in-customs, in-laws, | among 
se dif-fe-runt.! 

themselves differ. 


2. NOTES. 


1. hi, ¢hese ; for case, number, and gender, cf. Galli III. n. 6, a. 

2. omnés, all: (a) for 6, see I. N. 3, a; (4) for s, see I. N. 6, 5; 
(c) omnés has here the same case as hi, i. e. the nom. (47) To 
what case does the ending -8s belong in partés and trés? Cf. I. 
N. 7; (e) cf. omnés, nom. plur, with omnis, nom. sing.; Gallia . 
omnis, all Gaul, hi omnés, all these. | | 

3. lingua, in-language: (a) for form, pronunciation, and transla- | 
tion, see III. N. 3; (6) lingua, language, when used as a subject, ! 
i. e. in the nom. case, cf. Gallia I; linguam, language, when used — 
as an object, 7. e. in the accus. case, cf. aliam. II. N. 5; lingua, 
in-language. What difference in translation between linguam and 
lingua? What difference iu the form? ! : 

4. institütis, /n-customs ; cf. institute, institution : (a) On which 
syllable is the accent? Of. III. N. 7; (6) number of this word? 
(c) for translation, cf. lingua 3. | 

9. legibus, in-laws; cf. legal : ? (a) for sound of g, cf. Belgae II. 
N. 4; (5) accented syllable and why ? (c) note that lingua, instititis, 
and légibus are all translated by the English prep. i». Have they 


| 
| 
: 


1 Remember that vowels not marked are short. - 
2 Occasionally Eng. derivatives are given as suggestions to the learner. The 
teacher should urge pupils to find many others for themselves. 


LESSON IV... CE 


all the same ending? For an ending equivalent to English of, cf. 
LH N- 2, 0, | 

6. se, themselves ; accus. plur. with the preceding preposition inter ; 
cf. in partés I. 6, 7, and the free translation of inter sé, p. 386. 

7. differunt, /Aey-d/ffer : (a) note that the one word is translated 
by two. What other instances of the same kind have we already met ? 


(6) What part of speech is differunt? How do you know? | Find 


in preceding lessous other examples of this part of speech. (c) The 
subject is hi. When this is supplied, the full translation is ZAese, 
they differ, but they may be properly omitted, leaving these differ, cf. 
incolunt II. n. 3, c. 


3. OBSERVATIONS: 


l. The ending -8s is found in both the nom. and the accus. plur. 

2. Some words which have the nom. sing. in -is change this end- 
ing to -&s in the nom. plur. 

3. Words having -& as the nom. sing. ending, have -am in the 
accus, sing., and -à as the ending of another case in the sing. 

4. Many single words in a Latin sentence are represented by two 


or more words in the English translation. Cf. E. G. 46. 


5. A Latin ending is often translated by an English preposition. 
Cf. E. G. 61, 2 and 3. 

6. Two nom. sing. endings have been found, -& and -is, and three 
nom. plur. endings, -1, -ae and -és. 

4. The prepositions in and inter are followed by the accus. case. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. dif-fe-runt, /Aey bear apart, | 4. inter, prep. with accus., óe- 


differ. tween, among. 

2. hi, nom. plur. masc., ZAese. 5. 1&-gi-bus, in-laws. 

9. In-sti-tü-tis, in-customs, in- | 6. sé, accus. plur., themselves. 
institutions. 


1 The teacher must not forget to require the pupil to furnish examples of the 


| principles stated under this heading. 


78 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. EXERCISES. 


Translate, and name all the nominatives and accusatives. ' 


1. (a) Omnés lingua inter sé differunt. (4) Hi legibus inter sé 
differunt. (c) Trés partes inter sé differunt. (4) Hi omnes Galli 
appellantur. 

2. (a) Galli et (and) Germani nàtürà! inter sé differunt. (5) Se- 
quani et Lingonés ipsorum lingua Celtae appellantur. © (c) Galli 
Galliam incolunt. 

3. (a) All these differ from one-another in-language. (5) These 
are-called Celts. (c) The-Celts and the-Belgians, who inhabit Gaul, 
differ from one-another in-laws. 

4. (a) The-Gauls inhabit all the-parts. (4) The-Celts and Aqui- 
tanians differ in-customs. (c) Gaul is divided into parts of-which 
the Celts inhabit the third. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. The following endings of nouns and adjectives: -&, -à, -rum, 
-am, -és, -i, -is. 2. Four of these endings which may indicate the 
same case. 3. Three which have a common letter. 4. An ending 
sometimes translated i». 5. One often translated of. 6. Two endings - 
used in object nouns. 7. All the Latin words of the text thus far 
which are translated by more than one English word. 8. All the 
sing. endings learned thus far, 9. All the plur. endings. 10. Accent 
in words of two syllables. 11. In words of three syllables, 12. Latin 
prepositions with the accusative. 


1 Words not yet found in the text will occasionally be inserted when their form 
shows their Englisb meaning, 


LESSON V. 19 


LESSON V. 


LS TEXI. 


. Gallos ab A-qui-tà-nis Ga-ru-mna flümen, 
The-Gauls from the-Aquitanians — the-Garumna river, 

a Belgis Ma-tro-na et Sé-quana_ di-vi-dit* 
J'rom the-Belgians the-Matrona and  the-Seine — divide(s). 


2. NOTES 


1. Gallos, the-Gauls: (a) the object of dividit (at the end of 
the sentence). In what case, number, and gender is Gallos? 
(P) What is its ending? Cf. Galli III. n. 6. Aquitani II. 
What, then, is an ending of the accus. plur. masc.? 

2. ab A-qui-ta-nis, from the-Aquitanians: (a) Aquitànis is in 
the ABLATIVE case.? This case is not found in English; the pupil 
will learn its Latin uses very gradually from the text; (5) note that 
the ablative is here used after a prep.—— viz. the prep. ab. What 

other case have we had used after a prep.? (c) Cf. the ablative sing. 

lingua III. and [V., and ablatives plur. institütis and légibus IV. 
What abl. plur. ending is common to Aquitànis and institütis ? 
How does this ending differ from that of omnis I. | (7) What nom. 
plur. ending belongs to the same words as the abl. plur. ending -is ? 
Cf. Aquitani If. What accus. plur.? Cf. Galli III. and Gallos 
above. 

9. flümen, that which flows, the river; cf. fluid; in apposition 
with the preceding word Garumna, which is the subject of dividit. 

What then is its case? Cf. E. G. 57. 


| 

|. 1 The pupil should not lose sight of the suggestions made in the first lesson, 
touching the order and plan of study. 

2 The Latin ablative is not easy to master at best. The teacher should not in- 


| 
: 
: 


‘crease its complexity by anticipating difficulties. Let the pupil learn its uses one 
at a time from the text. 


80 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. à, from: (a) a modified form of ab 2; cf. a-vert, ab-solve ; 
(b) the difference in the use of à and ab is the same as that be- 
tween a and an, except that in Latin h is never treated as a conso- 
nant ;1 cf. à Belgis, ab Aquitanis, with a Belgian, an Aquitanian. 

5. Belgis, the Belyians: (a) what case? Cf. 2, 6, and 4, a. 
(5) What is the nom. plur. of this word? Cf. II. (c) What two - 
nom. -plur. endings, then, change to the same ending.in the abl, ? 

6.. dividit, i/ divides: (a) note that this verb has two subjects, 
Garumna and Mátrona et Séquana, but only one object, Gallos ; 
cf. free translation, p. 386 ; (4) the expression Matrona et Séquana 
makes one singular subject, because the two rivers unite to form one 
river and one boundary line; see map; (c) cf. est, i£ zs, and di- 
vidit, it divides. What ENDING is common to est and dividit? 
What MEANING is common to them? What then is the meaning of. 
this ending? . It may also mean he or she. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. In Latin there is a case called the aBLATIVE. This case, as 
well as the accusative, is used after prepositions. 

2. The following endings of the ablative have been met in the 
text: sing. -à; plur. -is, -ibus. P 

3. Masc. nouns having a nom. plur. ending in -i have an accusative 
plur. in -ós and an ablative plur. in -is. | 

4. All nouns having the nom. sing. in -a have the accusative sing. 
in -am, the ablative sing. in -à, the nom. plur. in -ae, and the abla- 
tive plur. in -is. 

5. The ending -t in verbs means it, he, or she. | 

6. The prep. à or ab is used with the ablative. Ab stands before 
a vowel or h ; à before a consonant. 

4. The rules for the case of the subject, the direct object, and the 
appositive are the same iu Latin as in English. 


1 Ab is, to be sure, sometimes found before a consonant, but the rule here sug. 
gested will never lead to error, and its simplicity makes it suitable for beginners. 


| 
" 


LESSON V. 81 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. à, ab, prep. with ablative, | 5. Garumna, nom. sing. masc., 


Jrom, by. the Garumna. 
2. dividit, he, she, or it, divides ; | 6. Matrona, nom. sing. masc., 
cf. meaning of divisa I. the Matrona. 
. 89. et, and. 7. Séquana, nom. sing. fem., the 
4. flümen, nom. sing. neuter., a Seine. 
river. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Aquitands à Gallis Garumna fltimen dividit. (4) Gallos à 
Belgis Matrona et Sequana dividit. (c) Flümen est Garumna inter 
Gallos et Aquitanos. (4) Galli inter sé differunt. 

9. (a) Hi Galli Celtae appellantur. (^) Hi Galliam divisam inco- 
lunt. (c) Omnes ab (4y) his Galli appellantur. 

3. (a) The-Garumna river separates the-Gauls from the-Aqui- 
tanians. (4) All these differ from one-another. (c) All these are- 
called Celts in their-own language. 

4. (a) The-languages differ. (2) The-Celts differ from the-Aqui- 
tanians in-language, customs, and laws. (c) The-river separates 
these from Gaul. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The ablative case. 2. Its endings in sing.; in plur. 3. Plur. 
endings of masc. nouns. 4. Five endings of fem. nouns. 5. The 
endings -1s and -is. 6. Cases with prepositions. 7. Use of à and ab. 
8. Use of prefix a or ab in Eng. 9. Apposition. 10. The ending -t. 
11. Difference between dividit and divisa. 12. The accent of every 
word in the lesson, with reason for it. 


6 


82 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON VI. 


l. TEXT: 
Horum o-mni-um for-tis-si-mi sunt | Belgae 
Of-these (of) all the-bravest are the-Belgians 
propter-e-a’ quod A cultü atque 
on-account-of-this because Jrom the-civilization and-also 


hi-ma-ni-ta-te pro-vin-ci-ae lon-gis-si-mé ab-sunt. 
the-refinement of-the-province furthest they-are-distant. 


2. NOTES. 


1. hórum, of-these; cf. 3: (a) What ending has this word in 
common with ipsorum III.? This is the ending of the genitive 
plur. mase.; (4) cf. -àrum, the ending of the genitive plur. fem. in 
quarum. (c) What Eng. prep. often translates the Lat. genitive ? 
Cf. translation of ipsorum, quarum, and hórum. (47) What nom. 
plur. ending belongs to genitives like hórum ? Cf. hr IV. (e) To 
what persons previously mentioned in the narrative does horum 
refer ? 

2. omnium, (0/) all. (a) What is the ending of this genitive 
plur.? Cf. nom. sing. omnis I. and nom. plur. omnés IV. (5) In 
what three respects does the adj. agree with the noun it limits ? 
Cf. Gallia omnis and divisa, and partes trés I., hi omnes IV., 
and hórum omnium above. 

3. fortissimi, the bravest: (a) for case, number, and gender, 
cf. Galli III. N. 6, 4; (6) the word for órave is fortis, nom. sing. ; 
fortes, nom. plur.; cf. omnis I. omnés IV.; (c) hórum depends 
upon (4. e. hangs from) fortissimi; the bravest of these; (d) in the 


1 A compound of two words of which the first is propter; hence the above 
syllabication and not propte-re-a. 


T 


NT 
| LESSON VI. 83 


bhrase hórum forticsimi, horum denotes the whole (i. e. the whole 
of the Gauls) of which fortissimi, ‘de dravest, are ouly a part; cf. 
quárum II. which denotes the whole, while ünam, on which it de- 
pends, denotes a part; hórum and quàrum are called partitive gen- 
itives, or, by some, perhaps more correctly, genitives of the whole; 
| €f. the use of the accus. with of in E. G. 71, e and 3; (¢) cf. ipsorum 
lingua III., where the genitive has exactly the force of the Eng. pos- 
sessive genitive; cf. E. G. 21, 2; (/) agrees with Belgae, the sub- 
ject of sunt; cf. 2, 4. 

4. sunt, they are, i. e. the-Belgians are ;- cf. est, it is. 

5. proptereà quod ; proptereà, adverb, o» account of this ; quod, 
conjunction, decause. Both words together may be trauslated Jecause. 
|. 6. a cultü atque hümanitàte, from the-civilization and-also the- 
refinement : (a) What is the case of both these nouns? Cf. V. x. 2, 
6. (6) Why is & used rather than ab? Cf. V. N. 4, £. (c) Show, 
: from the text, translation, and vocabularies of this and preceding les- 
‘sons, that the definite and also the indefinite article may or may not 
be included in the meaning of a Latin noun. The Latin, as a rule, 
has no separate word to express the meaning of the English article. 

7. provinciae, of-the-province : (a) a genitive sing. fem. from the 
nom. sing. provincia ; cf. Gallia I.; (4) the ending is -ae. In 
what other case and number does this ending occur? Cf. Belgae II. 
(c) Is it a possessive or partitive gen.? Of. 3, d, e. 

8. longissime, farthest : (a) cf. its meaning and form with that of 
fortissimi 3. What letters have these words in common? What, 
judging from the translations farth-est, brav-est, seems to be the 


meaning of these letters? (4) note that longissimé is an adverb, 
and fortissimi an adj., and that the difference in the final letters -& 
and -i shows this difference in part of speech. 

9. ab-sunt, ‘hey are away, or distant (cf. ab-sent) : (a) ab, from, 
away, and sunt, they are; cf. 4; (b) bs is pronounced like ps. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. New endings: -6rum, gen. plur. masc.; -áàrum, gen. plur. 
fem.; -ium gen. plur. from nom. sing. -is; -ae, gen. sing. fem. 


84 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. The ending -issim-i is that of the superlative degree of the 
adj. in the nom. plur. masc. The letters -issim- are found also in 
the superlative degree of the adverb. 

3. The following different partial declensions (cf. E. G. 22, 2) are 
strictly based on the text thus far studied :! — 


FEM. Masc. 

Sing. Sing. Sing. 
Nom. lingu.a (cf. Gallia I.) omn-is (cf. IL.) 
Gen. lingu-ae(cf.prévinciae VI.) — —— 


Accus. lingu-am (cf. inam Il.) —— Rire 


Abl. linguà (cf. III.) 


—————— 


Plur. Plur. Plur. 
Nom. lingu-ae(cf.Belgae II.) Gall-i(cf. III.) omn-és (cf. IV.) 
Gen. lingu.árum (cf. quà- Gall-Grum (cf. omnium (cf. VL.) 
rum Il.) horum VI.) 


A cecus. Gall-os (cf. V.) —— 
Abl. lingu-is (cf. Belgis V.) — Gallis (cf. Aqui- 
: tanis V.) 


4. Almost all nouns or adjectives with nom. sing. in -a are declined.- 
like lingua, almost all with nom. sing. in -is like omnis, and all 
with nom. plur. in - like Galli. i 

5. The Lat. has no article. In translating, therefore, the English 
article must be supplied when the sense requires it. 

6. The Lat. adj., including, of course, the participle (cf. E. Gy 
20, 1 and 6), agrees in case, number, and gender with the noun or 
pronoun which it limits. 

4. The name of the person or thing to whom or to which some- 
thing belongs or pertains is often put in the genitive. 

8. Words denoting a part of a thing are often accompanied by a 
genitive designating the whole which 1s divided (the partitive 
genitive). 


1 It would be well for the teacher to keep upon the board or upon a large piece 
of paper, so arranged that it can be covered or exposed, a scheme like the following, 
ready to be filled out as new endings are learned from the text. 


? 


LESSON VI. | 85 


4. VOCABULARY. 


IB. ab-sunt, they are away or , 5. hiimanitate, abl. sing., re- 


distant ; cf. ab-est, he, she, finement. 
or it, is distant. 6. longissime, adv., farthest. 
| 9. atque, and, and also. 1. propterea, adv. Jor this 
| 9. cultü, abl. sing., culture, civil- reason. 
ization. 8. provincia, a province. 


|, 4. fortis,’ adj. drave; fortis- | 9. quod, conj., óecause. 
simI, nom. plur. masc., 
óravest. 


5. EXERCISES. 


_ Translate, distinguish the possessive from the partitive gen., and give the agree- 
. ment of every adjective. 
| 
| 


1. (a) Hi omnés fortes sunt. (6) Horum omnium fortissimi sunt 
Belgae. (c) Fortissimi sunt, proptereà quod longissimé absunt. 
(2) Ab hümànitàte provinciae absunt. (e) Gallorum omnium for- 
tissimi sunt Belgae, proptere& quod à cultü longissime absunt. 

2. (a) Hae linguae inter “sé differunt. (¢) Belgarum omnium hi 
fortissimi sunt. (c) Flümen Séquana à provincia abest. (4) Omnés 
qui provinciam incolunt à Belgis absunt. : 

3. (a) He is-distant from the-refinement and-also from the-civ- 
ilization of-the-province. (6) These are-different from the-bravest. 
(c) They-are farthest distant from the-province. (4) The-three parts 
of-Gaul differ from one-another. (e) (There) are three parts, of- 
which the-Belgians inhabit one. 

4. (a) All whom the-river separates are-called Belgians. (5) The- 
river divides these into parts. (c) The-provinces are-called ours. 
(d) All the-province is-distant from the-Belgians, who are the bravest 
ofthe-Gauls. (e) The-Sequana is a-river of-Gaul. (/) The-language 
of-the-Celts 1s one. ' 


1 When no case is mentioned the nom. sing. is to be understood. 


86 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The new endings in this lesson. 2. Two uses of the ending -ae. | 
3. The formation of the superlative. 4. Prep. used to translate the | 
genitive. 5. Prep. used to translate the ablative. 6. Difference be- | 
tween masc. and fem. in gen. plural. 7. Fem. endings. 8. Masc. 
endings. 9. Two simple forms of the verb de in Latin. 10. A com- 
pound of the same verb and explanation of its meaning. 11. Rule | 
governing use of adjectives. 12. Two uses of the genitive. | 


LESSON VII. 


l. TEXT. 


Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod 
a cultü atque hümanitate provinciae longissime absunt, 


mi-ni-mé-que ad eos  mer.ca-to-rés saepe  com- 


and-least to them merchants often re- 
me-ant atque e-a,, quae ad 
sort and-also those (things), which to 
ef-fe-mi-nan-dos  a-ni-mos  per-ti-nent, im-por-tant. 
enervate minds tend, bring-in 
2. NOTES. 


1. miniméque, and least ; cf. Eng. minimum: (a). What ending 
has minimé in common with longissime VI.? Both are adverbs. 
What then seems to be an adverbial ending? Cf. E. G. 44. 
(6) minimé is an irregular superlative ; cf. the regular form in longis- 
simé ; (c) -que, conj., and, is always attached to some other word, 
as if too weak to stand alone, and is called an enclitic, 7. e. a word 


1 [f the pupil is unable to arrange the words of this literal parallel so as to 
make sense, he may refer to the free translation, p. 386. 


LESSON VII. - 87 


which Jeans upon another. The enclitic is pronounced like a final 
syllable, and not like a separate word. 

2. ad eos, to them: (a) What case here follows ad? Cf. Gal- 
los V. N. 1; for other prepositions taking the same case, cf. in I., 
inter IV. (4) What is the antecedent (cf. E. G. 65) of eos? 

3. mercatores, merchants ; cf. merchandise, commerce; for case 

and ending, cf. omnes IV. 
.—. 4. saepe, often: (a) for pronunciation of diphthong ae, cf. Belgae 
II. N. 4, 6; (5) the adverbial final -e is here short; cf. minimé 1; 
(c) limited by the adverb minime (cf. E. G. 14, 5) ; least often — 
. very seldom. 

9. commeant, they resort: (a) the subject is mercatores, and 
mercütorés commeant means strictly, the merchants, they resort, 
.since commeant means not resort, but THEY resort; (5) cf. in- 
colunt, they inhabit, II. What final letters are contained in both 
commeant and incolunt? What word is used in the translation 
of both? What, then, is the meaning of -nt? Cf. -t in dividit, 
wt divides. 

6. e-a, those (things): (a) accus. plur. neuter; cf. e-6s 2, the 
accus. plur. masc. of the same word ; (4) cf. the same ending when 
used (as in Gallia I.) to indicate the nom. sing. feminine. 

7. quae, which : (a) nom. plur. neuter (irregular ending); (4) its 
antecedent is ea; (c) cf. qui, who, ILI.; quos, like Gallos V., and 
quarum, gen. plur. fem., of which, II. 

8. ad efféminandés animos, /o enervate minds: (a) for use of 
| prep. and case, cf. ad eos 2; (4) efféminandos is a participle agree- 
ing with animos ; it will be explained later; (c) give Eng. words 
related to each of the foregoing Lat. words. 

9. pertinent, they tend; cf. Eng. pertinent: (a) its subject is 
quae 7; (/) the sing. is pertinet, i£ tends (cf. V. N. 6, c) ; in the 
same way the sing. of commeant is commeat; but the sing. of 
incolunt II. is not incolut but incolit, like dividit V., of which 
the plur. is dividunt ; (c) cf. pertine-nt, commea nt, incolu-nt. 
| What vowel precedes the -nt in each case? 

10. important, they bring in: (a) its subject is mercatores 3, its 
| object is ea 6 ; note the punctuation, which sets off by itself the sub- 


88 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


ordinate clause, quae — pertinent; (4) its passive is importantur, 
they are brought in; cf. appellantur, they are called ILI.; (c) cf. 
importat (fe drings in), important (they (ring in), importantur 
(they are brought in), and dividit, dividunt, dividuntur. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The ending -a is the ending of neuter nouns and adjs. in the 
accus. plur., as well as of fem. nouns and adjs. in the nom. singular. 

2. An ending of the adverb is -e, usually long in quantity. 

3. The ending -t in active verbs (cf. E. G. 40 and 41) means he, 
she, it, the ending -nt, they; in passive verbs the ending -ntur means 
they. Since these endings take the place of personal pronouns, they 
are called personal endings. 

4. The verbs which have been met may be divided into three 
classes as to the formation of the present tense, indicative mode, 
third person!: one with a before the personal ending in both sing. 
and plur.; one with e; and one with i in the sing. and u in the plur. 

5. The preps. in, inter, ad, take the accus., à or ab takes the 


ablative. 
4. VOCABULARY. 

1. ad, prep., £o, toward. 6. importat, he brings in. 

2. animi, nom. plur. masc. (cf. 7. mercátórés, nom. and accus. - 
Galli) minds, feelings. plur. mase., merchants. 

3. commeat, ie? goes back and | 8. minime, adv., in the super- 
forth, resorís; commeat lative degree, least, by no 
ad, he visits. means, not at all. 

4. efféminat, 7 makes effeni- 9. pertinet, 2f stretches out, 
nate, enervates, weakens. tends, pertains. 


5. eds, accus. plur. masce., those | 10. -que, conj., and ; enclitic. 
(men), them ; cfea,accus. | 11. saepe, adv., often. 
plur. neut., those (things). 


1 For meaning of these terms, cf, E. G., 31, 2 and 3, and 70, 1 and 2. 


2 Only one meaning of the personal ending is given, to save space. "The other 


meanings are to be understood. 


mettra toc 


LESSON VII. 89 


5. EXERCISES. 


(1) Translate. (2) Point out, and translate the personal endings. (3) Classify 
the verbs aecording to Observation 4. 


1. (4) Minime mercatorés ad eos saepe commeaut. (4) Ad eos 
mercatorés ea, quae ad effeminandos animos pertinent, important. 
(c) Animi eorum qui à culti provinciae longissimé absunt minime 
effeminantur. (4) Ab eis quorum provinciam flümen dividit merca- 
tores absunt. 

2. (a) Provincia fortissimorum ad Galliam pertinet. (4) Hi fortes 
ad Gallos saepe commeant. (c) Belgae et Celtae partes Galliae in- 
colunt. (4) Horum omnium quos Gallos mercatores appellant for- 


tissimi sunt Belgae. (^) Mercatorés qui ea, quae animos effeminant, 


important provinciam incolunt. 

3. (a) The-merchants very seldom bring-in those-things which 
tend to weaken minds. (6) Those-things which tend to weaken 
minds are very-far distant from the-Belgians. (c) The-minds of- 
those who are-called Celts are-weakened. (d) The-Aquitaniaus are- 
separated from-our proviuce. 

4. (a) The-Belgians differ from these in-civilization and refine- 
ment. (4) He often visits our province. (c) The Belgians are-dif- 
ferent from those who inhabit the-third (part) of-Gaul. (47) Those- 
things which merchants bring-in to the-Aquitanians are very seldom 
brought to these (men). 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The endings -a, -8, -t, -nt, -ntur. 2. Two uses of the end- 
ings -a, -ae, ds. 9. Active personal endings. 4. Passive ending. 
5. Three classes of verbs—a list of each from the text thus far.! 
6. List of prons. in first, seven lessons. 7. Forms of the relative 


| pronoun found in the text, with their meanings; cf. E. G. 24. 


1 The instructor should aid the pupil in this work of classifying his material. 


| Blank-books, properly ruled, should be used. It is of extreme importance that, 
|! from the beginning, the pupil should be encouraged to do independent work. 


90 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


8. The forms of the pron. of which the accus. plur. masc, is eds. 
9. Three accus. plur. endings. 10. The meaning of enclitie. 11. A 
declarative Lat. sentence in a single word — how can it be? Why 
not in Eng.? 12. Preps. used thus far. 


LESSON VIII. 


l. TEXT. 


Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod 
a cultü atque hümànitate provinciae longissimé absunt, 
minimeque ad eos mercatores saepe commeant, atque 
ea, quae ad effeminandos animos pertinent, important, 
pro-xi-mi-que sunt Ger-ma-nis, qui trans Rhénum 

and-nearest they-are to-the-Germans, who across the-Ehine 
in-co-lunt, qui-bus-cum con-ti-nen-ter bellum gerunt. 

dwell, with-whom continually war they-wage. 


2. NOTES. 


1. pro-xi-mi-que, and-nearest or next : (a) for use of the enclitie 
-que, cf. miniméque VII; (4) case, number, gender, of proximi? 
(c) What part of speech is it, and with what does it agree ? Cf. VI. 
nN. 2, b; (d) an irregular superlative like minima ; (4) note that, 
in the words divided into syllables, in this and preceding lessons, as 
many consonants are united with a following vowel or diphthong as 
can be pronounced with it; but cf. foot-note on prop-ter.ea VI.! 
(f) How'does the number of vowels or diphthongs compare with the 
number of syllables ? 


1 Tt is proper to add that it is doubtful whether the method of syllabication here 
adopted fairly represents Roman pronunciation. It is given here because it is sub- 
stantially the method given in the school grammars under ** Roman pronunciation," 
and some definite method was necessary. The teacher will find a different method 
advocated in Roby’s Lat. Gram., Book I., Preface and Chap. XI. 


LESSON VIII. 91 


2. Germànis, /o-/he- Germans : (a) the clause in which this word 
stands may be translated without the prep. £o, thus, they are nearest 
the Germans ; (b) the word Germànis is in the dative case with the 
adj. proximi, just as Germanus 1s in the dative case with the adj. wears 
est in the translation given under a, cf. E. G. 62, 2; (c) note that 
the ending is -13 and is the same as that of the abl. plur.; cf. ab 
Aquitanis V.; the nom. plur. is Germani; (7) nouns aud adjs. 
with nom. sing. ending -a (usually fem.) also have the dat. and abl. 
plur. in 1s ; cf. Belgis V. 

3. trans Rhénum, across the Rhine ; the prep. trans is followed 
by the accus. What other preps. take the same case ? 

4. quibus-cum, with whom ; two words, quibus and cum: (a) 
cum, prep. with abl.; cf. à or ab V.; (4) joined to the end of quibus 
and some other pronouns, though with other parts of speech it has 
the position of 4 or ab; (c) quibus is abl. plur. masc. from nom. 
plur. qui, though we should have expected quis; cf. Aquitani II, 
Aquitanis V. (d) What is the ending? Cf. légibus IV.; the nom. 
plur. of légibus is légés, and the abls. plur. of partés and omnés are 
partibus and omnibus ; (e) cf. the gender, number, and case, of all 
the prons. met thus far in the text, with the gender, number, and 
case, of their antecedents. "What do you find to be true as to the 
gender and number? What as to case? Cf. the Eng. rule, E. G., 
65. 

5. bellum, war ; cf. bellicose : (7) What case and why? (4) What 
ending has it in common with the accus. Rhénum 3? This is the 
ending of the accus. sing. masc. and neuter; cf. the accus. sing. fem. 


ending -am in aliam II. 

6. gerunt, (hey carry on, wage; cf. belligerent, an adj. applied to 
those waging war: (a) What is the active sing. and the passive plur. 
of this same tense? Cf, VII. N. 10 and Obss, 3, 4. (2) In what re- 
spect does it agree with its subject ? Answer the same question 
in regard to est L, appellantur IIL, dividit V. ; cf. E. G., 31, 1 
and 2. 


1 The pupil should constantly refer to the connected text on p. 363. 


02 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The Lat. has a dative case similar in use to the Eng. dative. 

2. The dative plur. ending of masc. nouus like Galli is -is, like 
he ablative. 

3. The ending -um is that of the accus. sing. masc. and neut, ; -am 
that of the accus. sing. feminine. 

4. The ending -ibus is found in the abl. plur. of nouus and adjs. 
declined like omnis. 

9. The preps. in, inter, ad, tràns, take the accus. ; à or ab, and 
cum, the ablative. 

5. With the abl. of qui, who, cum is attached to the end of the 
word. 

4. In dividing words into syllables, as many consonants are united 
with a following vowel or diphthong as can be pronounced with it, 
except when such a division would obscure the composition of a com- 
pound word. 

8. Every Latiu word has as many syllables as it has vowels and. 
diphthongs. 

9. A pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and number, 
but not in case. 

10. A verb agrees with its subject in number.! 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. bellum, accus. sing. neut., war. | 5. gerit, he carries on, wages. 


2. continenter, continually. 6. proximi, nom. plur. masc., | 
3. cum, preposition with abl. nearest, next. 
with. 7. Rhénum, accus. sing. masc, 
4. Germàni, nom. plur. masc., the Rhine; see map. | 
the Germans; see map. 8. tráns, prep. with accus., across. | 


1 [t also agrees in person, but the pupil has not observed this, since all the verbs | 
of the text thus far have been in the third person. 


LESSON VIII. 93 


5. EXERCISES. 


(1) Translate. (2) Explain the agreement of every adjective, pronoun, and 
verb. 


1. (a) Belgae fortissimi sunt propterea quod proximi sunt Germa- 
nis, quibuscum continenter bellum gerunt. (4) Galli cum Germanis 
continenter bellum gerunt. (c) Belgae proximi eis qui trans Rhenum 
iucolunt. (4) Cum Gailis proximis bellum gerit. 

2. (a) Belgae ab eis, quos Aquitanos appellant, absunt. (2) Gallia 
est divisa iu partés trés, quàrum tna Aquitania est. (c) Ea quae ad 
effeminandós animós pertinent proxima sunt Aquitanis. (d) Hae 
leges et linguae ab Aquitàuis minimé absunt. (¢) Institüta (cf. ea), 
quae trans Sequanam sunt, importat. (/) Flümen 4 Belgis Gallos 
dividit. 

3. (a) The-Belgians and the-Celts inhabit Gaul. (5) Parts of 
the-divided province are-inhabited. (c) One (part) is nearest the- 
Celts. (47) They-bring-in those-things across the-province. 

4. (a) The-river separates all the-bravest (men) from the-mer- 
chants. (4) The-merchants are-separated from all the-bravest (men). 
(c) He goes-back-and-forth across the-Matrona. (4) All the-Aqui- 
tanians, to whom merchants resort, are next to-the-Celts. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The dative case. 2. The endings -um, -am, -is, -ibus. 
3. Forms of the relative pron. with endings like those of lingua or 
Galli. 4. The peculiar forms quae and quibus. 5. Cases in Eng. 
and in Lat. 6. Position of cum. 7. Preps. with accus. 8. With 
abl 9. Number of syllables in a Lat. word. 10. Agreement of 
pron. 11. Of verb. 12. Of adj.. 13. Eng. derivatives from words 
in this Lesson. j 


94 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON IX. 


REVIEW. 
Lessons I.-VIII. 


This Lesson is a review of all that has preceded 1t. Nothing is so necessary, in 
the acquisition of a language, as constant and thorough review. One should carry 
forward with him at least nine-tenths of what he has learned. The preceding les- 
sons contain in all sixty different words, together with a large number of grammat- 
ical forms. Many of the most important principles of the language have been 
considered. Others might have been brought forward, but it has been deemed wise 
to hold them in reserve. It is understood that the student will in no case proceed 
to take up Lesson X. until this Lesson, with all that it includes, is learned. Let 
every word, every phrase, every principle, be mastered absolutely. 


l. TEXT. 


Casar’s ‘*Gatitic War,” Book I, Chapter 1, as far as gerunt. 


In the review of the text which has thus far been taken, pursue the 
following order of work : — 

1. Pronounce aloud the Lat. text repeatedly. 

2. With only the word for word Eng. parallel (p. 380) before the 
eye, pronounce the Lat., until this can be done rapidly and without 


hesitation.! Do the same thing with the free translation (p. 386) 


before the eye. 
3. With only the Eng. parallel before the eye, write out the Lat. ; 
compare the result with the printed Lat. text ; note and correct mistakes. 
4. Write out, under the following heads, a grammatical analysis 


of the material of the text thus far studied: (1) noun, adjective, | 


and pronominal forms, classifying separately in both sing. and | 
plur, (v) nom. forms, (4) gen. forms, (c) dat. forms, (d) accus. | 
forms, (e) abl. forms; (2) verb forms, classifving separately in | 


both sing. and plur., (4) act. forms, (4) pass. forms.? 


1 Tf the teacher has followed ** Suggestion 2 " under ** Suggestions to Teachers ” 


this has already been done in the class at least eight times. 
? Great importance should be attached to this analysis of the text by the pupil. 
It will be found invaluable in sharpening observation and in giving a mastery of forms, 


LESSON IX. 95 


5. Go through the text and select those forms and phrases which, 
perhaps, still remain unmastered. Read again the notes given upon 


them in previous lessons. Do not leave them before they have been 


conquered. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. Pronunciation. — The long sound of a vowel is indicated by 
the mark ^ over it, the short sound by the mark "v . 


à — a in father. 6 =o in note. 
é — ey in they. ü = 00 in moon. 
1 = in machine. ae — i in kite. 


The short sounds differ from the long only in being less prolonged 
in pronunciation. 

Most of the consonants have their Eng. sounds, but t has always 
the sound of £ in Zin, never that of sh ; s always has the proper hissing 
sound of Eng. s, never that of z; c and g are always hard, as c and g 
in can and go, never soft like s andj; bs has the sound of ps; v 
has the sound of  ; qu has the sound of £c, and gu that of gz. 

Every Lat. word has as many syllables as it has vowels and diph- 
thongs. In words of two syllables the accent. 1s always on the first ; 
in words of more than two syllables the penult is accented if it has 
a long vowel or a diphthong, or if its vowel is followed by two con- 
sonants before the next vowel is reached; all other words of more 
than two syllables are accented on the antepenult. 

2. Inflection (see E. G. 22, 2). - 


Nouns, ADJECTIVES, AND PRONOUNS. 


Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. 


Nom. lingua lingu-ae Gall-i omn-is omn-és 
Gen.  lingu.ae lingu-ürum ——— Gall-6rum omn-ium 
Dat. ^ lingu-ae lingu-is | . Gallis —— 

Accus. lingu-am lingu-às | Gall.um Gallos ———  omn-és 
Abl.  lingu-à  lingu-is Gallis . . ——. omnibus 


96 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


We have also met the ending -a as an accus. plur. neut., and -8 as 
‘an ending of the adverb. 


VERBS. 
Active. 

Sing. appell-a-t pertin-e-t divid-i-t 
Plur. appell-a-nt pertin-e-nt divid-u.nt 
Passive. 

Sing. 
Plur. appell-a-ntur (pertin.e-ntur) ^ divid-u-ntur 


OBSERVATIONS ON THE ABOVE. 


Note that the declension of lingua above is complete. A vocative 
case, the same in use as the Eug. vocative (see E. G. 21, 4), is very 
rarely found in Caesar. Its form, as in Eng., is the same as the 
nom., with an exception which will be learned later. 

The dat. sing. and the dat. plur., of a noun with nom. sing. in -a 
has not yet been used, but the former is the same as the gen. sing., 
and the latter the same as the abl. plural. The accus. plur. ending, 
which has not yet been used, differs from the ending of Gall.os in 
the same respect that the ending of lingu-arum differs from that of 
Gall-orum. 

Note that the form lingua is found in all the cases except the dat. 


and abl. plural. Here the absence of a is only apparent, for linguis | 


is really a contracted form for lingua-is. A part of a word which, 
like lingua, remains unchanged throughout its inflection, is called 
its STEM. Nouns like lingua are often called A nouns, and belong 
to what is called the rrrst declension. 

3. Use of cases.— The uses of the cases thus far met with are 
the same as in Eng., with these exceptions: (4) the abl. case, not 
found in Eng., is sometimes translated by the Eng. prep. i», and is 
used after the preps. à or ab, and cum; (2) the genitive has a par- 
titive as well as a possessive use. 

4. Agreement. — The four rules of agreement relating to the 
appositive, verb, pron., and adj. are the same as in Eng., except 


1 This verb, being intransitive, is never found in the passive. 


LESSON IX. 97 


that the adj. agrees with its noun or pronoun in gender, number, 
sand case; cf. E. G. 25. | | 

5. Translation. — In translating, two or more Eng. words may 
represent but one word of the Latin. Thus an Eng. prep. with its 
case may be required to represent the Lat. zen. or abl, the Eng. 
article with its nouu to represent a Lat. noun, and an Eng. personal 
pron. with a verb or a verb phrase to represent a single verb form 
in Latin.! 

On the other hand, but one Eng. word may be represented by two 
or more in Lat.; thus, mercátórés ad eós commeant may be 
translated, merchants visit them. 

6. Gender. — In Lat. all names of males are masc., all names of 
females fem. ; the gender of other words, with a few apparent ex- 
ceptions to be noticed later, is determined by their endings. All 
words in Cesar having the nom. sing. ending -a are fem. (except 
names of males), and are declined like lingua. All nouns having 
the nom. plur. ending -iare masc., and are declined like Galli. 
Cf. gender in Eng., E. G. 42. 

7. Peculiarities of certain words. — (2) The prep. cum is 
appended to certain pronominal forms, but with other words has 
the usual position of preps.; (4) -que is always appended to some 
other word ; (c) à stands before words beginning with a consonant, 
ab before those beginning with a vowel. 


3. WORD REVIEW. 


Pupils should go very rapidly through the following lists, translating, and giving 
the case, number, and, so far as the lessons provide for it, the gender, of all nouns, 
prons., and adjectives. 


Vers Forms. 


1. absunt 5. dividit 8. est 11. incolunt 
2.appellantur 6. divisa —. 9. gerunt 12. pertinent 
3. commeant 7. effeminandos 10. important 13. sunt 

4. differunt 


l The hyphen, which has reminded the pupil of this fact, will be generally 
omitted in the Eng.-Lat. Exercises hereafter. 


7 


98 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


Noun, PRONOMINAL, AND ADJECTIVE Fors. 


l. aliam 13. 
9. animos 14. 
3. Aquitant 15. 
4. Aquitàuts 16. 
5. Belgae 17. 
6. Belgis 15: 
7. bellum 19. 
8. Celtae 20. 
9. cultü 21. 
10. divisa 22. 
ll. ea Doe 


12. effeminandos 24. 


ADVERBS. 


. continenter 
. longissime 
minimé 

. propterea 
. saepe 


om 0 t2 r3 


eds 25. ipsorum 36. proximi - 
flümen 26. legibus 37. quae 
fortissimi 27. lingua 38. quarum 
Galli 28. Matrona 39. qui 
Gallia 29. mercatores 40. quibus 
Gallos 30. nostra 41. Rhenum 
Garumna 31. omnes 42. se 
Germàuis 32. omnis 43. Sequana 
hi 33. omnium 44. tertiam 
horum 94. partes 45. tres 
hümanitàte 35. provinciae 46. ünam 
Institütis 
PREPOSITIONS. CONJUNCTIONS. 

den l. atque 

2. ab 9. et 

28d 9. -que 

4. cum 4. quod 

5. mn 

6. inter 

7. trans 


= 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. Conversation. — Qui Galliam incolunt ? 
Belgae et Celtae et Aquitani Galliam incolunt. 
Qui Gallorum fortissimi sunt ? 
Belgae Gallorum fortissimi sunt. 
Cir (why) Belgae fortissimi sunt? | 
Proptereà quod provincia, à quà ea quae animos efféminant mer- | 
cátórés important, ab his longissime abest, atque proximi Germ@nis | 


fortibus sunt. 


Quorum est provincia? 


j 


LESSON IX. 99 


Nostra est provincia. 

Quorum lingua Celtae, qui tràns Garumnam incolunt, Galli 
appellantur? 

Nostra lingua Galli appellantur. 

Quorum linguam mercatores important ? 

Nostram linguam important. 

Quorum est ** nostra" lingua? 

Romanorum est. : 


2. For translation into Latin. — There are three parts of Gaul 
into which the Garumna and the Seine divide it. These parts are 
inhabited by the Belgians, the Celts, and the Aquitanians, whose 
languages and laws differ from one another. "The Seine river is be- 
tween the Belgians and the Celts, the Garumna between the Celts 
aud the Aquitanians. A Roman province is next to the Aquitanians, 
and very far distant from the Belgians. Merchants from the prov- 
ince often visit the nearest Gauls and weaken their minds. Cesar 
calls the Belgians the bravest of all the Gauls. "These Belgians 
stretch out to the Rhine, and are next to the Germans, with whom 
they wage war most bravely. 'The Germans differ in refinement 
from the Gauls who live nearest the province. 


1 Note the case and gender required for this word. The pron., of which we 
have had the forms e-a, ueut. aud e-Os masc., is found in all genders, 


GALLIC HELMETS OF LEATHER. 


100 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON X. 


l. TEXT. 


Qua dé causa  Hel-ve-tii! quoque reliquo: 
Which from cause  the-Helvetiaus also the-rest-of 


Gallos virtüte praecedunt. 
the-Gauls in-valor —— surpass. 


2. NOTES. 


l. quà dé causa, for this reason: (a) the diphthong au (in 
causa) is pronounced like ow in how; (6) quà is here a pronominal 
adj. agreeing with causa; (c) for its Ist decl. form, cf. quarum II. 
and IX. 2, 2; (4) note that the Lat. relative shows difference in gender 
by its endings; cf. qui, nom. plur. masc., VIIL, and quae, nom. 
plur. neut, VII. How far is this so in Eng.? (e) note that the 
relative quà stands in the principal clause at the beginning of the sen- 
tence, and is translated by the demonstrative pron. (see E. G., 24, 1) 
this. (f) Give the preps. used with the abl. so far as you now know 
them. 

2. reliquos Gallos, the-rest-of the-Gauls; cf. relique, relic: 
(4) reliquos is an adj. agreeing with Gallos; (^) note its peculiar 
translation ; of in this translation is part of the meaning of the adj. 
reliquos, and not the translation of a genitive. 

3. virtüte, ix-valor: (7) an abl. sing.; cf. himanitate VI.; 
(5) cf. its translation and use with those of lingua IV.; ablatives 
which, like lingua and virtüte, limit the verb by telling in what 
respect its action is true, are called abls. of RESPECT. 


1 Syilabieation in the “ Text " will hereafter be discontinued except in special 
cases. What difference in spelling between Helv6-ti-I and other nouns in -1 like 
Galli and Germáni does it here make prominent ? Each pupil for himself will 
divide words into syllables according to the rules already learned. 


LESSON X. 101 


4. praecédunt, they go before, surpass: (a) compounded of prae, 

- before, and cedunt, they go; cf. absunt VI. N, 9. (4) What is its 

subject and what its object ? How do you know subject and object 

by their endings ? Could Helvétii be the subject if it came AFTER 
Gallos? Cf. ünam incolunt Belgae II. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The relative, like which aud what in Eng., is sometimes an adj. 

2. The relative has different forms for each of the three Latin 
genders. 

93. The relative is not confined to subordinate clauses as it usually 
is in English ; it often stands in a principal clause at the beginning of 
a sentence, and must then be translated by the demonstrative or by 
the demonstrative with a connective. 

4. The preps. 4, ab, cum, and dé take the ablative. 

9. The ab]. without a prep. is used to show in what RESPECT a 
statement is true. 

6. The prep. of is not always to be translated by the genitive. 

1. The diphthong au is pronounced like ow in how. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. causa, cause, reason.? 4. praecédit, he goes before, sur- 
2. dé, prep. with abl., from, down passes. 
from, concerning, for. 5. quoque, conj., also. 
3. Helvétii, nom. plur. masc., | 6. reliqui, adj., nom. plur. masc., 
the Helvetiaus ; see map. the rest of. 
What nation now occupies | 7. virtüte, abl. sing. virtue, 
the territory formerly occu- valor. 


pied by the Helvetians ? 
1 The Lat. relative, like the Eng. (cf. E. G., 20, 5), is always equivalent to a 


demonstrative or personal pron. and a connective, but a connective at the beginning 
of an Eng. sentence is often useless or even misleading. The teacher may consult 
on this point, A. S. Hill's Rhetoric, pp. 116 and 117. 

? What is its gender? See IX. 2, 6. 


102 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline causa completely. (4) Decline Helvétii in all the 
cases you know. (c) Decline reliqués Gallos together in the plural. 
(d) Write all the forms you know of praecédunt. | 

2. (a) Belgae et Helvetii cum Germauis continenter bellum gerunt. 
(4) Belgae et Helvetii proximi Germanis sunt. (c) Reliqui Galli ab 
Helvetiis virtüte praeceduntur. (4) Helvetii reliquos Gallos cultu 
minimé praecedunt. 

3. (a) Provincia, quam mercatores incolunt, proxima Helvetiis est. 
(0) Mercatorés ad Belgas minime saepe commeant ; qua? dé causa 
Gallorum Belgae fortissimi sunt. (c) Aquitàni, ad quos mercatores 
saepissime commeant, à Belgis animis differunt. (7) Helvetii a re- 
liquis Celtis, a quibus virtüte differunt, minimé absunt. 

4. (a) The Helvetians are between the province and the Germans. 
(^) The river divides their province into parts. (c) These excel? 
the-rest-of the Belgians in bravery. (47) The Belgians are farthest 
distant from the civilization of the province. For this reason they excel 
the Celts in valor. (e) The province which they inhabit is ours. 

5. (a) The Germans, who are distant from the province, wage war — 
with the Helvetians. (4) Csesar wages war with those who surpass 
the Aquitanians in valor. (c) He brings in these-things to those 
with whom he dwells. (4) The bravest do not dwell nearest the — 
province from which the merchants bring in these-things. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Pronunciation of diphthongs ae and au. 2. All the forms of 
the relative yet discovered. 3. The classification of these forms by 
gender. 4. The uses of the relative. 5. The meaning of reliqui. 


1 How may qua be best translated here ? 

2 The pupil will use the word for which the meaning surpass is given in the 
vocabulary. It would be impossible to give all possible Eng. meanings in the 
vocabularies, and the pupil is expected to use his intelligence. What is the word 
for óravery just beyond ? 


LESSON XI. 103 


6. All the preps. yet used. 7. Peculiarities in use of two of them. 

. 8&. Eng. words related to Lat. words in this lesson. 9. Two uses of 
in the ablative. 10. Compounds of preps. in English and in Latin. 
ll. Variable position of object and subject in Latin. 


LESSON XI. 


JO DEOCT: 


Qua dé causa Helvétii quoque reliquos Gallos virtüte 


praecedunt, quod fere  co-ti-di-a-nis proe-liis cum 
| because almost (in) daily battles with 


Germanis contendunt. 
the-Germans  they-contend. 


2 NOTES. 


l. fere: (v) part of speech and ending? Cf. minimé VII. 
N. 1, a, (b) limits the adj. cotidiànis. 

9. proe-li-is, i; or by, battles: (a) diphthong oe — oi in coin; 
(4) for case, cf. institütis IV. and Aquitanis V.; (c) what differ- 
ence in the meaning of zz, used to translate proeliis, and the 2» used 
to translate Institütis IV.? 

3. cum Germánis: (4) note that cum here precedes its noun 
and is not attached to it; cf. quibuscum VIII. v. 4, 0. (b) What 
is its case ? What is the case of the same form Germanis in VIII.? 

4. contendunt: (a) What is the subject of this verb? (5) In 
what part of its clause does contendunt stand? What proportion of 
the verbs thus far used have the same position in their clauses as this 
verb?! (c) Note that the verb of which est and sunt are forms does 
not have the same position as the other verbs. 


1 Let the teacher see to it that the pupil gives a precise answer, secured by 
actual count of the verbs. - The connected text on p. 363 should be referred to, not 
the text at the head of each lesson. 


104 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The diphthong oe is pronounced like oi in coin. 

9. The prep. i is not always represented in Latiu by an abl. of 
respect. 

3. Lat. verbs, except the verb of which est and sunt are forms, 
have a marked tendency to stand last iu their clauses. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. contendit, he stretches vigor- | 3. fer, adv., almost. 
ously, strives, contends, | 4. proeliis, dat. or abl. plur., 
hastens. battles. 

2. cdtidiani, nom. plur. masc., 
daily. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Helvetii eum Germànis feré cotilianis proeliis contendunt. 
(5) Proximi sunt Germanis quibuscum fere cotidianis proelüs con- 
tendunt. (c) Minime cum Belgis Aquitàni proeliis contendunt. 
(d) Ad Rhénum à provincia ROmandrum Cesar contendit. 

2. Conversation. — Qua dé causa Helvétii reliquos Gallos vir- 
tüte praecedunt ? 

Quod. proximt Germanis sunt et cum his saepissime proeliis 
contendunt. 

Ubi (where) Germani incolunt? 

Trans Rhenum Germani incolunt. 

Mercátorés-ne! ad Germános commeant ? 

Minimé saepe mercatorés ad Germànos commeant. 

Germanine sunt fortes ? 

Fortissimi sunt Germani. 


1 ne, an enclitic like -que VIL, shows that a question is asked. It is not 
translated by any separate word. How is the question introduced in English ? 
Cf. E. G. 68, j and 5. 


LESSON XII. 105 


3. (7) The Germans are distant from the Romans. (6) The Ger- 

. maus contend with the Helvetians. (c) He contends with these. 

(4) The Germans are not weakened in courage (minds) by the 
merchants. 

4. (a) The Germans, Belgians, and Helvetians are brave. (2) They 
very seldom bring in those things which tend to weaken (their) 
minds. (c) A river divides the Gauls from the Germans. (d) The 
Gauls, whom the Germans surpass in valor, are divided into parts. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Pronunciation of the three diphthongs, ae, au, oe. 2. An 
ending of the adv. 3. Two uses of the adverb. 4. Different mean- 
ings of the prep. i». 5. Position of cum. 6. Two or more uses 
of -is, -ae, -6s, -a. 7. Position of verbs. 8. Accent of the words in 
this lesson. 


LESSON XII. 
1. TEXT. 


Quà dé causa Helvétii quoque reliquos Gallos virtüte 
praecedunt, quod fere cotidianis proeliis cum Germanis 
contendunt, cum aut suis finibus — eos 

when either from-their-own boundaries them 


prohibent, aut ipsi in eorum finibus bellum 
they-keep-away or themselves in their boundaries war 


gerunt. 
wage. 


2. NOTES. 


|... 1. cum, conj., when: (a) also written quum ; (4) not to be con- 
founded with the prep. cum ; cf. XI. 


106 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. suis, their or their own: (a) possessive adj. limiting finibus ; 
(5) cf. the corresponding reflexive sé (IV. N. 6) which always takes 
the place of a noun and has no adj. force. 

3. finibus, from boundaries ; cf. confines, finite: (a) for case, cf. 
légibus IV. and quibus VIII. N. 4, c and d; (4) the nom, sing. is 
finis, end, limit; cf. omnis I; (c) note that the case here denotes 
removal or separation, and is used with prohibent, they keep away ; 
(d) cf. ab Aquitanis V., à cultü VI., and note that the abl. of sep- 
aration is used sometimes with, and sometimes without, a preposition. 

4. prohibent: for form, cf. pertinent VII., and all the verb 
forms in IX. 2, 2 

5. aut: (a) for diphthong au, cf. causa X.; (5) note that aut . 
is repeated in this sentence. What difference in its translation do 
you note ? 

6. ipsi: cf. ipsorum III.; agrees with Helvetii, the subject of 
prohibent. 

4. eorum, of them, their; note that eórum and also eos, just 
before, refer to Germànis, and not to the subject of the clause, while 
suis in suis finibus refers to Helvetii, the subject of prohibent; 
note further that sé IV. refers to the subject of differunt, while eos 
and ea in VII. do not refer to the subject of the sentence in which 
they stand. 

8. in finibus, in boundaries ; note the meaning of the prep. in and 
the case used after it; cf. in partes I. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. With the accusative, the preposition in expresses motion toward 
a place and is translated 2»£o; with the ablative it expresses position 
in a place and is translated 2x. 

2. The form cum may be a conj. meaning when, as well as a prep. 
meaning with. 

3. The pron. of which the form sui is the nom. plur. masc., is an 
adj. (while referring to a noun or pron.), but the pron. of which sé is 
a form has no adj. force. 

4. The pronouns of which sui and sé are forms must always refer 


E | 
da. | 


LESSON XII. 107 


to the subject of some verb in the sentence, but the pron. having the 
gen. plur. form eórum, /Zeir, need not so refer. 

9. The abl. regularly expresses separation, sometimes with, some- 
times without, a preposition. | 

6. When the conj. aut, or, is repeated, the first aut is translated 
either. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. aut, conj, or; aut . . . aut, | 4. prohibet, he keeps out, keeps 


either . . . or. Aways 
2. cum, conj., when, since, al- | 5. sui, nom. plur. masc., his, her, 
though. its, their. 


9. finis, ax ed; finés, plur., 
boundaries, territory. 


5. EXERCISES. 


l. (a) Write all the forms you know of finibus. (4) Of ipsi. 
(c) Of prohibent. (47) Of gerunt. 

2. (a) Helvetit aut suis finibus Germànós prohibent, aut ipsi in 
 Germànorum finibus bellum gerunt. (6) Ad Rhénum finésque 
- Germànoórum Helvétii contendunt. (c) Finés eorum ad Rhénum 
pertinent. (d) Cum eis qui virtüte Aquitànos praecédunt bellum 
gerunt. 

3. (a) Fortissimi sunt Germani quos Helvétii prohibent, (5) Ger- 
mani, quorum fines trans Rhenum sunt, ab Helvétiis prohibentur. 
(c) Helvétii, quos Caesar fortissimos appellat, in suis finibus con- 
tendunt. (4) In eorum finés ea important. 

4. (a) The Romans keep the Germans from the territory of the 
Celts. (5) The Germans continually wage war in the nearest terri- 
tory. (c) The Aquitanians who are nearest the Garumna often visit 
the province. (d) In the province dwell the merchants by (à) whom 
the minds of the Gauls are weakened. 

5. The Helvetians, who live in Gaul, and the Germans, who live near- 
est them across the Rhine, contend continually. A river is between 
them. The Germans go back and forth to the Rhine and in almost 


108 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


daily battles contend with the Helvetians. The Helvetians, who sur- 
pass the-rest-of the Gauls in valor, keep them out. Often they wage 
war across the Rhine. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Two meanings of cum. 2. Two meanings of in. 3. Differ- 
ence between suis and sé. 4. Between suis and eórum. 65. Ante- 
cedent of each pron. in this Lesson.. 6. Uses of abl. in last three 
lessons. 7. A Lat. plur. translated like a sing. 8. Three classes of 
verbs. 9. Meaning of aut . . . aut. 10. Decleusion of nouns or 
adjs. with nom. sing. in -is. 


LESSON XIII. 


l. TEXT. 


Eorum üna pars, quam Gallos obtinere 
Of-these — * one part, which — the-Gauls to-hold 


dictum-est, initium capit a flimine Rhodano. 
it-has-been-said, beginning takes from the-river fthone. 


2. NOTES. 


3 


1. eorum : (a) possessive or partitive gen. ? Cf. VI. N. 3, c, d, e; 
(5) it refers to all the inhabitants of Gaul. 

2. pars: (a) nom. sing. fem. Of what is it the subject? (4) Cf. 
the nom. and accus. plur. form partés I. ; the abl. plur. is partibus, 
like finibus XII. (c) What nom. sing. ending have pars, and omnis 
I. in common ? 

3. quam: (a) for case, cf. ünam, aliam II.; it is the object of 
obtinére ; (4) for other fem. forms of the same pron., cf. qua X., 
quarum II. (c) What is its antec. and how do you know it? Cf. 
VIII. n. 4, e, and Obs. 9. 


LESSON XIII. 109 


4. obtinére, /o hold, occupy, possess, and NoT “to obtain," as 
many pupils translate it: (a) cf. pertine-nt VII., prohibe-nt XII., 
obtin&-re. Barring quantity, in what letter do the stems (ef. IX., 
2, 2) of all three forms end? (4) What is the ending of this form ? 
Judging from the translation, what form of the verb is this? (c) for 
the use of the preceding word Gallés, cf. E. G., 68, 6. 

. 9. dictum, said or having been said: cf. diction, dictation ; (a) to- 
gether with est, translated i¢ 2s having-been-said ; i. e. it has been said 
(0) nom. sing. neut. ; (c) a pass. participle; cf. divisa I. and E. G. 
41; (d) quam Gallés obtin&re dictum est, which it has been said 
the Gauls occupy ; (e) the Gallés here referred to are the Celtae III. 

6. capit ; cf. capture: (a) for ending, cf. dividit V. (6) What 
is its subject? Its object? 

7. à flümine Rhodano : (a) for case of flümine, cf. à Belgis V. ; 
(4) for case of Rhodano, cf. Garumna flümen V. N. 3. (c) What 
abl. sing. ending have flümine, hümánitàte VI., and virtüte X., 
in common? (4) flümine is a neut. ; its nom. siug. is flümen V. ; its 
accus. plur. is flümina, like the neut. accus. e-a VII. ; and its abl. plur. 
is flüminibus, like légibus IV. (^) What would be a better prep- 
osition than from in the free English translation ? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Noun and adjective endings: -s, nom. sing.; -e, abl. sing. 

2. Verb ending : -re, present active infinitive. 

3. In Latin as in English, the accus. may be used as the subject 
of an infinitive. 

4. Latin words do not always have the meaning of the English 
words which most nearly resemble them in form. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


| l. capit, he takes. 4. obtinet, he holds, occupies, 
2. dictum, neut., said or having possesses. 
been said. 5. Rhodano, abl. sing. masc. 
3. initium, accus, neut, a Óe- the Rhone; see map. 
ginning. 


110 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Una pars, ad quam Gallos commeàre dictum est, abest. 
(6) Alia pars, quam incolunt Aquitaui, à Garumna initium capit. 
(c) Tertia pars, quam Belgz obtinent, ad Rhénum pertinet. (7) Una 
Galli pars initium capit à flümine Rhodano. (e) Una in parte . 
continenter bellum gerit. 

2. Conversation. — A quibus ea importantur ? 

Ab Aquitanis, qui ad Garumnam pertinent, ea importantur. 

Quae flimina in Gallia sunt? 

Flümina quae in Gallia sunt Garumnam, Séquanam, Matronam, 
Rhodanum Caesar appellat. 

Omnés-né partés Galliae his flüminibus proximae sunt? 

Partes trés Galliae ab his flüminibus minime absunt. 

Aquitàni-ne ea quae animos efféminant important? 

Aquitànos in suds finés ea importare dictum est. 

3. (a) One part of Gaul stretches-out to the Helvetians. (6) The 
Garumna river divides the Gauls from the Aquitanians. (c) He 
hastens into the province. (4) He surpasses all these in valor. 

4. (a) Those-things which are-brought-in enervate the minds of 
the Gauls. (4) The Helvetians are-called the bravest of those who 
inhabit this territory. (c) The Belgians keep the Germans from their 
(i. e. the Belgian) territory. (4) He keeps the merchants from their 
province. (e) The third part begins at the river Garumna. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Abl. endings thus far. 2. Uses of the ablative. 3. Neut. nouns. 
4. Nom. endings. 5. Verb endings. 6. The translation of obtin- 
ére. 7. Of dictum est. 8. Of initium capit 4. 9. Fem. end- 
ings of the relative. 10. The accus., dat., and abl. plur., of eórum. 
11. Two perfect pass. participles. 12. Accent of the words in this 
Lesson. 13. English derivatives from words in this Lesson. 


LESSON XIV, 111 


LESSON XIV. 


l. TEXT. 


Eorum ina pars, quam Gallos obtinére dictum est, 
initium — capit a  flümine Rhodano; continetur 


at-is-bounded 
Garumna flümine, Oceano, finibus 
by-the-Garumna river, by-the-ocean, by-the-territory 
Belgarum. 
of-the-belgians, 


2. NOTES. 


1. continétur, it-is-held-together, it-is-bounded ; cf. Eng. continent, 
both noun and adj.: (a) for other compounds of the same verb, cf. 
per-tinent VIT. and ob-tinére XIII. (4) Judging from pertine-nt 
VIL, obtiné-re XIII., dividi-t V. and appella-ntur IIL, what is 
the ending of continétur and what is the meaning and use of this 
ending ? 

9. Garumnà, by (i. e. by means of) the Garumna : (a) note that 
the prep. expressed in the translation does not appear in the Latin ; 
cf. the meaning of lingua IIL, lingua IV., provinciae VI., finibus 
XIT.; (5) the abl. here expresses the means by which ** oze part is 
bounded”; cf. lingua III. and proeliis XI., which though translated 
by im are really examples of the same use of the ablative. 

3. Oceand: (a) for the form of this word, cf. Rhodano XIII. ; 
(2) for its use, cf. the preceding Garumna and the following finibus ; 
(c) position of accent and why ? 

4. Belgarum: note that this word though having a fem. ending 
is masc. because it is a name of males; cf. IIT. n. 4. 


112 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Verb endings : -t, he, she, or if, act.; -tur, he, she, or it, pass. 
-nt, they, * ; -ntur, they ef 
-re, pres. inf. ae 
2. An ending in Latin often expresses an idea which requires a 
preposition in English. 
3. Means or instrument is expressed by the abl. without a prep. 
4. Names of males are mase. and names of females are fem. in 
Latin as in English. The rules for gender by endings apply only to 


the names of things. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


1. continet, if holds together, | 2. Oceano, abl. sing. masc., the 
bounds. ocean. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Give all the forms you know of finibus. (/) Give all 
the plural forms of Belgarum. (c) Give five forms of obtinére. 
(d) Four of dividit. (e) Five of important. 

Explain the uses of the ablative in the following sentences : — 

9. (a) Provincia Germànos fortés prohibet. (4) Fines, à quibus 
flumen initium capit, ab Oceano absunt. (c) Eds qui his fines inco- 
lunt htimanitate praecedunt. (7) Provincia à Gallis flumine dividitur. 

3. (a) In parte finium quam pertinére ad Oceanum dictum est 
bellum gerunt. (4) Germàni cultü animos minime effeminant. 
(c) Fortissimi omnium qui Galliam incolunt flüminibus Matrona et 
Sequanà 4 reliquis Gallis dividuntur. (47) Tertia pars, quam Celtae 
obtinent, inter flümina est. 

4. (a) He bears these-things into the province. (4) (There) are 
merchants in the province. (c) The territory is divided into parts 
by law. (47) The Germans with whom he wages war possess this 
territory. (^) They are nearest the Helvetians; and-therefore (for 
which reason) they fight with them continually. 


LESSON XV. 1158 


5. (a) The river begins at their boundaries. (4) These are very 
far distant from the rivers which bound Gaul. (c) The Belgians who 


- are farthest distant from the province are bounded by the ocean. 


(d) Their miuds are kept from the refinement of the Aquitanians. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Five verb endings. 2. Four endings of the ablative. 3. Four 
uses of the ablative. 4. Likeness and difference of the abl. of means 
and abl. of respect. 5. Some compound words used thus far. 
6. The use of an ending in Latin where in Euglish we must use a 
separate word. 7. Why the abl. of means should be translated some- 
times by i. 8. A word plur. in form but sing. in meaning. 
9. Gender in Latin. 10. Likenesses and differences of the three 
classes of verbs. 


LESSON XV. 


A. TEXT: 


Eorum üna pars, quam Gallos obtinere dictum est, in- 
iium capit 4 flümine Rhodano; continétur Garumna 


flimine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum; attingit etiam 
at-reaches also’ 


ab Séquanis .et Helvétiis flimen 
on-the-side-of the-Sequanians and the-Helvetians  the-river 
Rhénum ; vergit ad sep-ten-tri-6-nés. 
Rhine ; it-slopes toward the-north. 
2. NOTES. 


1. attingit; for exact meaning, see Vocabulary below; for form, 


ef. dividit V., capit XIII, 
8 


114 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. ab; note the meaning, and observe that the Eng. idiom does. 
not allow a literal translation of the prep. here; cf. the free trausla- - 
tion of a iu XIII. 

3. Helvétiis; the object of ab like Séquanis; cf. E. G. 53, 1. 

4. flümen : (a) of the neut. gender: for another form, cf. flümine 
XIV. (4) What is the case of flümen here? What is the case of 
exactly the same form in V.? Cf. the neut. nom. dict-um and the 
neut, accus. initi-um XIII. Judging from these forms, what is true - 
of the accus. of neuters as compared with the nom. ? 

5. Rhénum ; for case, cf. V. N. 3; for ending, cf. VIII. N. 5. 

6. sep-ten-tri-6-nés : (a) for grammatical number and case, cf. 
partés [.; (4) for explanation of the sing. meaning for its plur. 
form, see Vocab. below. 


*. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Neuter nouns and adjs. have the same form in the nom. and 


accusative. 
2. In Latin as in English, two or more objects may follow the 


same preposition. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. attingit (ad and tangit), it Great Bear, “the Great 
touches upon, it reaches. Dipper,” which is situated 

v. et, and. in the northern part of the 

3. etiam, even, also. heavens, the north. 

4, septentrionés (also found in | 5. Séquani, nom. plur., the Se- 
the sing. with the same quanians ; see map. 
meaning), the seven stars, | 6. vergit, it slopes, verges, is sit- 
the constellation of the uated, | 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Una pars, à quà flümen initium capit, ad septentriones 
vergit. (4) Germani flümine Rheno continentur. (c) Flümina quae 


LESSON XV. 115 


_ Germ&nos attingunt inter sé differunt. (4) Tertia pars fluminibus 


continétur. (^) Bella ab Helvetiis geruntur. 
.. 9. Conversation. — Quorum in finibus bellum gerit ? 

Germanorum in finibus bellum gerit. 

Quod flümen est inter Gallos et Germànos ? 

Rhenus flumen est inter Gallos et Germünos. 

Quam in partem (direction) fines vergunt ? 

Fines quos obtinent ad septentriones vergunt. 

Flümina-ne Galliam continent ? 

Flümina tres partes Galliae continent. 

3. (a) One part of Gaul reaches the river Rhine. (2) The Ger- 
maus very seldom visit the province, (c) These surpass in valor 
those who dwell nearest the province. (4) He keeps the brave Ger- 
mans from their territory. (e) The Germans are kept out by the 
Helvetians. 

4. (a) The Belgians are the bravest of those who inhabit this 
territory. (4) The Germans very seldom bring in those things which 
weaken minds. (c) They keep out the merchants by whom these 
things are brought in. (4) For this reason they surpass all with 
whom they contend. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The nom. and accus. of neuter nouns. 2. The ending of these 
cases in the plur. 3. The list of neuter nouus and adjs. met thus 
far. 4. The composition and exact meaning of attingit. 5. The 
literal and the derived meaning of septentriones. 6. Different 
meanings of the prep. ab. 7. The endings -um and -a. 8. The 
syllabieation and accent of septentriones. 9. The geographical 
situation of the Celts. 


116 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XVI. 


l. TEXT. 
Belgae ab extremis Galliae finibus 
The-Belgians from  the-remotest of-Gaul boundaries 
oriuntur ; pertinent ad inferidrem partem 
take-their-rise ; they-extend — to the-lower part 
flüminis Rheni; spectant in septentrionem 
of-the-river Rhine ; they-look into the-north 
et orientem solem. | 
and —— the-rising sun. 
2. NOTES. 


l. Galliae; for case, cf. provinciae VI. x. 7. 

2. oriuntur; cf. orient and explain its meaning: (a) for form, cf. 
appellantur Í[I. and dividuntur; (4) note that, though this verb 
is pass. in form, it is act. in meaning ; (c) for best meaning of pre- 
ceding ab in connection with this verb, cf. initium capit à flümine | 
XIII. 

3. ad inferiorem partem: (7) What ending have the last two 
words in common? (4) Judging from the meaning, and from the 
use of ad in ad eds VII., what is the case and what is the number 
of these two words? . What, then, is an ending of this number and 
case? (c) Cf. partés [. and pars XIII. Judging from flümine 
XIII. aud finibus above, what are its abls. sing. and plur. ? (4) for 
use of ITuferiorem, cf. VI. N. 2, 3. | 

4. fliminis: (a) Judging from the meaning, what case and 
number is this? (6) What is the ending of this case? Cf. flümine 
XIII. and virtüte X.; (c) for gender, and nom. and accus, cf. 
flamen XV. x. 4.; (d) for nom. and accus. plur. flümina, cf. ea 


LESSON XVI. 117 


VII. n. 6. Cf. the masc. and fem. nom. and accus. plur. -és in par- 
tés I. and mercátorés VII. 

5. Rhéni: (a) in the gen. case. Why? It is of the masc. 
gender. (6) the ending is -1; cf. the accus. sing. ending -um in 
Rhénum VIII. What, then, are the gen. and accus. sing. of animós 
VIl.? (c) What other use has this ending? Cf. Galli III. 

6. orientem : (a) participle; cf. divisa I., dictum XIIL.; 
(4) from verb oriuntur 2; (c) for case ending and for nom. oriéns, 
cf. partem 3 and pars XIII. 

7. solem : (a) explain case and cf. XV. N. 3; (6) for meaning 
of prep. in before it, cf. XII. N. 8. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Sing. endings of masc. nouns: -i, gen. ; -um, accus. ; for plur. 
endings, see IX. 2, 2. 

2. Sing. endings of nouus declined like pars: -is, gen.; -em, 
accus. ; -e, ablative. 

3. Neuters differ from mascs, and fems. in two respects: (1) their 
nominatives and accusatives are always alike; (2) these cases in the 
plur. end in -a. 

4. Some verbs, passive in form, are active in meaning. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


1. extr&mi, nom. plur. masc., | 4. oriuntur, they rise, begin. 
extreme, remotest, the-end- | 5. solem, accus. sing. masc., 
of ; cf. reliqui, the-rest-of. the sun. 

| 8. Inferidrem, accus. sing., lower. | 6. spectat, zt looks, faces. 

3. oriens, adj., rising; oriens 
sol, the east. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Write all the forms you know of flümen; (4) pars; 
(c) sdlem; (d) animós ; (^) bellum; (/) Gallia; (7) spectant. 
2. (a) Belgae ab extremis Galliae finibus oriuntur. — (5) Belgae 


118 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


ad inferiorem partem fluminis Rhéni pertinent. (c) Belgae in septen- 
trionem et orientem solem spectant. (4) Fines Belgarum ad flümen 
Rhénum pertinent. (e) Pars finium Gallorum fiümine Rheno conti- 
netur. 

3. (a) Belgas in septentrionem et orientem solem spectare dictum 
est. (5) Cotidiànis proeliis cum Belgis contendit. (c) Bello Ger- 
mani Gallos praecedunt. (4) Suds fines dividunt. (^) Eorum 
finés capit. (^) Flümina 4 parte Galliae oriuntur. 

4. (a) The Belgians keep the Germans from their boundaries 
(6) One part of the river is in the province. (c) The Belgians 
touch-upon the part which the Celts occupy. (d) They often wage 
war. (e) The Belgians inhabit the most-remote territory. 

5. (a) The rest-of the territory is inhabited by the Belgians. 
(b) The wars which he wages are-different from those which the Bel- 
gians wage. (c) These merchants bring in refinement of mind. 
(d) These-things enervate the mind of the Gaul. (e) The beginning 
of the third part is next to the Belgians. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. New endings: -is, -em, -I. 2. Difference in use of -is and -is. 
3. Two uses of -is. 4. Two uses of -i. 5. Likenesses and differ- 
ences of -am, -um, -em. 6. Three gen. sing. endings. 7. Three 
gen. plur. endings. 8. Three accus. plur. endings. 9. Three nom. 
plur. endings. 10. Peculiarities of neuters. 11. Three instances of 
agreement of adjs. in this lesson. 12. Agreement of appositive in 
this Lesson. 13. Four different translations of 4 or ab, used thus far. 
14. Case with:ad. 15. With ab. 16. Cases with in. 17. Mean- 
ings of in. 18. Difference in meaning of orientem and oriuntur, 


LESSON XVII. 119 


LESSON XVII. 


l. TEXT. 


Aquitania a Garumna  flümine ad Pjyrénaeos 
Aquitania from the-Garumna — river to the-Pyrenean 


montes et eam partem Oceani quae est ad 
mountains and that part of-the-ocean which is near 


Hispaniam pertinet ; spectat inter occasum solis 
Spain extends ; — i-looks between the-setting of-the-sun 


et septentriones. 
and the-north. 


2. NOTES. 


1. eam partem: (a) eam is here an adj. agreeing with partem ; 
for another pronominal adj. cf. qua X ; (4) for ending, cf. quam 
XIII. ; (c) for other forms of the same pronoun, cf. eós and ea VII., 
eorum XII. (7) By whit preposition is partem governed ? 

9. Oceani; for form, cf. Rhéni XVI. 

3. quae: (a) nom. sing. fem. (irregular ending). (6) Why may 
a masc. or fem. pron. in Lat. be translated by which or it? Cf. IX. 
2, 6, aud E. G. 42. (c) What is here the antecedent of quae, and 
how do you know it? Cf. VIIL., N. 4, e, and E. G. 65; (7) the same 
form quae is a neuter plur. in VII. ; cf. also quárum II., qui III., 
quibus VIII., quà X., and quam XIII. 

4. ad; note the meaning and cf. it with the meaning of the same 
prep. elsewhere. 

9. inter; notethe meaning and cf. with its meaning in IV. 

6. solis: (a) for case and ending, cf. flüminis XVI.; (4) pos- 
sessive or partitive gen. ? Cf. VI. N. 3; (c) cf. the grammatical 
relation of the two words in the phrase occásum solis, the west, 
with that of the words in orientem solem, the east, XVI. 


120 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER, 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The form quae may be either the nom. sing. fem., or the nom. 
or accus. plur. neuter of the relative pronoun. 

2. The prep. ad may mean zear as well as £o; the prep. inter 
either between or among. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


1. Aquitània,  4quitania, the | 4. occásum, accus. sing. masc., 


country of the 4qgwitaui- a falling, setting ; occasum 
ans; see map. solis, the west. . 
2. Hispania, Spain. 5. Pyrénaei, adj, nom. plur. 
3. mons, masc. (declined like masc. Pyrenean, of the 
pars), a mountain. Pyrenees. 


5. EXERCISES. 


Give the gender, number, case, and antecedent of every pronoun. 


1. (a) Aquitània à Garumna flümine ad Pyrénaeos montés pertinef. - 
(4) Aquitània ad eam partem Oceani quae est ad Hispaniam pertinet. 
(c) Aquitània inter occásum solis et septentriones spectat. (7) Py- 
rénaei montes sunt Aquitanis proximi. (^) Mercatdrés ad eds, qui | 
Hispaniam incolunt, commeant. 

2. (a) Hi fiués ab oriente sole ad occásum solis pertinent. 
(^) Finés quibus proximi suut ad septentriones vergunt. (c) Pars 
ad quam mercatores commeant Romanis proxima est, (7) Hi omnes 
montibus et flümine continentur. (¢) Ea flümina à montibus oriuntur. 

3. (a) Aquitania is bounded by the Garumna river and the ocean. 
(4) One part of the river is near Spain. (c) These mountains are 
nearest their boundaries. (4) The rivers which extend to the west 
are the Garumna and the Seine. (e) They visit Spain, which is near 
Aquitania. 

4, (a) The Aquitanians inhabit Aquitania. (4) That part of Aqui- 
tania extends to the ocean. (c) The Pyrenees mountains are between 


LESSON XVIII. 121 


Aquitania and Spain. (7) The Aquitanians and the Belgians, whose 
boundaries extend to the Rhine, differ from each other in refinement. 
- (e) These inhabit three parts, of which one is Aquitania. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Different forms of the pron. eds. 2. Of the pron. qui. 3. The 
form quae. 4. Difference between English aud Latin gender. 
5. Two meanings of ad. 6. Difference in meaning of ad and 
proximi. 7. Two meanings of inter. 8. Three Latin words or 
phrases for points of the compass. 9. Syllables of Aquitania, 
Pyrénaeds, Oceani, septentriónés. 10. The geographical boun- 
daries of the three parts of Gaul. 


LESSON XVIII. 


REVIEW. 
Lessons X.-X VII. 


Before taking up this Lesson read once more the note at the head of Lesson IX. 


l. TEXT. 


Casar’s *Garnrc War,” Book I., Chapter 1. 


Note that this review of the text includes the whole first chapter, 
and hence includes the text of the last review. 
- Follow strictly all the directions given under ** Text” in Lesson IX. 


| 2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. Pronunciation. — The diphthong au is pronounced like ow 7 
| oe, like oi. 


122 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 
2. Inflection. — For the first decl. complete, see IX. 2, 2. 
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. | Plur. 
Nom. Gall-i omn.is omn-és par-s_ part-és 
Gen. Galli Gall-órum omn-is omn-i-um partis part-i-um 
Dat. Gall-is 
Accus, Gall-um Gall-6s omn-em omn-és part-em part-és 
Abl. Gall-is omn-ibus part.e  part-ibus 
NEUTERS. 
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. 
Nom. bell-um bell-a flünen flümin-a 
Gen. flümin-is 
Dat. 
Accus. bellum bell-a flümen flümin-a 
Abl. bell-is flümin-e flimin-ibus 
VERBS. 
Active. 
Sing. appell-a-t prohib-e-t divid-i-t 
Plur. appell-a-nt prohib-e-nt divid-u-nt 
Inf. appell-d-re prohib-é-re 
Passive. 
Sing. appell-à-tur prohib-é-tur divid-i-tur 
Plur. appell-a-ntur prohib-e-ntur divid-u-ntur 


Under what case are most of the blanks in the above paradigms i| 
How many times does this case occur in the text of Chapter 1? | 


All nouns and adjs. with nom. plur. -i are declined like Galli ; 
ad]s. with nom. sing. -is like omnis; 
those in -men, like flümen ; and all nouns and adjs. in -um| 


pars ; 


like bellum. | 
Galli and bellum are of the second declension ; omnis, pars, anc 
flümen, of the third declension. 


al 


all nouns in -rs and -ns, lik] 


j 
] 


LESSON XVIII. 123 


3. Uses of Cases. — The accusative may be used as the subject 
of an infinitive. 

The abl. is, in this chapter, used in the following ways: (a) with 
the preps. à or ab, cum, dé, and in ; (^) without a prep. to express 
che means or instrument; (c) without a prep. to express that in 
respect to which a thing is true; (d) sometimes with, sometimes 
without, a prep., to express separation. 

4. Translation. — Lat. words are not always well translated by 
their Eug. derivatives. | 

The Lat. often expresses by a case ending what the Eng. must 
employ a prep. to express. 

The prep. of is not always to be translated by a genitive; it is 
sometimes part of the meaning of an adjective. The Eng. prep. iz 
may be represented by an abl. of respect, an abl. of means, or by the 
Lat. prep. in. 

The conj. aut, when repeated, is translated either . . . or. 

5. Gender. — All neuters have the nom. and accus.-alike ; in the 
plur. these cases end in -a. 

6. Pronouns. — The forms of which the noms. plur. are sui, 
masc., suae, fem., sua, neut., are always pronominal adjs., while sé 
is never an adjective. Sui, suae, sua, and sé always refer to some 
subject ; but the pron. of which the gen. plur. is eorum need not refer 
to a subject. 

The relative pron. has different forms for all three genders. It 
may be used at the beginning of principal clauses where the Eng. uses 
a demonstrative. The rel. form quae may be either a nom. sing. 
fem., or a nom. or accus. plur. neuter. 

7. Prepositions. — Two or more objects may follow one prepo- 
sition. The form cum may be a con‘unction as well as a preposition. 

With the abl. the prep. in means iz; with the accus. it means ito. 
The prep. ad means zear as well as £o; the prep. inter, Jetween as 
well as among. 

8. Verbs. — Verbs (except est, sunt) have a tendency to stand 
last in their clauses. 

. Some verbs are pass. in form but act. in meaning. 


124 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. | 


3. WORD REVIEW. 


Follow the directions given under * Word Review,” in IX. 
Review once more the words in IX. 
The last eight lessons contain the following new words: 


Vers Forms. 


1. attingit 5. obtinére 8. prohibent 
2. capit 6. oriuntur 9. spectant 
3. contendunt 7. praecedunt 10. vergit 

4. continetur 


Noun, PRONOMINAL, AND ADJECTIVE FoRus. 


1st Decl. 2nd Decl. 3d Decl. Unclassified. 
1. Aquitània 1. cotidianis 1. finibus occasum 
2. causa 2. dictum 2. inferidrem 
3. Hispaniam 3. extrémis 3. montes 
4. Helvetiis 4. septentriones | 
5. initium 5. solem 
6. Oceano 6. virtüte | 


7. proeliis 
8. Pyrenaeos 
9. reliquos | 


10. Rhodano 
11. Séquanis ; 
19. suis 
ADVERB. PREPOSITION. — CONJUNCTIONS, 
fere dé l. aut 
2. cum 
3. et 
4. etiam 
5. quoque 


LESSON XVIII. 125 


4. EXERCISES. 


The teacher should be particular to see that the pupil understands the subiect- 
| matter. ‘The following exercises will be found a help to this end. 


1. Conversation. — À quibus trés partés incoluntur? 
Ab Aquitanis et Celtis et Belgis incoluntur. 

Qui cum Germanis bellum gerunt ? 

Belgae et Helvetii cum Germànis bellum gerunt. 

Cir Helvetii et Belgae cum Germanis bellum gerunt ? 
Quod Germanis proximi sunt et fortissimi. 

Quorum in finibus Helvetii bellum gerunt ? 

|. Germanorum in finibus et in suis finibus bellum gerunt. 
Ubi (where) sunt P¥rénaei montés ? 

Ad Hispaniam Pyrenaei montes sunt. 


Answer the following questions in Latin. 


Qua dé causà Helvetii reliquos Gallos virtüte praecédunt ? 
Quibus à finibus Belgae oriuntur? 

Quibus flüminibus tertia pars continetur? 

Quà à parte provincia longissime abest ? 

Quae partes flimen Rhénum attingunt ? 

Quam partem Helvetii incolunt ? 


— 


2. For translation into Latin. — The Belgians, the Celts, and 
‘the Aquitanians occupy Gaul. A Roman province is also in Gaul. 
"The Aquitanians are next to Spain and to the province; the Celts 
occupy the territory which is between the Garumna and the Seine; 
the Belgians stretch into the north and touch the lower part of the . 
river Rhine. The Germans are next to the Gauls across the Rhine. 
With these the brave Belgians and Helvetians contend continually, 
| and often surpass them in valor. Merchants, who inhabit the prov- 
ince, visit the rest of the Gauls, and weaken their minds by the 
refinement? which they bring in. 


1 This word is fem. in Latin, 


126 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XIX. 


l. TEXT. 


Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus et ditissimus 
Among the-Helvetians far — the-highest-born and the-richest 


fuit Orgetorix. Is, M. Messala et M. 


was Orgetoriv. He, Marcus | Messala and Marcus 
Pisone consulibus, regni cupiditate 
Piso (being) consuls, of-the-royal-power — by-a-desire 
inductus coniürationem ! nobilitatis fecit. 
led a-conspiracy of-the-nobility made. 
2. NOTES. 


l. longé: (a) What shows that it is an adv.? Cf. VII. Nn. 1. 
(b) What is its superlative? Cf. VI. (c) What does it modify ? 

2. ditissimus: (a) nom. sing. masc., like the preceding nobilis- 
simus ; (^) for degree of comparison, cf. fortissimi and longissimé 
VI. What letters have all these forms in common ? 

3. fuit: (a) perfect tense of est I., equivalent, here, to a simple 
past; (6) cf. est L, sunt VI., and note the dissimilarity of form ; 
cf. the conjug. of the English verb de, E. G. 37. 

4. Orgetorix; nom. sing. masc. Why? What adjs. agree with 
it ? 

5. is: (a) What does the translation show as to case, number, and 
gender? (6) What is its antec.? (c) Cf? eos, ea VII., eórum 
XIII., eam XVII. 


1 The letter i (before ti) is here a consonant pronounced like y in year. 

2 The teacher, whenever this abbreviation is used, should see to it that pupils 
make the comparison directed. Here, the pupil should be able to state not only 
that the three forms belong to the same pron. is, but also the case, number and 
gender of each. 


LESSON XIX. _ 127 


6. M. Mess4la et M. Pisóne consulibus, freely translated, 2» the 
consulship of Marcus Messala and Marcus Piso; cf. the English 
phrase ix Polk’s administration: (a) M. in a Roman proper name 
always stands for some case of Marcus; cf. Eug. Mark; (0) the 
consul was a Roman magistrate something like an American presi- 
dent; the year of au eveut was indicated by naming the consuls of 
that year; (c) the Latin phrase at the head of this note is grammati- 
cally unconnected with the rest of the sentence. (4) In what case 
are all the words of this phrase ? | 

4. régni: (a) in the neuter gender and declined like bellum 
XVIII. 2, 2; (4) ihe case ending is the same as in mascs. of the 2d 
decl.; cf. Rh&ni XVI. 

8. inductus: (a) nom. sing. masc. (4) What ending has it ^n 
common with the noms. sing. masc. nobilissimus and ditissimus ? 
(c) With what does it agree? (d) How does the preceding noun 
cupiditate modify it?! Cf. Garumna XIV. (e) In what respect is 
it like divisa I. and dictum XIII? E. G. 20, 1. 

9. fécit: (a) a pf. ind. translated like a simple past; cf. fuit 
above; this same word is, however, in other sentences translated he 
. has made, and fuit is translated he has been. — (b) What is its object? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The ending -us is found in the nom, sing. masc. ; -i in the gen. 
sing. masc. and neuter. 
2. The Latin perfect tense is often translated like a simple past. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. apud, prep. with  accus., swearing together, a con- 
among. spiracy. 

2. coniürátiónem, accus. sing. 3. c6nsulés, consuls; cf. N. 6, b. 
fem. (from con and iüráàre, | 4. cupiditatem, accus. sing. 
to swear, take oath), a fem., desire, cupidity. 


1 Do not forget that the free translation, P 387, is a great help in understanding 
the connection of the Latin words. 


128 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 

5. ditissimus, richest. 19. nobilissimus, /ighest-born ; 

6. f&cit, he has made or done, he the positive is nobilis, 
made or did. high-born. 

7. fuit, he has been or was, cf. | 19. nobilitátem, accus. sing. 
est, sunt. fem., high-birth, the nobility. 

8. inductus, having been led | 14. Orgetorix, a Helvetian 


10. 


into, led, induced. 


. is, masc., that, that one, he ; 


cf. eós, eórum, ea, eam. 
Marcus, a Roman name. 


noble. 


. Pisonem, accus. sing. masc., 


Piso, a Roman name. 


. régnum, royal power, king- 


11. Messala, masc. by meaning, doin. 


a Roman name. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Giveall the cases you now know of inductus; (5) régnum ; 
(c) coniürationem ; (d) cupiditate. (e) Latin words for brave, very 
brave, very bravely. 

2. (a) Helvetiorum omnium longé nobilissimus est Orgetorix. 


(b) Orgetorix, Messalà et Pisone consulibus, coniurationem nobilitatis 


fecit. (c) Helvétii virtüte inducti bellum gerunt. (7) Marcus fuit 
consul. (e) Gallus hümánitatis cupiditate inductus ea, quae animos 


(f) Hi sunt consules nobiles. 

3. (a) Orgetorix Gallorum partem capit. (4) Pars nobilitatis ab 
Helvetio ditissimo indücitur. (c) Marcus consul appellatur. (d) Ani- 
mus Galli himànitàte animum Germani praecedit. (e) Mercatores, 
(f) Eos qui- 


effeminant, importat. 


quos ea importare dictum est, provinciam incolunt. 
buscum contendit virtüte praecedit. 

4. (a) Orgetorix is far the richest. (6) In the consulship of 
Marcus, a brave Helvetian made a conspiracy. (c) These (men), being 
influenced by a desire for (of) war, visit the province. — (47) These 
(things) are imported by the merchants. (¢) The province is next to 
the Aquitanians. (/) The province is very far distant from the Bel- 
gians. 

5. (a) The river Rhine, which separates the Gauls from the Ger 


LESSON XX. 129 


mans, rises in the mountains. (4) The highest-born (men) possess 
the kingdoms of Gaul. (c) Daily battles are waged in their boun- 
daries. (d) The mountains are divided into parts by rivers. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. The ending -us. 2. The different uses of the ending -x. 3. The 
ending -&. 4. Masc. nouns of the 2d decl. in the text thus far. } 
5. The form of the superlative. 6. The verb de in Latin. 7. The 
various forms of the pron. is. 8. Neuters in -um. 9. Agreement 
of adjs. in this Lesson. 10. The new tense in this Lesson. 11. Two 
translations of this tense. 12. The abl. of means in this Lesson. 
13. The literal and the free translation of Messalà et Pisone cón- 
sulibus. 14. The free Euglish translation of this Lesson. 15. Eng- 
lish derivatives from words in this Lesson. 


LESSON XX. 


Le TEXT. 


Is, M. Messala et M. Pisone consulibus, regni cupi- 


ditate inductus coniürationem nobilitatis fecit et 


and 
civitati persuasit, ut dé finibus suis cum 
the-citizens persuaded, that from boundaries thew with 


omnibus copiis exirent. 
all forces they-might-go-out. 


2. NOTES. 


1. civitati; for meaning, see Vocab.: (a) cf. himanitate VI., 
cupiditate, ndbilitatis XIX. What three letters immediately pre- 


1 Each pupil should write out a list of such nouns. 
9 


130 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


cede the case endings in each word? (4) All such words form the 
nom. by adding s to the stem (cf. IX. 2, 2) and dropping the t which 
precedes it ; thus civitat-, civitats, civitas ; cf. also partés I., pars 
XIII. What is the nom. of virtüte X.? (c) civitàáti is a dat. sing. 
What is its ending? This is the ending of the dat. sing. in all 3d 
decl. nouns. Where else do we find the same ending ? 

2. persuasit: (4) pf. ind. active; cf. fécit XIX. ; (/) used with 
the dat. civitati. 

3. ut, that, in-order-that, conj. ; introduces the verb exirent. 

4. suis. How does its ending show its agreement ? 

9. persuásit.. . ut... exirent, he-persuaded in-order-that they- 
might-go-out. (a) What would be a suitable free translation? See 
free translation, p. 387. (4) How does the form show the number of 
exirent?! (v) Note that the preceding suis refers to the subject of 
this verb, and cf. XII. Nn. 7. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The dat. sing. of the 3d decl. always ends in -i. 

2. All stems of the 3d decl. ending iu t form the nom. sing. by 
adding s to the stem and dropping t before s. 

3. The verb of which the pf. ind. act. is persuásit is followed by 
the dat. of the person who is persuaded, and not by the accus. of the 
person, as we might expect. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. civitás, fem., citizenship, a troops are not regarded as 
state, the body-politic, citi- persons. 
zens ; most frequently, state. | 3. exire, fo go out ; cf. obtinére 
2. copia, in sing, plenty, a XIII. wn. 4. 
supply; in plur, forces, | 4. persuasit, he persuaded or has 
troops. It is fem. in plur. persuaded. 


as well as in sing., since | 5. ut or uti, conj., that, in order 
that, so that. 


1 This is not a pres. indicative. It will be more fully explained later. 


LESSON XX. 131 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Orgetorix Helvetüs persuasit ut de finibus suis exirent. 
(6) Aquitania inter occasum solis et septentriones spectat. (c) Belgae 
pertinent ad inferidrem partem flüminis Rheni. (4) Helvetii montibus 
et flàminibus continentur. 

2. (a) Fortissimi Helvetii hos finés obtinent. (7) In his finibus 
Orgetorix incolit. (c) Omnes Helvetiorum copiae sunt proximae Ger- 
manis. (47) Nobilitatem conitiratidne inductam exire dé civitate 
dictum est. (v) Orgetorix ditissimis persuasit et initium coniür&tionis 
fecit. 

3. (a) That (man) persuaded a part of the state. (4) The state is 
next to the province. (c) These possess all the territory which is 
near the mountains. (7) The refinement of the province is kept out. — 
(e) The state is bounded by a mountain and a river. 

4. (a) They inhabit the state which is nearest to the river. (4) He 
persuaded those who are richest. (c) He visits that state in which 
the high-born Orgetorix dwells. (4) These (things) begin in the 
consulship of Marcus and Lucius. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Mase. and fem. endings of the 3d declension. 2. Different 
uses of the ending -. 3. Nom. sing. endings met thus far. 4. Two 
uses of the dative. 5. The meaning of civitas. 6. Ofut. 7. Of 
copia in sing. and plural. 8. The syllable -tát-. 9. The use of 
suis and eórum. 10. Preps. with abl. thus far. 


132 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XXI. 


AM, hg) Op <9 
Is, M. Messala et M. Pisone consulibus, regni cupidi- 
tate inductus coniürationem nobilitatis fecit, et civitati 
persuasit, ut de finibus suis cum omnibus copiis ex- 


irent: perfacile esse, cum  virtüte omnibus 
very-easy —— to-be, since | én-valor all 
praestarent, totius Galliae imperio potiri. 


they-stood-before, of-entire Gaul the-supreme-power to-obtain. 


2. NOTES. 


1. perfacile ; for composition, see Vocab.; accus. sing. neuter. 
What is the nom. sing? Cf. XV. N. 4. 

2. esse; pres. inf. of est, sunt. 

3. cum: (a) subordinate conj. followed by verb praestárent; 
(4) ef. cum, conj., when, XIL., and cum, prep., with, VIII. 

4. omnibus: (a) dat. plur. with praestárent. What is its end- 
ing? Cf. omn-is I.,omn-és IV. _ (6) Here a noun, though often an 
adjective. 

5. praestárent: (a) for meaning, see Vocab. ; (5) cf. ex-i-re-nt 
and prae-sta-re-nt. In what respects are they alike? 

6. totius; an irregular gen. singular. What does it limit ? 

7. potiri: (a) an inf.; cf. esse 2, obtinére XIII.; (4) pass. in 
form, act. in meaning; cf. oriuntur XVI.; (c) the preceding abl. 
sing. neut. imperió is used with it, with practically the same force 
as an object accus.; (4) potiri is the subj. of the inf. esse and 
is limited by the adj. perfacile; cf. E. G. 68, e and 3; (e) for 
free translation of this Lesson, see p. 387. 


LESSON XXI. | 55 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The ending of the dat. sing. in the 3d decl. is -14 of the dat. 
plur. -ibus. 

2. The form cum may be either a conj., meaning when or since, or 
à prep., meaning widh and taking the ablative. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. imperium, neuter, supreme | 4. praestáre (prae, b-fore and 


power. stare), to stand before, to 
2. perfacile (per, very and fa- excel, 

cile), neuter, very easy. 5. totus (ven. totius), tie whole, 
3. potiri, fo obtain; potitur, he the whole of, entire. 


obtains ; potiuntur, (cf. 
oriuntur) they obíain. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Perfacile est totius Galliae imperio potiri. (2) Virtüte om- 
nibus Helvetii praestant. (c) Dictum est Helvetios totius Galliae 
imperio potiri. (4) Una pars, quam Gallos obtinére dictum est, ini- 
tium capit à flumine Rhodano. (e) Regnum in civitate sua obtinet. 
(f) Provincia à montibus oritur et ad flümen pertinet. 

2. Conversation. — Quis (who) fuit Orgetorix ? 

Orgetorix nobilissimus et ditissimus Helvetiorum fuit. 

Quid (what) Orgetorix fecit? 


Cür coniüràtionem fécit? 

Quod régni cupiditate inductus est. 

Ubi (when) coniürationem fecit ? 

Messala et Pisone consulibus, eam fecit. 

Quibus persuasit ut exirent ? 

Omnibus Helvétiis persuasit. 

Quid ab Orgetorige dictum est ? 

Perfacile est, quod Helvetii virtüte reliquis Gallis praestant, totius 
Galliae potiri. 


134 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. (a) It was easy to keep the Sequanians from the territory of 
the Helvetiaus. (4) The high-born Orgetorix, influenced by his 
desire for (of) the-rest-of Gaul, made a beginning of conspiracy. 
(c) The merchants resort to almost all the states. (47) The Helve- 
tians are bouuded by rivers and mountains. 

4. (a) The nearest states differ from the most remote (states). 
(6) In the consulship of Pompeius and Crassus, the Romans obtain 
a part of Gaul. (c) He persuaded the richest (men) who inhabit 
the state. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Two uses of the ending -ibus. 2. Three meanings for cum. 
3. The datives used thus far in the text. 4. Four forms of the Lat. 
verb corresponding to Je. 5. Compound words in text so far. 
6. The inf. as subj. in English and Latin. 7. Infs. in text so far. 
8. Two neuters in this Lesson. 9. Eng. derivatives from words in 
this Lesson. 10. Difference in meaning between régnum and 


imperium. 
LESSON XXII. 
LI TEXT. 
Id hoc facilius — eis persuasit, quod 


This on-this-account more-easily to-them he-persuaded, because 


undique loci natira Helvétii 
oa-all-sides — of-the-place by-the-nature — the-Helvetians 


continentur. 


are-hemmed-in. 
2. NOTES. 


1. id, that (thing), that, this, it; cf. Eng. i. e. for id est, that is: 
(a) accus. sing. neut., direct object of persuasit; (4) cf. the nom. - 


1 The pupil should not forget that great assistance in understanding the 
meaning of the Latin is given by the free translation, p. 387. 


——————————— 


LESSON XXII. 135 


sing. masc. is, ¢his (man), he, XIX.; (c) the accus. sing. fem. is 
eam XVII. Judging from ünam, ina, what is its nom. sing. fem. ? 


- (d) For nom. and accus. plur. of the neut. id, cf. ea VII. (e) What 


is the antec. of id ? 
9. hOc, because-of-this, on-this-account ; abl. sing. neut.; cf. the 


masc. forms hi IV., hórum VI. 


3. facilius: (a) adv. in comparative degree. What does it modify ? 


(4) Cf. the neut. adj. perfacile XXI. 


4. eis: («) dat. plur. masc., indir. obj. of persuasit ; cf. civi- 
tati XX. Obs. 3; (4) the direct object is id; he persuaded this to 
them, or better, he persuaded them of this; cf. E. G. 62, 4.; (c) cf. 
the other masc. forms eós, eórum XII. and is XIX., and give the 
case and meaning of each. 

5. loci; cf. local, locate ; for case, number, and gender, cf. Rhéni 
XVI. 

6. continentur: (a) for voice, cf. appellantur IIL ; (4) for the 
reason for the case of preceding nàtürà, cf. continétur Garumna 


AIV. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. The Latin has a pron. which is both demonstrative like the 
English Z4is and that, and personal like he, she, it, they. 

2. This pron. is found in all three genders; we have met the fol- 
lowing forms: masc. is, eórum, eis, e6s; fem. eam; neut. id, ea. 

3. The verb persuásit takes the accus. of the thing as direct 
object, the dat. of the person as indirect object. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. facilius, adv. in comparative | 3. nátüra, nature, character, dis- 
degree, more easily. position. 
2. locus, a place. 4. undique, adv., from all sides, 
on all sides. 


136 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline nátüra. (?) Decline Helvétii in plural. (c) De- 
cline locus in sing. as far as possible. (4) Write all the forms you 
know of continentur. 

2. (a) Helvétiis et nobilitati Helvetiorum persuasit. (4) Omni- 
bus ut exireut persuasit. (c) Messala consule, coniürationem om- 
nium ditissimorum fécit. (47) Cum proximis civitatibus bellum 
gerit. (^) Id bellum cum eis qui ad Rhenum incolunt geritur. 

3. (a) Hoe coniürationem fecit, quod fortissimus omnium fuit. 
(6) Omnés quorum finés sunt proximi prohibent. (c) Eum locum, 
quod virtüte omnibus praestat, obtinet. (4) Helvetios esse fortis- 
simos dictum est. (^) Virtute Helvetii hoc loco potiuntur. 

4. (a) He persuades them of this more-easily on this account. 
(5b) He persuaded these to go-out! from one part. (c) The character 
of the place hems-in the Helvetians. (4) This is brought between 
the mountain and the river into the territory. (e) The rivers hem-in 
all parts of Gaul. 

5. (a) It is easy to hold this place. (6) The valor? of the Hel- 
vetians surpasses the valor of the Sequauians. (c) The nobility is 
the richest and bravest. (4) The forces of the Helvetians contend 
with those whose boundaries reach the river. (e) Influenced by 
their desire for refinement, they often visit the province in which. 
it has been said the merchants dwell. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The masc. forms of is. 2. The fem. forms. 3. The neut. forms. 
4. The noms. singular. 5. Different uses of this pronoun. 6. Dif- 
ference between act. and pass. verb forms. 7. Between sing. and 
plur. verb forms. 8. Two cases after persuasit. 9. Different uses 
of abl. thus far. 10. Syllables of facilius, undique, Helvétii. 


! Cf, ut... . exirent XX. 2 For form, cf. XX. n. 1. 


LESSON XXIII. 137 


LESSON XXIII. 


ESLEXT 


Id hoc facilius eis persuasit, quod undique loci natira 
Helvetii continentur; tina ex parte flimine  Eheno, 
one on side by-the-rwer Rhine, 


latissimo atque altissimo, qui agrum  Helvetium 
very-broad | and very-deep, which the-country Helvetian 


a Germanis dividit. 
from the-Germans divides. 


2. NOTES. 


1. ünà ex parte: (a) ünà agrees with parte ; o» one side. What 
is the case, number and gender of each? (bh) ex, which is here 
translated o», is more frequently translated out-of, from. | (c) What 
Latin preps. have been used with the abl. case in the text thus far ? 

2. flümine : (4) for nom. and accus. sing. and gender, cf. XV. 
N.4. What change of vowel in syllable -men in passing from the nom. 
or the accus. sing. to the other cases? (4) Used with continentur 
in preceding Lesson. Why then ablative? 

3. altissimo : (2) What degree of comparison? Cf. fortissimi VI. 
Note that this degree is here translated by very; very-deep, not 
deepest ; cf. E. G. 29, 3. (4) What is the case, number and gender 
ofaltissimo, and why? (c) Cf. altissimó and Rhénó. What is 
the case of each? What ending have they in common? (d) Cf. 
also the neut. abl. imperio XXI., from the nom. imperium. 

4. qui: (a) nom. sing. masc. Why nom.? What is the number 
of the same form in VIII.? (4) What is the antec. of qui in this 
Lesson, and how do you know it? (c) Why is it correct to translate 
the Lat. masc. qui by the English so-called neuter which ? 


138 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


9. agrum : (a) for case, number, and gender, cf. Rhénum XV.; 
(6) reason for its case? 

6. Helvétium, Helvetian; note that it is here an adj. limiting 
agrum ; the same form might be a noun meaning a Helvetian ; cf. 
Helvetii the Helvetians, X. and the English expressions, American 
territory, an American. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The ending of the abl. sing. masc. and neuter is -6. 

2. Neuters in -men of the 3d decl. change e to i in all cases which 
contain more syllables than the nominative. 

3. The form qui may be either a nom. plur. or a nom. singular. 

4. In Latin, as in English, the name of the people of a nation and 
the adj. meaning Jdelonging to that nation are often the same in 
form. 

9. The preps. thus far used with the abl. are à or ab, ex, cum, dé, 
and in when it means i. 

6. The Latin superlative ending may be translated by very, as well 
as by an English superlative ending or by most. 

7. A masc. or fem. relative pron. in Latin may be translated by the 
English so-called neut. which. This is because masculines or femi- - 
nines in Latin are often names of things. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. agrum, accus. sing. masc., a consonants, 8 only before 
field, territory. consonants. 

2. altus, high, deep; altissimus, | 4. Helvétius, a JTelvetian; or 
highest, very high. as adj., Helvetian. 

3. ex or 8, out-of, from; ex is | 5. latus, wide. Cf. first syllable 
used before both vowels and with first syllable of al-tus. 


What 1s the difference ? 


LESSON XXIII. 129 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline parte; (^) flimine; (c) latissimo in masc.; 
(d) qui, so far as possible; (e) all the forms of dividit yet dis- 
covered. 

2. (a) Una ex parte Helvetii continentur flumine Rheno. (0) Flü- 
men Rhénus agrum Helvétium à Germanis dividit. (c) Rhénus 
flümen est làtissimus atque altissimus. | (7) Natüra loci Helvetii à 
reliquis Gallis divisi sunt. (e) Cum his mercatoribus ad eam 
partem Galliae saepe commeat. 

3. (4) Germànos ab agro Helvétid flumen Bhanu dividit. (7) Hel- 
vétit, qui ad Rhénum incolunt, 4 Romanis minimé longé absunt. 
(c) Trium partium Galliae ünam incolunt Belgae. (47) Orgetorix, 
qui apud. Helvetios ditissimus est, nobilitàti persuasit. (e) Hi mon- 
tés, qui sunt altissimi, proximi Helvetiis sunt. 

4. (a) The Helvetians are-hemmed-in by a broad and deep river. 
(^) Our province extends from the mountains to the river Rhone. 
(c) The Helvetians begin at the province and face north-east. (7) The 
Gauls and the Germans differ from one another in valor. 

5. (a) To-obtain the-supreme-power of the-whole-of Spain is very- 
easy. (^) These extend towards the north and west. (c) They sur- 
pass in refinement all who inhabit the-rest-of Gaul. (4) The rivers 
which are in Gaul are the Seine, the Garumna, the Rhine, the Rhone. 
(e) Aquitania, which is near the ocean, is-inhabited by (ab) the 
Aquitanians. (f) The part which the Celts inhabit is very wide. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The ending -6. 2. Declension of nouns in -men. 3. Two 
translations of the Latin superlative. 4. Difference between Latin 
and English gender, and the result of this difference, as seen in the 
translation of pronouns. 5. Preps. with the ablative. 6. Two uses 
for qui. 7. For quae. 8. Two parts of speech possible for Helvé- 
tius ; for Helvetian. 9. Difference in form and meaning of latus and 
altus. 10. Illustrations of four kinds of agreement in this Lesson. 


140 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XXIV. 


LPL EAT: 


Id hoc facilius eis persuasit, quod undique loci natira 
Helvetii continentur; ina ex parte flümine Rheno, latis- 
simo atque altissimo, qui agrum Helvétium a Germanis 
dividit; alterà ex parte monte Iüra altissimo, 

the-second on side by-the-mountain Jura | very-high, 


qui est inter Sequanos et — Helvetios; 
which 1s between the-Sequanians and the- Helvetians ; 
tertia lacü Lemanno et flümine 


(on) the-third (side) by-the-lake Geneva and by-the-river 


Rhodano, qui provinciam nostram ab Helvetiis 


Rhone, which province our from the-Helvetians 
dividit. 
divides. 

2. NOTES. 


1. alterá ex parte: (a) for meaning of ex and agreement of 
altera, cf. XXIIL, N. 1; (4) ef. the order —adj., prep., noun — 
with the order in qua dé causa X., ünà ex parte XXIII. How 
many syllables has the prep. in each case? Is this order always 
observed in such phrases? Cf. examples in XVI., XVIL, XX. 

2. monte: (4) What verb, brought forward from XXII., is 
limited by this word? Why, then, is it an abl.? (6) What is the 
nom..sing.? Cf. XX. N. 1. 

3. altissimo ; cf. its meaning with that of the same word in 
XXIII. and note that altus refers to vertical direction either up or 
down. 

4. inter; cf. its meaning with that in inter sé IV. 


LESSON XXIV. d 141 


5. tertià; limits parte in ex parte understood; cf. alterá ex 
parte above. For omission of noun, cf. tertiam, nostra III. 

6. lacü: (a) abl. sing. masc.; (5) for form, cf. the abl. sing. 
masc. cultà VI. What ending is common to both? (c) Cf. the 
endings of these abls. sing. with those of altera, parte, and altis- 
simo above. Inu what respect are these endiugs alike? 

7. qui: (a) for form and translation, cf. XXIII. N. 4. (6) How 
do you know whether its autecedent is flümine or Rhodano? 

8. dividit: (4) subj. of this verb? (4) Cf., as to structure and 
meaniug, the clause ending at this word with the text of V. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The abl. sing. sometimes ends in -a. 

2. All abls. sing. thus far met with end in a vowel. 

3. A preposition of one syllable often stands between an adjective 
and its noun. 

4. In Latin, as in English, the noun with which an adjective agrees 
is often omitted. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


1. altera, fem., one of two, the | 3. laci, abl. sing. masc., a lake. 
other, the second. 4. Lemannus, the name of a 

9, Iüra, a mountain chain in lake, Leman or Geneva. 
Gaul; see map. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Helvétii tertià ex parte lacü Lemanno et flimine Rhodano 
continentur. (6) Mons lüra est inter Sequanos et Helvetios; lacü 
Lemannó nostra provincia ab Helvetiis divisa est. (c) Nostra pro- 
vincia ab Helvetiis flümine Rhodano dividitur. (7) Mons Iüra à 


1 The letter I is here a consonant, pronounced like y in year; ef. conitra- 
tiónem XIX. 


142 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


flimine Rhodano ad flümen Rhénum pertinet. (e) Pars nostrae 
provinciae Rhodanum attingit. 

2. Conversation. — Cir mercatorés facilius ad Celtas commeant ? 

Hoc facilius commeant, quod flümen est proximum. | 

Quo flümine provincia continetur ? 

Id flümen quod provincia continetur est Rhodanus. 

Quid Helv.tios continet ? | 

Loci natüra Helvétios continet. 

Quot (how many) ex partibus Helvetii nàtürà loci continentur? 

Tribus ex partibus Helvetii lacü et flüminibus et montibus 
continentur. 

Ea-ne in eorum fines importat ? 

Ea in eorum finés importat. 

3. (a) The very-high Mount Jura is between the Sequanians and 
the Helvetians. (4) Of all these mountains, the highest is Jura. 
(c) The Celts begin in the mountains and extend to the ocean. 
(4) (There) are three parts, of which Aquitania is one. 

4. The Helvetians occupy that part of the territory of the Celts 
which extends towards the east. They touch the Rhine, the Rhone, 
and the mountain Jura. On one side they are bounded by a lake. The 
Germans inhabit the nearest territory, and wage war in the territory 
of the Helvetians. For this reason the Helvetians are the bravest 
of the Celts. The Helvetians are separated from our province, in 
which the merchants dwell. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. The ending -ü. 2. All the endings of the abl. singular 
3. The order in alterà ex parte. 4. Different uses of the abl. 
met with thus far. 5. Different preps. used to translate the ablative. 
6. The meaning of altus. 7. Difference between látus and altus in 
form and meaning. $8. Two meanings of inter. 9. Ofin. 10. Of 
ad. 11. The agreement of the relative. 12. The geography of the 


Helvetian country. 


LESSON XXV. 143 


LESSON XXV. 


l. TEXT. 


His rebus fiebat, ut et minus 
On-account-of-these things tt-came-to-pass, that both less 


late vagarentur, et minus facile finitimis 
widely they-wandered, and less easily neighbors 
bellum inferre possent. 


war  (to-bear-upon  they-were-able. 


2. NOTES. 


l. his r&bus: (a) abl. plur. fem. ; (4) note that the abl. here 
gives the cause of the action expressed by the following verb fiébat ; 
cf. hdc XXIL, which gives the cause of persuasit ; (c) his is here 
an adj. limiting rébus; cf. qua X., eam XVII., and E. G. 20, 3; 
(d) for other forms of the same word, cf. hi IV., horum VI., hoc 
XXII. 

2. ut, that: (a) cf. with the same word in XX. and note that in 
both cases ut, ¢hat, is a conj. ; (4) distinguish ut from the pronom- 
inal adj. eam, ¢hat, XVII. and the pron. is, ¢hat-one, he, XIX.; 
(c) note also that the Eng. conj. that, used after the verb of saying 
dictum est in the free translation of XIIL., has no corresponding 
word in Latin. 

3. minus: (a) Eng. derivatives? (5) Irregular comparative of 
an adverb ; (ec) cf. irregular superlative minime, /eas¢, VII. (d) What 
does minus limit ? 

4. late, widely : (a) What part of speech? (4) Cf. the adj. latus, 
wide. How may the adv. be formed from the nom. plur. of the adj. ? 


144 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


(c) What is the superlative of lát&? Cf. látissimó XXIII. and 
longissime VI. 

9. vagárentur: (a) pass. in form, act. in meaning ; cf. oriuntur 
XVL, potiri XXI.; (0) cf. exirent XX., praestarent XXI. What 
two letters are found in all three forms just before the personal end- 
ings? All these verbs are subjunctives and are past imperfects; cf. 
E. G. 39, 41, and 70. 

6. facile, easily: (a) What part of speech, here? What part of 
speech is perfacile XXI.? (0) Cf. facilius, more easily, XXII. 
How, then, do you form the comparative of au adv. from the positive ? 
What means more widely? Cf. E. G. 26, 30. 

7. inferre : (a) compounded of prep. in, ido, upon, and ferre, £o 
bear ; cf. praestarent XXI., compounded of prae, defore, and starent, 
they stood ; (b) inferre has the preceding dat. finitimis as its indi- 
rect obj., just as praestarent has the dat. omnibus as its indirect 
object. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. Adjectives ending in -us regularly form the corresponding ad- 
verbs by changing -us to -é. 


2. The following are adverbial endings: -8, positive; -ius, com- - 


parative; -issimé, superlative. The comparative and superlative 
endings are not added to the positive, but take the place of the positive 
ending. 

3. The past imperfect subjunctive is distinguished by the letters 
-re- immediately before the personal ending. 

4. The Eng. word ¢hat is translated into Latin sometimes by ut, 
sometimes by some form of the pron. is, but sometimes it has no cor- 
responding word at all. 

9. The ablative is used without a preposition to express the cause 
of an action. 

6. The dative is used as the indirect object of many verbs com- 
pounded with prepositions. 


T —À 


LESSON XXV. 145 


4. VOCABULARY. 


M 


l. fi&bat, i£ was being made or | 5. minus, adv. in comparative, 


done, it was happening. less, cf. minime, least. 
2. finitimus, adj, (finés, Jor- | 6. posse (compound of esse, £o 

ders, boundaries), bordering be), to be able. 

upon, neighboring ; in plur. | 7. rébus, abl. plur. fem., chings ; 

inasc., usually a noun mean- cf. Eng. rebus. 

ing neighbors. 8. vagari, fo wander; for form 
3. Inferre, ¢o dear into or upon, ^ and meaning, cf. potiri 

to wage upon. XXI. 


4. 1até, adv., widely. 


5. EXERCISES. 


l. (a) Fiébat ut Helvétii minus late vagarentur. (6) Fiebat ut 
mercatores id importarent. (c) Helvetii cum Germaàuis contendunt. 
Qua dé causa reliquos Gallos virtüte praecédunt. (47) Initium proelii 
Marcus fécit. (e) Iustitüta eorum qui eos fines incolunt inter sé 
differunt. 

2. (a) His rébus fiébat ut mercatores ad Aquitànos commeaàrent. 
(^) His facile persuasit ut in finés reliquorum Gallorum exirent. 
(c) Finitimi proximis in finibus vagantur. (7) Finitimos quibuscum 
bellum gerunt virtüte praecedunt. (e) Regna quae obtinent Helvetiae 
civitati proxima sunt. 

3. (a) On-account-of-these things the Helvetians wander less 
widely. (5) On-account-of-the-river and the mountain they very 
seldom visit our province. (c) Orgetorix goes-back-and-forth across 
the kingdoms of Gaul. (47) In the consulship of Messala and Piso, 
Orgetorix persuaded the neighboring nobility. (e) It came to pass 
that they went out-of their territory. 

4. (a) Since he surpassed all in valor, he made a beginning of 
conspiracy. (4) The Germans contend with the Helvetians in daily 
battles. (c) It has been said that the Belgians are far distant from 
the refinement of these. (7) These (men), influenced by the desire 
for (of) the nearest fields, wage war very bravely. (e) They are far- 


ther distant from the river. 
10 


146 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The comparison of adverbs. 2. Difference in form of adjectives 
and adverbs. 3. The personal endings in active. 4. Personal endings 
in passive. 5. The ending -re in verbs. 6. The letters -re- when 
used before personal endings. 7. Meauing of vagarentur. 8. How 
to say that in Latin. 9. Three uses of the dative. 10. Four uses of 
the ablative without a preposition. 11. Two parts of speech possible 
for his or qua. 12. The words for /ess and /east. 13. Two meanings 


for facile. 


LESSON XXVI. 


l. TEXT. 


His rébus fiebat, ut et minus late vagarentur, et mi- 
nus facile finitimis bellum inferre possent; qua ex 
which in 


parte homines . bellandi cupidi magno dolore 
respect men of-warring fond with-great grief 


afficiébantur. 
were-affected. 


2. NOTES. 


l. quà ex parte, from which consideration, in this respect; for 
order of words and use of qua, cf. ina ex parte XXIII. 

.2. bellandi: (4) verbal noun, corresponding in many of its uses 
to the Eng. verbal warring; cf. E. G., 20, 2; (4) gen. sing., depend- 
ing on the following adj. cupidi. 

3. cupidi: (a) nom. plur. masc. What does it limit? (4) Distin- 
guish the ending -3 as used here from -1 in bellandi above, and -1 in 
civitati XX. 


LESSON XXVI. 147 


4. dolére: (a) Case and why? (7) What do you know about 
the gender of dolore from the ending of magno? (c) In what 
“respect is it similar in form to mercátor-es VII., inferior-em XVI. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. The ending -i is found in the gen. sing. and the nom. plur. of 
the 2d decl., and in the dat. sing. of the 3d. 

9. The Latin has a verbal noun like the English verbal in -ing. It 
has the endings of the 2d declension. | 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. afficiébat, he affected or he | 4. dolore, abl. sing. masc., pain, 


was affecting; aff&cit, he grief. 
affected ; cf. f&cit XIX. 5. hominés, nen. 
2. bellat, he wars, wages war. 6. magnus, great. 


3. cupidus, desirous, fond ; cf. 
cupiditas, desire, fondness. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline the masc. magnus ; (4) the fem. magna ; (c) the 
neut. magnum. (d) Write all the forms you know of the pron. qua. 
(e) Write four sing. and four plur. cases of dolóre. 

2. (a) His rébus fiebat ut hominés bellandi cupidi minus facile 
finitimis bellum inferre possent. (4) Qua ex causa Helvetii magno 
dolore afficiebantur. (c) Régnum in sua civitate Marcus obtinet. 
(d) His causis Germani proeliis contendunt. (¢) Bella Germandrum 
sunt magna. 

3. Conversation.! — Quos flümina et montés dividunt ? 

Mercatorés ab Helvétiis montés et flümina dividunt. 


1 Tt is earnestly recommended that all of the class-room work on these ** Con- 
versations " and the review of other ** Exercises " be conducted viva voce, in order 
to secure training for the ear. It is hoped, too, that every teacher will give fre- 
quent impromptu conversation exercises, framing questions of his own similar to 
those in the book. 


148 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


Quid fiébat ? 

Hi hominés cupiditate bellandi inducti láté vagabantur. 

Quos hoc locó prohibent ? 

Eds hominés qui ea important hoc loco prohibent. 

Quid Helvetios afficiebat ? 

Nàtüra loci in quo incolunt Helvetios afficiébat. 

Flümen-ne Helvetios continet ? 

Lacum et flümen agrum Helvétiorum continere dictum est. 

4. (a) He persuaded them to wander? more-widely in the country 
of the-rest-of the Gauls. (/) The Germans contend with the Hel- 
vetians in daily battles. (c) That (man) is great. (7) These men 
are great. (e) He is fond of warring with his neighbors. 

9. (a) It has been said that the Belgians are far distant from the 
refinement of those who inhabit the province. (4) These men, influ- 
enced by the desire for large fields, wage war with the Aquitaniaus. 
(c) The merchants bring-in these (things), because the Gauls to whom 
they are brought are fond of refinement. (4) A river divides the 
lower place from the highest mountains. (e) Our province, which is 
next to the Aquitanians, extends toward the east aud reaches the 
mountains. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Three uses of the ending -i. 2. Difference in part of speech of 
skating in the boy is skating and the boy likes skating. 3. Different 
translations of pars. 4. Difference between cupidus and cupiditàs. 
5. Abls. of means in text thus far. 6. Instances of agreement in this 
Lesson. 7. Words with -6r- before the ending. 8. English derivatives 
from words in this Lesson. 9. Syllables of afficiébantur. 


1 To wander = ut vagarentur ; cf. ut exirent XX. 


LESSON XXVII. 149 


LESSON XXVII. 


Le TEXT. 
Pro multitüdine autem hominum et 
Considering the-great-number moreover of-men and 
pro gloria belli atque fortitüdinis 
considering _ the-glory of -war and of-bravery 
angustos sé finis habere arbitrabantur. 
narrow themselves territory  to-have they-thought. 

2. NOTES. 


1. pro: (a) a prep.; for meaning, see Vocab. (6) What case is 
used with it? What other preps. have thus. far been used with the 
ablative ? 

2. hominum: (a) What is the case and what is its ending? 
Cf. homines XXVI. (4) Cf. omnium VI., and note that the gen. 
plur. here appears to end in -ium not -um. The gen. plur. of pars 
XIII. and orientem XVI. is like that of omnis, while the gen. plur. 
of flümen V. is like that of hominum. 

3. sé; for case, cf. inter sé IV. 

4. finis: (7) note that the first meaning is downdaries ; hence, what 
is enclosed within boundaries, Zerritory, land ; (6) accus. plur. masc. 
What is the ending? Cf. finibus XII. (c) The nom. sing. is 
finis, like omnis I. How does the ending of finis differ from the 
nom. sing. ending ? (7) The ending -1s is found in the accus. plur. 
of such words as omnis, pars, oriéns, but even here the ending -és 
is also found; cf. partes I. (e) By what adj. is finis limited ? 

5. habére; for form and use, cf, obtinére XIII. N. 4. 

6. arbitrábantur: (a) note its translation and its personal ending ; 
cf. oriuntur XVI., vagárentur XXV.; (4) sé habére arbitraban- 


150 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


tur, they thought themselves to have, or better, they thought that they 
had (cf. E. G. 68, c and d) ; the thought iu their minds was we have ; 
(c) cf. Gallos obtin&re dictum est XIII., and note that in one in- 
stance a statement is made after a verb of thinking, in the other, after 
a verb of saying. (d) In what mode are both obtinére and habére ? 
In what case is the subject of each? In the free translation what 
English mode is used? Is there any word in Latin for the word 
that of the free translation ? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. The gen. plur. of the 3d decl. ends in -um, but in words having 
the nom. sing. endings -is, -rs, -ns, and in some others, the -um is 
immediately preceded by i. 


2. Third decl. forms with nom. sing. endings -is, -ns, and -rs have 


either -&s or is in the accus. plural. 

3. The preps. à or ab, cum, dé, ex, in translated in or on, and 
pro, are used with the ablative. 

4. Some Latin verbs have an act. meaning with a pass. form ; such 
verbs are called ** deponent.”’ 

9. After a verb of saying or thinking, (1) the verb of the principal 
statement is in the inf.; (2) this inf. may then be translated by the 
indicative ; (3) the subj. of the inf. is in the accus. ; and (4) the Eng- 
lish word that, which commonly introduces such a quotation, has no 
corresponding word in Latin. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. angustus, arrow. 6. habere, to have, hold. 

2. arbitrari (cf. poti-ri XXI.) | 7. multitüdine, abl. sing., a 
to judge, think. great number, a multitude. 

3. autem, conj. but, however, | 8. pro, prep. with abl., im front - 
moreover. of, in behalf of, instead of, 

4. fortitüdinis (fortis, brave), for, in proportion to, con- 
of bravery. sidering; cf. Eng. for, E. 


5. gloria, glory. G. 72. 


E 


| 
| 


LESSON XXVII. ' 151 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) All the forms of habére which the pupil should know. 

(4) Decl. of gloria; (c) belli; (7) angustos; (c) finis; (/) ho- 
minum, except nom. sing.; (7) multitüdine, except nom. singular. 
. 9. (a) Pro multitüdine hominum angustos finés Helvetii habent. 
(^) Pro gloria atque fortitudine Helvétii angustds esse suds finés 
arbitrantur. (c) Quod Helvetii lacü et flüminibus et montibus con- 
tinentur, minus laté vagantur. (d) Hominum multitüdinem habet. 
(e)Is trans hos finés cum hominibus contendit. 

3. (a) Gallum cupidum gloriae esse dictum est. (4) Eorum finis 
Aquitani attingunt. (c) Hominés quós montés continent màgno 
dolore afficiébantur. (47) Helvetii, quod virtüte alios hominés prae- 
cédunt, cupidi belli sunt. (e) Perfacile est fortés hominés magna 
glorià potiri. 

4. (a) The territory of the Helvetians is narrow. (7) The Celts 
hold a third part of Gaul. (c) He holds the-supreme-power of a 
large state. (d) The mountain slopes to the river. (e) These brave 
men are-warring. 

5. (a) He takes all his men, of-whom he has a-great-number. 
(^) Considering the nature of the country, the Helvetians wander 
very-widely. (c) It came to pass that they went out-of their country 
with all their forces. (7) Orgetorix persuaded the Helvetians of 
this. (e) The Helvetians have a great desire for (of) warring with 
their neighbors. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. All the uses of ending -1s. 2. Distinction between -is and -is. 
3. The ending of gen. plur. in 3d declension. 4. Preps. with the 
ablative. 5. Connection of the various meanings of pró with the 
first meaning in-front-of. 6. Meaning of the word “ deponent.” 
1. Four very important facts about a statement after a verb of saying 
or thinking. 8. The meaning of finés. 9. The ending of the act. 
Infinitive. 10. The reason why the Helvetians left their boundaries. 


152 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XXVIII. 


1. TEXT. 


Pro multitüdine autem hominum et pro gloria belli 
atque fortitudinis angustOs sé finis habere arbitrabantur, 
qui in longitüdinem milia passuum ducenta 
which in (into) — length thousands  of-paces two-hundred 


et quadraginta, in latitadinem centum — et 
and forty, in (2nto) width a-hundred and 


octoginta patebant. 
eighty extended. 


2. NOTES. 


1. qui: (a) What is the antec., and how do you know it? 
(4) Why is it correct to translate the Lat. masc. qui by the Eng. 
so-called neuter which? Cf. IX. 2, 6. 

2. milia: (a) accus. plural. What is its gender? (6) Note tàat 
the ending -a is preceded by i, and cf. omnium VI.; (c) for expla- 
nation of case, cf. E. G. 60, 1. 

3. passuum: («) What case? Note that u precedes the ending 
-um, as i precedes it in omnium, and cf. culta VI., laca AXIV.; 
(4) for explanation of case, cf. VI. N. 3, c. 

4. ducenta ; accus. plur. neuter. With what does it agree? 

9. latitidinem: (a) cf. its form with the form of multitüdine, 
fortitidinis XXVII., and that of longitüdinem above. What five 
letters immediately before the ending in each of these words? (6) in 
latitidinem means strictly, into width, though translated properly 
in width ; cf. the free translation of à flimine XIII., ab Séquanis 
XV., ünà ex parte XXIII., and E. G. 74, 1. 


LESSON XXVIII. 153 


6. octogintà; this is not an abl, as it seems to be from its end- 
ing, but an indeclinable adj.; i. e., an adj. which (like all Eng. adjs. 
except /Ais and that) remains unchanged in form, whatever it limits ; 
cf. E. G. 25. The preceding centum and quadraginta are also in- 
declinable. All these adjs. limit milia. 

7. patébant: (a) What is the subj. of this verb? (4) For form, 
ef, fiébat XXV., afficiébantur XXVI, arbitrábantur XXVII. 
What two letters are found in all these forms immediately before 
the personal ending? These letters distinguish the past imperfect 
tense in the indicative mode, and are called its sign ; thus, pate-nt, 
they extend, paté-ba-nt, they were extending, or more indefinitely, 
they extended ; for force of the past imperfect, cf. E. G. 39, 41. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1.. The past imperfect tense represents the action as going on in 
past time. The word “imperfect”? is understood to mean past im- 
perfect, though an action may be represented as incomplete in the 
present or future. 

2. A Lat. imperfect is often idiomatically but somewhat inaccu- 
rately translated by a simple Eng. past; cf. E. G. 74, 2 and 3. 

3. The sign of the imperfect indicative is -ba-, inserted between 
the stem and personal ending. 

4. The Lat. has many 3d decl. nouns with stems ending in 
-tidin-. 

5. The Latin frequently uses a prep. denoting motion to or from 
a place where the English less accurately uses a prep. denoting posi- 
tion in a place. 

6. Some Latin numeral adjectives are not declined. 

_ 7%. In Latin, as in English, extent of space is expressed by the 


. ^ accusative. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. centum, indecl. numeral adj., | 2. ducenti, numeral adj., £wo 
one hundred. hundred. 


154 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. longitüdinem, accus. sing. | 7. passuum, gen. plur. masc., 


fem., length. of paces (the Roman mile 
4. látitüdinem, accus. sing. was à thousand paces, and 
fem., width; cf. latus, the Roman pace was a little 
wide. less than five feet). 
5. milia or millia, neut. plur., | 8. patére, £o lie open, extend. 
thousands. 9. quadràginta, indecl. num. 
6. octoginta, indecl. num. adj., adj., forty. 
eighty. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Finés angustos Helvétii habent, qui in latitüdinem. milia 
passuum centum et octogintà patent. (^) Quod Helvetir lacu et 
fluminibus et montibus continebantur, fiebat ut minus làte vagari 
possent. (c) Fortium hominum multitüdinem habébat. (47) Hel- 
vétii cum omnibus copis vagübantur. (+) Helvetiorum copias 
Romani praecédunt. 

2. (a) Cupiditate gloriae inducti reliquis cum Gallis contendebant. 
(^) Fines Helvetiorum à lacü ad flümen pertinebant. (c) Hi fines 
milia passuum ducenta et quadràgiutà pertinent. (4) Finés quos 
Belgae obtinent latitüdine agrum. Helvétium praecedunt. (e) Is suis 
copiis quadragintà milia hominum capit. 

3. (a) The Helvetian country extended two hundred and forty 
miles in length. (4) The mountains were sloping to the river. 
(c) The Helvetians surpass all their neighbors in valor. (4) Two 
hundred men are in the field which is near the river. (e) It has 
been said that the Celts possess a third part of Gaul. 

4. (a) They think that the fields of the province are very-broad. 
(5) It has been said that the merchants very seldom visit the Bel- 
gians. (c) The Helvetians were greatly troubled (were affected with 
great sorrow) because they were-hemmed-in by the nature of the 
country. (4) They keep the Germans from the narrow boundaries. 
(e) They often hasten across the river Rhine and wage war with the 
nearest Germans. 


LESSON XXVIII. 155 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The meaning of the word “imperfect? in naming a tense. 
2. The exact translation of the imperfect. 3. The sign of the im- 
perfect indicative. 4. The tense sign in praestarent. 5. Difference 
between Lat. and Eng. use of prepositions. 6. How to express ex- 
tent of space, or answer question “how far?" 7. Likeness in 
spelling of quadraginta and octoginta. 8. Likeness in respect to 
inflection. 9. Likeness in form of milia aud omnium. 10. Of 
omnium and passuum. 1]. Of passuum and cultü. 12. The 
stem ending -tüdin-. 13. Eng. derivatives from words in this 
Lesson. 


GALLIC SWORDS OF BRONZE. 


156 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XXIX. 


REVIEW 
Lessons XIX.-XXVIII. 


l. TEXT. 


C.zsar’s ** GaLLIC War,” Book I., Chapter 2. 
Follow strictly all the directions given under ‘ Text” in IX. 


2 GRAMMAR LESSON 


]. Inflection of Nouns and Adjectives. — For Ist Decl., see IX. 


Sing. Plur. Sing. | Plur. Sing. | Plur. 
Nom. Gall-us Gall.i omn-is omn-és par-s  part-és 
Gen. Galli  Gallórum omn-is omn-ium partis part.ium 
Dat. Gallo Gall-is omni  omn.ibus part.i  part-ibus 


Accus. Gall-um Gall-6s — omn-em omn-és(is) partem part-és (is) 
Abl. Gall-6 Gallis omn-ibus part.e  part-ibus 


NEUTERS. 
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. 
Gen. bellum bell.a fiümen flümin-a 
Nom. bell i bell-6rum flimin-is flimin-um 
Dat. bell-6 bell-is flümin-i flumin-ibus 
Accus. bell-um bell.a flümen flümin.a 
Abl. bell-6 bell is flümin-e flümin-ibus 


OBSERVATIONS ON THE ABOVE. | 


Every form of nouus and adjs. in -us has been found in the text 
except the dat. sing., and this is the same as the abl. singular. 
Neuters in -um are declined like masculines in -us except in the nom. 
and accus. sing. and plural. | 
The decl. of nouns ending in -rs like pars is complete. Nouns 


and adjs. in -ns are declined in the same way. Nouns in -tàs are 


LESSON XXIX. 157 


declined in the same way except that the gen. plur. often ends in -um 
instead of -ium. Note that in all these cases the final t of the stem 
is dropped before the nom. sing. ending -s. 

Many 3d decl. nouns have the gen. plur. in -um (like hominum 
XXVIL.). What change in a stem vowel of flümen in decl. ? 

The euding -ü has been met as an abl. sing. and -uum, as a genitive 
plural. Some Lat. numeral adjs. are not declined at all. 

2. Inflection of pronouns. — In general, prons. have endings like 
those of nouns and adjs. already given, but the followfig peculiar 
forms have been discovered : — 

is, nom. sing. masc. ; id, nom. and accus. sing. neuter. 

hóc, abl. sing. neuter. 

sé, accus, plur. masculine. 

qui, as nom. sing. mase.; quae, both nom. sing. fem. and nom. 
and accus. plur. neut.; quibus, abl. plur. masc., a 3d decl. form, 
while most of the forms of the relative are of the 1st or 2d declen- 
sion. 

3. Inflection of Verbs. 


Active. 
Pres. IND. 
Sing. appella-t prohibe-t dividi-t 
Plur. appella-nt prohibe-nt dividu-nt 
ImpF. IND. 
Sing. appella-ba-t prohibé-ba-t —— 
Plur. appella-ba-nt prohibé-ba-nt —— 
IuPr. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Sing. appellá-re-t prohibé-re-t —— 
Plur. appella-re-nt prohibé-re-nt —— 
Pres. Inr. 
appellá-re prohibé.re —— 
Passive. 
Pres. IND. 
Sing. appella-tur prohibé-tur dividi-tur 


Plur. .appella-ntur prohibe-ntur dividu-ntur 


158 INDUCTIVE I ATIN PRIMER. 
Imer. IND. 
Sing. appella-ba-tur prohibé-ba-tur —— 
Plur. appella-ba-ntur prohibé-ba-ntur —— 
Impr. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Sing. appella-ré-tur prohibé-ré-tur —— 
Plur. appella-re-ntur prohibé-re-ntur —— 
Pres. INF. 


——À 


The term ** imperfect," as used in Lat. grammar, always means past 
imperfect. The impf. is often translated, however, like a simple past. 
We have had a few forms of a perfect (f&cit, persuasit), which 
were translated like a simple past. 

Some verbs which are pass. in forin are act. in meaning. 

4. Formation and inflection of adverbs. — Adjs. ending in -us 
in the nom. sing. masc. form the corresponding adv. by changing this 
ending to -&. The comparative is formed by substituting the ending 
-ius for -8 of the positive, and the superlative by substituting -issimé. 

5. Use of cases. — The verb persuadere, to persuade, is followed 
by the accus. of the thing £o, or of, which one is persuaded, and by 
the dat. of the person who is persuaded. The dat. is used after 
some verbs compounded with prepositions. 


Exteut of space is expressed by the accus., as in English, and the - 


accus. is used as the subject of an infinitive. 

The preps. à or ab, cum, de, ex, in and pro are used with the 
ablative. The abl. without a prep. is used to express cause. 

6. Saying or thinking. — The principal statement after a verb of 
saying or thinking; (1) has its verb in the inf.; (2) which is then 
translated like the ind. ; and (3) has an accus. for its subj. ; (4) the 
word that which usually introduces such a statement does not appear 
in Latin. 

7. Translation. — Very (rather than most or the ending -es¢) is 
often used to translate the superlative degree. 

Since the names of things are often masc. or fem. in Latin, the 
English which may be used to translate a masc. or a fem. pronoun. 


LESSON XXIX. 159 


That is sometimes translated by the conj. ut, sometimes by a form 
- of is, and sometimes has no corresponding word iu Latin. 

The Latin has a verbal noun which may bé translated by the Eng- 
lish verbal noun in. Zug. 

Latin preps. denoting motion £o or from a place must often be 
translated by English preps. denoting rest iu a place. 

8. Miscellaneous. — In Latin (as in English), the name of a 
people and the adj. meaning belonging to that people often have the 
same form. ; | 

A single-syllable prep. often stands between an adj. and its noun. 
The noun with which an adj. agrees is often omitted if it can be 
readily supplied from the context. | 


3. WORD REVIEW. 


Follow the directions given under “ Word Review " in IX. 
The last ten lessons contain the followiug new words. 


VERB FonMws. 


l. afficiebantur 5. fiebat 9. patebant 13. praestarent 
9. arbitrabantur — 6. fuit 10. persuasit — 14. vagarentur 
3. exirent 7. habere 11. possent 

4. fecit 8. inferre — 12. potiri 


NOUN, PRONOMINAL AND ADJECTIVE FORMS. 


Ist Declension. 2d Declension. 
1. altera l. agrum . 10. inductus 
9. copils 2. altissimo ll. làtissimo 
3. gloria 3. angustos 12. Lemanno 
4. lara 4. bellandi | 13. loci 
5. natüra 5. cupidi 14. màgno 
6. ditissimus 15. Marco 
7. ducenta 16. nobilissimus 
8, finitimis l7. regni 
9. imperio 18. totius 


160 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3d Declension- 


1. civitati 9. longitüdinem 
2. eoniürátiónem 10. milia 

3. consulibus 1l. multitüdine 
4. cupiditate 12. nobilitàtis 
5. dolore 13. Orgetorix 

6. fortitüdinis 14. perfacile 

7. homines 15. Pisone. 


8. latitüdinem 


Unclassified. Indeclinable, 

1. lacü 1. centum 

2. passuum 9. octogintà 

3. rebus 3 quadraginta 
ADVERBS; PREPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTION. 
l. autem l. apud ut 
2. facile 2. ex 
3. late 3. pro 
4. minus 
5. undique 


4 EXERCISES 


1. Conversation. Answer in Latin the following questions : — 
Quis (who) fuit Orgetorix ? 

Qui fuérunt ! cdnsulés ubi (hen) is coniurationem fecit ? 
Quibus persuasit ? 

Quid (wat) eis persuasit? 

Cür eis facile persuasit ? 

Qué flümine Helvetii continentur ? 

Quà ex parte flümine continentur ? 

Quo monte Helvetii continentur? 

Quo lacü Helvetii continentur ? 


1 This word has not been used before. The pupil by comparing it with fuit 
will see its meaning and agreement. 


á A Tui 


LESSON XXX. | 161 


Qua à provincia Rhodanus Helvétids dividit ? 

Cur Helvetii magno dolore afficiébantur ? 

Quam (how) longi sunt eorum finés ? 

Quam làti sunt eorum finés ? 

2. Write in Latin. The Swiss, who are very brave, inhabit narrow 
boundaries. These boundaries extend from the Rhine river to Mount 
Jura, two hundred and forty miles from east to west. They dwell 
among the mountains, which are very high, or near Lake Geneva, which 
touches their country. Men who wander across the ocean and in 
places which are far distant from our country often visit the Swiss 
mountains. Very many people (a multitude of men) think that these 
mountains surpass all others (7. ¢., other mountains). 


LESSON XXX. 


l. TEXT, 


His rébus adducti et auctoritate Orgetorigis 
By-these things Led and by-the-advice — of-Orgetorix 


permoti constituerunt ea, quae ad 
deeply-moved they-determined those-things, which — to 
proficiscendum  pertinérent, comparare, iümen- 
departing pertained, to-prepare, —— of-beasts- 
torum et carrorum quam maximum numerum 
of-burden and of-carts | as-mueh-as. the-greatest number 
coémere. 


to-buy-up. 
2 NOTE 


1. Orgetorigis : (a) What is the case-ending ? What the stem ? 
(^) forms the nom. sing. by adding -s, like civitàs and pars ; cf. 
XX. N. 1; (oc) the final g of the stem is not dropped before s, like t, 

11 


162 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


but unites with it, and gs is always written x — What then is the 
nom. sing. of Orgetorigis ? What of legibus in LV. ? 

9. permóti: (4) cf. adducti just before, dictum XIIT., induc- 
tus XIX. Judging from the translation, what is the voice and tense 
of each of these participles? Cf. E. G. 33. (4) How are they de- 
clined ? (c) What letter has each before the case-ending? (7) Note 
that divisa I. is of the 1st decl. and that the letter s precedes the 
case ending 

3. constituerunt: (a) How does the form of this verb show its 
number? (6) adducti and permoti both agree with its subject. 
What, then, are the case, number, and gender of these participles ? 

4. ea quae; cf. ea quae VII. 

9. proficiscendum ;: (4) the accus. of the Lat. gerund, which 
corresponds to the Eng. verbal noun in -ing; cf. E. G. 20, 2, and 
bellandi XXVI. x. 2. (6) What similarity of form have proficis- 
cendum and bellandi ? 

6. pertinérent , mode aud tense? Cf. vagarentur XXV. N. 5, 
and the pres. ind. pertinent XVI. 

4. comparáre : (4) for mode and ending, cf. obtinere XIII, x. 
4; (5) used to complete the meaning of cénstituérunt, just as In- 
ferre is used to complete the meaning of possent in XXV. 

8. quam, adv., ow, as; with the superlative degree it is best 
translated possib/e ; thus, quam maximum numerum, the greatest 
possible uumber. 

9. coémere: (4) completes the meaning of constituerunt like 
comparáre 7; (5) cf. coémere with habére. What difference in 
the quantity of the e before -re ? (c) Those verbs which have short e 
in the penult of the inf. have i and u (instead of e) before the per- 
sonal endings iu the 3d person of the present tense ; cf. dividit V., 
gerunt VIIT.;, and XXIX. 2, 3. (4) What vowel before -re in 
comparare ? | 

3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Stems in -g of the 3d decl., as well as those in -t, form the 
nom. by adding -s. The combination -gs thus formed is always rep- 
resented in Latin bv -x. 


LESSON XXX. 163 

2. The perfect passive participle is declined like an adj. of the 
lst and 2d decls. It is distinguished by the letter t (sometimes s) 
before the case-endings. 

3. Verbs are divided into different classes, or conjugations. These 
are distinguished by the letter which precedes the -re of the pres. inf. 
active. This letter is called the CHARACTERISTIC. * 

4. The characteristic of the Ist conjug. is à, of the 2d, 8; of the 
3d, e. "That of the 4th conjug. has yet to be learned. 

9. The characteristic of the 3d coujug. 1s changed to i in the pres. 
ind. 3d sing., and to u in the pres. ind. 3d plural. 

6. The adv. quam with the superlative denotes the highest degree 
possible. 

4. The Latin gerunil, corresponding in some respects to the Eng- 
lish verbal in -ing, has the letters -nd- before the endings of the 2d 
declension. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


I. addücere, to lead or draw to, 8. maximus (irregular superla- 


to influence. 


. auctoritàs, advice, authority, 


influence. 
carrus, a cart, 


4. coémere, to buy up. 


. comparare, 


to prepare, to 
make ready. 


. constituere, /o set together, 


arrange, determine. 


. iümentum, neut., a yoke ani- 


mal, beast of burden. 


tive of magnus), greatest. 


. numerus, a number. 
. permovére, fo move thor- 


oughly or deeply. 


. proficiscendum, a departing, 


departure. 


. quam, adv., how, as; with 


the superlative it may be 
translated possible. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Declension of auctoritate ; (/) Orgetorigis ; (c) carrórum ; 
(7) iüàmentórum. (e) Write all the forms you know of adducti ; 
(f) co&mere; (y) comparáre; (^) pertinérent, in the active. 


164 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. (a) Helvétil his rebus permoti constituerunt dé finibus suis 
exire. (7) Helvétii cOnstituérunt itimenta et carros coémere. 
(c) Auctoritàs Orgetorigis, quà hi addticébantur, maxima fuit. 
(d) Ea, quae ad bellandum pertinerent, comparabant. (^) Quam 
maximus numerus carrorum comparatur. 

3. (a) Dictum. est imercatórés ad Helvetios iümenta minimé saepe 
importàre. (4) Quod Helvetii fortissimi fuerunt, proeliis cum reli- 
quis Gallis contendere constituerunt. — (c) Orgetorix eis persuasit ut 
carrós iümentaque ex fiuitimis importarent. (4) Homines bellandi 
cupidi cum finitimis bellum gerébant. (e) Eorum fines a montibus 
altissimis ad flümeu altum pertinebant. 

4. (a) The Helvetian state is nearest to Mount Jura. (0) The 
advice of Orgetorix influences the Helvetians. (c) Those-things which 
are prepared have-to-«lo with (pertain to) departure. (d) Orgetorix 
persuaded them to prepare these-things. (4) They buy up the beasts- 
of-burden which are imported. 

9. (a) Large carts are-bought-up. (4) He persuaded the Helve- 
tians to-buy-up carts. (¢) The beasts-of-burden draw the carts which 
are imported. (7) He was preparing the largest possible number 
of men. (e) He determines to wage war upon those who live near 
the ocean. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. The equivalent of x. 2. Words which have the nom. sing. 
ending -s. 3. The letter t before s. 4. The letter g before s. 
5. Characteristic vowels 4, &, e. 6. Pres. ind. of 3d conjugation. 
7. The perfect passive participle. 8. -t, -nt, -tur, -ntur, -ba., 
-re-, re. 9. Use of quam. 10. The Latin gerund. 


LESSON XXXI. 165 


LESSON XXXI. 


Loe DEX T. 


His rebus adducti et auctoritáte Orgetorigis permoti 
constituerunt ea, quae ad proficiscendum pertinerent, 
comparare, iümentorum et carrorum quam maximum 
numerum  coémere, sementes quam maximas 

sowings  as-much-as the-greatest 


facere, ut in itinere copia frümenti 
to-make, | in-order-that on the-journey — plenty  of-grain 


suppeteret, cum proximis civitatibus 
might-be-on-hand, with the-nearest states 
pacem et amicitiam confirmare. 
peace and — friendship to-establish. 
2. NOTES. 


1. maximas: (4) What does it limit? (4) For force of pre- 
ceding quam with it, cf. XXX. N. 8. (c) What is the gender of 
the adj. maximas, and of what decl. is it? What is the gender 
and decl..of maximum (a form of the same word) in XXX.? Cf. 
also the neut. ea XXX. with the fem. eam XVII., and the masc. 
eds VII. What do these examples show about the gender of adjs. 
and prous.? 

2. facere: (4) for its form, cf. coómere XXX. ; ©) it completes 
the meaning of cónstituérunt XXX. 

3. in itinere: (a) note that in is sometimes Yee 0n. 
(^) What, judging from the ending, is the case of itinere, and 
what its declension ? 

4. suppeteret: (a) mode, tense, number? (4) What is its con- 
jugation? Cf. XXX. N. 9, c; Obs. 4. (c) What is its subject? 


166 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


(d) it denotes a state or condition, rather than an act; note its 
translation. 

9. pacem: (a) stem pàc- ; (4) the nom. is formed by adding -s to 
the stem; pacs = pax; cf. Orgetorigis XXX. x. 1. 

6. cénfirmare: (a) for form and conjug., cf. comparare XXX. 
(P) Of what does it complete the meaning? (c) What are its 
objects ? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Third decl. stems in -c, like those in -g, form their nominatives 
by adding s. The cs thus formed is equivalent to zx. 

2. Since the same adjective must agree with nouns of different 
genders, the Lat. adj. is inflected for gender as well as for case and 
number. So, too, with most pronouns. 

3. When the masc. and neut. of an adj. are of the 9d decl, the 
fem. is always of the 1st declension. 

4. Many Latin verbs express state or condition rather than action. 
Such verbs are usually translated by English phrases, not by single 


words. 
4. VOCABULARY. 

l. amicitia, friendship. 5. itinere, abl. sing. neut., Jour- 
9. cónfirmáre, fo strengthen, es- ney, route, march. 

tablish, encourage, affirm. 6. pax, fem. (pácis, gen.), peace. 
3. cdpia, plenty, a supply; in | T. sémentis, fem., a sowing, 

plur., forces, troops. planting. 
4. frümentum, grain. 8. suppetere (sub and petere), 


£o be on hand, to be in store. 


EXERCISES. 


l. Decline together so that the adjs. will always agree with the 
nouns; (2) maximus numerus; (4) maxima sémentis; (c) ma- 
ximum iümentum; (7) proxima civitas. (¢) Write all the forms 
you know of cónfirmáre; (/) suppeteret. 


LESSON . XXXI. 167 


2. Conversation, Answer in Latin the following questions : — 

Cüius auctoritate Helvétii permovébantur ? 

Quibus rébus addüceébantur ? 

Quae ad proficiscendum pertinébant ? 

Quot (Low many) iümenta et carros coémérunt ? 

Ctr (why) quam maximas sémentés fecerunt ? 

Quibuscuin civitatibus pàcem et amicitiam cdnfirmabaut ? 

Qui Helvétiis proximi incolebant ? 

3. (a) It-came-to-pass because-of-the-influence of Orgetorix, that 
the Helvetians possessed a very-great supply of-grain. (4) It was 
very-easy, since they surpassed all in-courage, to wage war upon 
their neighbors. (^) The Gauls whom they have determined to 
surpass are not-at-all (least) hemmed-in by the character of the 
country. (7) The highest mountains are nearest the province. 
(e) The very-wide river divides the Gauls from the Germans. 

4. (a) The greatest wars were-being-waged in Gaul. (6) He 
contends with all the forces of the Helvetians. (c) They establish 
friendship with the state nearest the Rhine. (4) They-were-estab- 
lishing friendship with their ueighbors, so-that they-inight-have peace 
on their march. (¢) The greatest possible number of carts were- 
being-prepared so-that they-might-go-out with plenty of grain. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The equivalents of x. 2. The translation of the superlative. 
3. The translation of quam with the superlative. 4. The decl. of 
adjs. 5. The masc., fem., and neut., of proximis in nom. singular. 
6. In nom. plural. 7. The translation of suppetere. 8. Of copia 
iu the plural. 9. Of in. 10. English derivatives from words in 
this Lesson. 


168 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XXXII. 


L. TEXT. 
Ad eas rés conficiendas biennium 
For — these things  to-be-accomplished | two-years' -tume 
sibi satis esse düxérunt: in tertium annum 


Jor-them enough to-be they-thought: for the-third — year 


profectionem lege confirmant. Ad eas rés 
the-departure by-law they-fir. For | these things 
conficiendas Orgetorix  deligitur. Is sibi 


Lo-be-accomplished  Orgetorix — is-chosen. He upon-himself 
legationem ad civitates suscépit. 
an-embassy to the-states took. 


2. NOTES. 


1. e&s: (a) case, number, and gender? (6) What part of speech | 
in this instance? Cf. eam XVII. (c) for other genders of the - 
same case, cf. eós VIL, ea XXX., and XXXI., Obs. 2, 3. 

2. rés: case, and why? For another form of same word, cf. 
rébus XXV. 

3. ad eàs cénficiendas, fo or for these things to-be-accomplished or 
completed,’ freely translated, fo accomplish these things ; for form and 
translation of cónficiendàs, cf. ad efféminandós animos VII. n. 8. 

4. sibi; irreg. dat. plur. ; cf. accus. plur. s& IV. 

5. satis; here an indeclinable adj. limiting biennium. 


1 The writer is aware that the translation here given may be fairly questioned, 
but thinks it better to give an explanation to the beginner which may be modified 
later, than to give no explanation at all, — the alternative often adopted in books 
for beginners. 


LESSON XXXII. 169 


6. düxérunt, they-led, they-drew, they-thought ; for the connection 


between leading or drawing, and thinking, cf. the Eng. expression to 


draw an inference; also a train of thought, suggesting the fact 
that our thoughts are coupled together and drawn out like the cars 
of a train: (a) for form aud tense, cf. cénstituérunt XXX.; the 
tense in both cases is the past indefinite, but the Lat. has but one 
form for the past indefinite and the present perfect (in the same 
voice, number, and person), and the name “ perfect’ is given to 
this form;! cf. XIX. N. 9. (4) What ending is common to 
düxérunt and cénstituérunt? What, then, is the ending of the 
pf. ind. act., third plural? (c) Note that the Eng. idiom in this 
instance allows the preceding esse to be translated by an Eng. inf., 
though it stands after a verb of thinking; cf. E. G. 68, c and d. 

1. in tertium annum: (a) What is the more usual translation of 
in with the accus.? Cf. in partes |. What is it translated here? 
(^) Cf. the accus. sing. masc. tertium here with accus. sing. fem. 
tertiam III., and cf. also XXXI. n. 1. 

8. lége: (a) What, judging from the ending, is the case and num- 
ber? Cf.abl. plur. légibus IV. (4) Judging from Orgetorigis XXX. 
N. 1, what is the nom. sing. of lége? (c) Four kinds of abls. used 
without a prep. have already been met; examples are virtüte X., 
abl. of respect; finibus XII., abl. of separation; Garumna XIV., 
abl. of means; rébus XXV., abl. of cause; note the ling. prep. 
used to translate each. — (7) Which of these four classes of abls. 
seems most appropriate for l8ge in this sentence? 

9. déligitur: (4) act. or pass. voice? Cf. continétur XIV.; 
(4) tense and conjug.? Cf. dividit V., and also XXIX. 2, 3. 

10. suscépit: («) for tense, cf. f&cit XIX.; (4) its subject? 
direct object? (c) the indirect object 1s sibi, himself, for-himself, 


: upon-himself; the same form sibi (4, above) is translated for-them 


1 Tt is unfortunate that we are obliged by convention to use the name “ perfect” 
for a tense which in the vast majority of cases is not perfect at all. This constant 
misuse of the word “ perfect will obliterate, in the pupil's mind, its true meaning, 
unless frequent drill in tense distinction is given on the basis of E.G. 41. If this 


| drill is given, the pupil will be able to use the Greek aorist and perfect intelligently 
_ when he reaches them. 


170 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER, 


or for-themselves; the pron. of which sibi is a case has the same. 
case forms in sing. and plur.; (7) we know that here it is singular 
in meaning because it refers to the subject of the sing. verb suscepit; 
above it referred to the subject of the plur. verb düxérunt ; cf. XII. 
N. 7. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The Latin has but one set of forms for the past indefinite and 
the present perfect tenses. These forms are said to belong to the 
** perfect " tense. 

2. The endiug of the pf. ind. act. 3d plur. (including the personal 
ending) is -érunt. 

3. The pron. of which sé and sibi are the accus. and dat. has the 
same case forms in the sing. and plural. This pron. always agrees in 
number and gender with some subject in the sentence in which it 
stands. We ascertain its meaning by reference to this subject. It 
is therefore called a reflexive (&endiug-back) pronoun. 

4. Abls. of means, respect, and cause are always used without 
Latin prepositions; the abl. of separation is often used without a 
preposition. The abl. of means is commonly translated by the 
English preps. with or dy, the abl. of respect by 2»; the abl. of 
separation by from (sometimes of). The abl. of cause is commonly 
translated by the words decause-of, on-account-of. 


4 VOCABULARY. 


l. annus, a year. 7. profectionem, accus. sing. 
2. biennium (bis, £iwice, and an- fem., a setting out, a de- 

nus), two years’ time, the parture. 

space of two years. 8. satis, adv. or adj., sufficiently, 
3. conficere (con and facere), enough. z 

to accomplish, complete. 9. suscipere (sub, under, and 
4. déligere, to choose from, select. capere), fo take from under- 
5. dücere, /o lead, draw, think. neath, to take up or upon, 
6. légati6nem, accus. sing. fem., to undertake. 


an embassy. 


LESSON XXXII. dT 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (4) Decline profectionem, omitting nom. sing. (6) Decline 
tertium annum in the sing. (c) Decline eà lége. (d) Write as 
many forms as you know of déligitur. 

2. (a) Cum Haeduis reliquisque civitatibus Helvétit pacem con- 
firmant. (6) Ad eas rés conficiendas Helvetii Orgetorigem, qui 
apud eos longe nobilissimus fuit, deligunt. (c) Ea, quae ad effémi- 
nandos animos pertinent, important. (d) Ea, quae ad proficiscendum 
pertinent, importantur. (e) Homines cupidos bellandi magnus dolor 
afficiebat. 

3. (a) Dücunt, düxerunt, dücebant. (+) E's persuasit ut omnes 
copias dücerent. (c) Ad omnés rés comparandas quattuor annos 
Helvétiis satis esse dücit. (47) Virtüte suis finitimis praestabant. 
(¢) Homines, qui in montibus incolebant, sibi ea susceperunt. 

4. (a) These (men) took upon-themselves an embassy. (4) A 
part of Gaul is separated from the Helvetians by-the-river Rhone. 
(c) Orgetorix was-leading his-own men to the war. (4) Their men 
were-being-led to the river. (^) The Helvetiaus, because they 
thought their boundaries to be narrow, determined to possess very- 
broad fields. 

5. (a) Orgetorix, influenced by the desire for kingly-power, was- 
preparing grain for the third year. (6) It has been said that they 
fix the departure for the third year. (c) This (man) prepares these 
things for himself. (7) The Helvetians surpass their neighbors in 
number of men. (2) The mountains keep the merchants from the 
Helvetian country. (/) The merchants are-kept-out by the moun- 
tains. (5) The Helvetians choose Orgetorix because-of-his-influence 
(auctóritàs). 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The ending of the pf. tense in the plur. active. 2. The double 
meaning of the so-called “perfect.” 3. The form of the reflexive 
substantive. 4. Where to look for the meaning of the reflexive 
pronoun. 5. Meaning of the word “reflexive.” 6. Four ways to 


od 


172 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


translate an abl. used without. a Lat. preposition. 7. Four kinds of 
ablatives. 8. A new meaning for the prep. in. 9. The literal and 
the free translation of ad eàs rés conficiendás. 10. The masc. and 
neut. corresponding to the form eas. . 1l. The meaning of dücere. 
12. Vowel change in passing from capit to suscépit, facere to 
fécit. 


LESSON XXXIII. 


l. TEXT. 


In eó itinere persuadet Castico, Catamantaloedis 
On this journey he-persuades Casticus, of-Catamantaloedes 


filio, Sequano, cüius pater regnum 
son, | a-Sequanian, whose father — the-kingly-power 
in Sequanis multos annos obtinuerat, et 
among the-Sequanians many years had-held, and 
a senati populi Romani amicus appellatus- 


by the-senate of-the-people Roman friend || had-been- 


erat, ut régnum in civitate sua 
called, that  the-kingly-power 2m state his 
occuparet, quod pater ante habuerat. 


he-might-seize, which (his) father before — had-Aad. 


2. NOTES. 


1. Casticó: for case, cf. civitati XX. Obs. 3. 

2. Séquanó; for case and also for that of preceding filio, cf. 
flümen V. aud E. G. 57. 

3. cüius, of whom, whose: (a) i has the sound of y in year; 
cf. coniürátiónem XIX., lira XXIV. (4) Between what two 


LESSON XXXIII. 173 


vowels does the letter i stand in cüius? Note that in Tira it is 
initial before the vowel u. The letter i in such positions becomes 
a consonant, and is pronounced like y in year; the endings. of 
cü-ius and totius, XXI. are, therefore, the same; (v) cüius is the 
gen. sing. masc. of the relative pron. qui XXIV.; the gen. sing. of 
is XXXII. is éius, and of hi IV. is hüius ; (4) antecedent of cüius ? 

4. obtinuerat: (a) What is the subject of this verb? Its object ? 
(^) note that multós annos limits the verb like an adverb, not an 
object; cf. milia XXVIII. and E. G. 60, 1. 

9. appellátus-erat: (7) note that these two words are taken 
together and trauslated like one word. (^) In what voice is the 
phrase had been called in the above translation? Cf. E. G. 40; 
(c) on reaching this verb the pupil will see that the preceding phrase, 
à senátü, is nore appropriately translated dy the senate than from the 
senate, as previous uses of à would lead him to translate it; (d) a- 
micus (the preceding word) is nom. like the subject pater, refers to 
the same person as pater, and is part of the predicate; cf. the case 
of Galli and qui in qui Galli appellantur I[II., aud also E. G. 
56, 3. 

6. ut — occuparet, that he might seize, or better, more freely, 
to seize; cf. E. G. 68. 7: (v) mode, tense, and conjug. ? Cf. XXIX. 
2, 3, and XXX., Obs. 3, 4. (4) How does the number of cecuparet 
determine the meaning of the preceding sua? Cf. XXXII. N. 10 
and Obs. 3. 

7. quod: (a) accus. sing. neut. of the relative pronoun. In what 
respects is it like id XXII.? (4) Distinguish it from quod, the 
conj., Jecause, XI.; (c) antecedent ? 

- 8. habuerat: (v) cf. with obtinuerat, above. What similarity 
of form do you notice? (6) What English word is used to translate 
each? What, jude ng from the translation, is the tense of each? 
Cf. E. G. 41. (v) What is the conjug. of each? Cf. obtinére 
XIIL, habére XXVII. What is the vowel & of the inf. changed 
to in the forms of these verbs (denoting completed action) in this 
Lesson ? 


174 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The vowel i between two vowels or at the beginning of a word! 
before a, e, o, or u, becomes a consonant, is pronounced like y in 
year, and is often written j. 

2. The perfect stem, upon which as a base all tenses of completed 
action in the active voice are formed, may be found in the 2d conju- 
gation by changing the final vowel of the present stem to u. 

3. The past perfect ind. act., often called the pluperfect, 1s formed . 
upon the perfect stem, and has (at least in the 2d conjug.) the tense 
sign -era-. 

4. Two new irregular forms of the relative pronoun have been 
discovered: cüius, the ven. sing. of all genders, and quod, the nom. 
and aecus, sing. neuter. 

§. In Latin, as in English, exteat, or duration, of time is expressed 
by the accusative. 

6. In Latin, as in English, the predicate noun or adj. agrees with 
its subject in case. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


]. amicus, a friend; cf. ami. 6. mult.us, -a, -um, much ; 
citia, friendship, XXXI. plur. «any. 

2. ante, adv. and prep. with 7. occupare, to seize, to take 
accus., before. possession of. 

3. Casticus, a Sequanian chief- 8. pater, father. 
tain. 9. populus, people. 

4. Catamantaloedés, Cata- | 10. Rómànus, adj., belonging to 
mantaloedis, gen., a Gal- the Romans, Roman, also 
lic name. a noun, a Roman. 

5. filius, sov. ll. senátü, abl. sing. masc., a 


body of old men, a senate. 


1 The component words of a compound are here treated as separate words ; 
cf. con-iürationem. 


LESSON XXXIII. 175 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline together civitate sua; (7) régnum suum. 
(c) Write all the forms you know of cüius in all genders. (d) Write 
all the forms you know of habuerat; (v) occuparet. 

2. (a) Haedui à senatt populi Romàui amici appellantur, (4) Pater 
Casticl regnum multos annos obtinebat. (c) Iu suo itinere Séquand 
nobili persuasit. (7) Multa régna quae à hominibus ndbilissimis 
occupata eraut in Gallia erant. (+) Muliae fuerunt civitatés quas 
occupare coustituerunt. | 

3. («) Caesar düxit Orgetorigem Casticd persuadére. — (7) Casticus 
auctoritate Orgetorigis adductus réenum occupare constituit. (c) Hi 
hoininés qui suis finibus Germáuos prohibuerant fortissimi fuerunt. 
(d) Ab Orgetorige Casticus inductus erat ut regnum occuparet. 
(e) Séquani, quorum finés sunt proximi, amid ab his appellàbantur, 

4. (a) It-came-to-pass that the-kingly-power was-seized by Casti- 
cus. (6) Orgetorix had-had many friends. (c) The friends of Or- 
getorix were many. (d) Orgetorix persuaded his friends to seize the- 
kingly-power iu their states. (¢) The country of the Sequaniaus is 
bounded by the great Rhone river. 

5. (a) They determined to wage war upon the nearest states, 
(b) Rivers rise in the mountains and flow into the ocezn, — (c) Peace 
and friendship are established by the Helvetians. (47) Orgetorix had 
the largest possible number of friends, so that he might seize the 
royal power of Gaul. (e) He thinks that his friends have great valor, 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The use of the consonant i. 2. The use of the perfect stem. 
3. The form of the perfect stem in the 2d conjugation. 4. The 
meaning of the word pluperfect. 5. The sign of the pluperfect tense. 
6. The difference between the act. and the pass. voice. 7. The 
difference between the predicate noun and direct object. 8. The 
difference between direct object and accus. of extent. 9. Construc- 
tions with persuad&re. 10. Difference between predicate noun and 
appositive. 11. Irreg. forms of qui, learned thus far. 12. Different 
translations of prep. in. 


176 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XXXIV. 


l. TEXT. 


In eo itinere persuadet Castico, Catamantaloedis filio 
Sequano, cüius pater regnum in Sequanis multos annos 
obtinuerat, et a senatü populi Romani amicus appellatus 
erat, ut régnum in civitate sua occuparet, quod pater 


ante — habuerat; itemque Dumnorigi Haeduo, 
and-alsa = Dumnorie — the-Haeduan, 


fratri Divitiaci, qui eo tempore principatum 
brother — of- Divitiaeus, who at-that time the-chief-place 


in civitate obtinébat ac maxime 
vit the-state was-holding and very-greally 
plébi acceptus erat, ut idem 
to-the-common-people acceptable was, that the-same (thing) 
condrétur, persuádet eique flllam suam 
he-mighl-lry,  he-persuades — and«to-him daughter his 
in matrimonium dat. 

an (into) marriage he-gives, 

2. NOTES. 


1. Dumnorigi: (4) a 3d decl. noun; what case, then? (4) for 
uou. sing., cf. Orgetorigis XXX. Nw. 1. 

2. fràtii: (a) a 3d decl. noun; case and why? (4) the nom. 
sing. is frater, like pater XXXIII, the genitive of which is patris. 
The nom. sine. masc. of nostra IIT. is noster; that of agrum 


XXIII. is ager. 


LESSON XXXIV. 177 


3. Divitiaci: (a) a 2d decl. noun. What then is its case? 
(2) Why is this case different from that of fratri, which has the same 
ending? (c) Cf. Dumnorigi Haeduo, fratri Divitiaci with a phrase 
of similar coustruction in XX XIII. 

4. maximé; for formation, cf. XXV. N. 4, Obs. 1; for meaning, 
cf. maximum XXX. 

9. plébi: (a) of the 3d decl.; what case, then? (7) for explan- 
ation of case, cf, VIII. N. 2 and E. G. 62, 2. (c) the nom. sing. is 
plébs, formed by adding -s, like civitàs and 1éx; cf. XXX. N. 1. 

6. erat; impf. ind. of the Latin verb meaning £o de; for other 
forms of the sume verb, cf., giving mode and tense of each form, est 
L, sunt VI., fuit XIX., esse XXI. 

4. idem, the-same (thing): (a) accus. sing. neut.; object of the 
deponent! verb cónáré&tur; (/) for the word ¢hing iu the translation, 
cf. the neuter ea, those (things), VII. 

8. persuádet: (4) for the use of the dat. Dumnorigi and the 
clause ut — cónáàr&tur with this verb, cf. the use of persuádet in 
XXXIIL ; (^) for best translation of ut — cdnarétur, cf, XXXIIT. 
N. 6. 

9. ei, to him: (a) dat. sing. masc. of is XIX; the same form is 
also found in the fem. and neut. ; (4) the saine ending -i (differing 
in quantity) is found in oui, the dat. sing. of the relative qui; 
(c) for translation, cf. E. G. 62, 3 and 46; (7) antecedent ? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. Stems in -b of the 3d decl, like those in -t and -g, form the 
nom. sing. by adding s. 

9. A few noms. in -er of the 2d and 3d decls. have no e in the 
other cases. 

3. The verb persuádére takes a dat. of the person who is per- 
 suaded, and a clause with ut and the subjunctive to express what the 
person is persuaded to do. Instead of this clause the English often 
uses an infinitive. 


1 For meaning of this word, see XXVIT., Obs. 4. 


? Pronounced as a monosyllable. 
12 


178 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. Collect from the text and arrange by genders all the forms 
which have been used of is, ea, id, and qui, quae, quod, and note: 
(a) that these forms are generally of the 1st and 2d decl.; (4) that 
the following have the endings of the 3d decl.: is, ex, cui, quibus, 
and quem, accus. sing. masc. (not yet used); (c) the following have 
peculiar endings : qui, as nom. sing. masc. ; quae, as nom. sing. fem. 
and nom. and accus. plur. neut. ; id, quod, eius, cüius.! 

5. As these prons. are difficult and yet the most frequently used in 
the language, the followinz points must be thoroughly mastered : 
(a) in both, the gen. sing., the dat. sing., and the dat. and abl. plur. 
have but one form for all genders; (6) quae, nom. sing. fem., is the 
same in form as the nom. plur. fem. and the nom. and accus. plur. 
neut.; (c) qui, noi. sing. mase., is the same in forin as noun. plur. 
masc.; (7) quam, accus. sing. fem., is the same in form as the adv. 


quam. 
4. VOCABULARY. 
l. àc, another form for atque, 9. Haeduus, a Haeduan, one of 
and, and also; it is used the Haedui. 
only before consonants. 10. idem, nom. and accus. sing. 
2. accept-us, -a, -um, pf. pass. neut., the same (thing). 
partic. (from accipere), | ll. item, adv., likewise, also. 
accepted, acceptable, 12. mátrimonium, marriage. 
3. cénatur, deponent, he tries. 13. maximé, very greatly, most, 
4. dare,” to give. especially; cf. maxim-us, 
5. Divitiacus, the name of a -a, -um. 
Haeduau noble, a friend to | 14. plébs, -bis, p/ebeians, common 
the Romans. people. 
6. Dumnorix, -igis,? the name | 15. principátum, accus. sine 
of a Haeduan. masc., leadership. 
7. filia, daughter. 16. tempore, abl. sing. neut. 
8. frater, -tris, óroíher. time. 


1 il is commonly used instead of eI in the nom. plural. 
2 The -a of the stem of dare is short by exception. 
3 The final letters of the genitive. 


| 


| 
] 
| 
| 


LESSON XXXIV. 179 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Declension of Dumnorigi; (^) fratri; (¢) Divitiacus ; 
(d) civitáte ; (v) plebi; (/) filiam; (y) filius. (4) Write all the 


! forms you know of obtinébat. 


2. (a) Divitiaeus et Dumnorix fratres fuérunt. (6) Orgetorix 
| Helvétius Dumnorigi Haeduo persuasit. (c) Divitiacus in civitate 
principátum obtinuerat, (d) Id hóc facilius eis persuüsit, quod 


| undique loci natürà Helvetii continentur. (e) Eius filia homini no- 


bilissimo data erat. 
3. (a) Patri persuásit ut amico nobili filiam in matrimonium 


| daret. (6) Imperio Galliae tertio anno potiri constituerant et bien- 


| nium eas res comparübant. (c) Dumnorix, cuius frater erat Diviti- 
/ acus, régni eupiditate inductus, principatum in sua civitate esse satis 
| Sibi minimé arbitrabatur. (d) Dumnorix Orgetorigis filiam, quae in 
— Helvetiis incolébat, in matrimonium düxerat. 


4. (a) He persuaded them to try the-same (thing). (4) The father 
of Castieus held the leadership many years in the territory of the Se- 
quanians. (c) Dumnorix had led in marriage out-of that state the 
daughter of Orgetorix. (d) At that time Casticus was a friend of 
the Helvetians. (^) These high-born (men), with-whom Orgetorix 
made the conspiracy, determined to possess the roval-power. 

5. (a) The Sequanians send ambassadors to Dumnorix the Hae- 
duan. (4) The men with whom Orgetorix had made a conspiracy were 


desirous of warring. (c) Those men who were seizing the kingly 


power in Gaul took the leadership upon themselves. | (7) Dumnorix 


was called friend by (ab) Orgetorix. (e) Divitiacus, who it has been 
said was the brother of Dumnorix, was a friend of the Roman people. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


. 1. Nouns aud adjs. with the nom. sing. ending -s. 2. With the 


nom. sing. ending -er. 3. Three uses of the case ending -X. 4. Like- 


ness in decl. of is and qui. 5. Number of times each is used in the 
text thus far. 6. Datives in text thus far. 7. The formation of the 
adverb. 8. Translation of neuter pronouns. 9. The appositive. 
10. The construction with persuádére. 


180 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XXXV. 


l. TEXT. 


Perfacile  factü esse — ilis . probat conata 
Very-easy in-doing (it) is to-them he-proves undertakings 


perficere, propterea quod ipse suae 
to-accomplish, on-account-of-this because himself of-his-own 


civitatis imperium obtentürus esset. 
stale — lhe-supreme-power about-to-hold he-was, 


2. NOTES. 


l. perfacile; neut. gender; cf. XXI. N. 1. 

2. factü, iu-doing, or more freely, to-do; a verbal noun from the 
verb facere XXXI. For its case and the reason for it, cf. lacü 
XXIV. x. 6, and X. N. 3. 

3. probat: (a) a verb of saying, using that term in its widest 
sense; for the preceding esse and its translation, cf. XXVII. N. 6, 
Obs. 5; (4) the preceding illis is a dat. used with it; Ae proves to 
them; cf. e dat, he gives to him, XXXIV. 

4. perficere : (4). What part of speech is perficere? Cf. E. G. 
20, 2. (4) Of what is it the subject? Cf. E. G. 51 and 68, e. 
(c) What is its object? (ad) What adj. limits it? 

9. ipse; a nom. sing. masc., limiting the subject of the verb 
which follows; cf. ipsorum IIL, ipsi XII. 

6. suae. How does the preceding ipse show the meaning of this 
word? Cf. XXXII. n. 10, Obs. 3. 

7. obtentürus: (4) a partic, agreeing with the subject of the 
following verb; cf. obtinére XIIL, obtinuerat XXXIII. (4) What 
is its object ? 

8. esset; impf. subj. 3d sing. of the irregular verb esse; cf. 


XXXIV. N. 6. 


LESSON XXXV. 181 


3. OBSERVATION. 
1. The Latin infinitive, like the English, is a noun which expresses 
action and may take an object. 
4. VOCABULARY. 


l. cónátum (conàtur, le (ries), | 3. perficere (per, throughly = 


a thing tried, an attempt, thoroughly, and facere), to 

undertaking. do thoroughly, io accom- 
2. illis, dat. plur., £o-/Aem, for- plish, finish. 

them. 4. probare, to test, prove, approve. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Perfacile factü est totius Galliae imperio potiri. (4) Perfacile 
factü erat couüta perficere. (c) Orgetorix Castico et Dumnorigi pro- 
bat perfacile esse ea facere. — (7) Ipse suae civitatis imperium obtentü- 
rus est. (e) Perfacile fuit Helvetios virtüte omnibus praestare. 

2. (a) Belgae ab himanitate provinciae longissimé aberant. 
(6) Dictum est Orgetorigem in sua civitate imperium obtentürum 
esse, (vc) Quà dé causa Helvetii ipsi bellum gerere constituerunt. 
(7) His xébus inducti  coniürationem — nobilitatis factüri sunt. 
(e) Probant ea cOnata esse perfacilia. 

3. (7) He is about-to-hold the-supreme-power in the Helvetian 

state. (4) Orgetorix was most-powerful among the Helvetians. 
(c) Orgetorix persuaded Casticus and Dumnorix to try to accomplish 
their undertakings. (4) Dumnorix, whose brother was a friend of 
the Roman people, was-trying the-same-thing. (e) Their state is 
about-to-hold the-leadership of Gaul. 
- 4, (a) These men at this time were acceptable to the-common- 
people. (6) So-that he-inight-persuade him, Orgetorix was-proving 
that the attempt was easy. (c) He determined to persuade the 
nobilitv in the largest possible states. (4) To seize the-whole-of 
Gaul is not (nón) very-easy to-do. (¢) Orgetorix persuaded them 
to-finish these undertakings. 


182 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The form of the infinitive. 2. The use of the infinitive. 3. The 
construction after verbs of saying and thinking, 4. Different forms 
of the verb esse. 5. Three words connected with facere in form. | 
6. A new ending for a verbal noun. — 7. Different uses of the dative. 
8. The use of the word i¢ in the word-for-word parallel of this 
Lesson (cf. E. G. 51). 9. The words for royal-power and supreme- 
power. 10. About-to-hold. 


LESSON XXXVI. 


l. TEXT. 


Perfacile factü esse illis probat conata perficere, 
propterea quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtentürus 


esset: non esse dubium quin totius Galliae 
mot (it) s. doubtful that of-the-whole-of Gaul 
plirimum Helvetii possent; sé suis copiis 


most — the-Helvetians were-able ; he-himself with-his forces 


suoque exercitü illis regna conciliatirum 
and-with-his army for-them the-kingdoms about-to-win (1s) 


confirmat. 
he-affir ms. 
2. NOTES. 


1. esse; makes a statement after probat; cf. XXXV. x. 3. 

2. totius Galliae: (a) for form of totius cf. XXI. n. 6 and 
XXXIII. v. 3; (4) Galliae is a partitive genitive (cf. VI. N. 3) 
depending on the following adverb plürimum. 

3. possent: («) cf. the same fori in XXV.; it is an impf. 
subjunctive of an irregular verb. (4) By what adv. is it modified? 
(c) For free translation of the clause ending with this word, see p. 388. 


LESSON XXXVI. 183 


4. conciliatürum : (4) this partic. agrees with sé, the first word 
in the clause; (5) copiis aud exercitü are abls. of means (cf. X1V.. 
N. 2) with conciliatürum ; (c) the preceding illis is a dat. with it; 
ef. illis XXXV. (d) What is the direct object of conciliatürum ? 

9. confirmat: (4) cf. cénfirmare aud its meaning in XXXI.; 
in this case the verb means he establishes, or makes strong, by words, 
he affirms ; (6) esse is to be supplied with this verb. Why should 
an inf. be used after it? Cf. XXVII. N. 6, Obs. 5; (c) the preced- 
ing sé is the subject of this esse. (47) How does the number of 
cénfirmat show the meaning of sé, suis, and suo ? Cf. XXXII. 
N. 10, Obs. 3. 


3. VOCABULARY. 


l. conciliare, /o bring together, | 5. plürim-us, -a, -um (irregular 


to win over. superlative of multus), 

2. dubi-us, -a, -um, doubtful. very much, most. 

3. exercitü, abl. sing. masc., av | 6. plürimum, adv., very much, 
exercised and disciplined most. 
body, an army. 7. quin, conj, that, but that, 

4. nOn, adv., not. that not. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. Answer from hearing and in Latin the following questions : — 
Quibus nobilibus Orgetorix persuasit ? 
Quorum in finibus hi nobiles incolebant ? 
Cüius frater fuit Dumnorix ? 
Quid ut facerent Orgetorix his persuasit ? 
Quam Dumuoriei dat ? 
Quid his probat ? 
Cir perficere conàta eorum perfacile fuit ? 
Qui principatum totius Galliae habent ? 
Cuius cóplae sunt regna conciliatürae ? 
9. (a) He-was-winning the kingdom for-them with his army. 


(b He wins their kingdoms for-himself. (c) The kingdoms are- 


, 


184 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


being-seized. (d) They seize the kingdoms which these Gauls had 
held. (¢) They think that they are the greatest men in Gaul. 

3. (^) By-means-of-the-cmbcssy these high-born Gauls were-being- 
won-over. (^) That was the embassy which Orgetorix undertook. 
(c) Orgetorix made a conspiracy so-that he-himself might seize the- 
kingly-power. (4) They seize the largest possible number of king- 
doms. (e) There was no doubt (it was not doubtful) that Orgetorix 
was-able to persuade many high-born Gauls. 


5. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The ending of tétius and cüius. 2. The meaning of possent. 
9. Of conciliatirum. 4. Of cónfirmáre. 5. Of sé in XXVII. 
6. Of sé in this Lesson. 7. Why this difference of meaning? 
8. English derivatives from words in this Lesson. 9. Construc- 
tion after verbs of saying and thinking. 10. Free trauslation of 
plürimum possent. 11. Meaning of the adj. tótus. 12. In what 
respect like that of reliquus (cf. X. N. 2). 


LESSON XXXVII. 


1. TEXT. 

Hac oratione adducti inter sé 
By-this speech influenced among themselves 
fidem et iüsiürandum dant et regno 
a-pledge | and an-oath — they-give and, the-kingly-power 

occupato, per tres potentissimos ac 
having-been-seized, through three very-powerful and 
firmissim6s populos totius Galliae Sésé 


very-strong peoples —of-the-whole-of Gaul (that) they 


potiri posse sperant. 
lo-be-imasters — are-able — they-hope. 


LESSON XXXVII. . 185 


2. NOTES. 


l. hac; abl. sing. fem. ; cf. hdc, abl. sing. neut., XXII. 

2. orátione: (4) What similarity of form between this noun and 
legationem XXXII.? (4) What, judging froin hae, is its gender? 

3. adducti ; cf. its form aud meaning with that of inductus XIX. 
and permoti XXX. xw. 2, Obs. 2. 

4. dant: (a) How does the number of this verb explain that of 
the preceding adducti? (4) What translation of inter sé seems 
most appropriate with this verb? See free translation, p. 388, and 
cf. the free trauslation of inter s8 iu IV. 

9. occupató: (a) note that this pf. pass. partic. is formed from 
the pres. iuf. occupáre by dropping -re, and by adding t and then 
the endings of the 2d decl.; (4) but in the 3d conjug. verb addü- 
cere the final e of the stem vanishes when the t is added ; cf. ad- 
ducti 3; (c) note that the phrase régné occupaté is grammatically 
unconnected with the rest of the sentence, as shown by the punctuation 
in the text above. Both words are in the abl. case; cf. XIX. N. 6, 
c and d. 

6. potentissimoós : (a) for ending -issimós cf. VI. N. 3 and N. 8; 
(5) for meaning of this ending in this instance, cf. altissimo XXIIT. ; 
(c) the nom. sing. masc. of the positive (cf. E. G. 26) is poténs. 
What is the gen. sing. of poténs (cf. XXIX. 2, 1 pars and Obs.), 
aud to what is the ending of the superlative added ? 

7. potiri; here followed grammatically by the gen. Galliae ; cf. 
| its more common use with the abl. in XXI. 

8. posse: (a) pres. inf. of the verb possent XXXVL ; (/) its 
subj. is sésé, another form for sé. 

9. spérant; a verb of thinking. How does it explain the mode 
and translation of posse ? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The pf. pass. partic. may always be formed in the Ist conjug. 
| by adding t and case-endings of the 1st or 2d decl. to the pres. stem. 
2. The pf. pass. partie. may very often be formed in the 3d conjug. 


186 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


by adding t (sometimes s) and the case-endings of the 1st or 2d decl. 
to the pres. stem less e. 

3. The superlative of adjs. in -ns is formed by adding the ending 
-issimus to the gen. sing. less the ending -is. 


4. VOCABULARY. y 
l. fidem, accus. sing. fem.,/a/£, | 4. Oratione, abl. sing. fem., « 
a promise, a promise of pro- speech, oration. 
tection, protection. 5. per, prep. with accus., through. 
9. firm-us, -a, -um, firm, strong. | 6. potens (in form a pres. par- 
3. iüsiüarandum (really — two tic. from posse ; cf. oriens 
words, the noun iüs and XVI), powerful. 


the partic. iürandum), az | 7. spérare, to hope, expect. 
oath. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline oratióne so far as you can. (7) Decline adducti 
in all genders. (c) Decline together rágnó occupato; (4) poténs 
populus. (¢) Write all the forms you know of sperant. | 

2. (a) Sibi ea regna conciliat. (6) Régna, quae Galli multi obti- 
nuerant, ab Orgetorige occupautur. (c) Potentissimi populi exercitü 
màáguó sé regnis totius Galliae potiri posse spérant. (7) S6 omnia 
regna occupatirds esse arbitrantur. 

3. (a) Imperio conciliato in alias partes finium copiae dücéban- 
tur. (^) Ea legatione quam ille suscepit trés Galli nobilés concilia- 
bantur. (c) Orgetorix coniürationem fécit, ut ipse quam maximum 
numerum regnorum occuparet. (4) Ad amicitiam confirmandam! 
inter sé fidem et iüsiürandum dabant. (v) Amicitiam cum finitimis 
confirmare conantur. 

4. (a) Influenced by these speeches, the men give a promise to 
one another. (4) The speeches of Orgetorix influence many high- 
born Gauls. (c) By-his-speech that (man) influences the nobility. 
(d) The nobility, being-intluenced by the speech, persuaded the- 


1 Qf. ad eas rés cónficiendàs XXXII. wv. 3. 


LESSON XXXVIII. 187 


common-people to wage war with their neighbors. (+) Because they- 
were-wandering widely, they thought that they had very-narrow 
boundaries. 

5. (a) Orgetorix, by whose speech the Sequanian and Haeduan 
were-being-influenced, was very-rich. (6) Casticus seized the kingdom 
which his father had-held. (c) The kingdoms which they hope they 
. are able to possess are not far distant. (4) The Haeduans, Sequa- 
nians, and Helvetians were very-powerful peoples. (e) The state 
was-giving the-leadership to Orgetorix. | 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. All the forms we have had in the text of the pron. hae. 
2. The genitive of poténs. 3. The superlative of poténs. 4. Two 
meanings for this superlative. 5. The formation of factus from 
facere. 6. Of spérátus from spérare. 7. The voice of spératus. 
8. The meaning of inter sé 9. Two cases used with potiri. 
10. The forms posse, possent and poténs. 


LESSON XXXVIII. 


REVIEW. 


Lessons XXX.-XXXVII. 


l. TEXT. 
CaesaR's “Gatiic War,” Book L, Chapter 3. 


Follow strictly all the directions given under ** Text " in IX, 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Inflection of nouns and adjectives. — Review once more the 
inflections in XXIX. 


188 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 
Singular. 
Masc. Fen. Neut. 
Nom. duct-us ! duct.a duct-um 
Gen. duct-i duct ae duct-i 
Dat. duct.ó duct-ae duct 6 
Accus. duct-um duct-am duct-um 
Abl. duct 6 duct à duct-ó 
Plural. 
Masc. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. duct-i duct-ae duct.a 
Gen. duct-órum duct-árum duct-6rum 
Dat. duct-is duct-is duct-is 
Accus. duct-ós duct.às duct-a 
Abl. duct-Is duct-is duct-is 
Singular. 
Nom. léx ? pléb.s* pax ? pater? 
Gen. lég-is pléb-is pac-is patr-is 
Dat. lég i pléb-i pác i patr-i 
Accus. lég-em pléb-em pac-em patr-em 
Abl. lég-e pléb-e pác-e patr-e 
Plural. 
Nom. lég-és pléb-és pác-és patr-és 
Gen. lég-um pléb-ium pác-um patr-um 
Dat. lég-ibus pléb-ibus pac-ibus patr-ibus 
Accus. 1ég-és pléb-és pac-és - patr-és 
Abl. lég-ibus pléb-ibus pac-ibus patr-ibus 


For the comparison of adjs. in -ns see XXXVII. Obs. 3. 


1 For explanation of decl., see XXXI. Obs. 2, 3. 


2? XXX. Obs. 1. 


8 XXXI. Obs. 1. 


5 XXXIV. Obs. 1. 
5 XXXIV. Obs. 2. So also the 2d decl. noun ager, agri, agró, agrum, etc. 


LESSON XXXVIII. 189 


2. Inflection of pronouns. 


Sing. Sing. 
Masc. Fen. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. i-s? e-a i-d qu-i qu-ae qu-od 
Gen. 6-ius é-ius é-ius cii-ius cü-ius ci-ius 
Dat. e-i e-i e-1 cu-i? cu-i cu-i 
Accus. e-um e-am i-d qu-em qu-am qu-od 
Abl. e-ó e-à e-ó qu-6 | qu-à qu-ó 
Plur. Plur. 
Nom. ii(e-1i) e-ae e.a qu-i qu-ae qu-ae 
Gen. e-órum e-drum_  e-órum qu-Orum qu-arum qu-d6rum 
Dat.  e-1s,ids e-Is,i-is e-is,iis qu-ibus qu-ibus  qu-ibus 
Accus. e-63 e-às e.a qu-ós qu-às qu-ae 


Abl. e-i5,i-1s e-is, iis e 15, i is — qu-ibus qu-ibus qu-ibus 


3. Inflection of verbs. Review the verb forms in XXIX. ; the 
following have been learned in addition. 


lst Conjug. 2d Conjug. 3d Conjug. 
habu-erünt ? 


Pf. ind. act. 
Plpf. ind. act. 


habu-erant 4 


Iufs. occupa-re?  habé-re® diice-re® 
Gerunds occupa-ndi® habe-ndi diice-ndi 


Pf. pass. partic. oceupat-us’ duct-us’ 
pass. p 


4. Use of cases. (a) Use and translation of the abl. without a 
prep, XXXII. Obs. 4. (6) Duration of time, XXXIII. Obs. 5. 
(c) Predicate noun, XXXIIT. Obs. 6. 

5. Use of verbs. (a) Translation of verbs expressing state or 
condition, XXXI. Obs. 4. (^) Past indef. and pres. pf, XXXII. 
Obs. 1l. (c) The use of the inf, XXXV. Obs. 1. (47) Use of ut 
with the subj. after persuadére, XXXIV. Obs. 3. 


1 For explanation of is and qui, see XXXIV. Obs. 4, 5. 
2 To be pronounced as one syllable. 

3 XXXII. Obs. 2, and XXXIII. Obs. 2. 

4 XXXIII. Obs. 3. 5 XXX. Obs. 3, 4. 

6 XXX. Obs. 7. 7 XXXVII. Obs. 1, 2. 


190 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. Miscellaneous. (a) Use of quam with the superlative, XXX. 
Obs. 6. (+) Meaning of sé and suus, XXXII. Obs. 3. (c) The 
consonant i, XXXIII. Obs. 1. 


3. WORD REVIEW. 


Follow the directions given under * Word Review " in IX. 
The last eight lessons contain the following new words : 


VERBS. 
lst Conjugation. 9d Conjugation. 3d Conjugation. 
1. conatur permovére 1. addücere 
2. comparare 2. coémere 
3. conciliare 3. conficere 
4. confirmàre 4. constituere 
5. dare 5. deligere 
6. occupare 6. dücere 
7. probare 1. perficere 
8. spérare 8. suppetere 
9. suscipere 
Nouns, PRONOUNS, AND ADJECTIVES. 
lst Declension. 2d Declension. 3d Declension. 
1. amicitia l. acceptus 13. Haeduus 1. auctoritas, fem. 
2. copia 2. amicus 14. illis 2. Catamantaloedes 
9. filia 9. annus 15. iümentum 3. Dumnorix 
4. biennium 16. matrimonium 4. frater 
Unclassified. 5. conatum 17. maximus 5. itinere, neut. 
l. exercitü 6. carrus 18. multus 6. legationem, fem. 
2. fidem 7. Casticus 19. numerus 1. oratione, fem. 
3. idem 8. Divitiacus 20. plürimus 8. pater 
4.jiüsiürandum 9. dubius 21. populus 9. pàx, fem. 
5. principatum 10. filius 22. proficiscendum 10. plébs, fem. 
6. senatü 11. firmus 23. Romanus 11. potens 
13. frümentum 12. profectionem, 
(em. 


13. sémentis, fem. 
14. tempore, neut. 


LESSON XXXVIII. 191 


ADVERBS. PREPOSITIONS. | CONJUNCTIONS. 
l. item 4. plürimum l. ante ]. ac 
2. maxima 5. quam 2. per 2. quiu 
3. non 6. satis 


4. EXERCISES. 


l. Conversation. — Answer in Latin the following questions : — 
Qua re Helvetii permoti sunt? 

Quae ad proficiscendum pertinebant ? 

Quae coémunt ? 

Cur quam maximàs sémentés fecerunt ? 
Quibus cum civitatibus pacem confirmant ? 
Quem in annum profectionem confirmant ? 
Quis ad eas rés conficiendàs déligitur ? 
Quid. is suscépit ? 

Quid eà legatione perfécit ? 

Quid Castico et Dumnorigi confirmat ? 

Qui sunt trés populi potentissimi Galliae? 
Quid Orgetorix eos facere posse confirmat ? 


2. Write in Latin. — The Helvetians were preparing beasts-of- 
burden, carts, and grain, for their departure, because they thought 
they could all go-out (exire) from their narrow boundaries into 
broad fields in the third year (abl., cf. eo tempore XXXIV.). They 
chose Orgetorix, who is the highest-born and richest among them, 
to get things ready. This (man) prepares things not for the Helve- 
tians, but (sed) for himself and his high-born friends. He made a 
conspiracy of the nobility in his own state, in-order-that he might 
seize the kingly power, and. persuaded his friends Casticus and Dum- 
norix, who were living in neighboring states, to try the-same-thing. 
They hope that they will win (are-about-to-win) the royal power in 
three states by-means-of-the-army of the Helvetians. 


192 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XXXIX. 


l. TEXT. 


Ea rés est Helvetiis per indicium enüntiata. Moribus 
suls Orgetorigem ex vinculis causam dicere coegerunt. 
Damnatum poenam sequi oportébat, ut igni cremaretur. 


To the Teacher. The word-for-word parallel, though still given on p. 382, 
and still to be used as directed under “ Suggestions for Teachers," will no longer be 
given under * Text" in the Lessons. The pupil, henceforth, should be taught to 
translate the text for himself. But let the teacher see to it that the text is mas- 
tered in the order of the original, and not by finding first predicate, then subject, 
etc. A plan by which this may be accomplished is suggested in Appendix A, to 
which teachers are referred. The “ Notes” of all later Lessons are adapted to the 
plan there suggested (see p. 390, Appendix A). 


2. NOTES. 


Appendix A ccntains all necessary notes on the above text. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The ending -i is sometimes found as the ending of the abl. sing. 
in 3d decl. nouns in -is. It is almost always used as the ending of 
the abl. sing. in 3d decl. adjs. in -is. 

9. The ending -1 is the ending of the pres. inf. pass. of the 3d con- 
jug.; -rI, the ending of the same inf. in the 1st, 2d and 4th conjuga- 
tions. In the 3d conjug. the final e of the stem disappears before -1. 

3. The 4th conjug. is distinguished by the characteristic letter -7. 

4. Stems ending in -8 form both the nom. sing. and the accus. 
plur. by adding s, the abl. plur. by adding -bus. 

5. In a Latin clause the relation of words, and hence the sense, re- 
main in doubt, as a rule, until the last word is reached. This last 
word is very frequently a verb. 


LESSON XXXIX. 198 


6. In getting the sense of a Latin sentence, every new word tells us 
something about the words which precede or the words which follow, 
or hoth. It is likely to throw light both backward and forward. 

7. In Latin an object almost always stands before its verb and very 
frequently stands before the subject. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Masc. and fem. endings 

ofadjs.in-is. . . . A.& G.? 84, levis. H.? 154, tristis. 
2. Characteristics of the four 

conjugations . . . . A.&G.122 anda. H. 201. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. coégérunt, they compelled, 8. oportet (found only in 3d 


they collected, or they have person sing.), i£ is neces- 

compelled or collected. sary, wt behooves. 
2. cremare, fo burn. 9. poena, punishment, penalty. 
3. damnare, /o condemn. 10. sequi, pres. inf. of a deponent 
4. énüntiàre, /o say ont or open- verb, £o follow ; pf. partic., 

ly, to make known. seciitus, having followed. 
5. Ignis, masc., fire. 11. vinculum or vinclum, ¢hat 
6. indicium, formation. which binds, hence, a rope, 
7. mOribus, abl. plur. masc, chain, fetter. 


customs, manners, character. 


1 [t will be noticed that here for the first time the “ Grammar Lesson” is 
made a distinct part of the work of the student, with references to standard Latin 
Grammars. The facts contained in the references under this heading are usually 
the same as those previously stated in the ** Observations." The form of statement 
is often different. This book may be used either with or without a grammar. 
Those who do not wish to use the grammar may find it best to have pupils occa- 
sionally write out in a blank book, kept for the purpose, paradigms or syntactical 
statements not so fully given in the ** Observations." 

2 i, e. Allen & Greenough's Lat. Grammar, edition of 1888. 

8 i. e. Harkness's Lat. Grammar, edition of 1881. 


18 


194 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline indicium. (4) Write all the forms you know 
of est. (c) Write all the forms you know of crem4rétur. 
(4) Decline igni. (e) Decline moribus suis together in every case 
except the nom. singular. 

2. (a) Enüntiant Orgetorigem coniürationem facere.l,. (7) Ex 
vinculis eum causam dicere oportet. (c) Moribus Helvétiorum dam- 
nàtos? igui cremari oportebat. (47) Fiébat ut ed anno frater Divi- 
tiaci principatum obtinéret. (¢) Finés sunt in multàs partes divisi. 

3. (2) Dumnorix Haeduus, cui Orgetorix filiam in maàtrimo- 
nium dat, plébi acceptus est. (4) Iu eorum civitatibus regna occu- 
pare cOnabatur. (c) Multos homines poena sequitur. — (7) Dicunt 
pàcem cum proximis civitàtibus ab Helvétiis confirmari. (¢) Carros 
Helvétii coegerunt et arbitrabantur hós iimentis düci posse. 

4. (a) They hope that they can obtain the power of their states 
by-means-of-the-army. (4) Considering (in-proportion-to) his high- 
birth (nobilitás), Orgetorix does not think that he possesses very- 
broad fields. (c) The Gauls, whom he persuaded to make a conspi- 
racy, were very-high-born. (7) They-make-known to-the- Helvetians 
that thing which Orgetorix did. — (^) The customs of the Helvetians 
are not acceptable to-condemned-men. 

5. (v) The punishment, which was overtaking Orgetorix, was very- 
great. (6) Orgetorix says that it is necessary to seize these states. 
(c) Many (men) had-been-burned (cf. appellátus erat XXXIII.) 
by-fire. (d) They say that punishment must overtake Orgetorix. 
(e) Orgetorix pleads his cause in chains, because he has made a con- 
spiracy. (f) In-our time and in our boundaries men very seldom 
plead their own causes. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The ending of the pres. act. inf. in all conjugations. 2. The 
endings of the pres. pass. infinitive. 3. Two new uses for the end- 


1 [t is suggested that some of these Lat —Eng. sentences be reserved for sight 
reading. They are well adapted to this, since they contain no new forms or con. 
structions. 

2 Here a noun, — condemned men, the condemned ; note the masc. ending. 


LESSON XL. 195 


ing -i. 4. Five uses of the ending -%, 5. The 4th conjugation. 
6. Three cases of & stems. 7. Why a verb helps us in determining 
the meaning of a noun in the same clause, ending in -is or -ibus. 
8. What the Latin word-order does for us. 9. What it does not do 
for us. 10. Two Helvetian customs. 11. How to say must. 
12. How to say /Ae-condemned or a-condemued-man. 


LESSON XL. 


LoOTEXTI. 


Dié constitütà causae dictionis Orgetorix ad iüdicium 
omnem suam familiam, ad hominum milia decem, undi- 
que coegit ct omnes clientés obaeratosque suds, quorum 
magnum numerum habebat, eodem condüxit: per eos, 
né causam diceret, se eripuit. 


2. NOTES: 


l. dié cónstitütà causae dictionis : (a) dié, o» the day; cf. 
tempóre XXXIV.; both are in the abl. case. What similarity in 
their translations ? What would you call this use of the ablative? For 
other uses of the abl. without a prep., cf. XXXII. N. 8; (^) What 
difference in the quantity of the final e in this word and in such 
3d decl. abls. as orátione XXXVII.? This word is declined like 
rés XXXIX. What, then, is its nom. sing. ? (c) for cónstitütà, cf. 
cónstituérunt XXX. and XXXVIL Nn. 5, Obs. 2; (7) dictionis is 
a gen. depending on dié, while causae depends on dictionis. For 
free translation of the phrase ending here, see p. 388. 

9. ad hominum milia decem : (7) ad means here aout. What 
isits object ? Does this object follow immediately ? For order of 


1 The pupil must not forget that much information, additional to that in the 
Notes, is contained in the Vocabulary of the Lesson. 


196 {INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


words, cf. in eórum finibus XII. ; (4) for use of gen. hominum, cf. 
milia passuum XXVIII. ; (c) observe that the words at the head of 
this note are joined by the sense into one group; so, too, with the 
words at the head of 1. Find, in preceding ie examples of 
similar groups of words. 

3. coégit, he collected: (a) cf. the meaning of the : same verb in 
XXXIX.; (4) note that both this form and coégérunt XXXIX. are 
in the pf. active. What is the difference in their number? How is 
this difference expressed by the endings? Say in Latin they made, 
they persuaded ; ct. fécit XIX., persuasit XX.; say he determined, 
he led ; cf. constituerunt XXX., daxérunt XXXII. 

4. condüxit: («) pf. ind. act. 3d sing., 3d conjug.; (6) pres. iuf. 
act. condücere (cf. dicere XXXIX.), pres. stem düce-; (c) pf. 
stem inay be found by cutting off -it in pf. iud. act. 3d sing. (thus, 
condüx-it), or by adding -s to the pres. stem less characteristic e ; 
thus, dücs- = düx-; cf. XXXI. N. 5; (4) the supine? stem may be 
found by cutting off the ending of the pf. pass. partic. or supine (thus 
induct-us XIX.), or by adding -t to the pres. stem less e ; (e) cf. 
facere XXXI., féc-it XIX., fact-à XXXV., and note that the pf. 
stem is in this word formed in a different way. 

5. n8 . . diceret, in-order-that he might not plead: (a) the single 
word né means in order that not or simply that not, but in translating 
a sentence, the zo£ contained in its meaning is separated from the 
(hat; see above translation; (6) cf. ut cópia suppeteret XXXI. 
and its translation. What is the mode of both diceret and suppe- 
teret? What seems to be the difference of meaning between ut and 
ne? 

6. &ripuit: (a) the pf. stem here has the form of what conjugation ? 
Cf. XXXIII. N. 8; (6) for ending -it, cf. 3; (c) antecs. of prece- 
ding eós and sé? (d) it will now be seen that n8 — diceret expressed 
the PuRPOsE of the action designated by éripuit. In like manner 
ut copia suppeteret XXXI. expresses the purpose of cónstitu- 
érunt sementés quam maximis facere ; cf. E. G. 69, 3 and 5. 


1 So called because the base of the supine, a verbal noun of which we had an 
example in fact XXXV. 


LESSON XL. - 197 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Every form of the verb must have as its base some one of the 
three stems, — pres., pf., or supine. 

2. In any conjug., the pres. stem may be found by cutting off -re 
of the pres. inf. act., the pf. stem by cutting off -it of the pf. iud. act. 
3d sing., and the supine stem by cutting off -us of the nom. sing. 
masc. in the pf. pass. participle. | 

3. The stems of the 3d conjug. must in many cases be memorized. 
It is well, however, to remember that the pf. and supine stems may 
often be found by oue of two methods: (4) by addiug to the pres. 
stem less e, -s for the pf. stem and -t for the supine stem, or (4) by 
adding -t as before for the supine stem and by changing the first 
vowel of the pres. stem, and droppiug the characteristic vowel, for the 
pf. stem ; ! with the last method, cf. Eug. fall, fell, fallen, and E. G. 
35, 1. 

4. The pf. ind. act. 3d sing. is formed iu all conjugs. by adding -it 
to the pf. stem; the 3d plur. by adding -érunt to the same stem. 
Cf., for pres. ind. act. of the 3d conjug., XXX. Obs. 5 

5. The abl. sing. of noun stems in -& has the same form as the 
stem; cf. XXXIX. Obs. 4. 

6. The time at which anything happens is expressed by the abl. 
without a prep. Cf. XXXIII. Obs. 5. 

4. PunPOsE is often expressed in Lat. by ut with the subjunctive 
when the purpose is affirmative, by né with the subjunctive when 
the purpose is negative. 

8. In the Latin as in the English sentence, words are arranged in 
groups, the words of which should be closely connected in thought. 
When read aloud, the words in the same group E be ashe 
together, almost like one compound word. 

9. Te are often interposed between a prep. and its noun. 


1 It is not asserted here that the pf. stem is formed from the pres. stem. The 
statement simply suggests to the beginner an easy and practical method of finding 
the pf. stem when the pres. stem is known. The introduction of the verb stem, on 
which no form of the verb is directly based, would be confusing and unnecessary, at 
this point. 


198 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON 


1. Time at which or when . . A&G. 256. H. 429. 
2. Purpose clauses . . . . A'& G. 317. H. 497 and II. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. cliens, a client, dependent. |. éripere, 8ripuit,? éreptus, 

9. condücere, condüxit, con- to suatch away. 
ductus,! ¢o bring together, 8. familia, a body of slaves, 
to hire. household, retinue. 

3. decem, indeclinable numeral:| 9. iüdicium, a judgment, a trial, 
adj., £e. a court of justice. 

4. dictiónem (dicere), fem., a | 10. né, con)., that... not, not 
saying, pleading. to, lest. 

5. diés, masc. or fem., day, time. | 11. obaerátus, one bound (o ser- 

6. eddem, adv., £o the same place. | vice for debt, a debtor. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. Write all the forms you know of (4) cónstitütà ; (6) condüxit ; 
(c) habébat; (4) &nüntiátà ; (e) dictionis; (^) dié. 

2. (a) Omnis éius familia ad itidicium condücebatur. (4) Orge- 
torix, quod nobilissimus erat et ditissimus, magnum clientium nu- 
merum habébat. (c) Arbitrantur eum hominum quam maximum 
numerum condücere. (47) Dumnorix Haeduus, cui Orgetorix filiam 
in mátrimonium dat, régnum occupare conatur. (^) Eum ad iüdi- 
cium, ut causam diceret, düxerunt. 

3. (a) Familia Orgetorigis, quam ad iüdicium condüxit, maxima 
fuit. (4) Clientium obaerátorumque quam maximum numerum coé- 
git. (c) Orgetorix, né igni cremarétur, hos obaeratds coégit. 


1 The pres. inf. act., pf. ind. act. and pf. pass. partic. of all 3d conjug. verbs will 
be given in order to show the three stems ; cf. Obs. 2 above. 

? Note that this verb has an inf. of the 3d conjug., but that the pf. agrees in 
form with that of the 2d conjugation. Some other peculiarities will be explained 
later. 


LESSON XL. 199 


(d) Magna ex parte finium Helvetiorum clientes Orgetorigis ad hoc 
- iüdicium contendébant. (e) Eo die ex Helvétiis sé éripuerat. 

4. (a) Orgetorix brought-together ten thousand men so-that he- 
might-be-able to-snatch himself away. (4) A great part of the clients 
and debtors of Orgetorix were (was) many miles distant from court. 
(c) At the appointed time the forces of these men try the-same-thing. 
(d) They appoint the day for (of) the pleading of the case. | (v) He 
himself had in Gaul three thousand very-brave men. 

5. (a) That fact was made-known on the third day. (6) He per- 
suaded his clients to follow him to the trial. (c) All these clients 
rescued (snatched away) Orgetorix. — (d) They tried to condemn Or- 
getorix so-that they might burn him with fire. (e£) Many condemned 
(men) used to be burned (were-being-burned). 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The three stems. 2. How to find them. 3. Their formation 
in the 3d conjugation. 4. The endings of the pf. ind. active. 
5. Stems in -&. 6. Time at which. 7. Time how long. 8. Purpose 
in Latin. 9. Purpose in English. 10. Grouping words to give 
the sense. 11. Order in ad hominum milia. 12. Peculiarity 
of decem. 13, Two meanings of diés. 14. Meaning of familia. 
15. Of n&. 


Im 
jit 


aul 


eet 


j 


ftu 


a 


GarLIc Corns such as were struck by powerful nobles, like Orgetorix. Many 
of them, like those above, contain the name of the noble who issued them and the 
figure of a wild boar, the symbol of liberty and war; cf. the American eagle. 


200 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XLI. 
l TEXT: 


Cum civitás ob eam rem incitáta armis iis suum 
exsequi coónàrétur multitüdinemque hominum ex agris 
magistratiis cogerent, Orgetorix mortuus est; neque 
abest suspicio, ut Helvetii arbitrantur, quin ipse sibi 
mortem consciverit. 


2. NOTES. 


1. Cum; here a conj. meaning when; cf. XII. v. 1. 

2. civitas: for decl., cf. civitati XX., XXIX. 2. Observations. 

3. incitata: (a) How is it formed and from what verb? Cf. 
occupat6 XXXVII. N. 5; (4) it limits civitas. What does this 
fact show about the gender of civitas? All nouus in -tàs are of 
this same gender. 

4. exsequi; for explanation of form, cf. sequi XX XIX. 

9. cónàrétur: (a) for mode, tense and voice, cf. the same form in 
XXXIV.; (4) its object is itis, a neut. noun, which we had before | 
in the compound word iüsiürandum XXXVII. (c) What is its 
subject? (d) What kind of an abl. is the preceding armis? 

6. magistratis: (a) nom. plur. masc. of a -u stem; for other 
cases of -u stems, cf. cultà VI., occásum XVII., passuum XXVIII. 
(^) What is the quantity of u in the nom. plur. ending ? 

4. cOgerent: (7) mode, tense, and conjug.? (4) formed on the 
pres. stein of the verb (for pf. stem, cf. coégit XL. and XL. Obs. 8) ; 
(c) its subj. ? | its obj. ? 

8. mortuus est, ie died : (v) a compound tense of a deponent 
verb; (5) a pf. ind. pass. in form; (c) mortuus, a pf. partic. of 
peculiar form. In what respect is it peculiar? 

9. suspicio (or suspitio): (4) a nom. sing. fem.; (6) other 
words declined in the same way are septentridnés XV., coniürà- 


LESSON XLI. 201 


tionem XIX., dictionis XL. What is the gen. sing. of suspicio? 
What the nom. sing. of dictionis ? 

10. arbitrantur: («) What is its mode and tense? It is intro- 
duced by ut, which here means as. (6) What mode follows ut 
when it means that, so-that, or in-order-that ? 

ll. cónsciverit: (4) a pf. subjv. act.; (^) of the 4th conjug. in 
its form: cf. XXXIX. Obs. 3; (c) note that the pf. stem is formed 
by adding v, and that the tense sign is -eri-; thus, c6nsci-v-eri-t ; 
(d) study carefully the literal and free translations of the clause 
euding here. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. Stems in u have the following endiugs (including the u of the 
stem) so far as discovered in the text: accus. sing. -um ; abl. sing. 
-ü; nom. plur. -üs; gen. plur. uum. Such stems are said to be of 
the 4th declension. 

9. All 3d decl. stems in -ón drop the n to form the nom. singular. 

3. The pf. stem of the 4th conjug. may be found by adding v to 
the pres. stem. 

4. The conj. ut when followed by the ind. means as or wAen; 
when followed by the subjv., that, so-that, iu-order-that. 


4 GRAMMAR LESSON. 
l. The 3d decl.; stems in -ón. A. & G. 49, 1eo. H. 60, led. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


1. arma, nom. plur. neut., armor, 4. incitàre, to urge on, incite. 
arms. 5. itis, neut., right, law, jus- 
9. cdnsciscere,! cónscivit, tice. 
conscitus, to decree, to 6. magistratis, nom. plur., civil 
deterinine. offices, civil officers, rulers, 
9. exsequi, exsecütus, to follow magistrates. 
out, follow up, enforce. 7. mori, mortuus, fo die. 


1 [t should be noted that this verb, like éripuit XL., has forms of two conjugs. 


202 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


8. mors, fem., death. 10. ob, prep. with accus., ox 
9. neque or nec, adv. and account of. 
conj., and not ; neque . . . | 1l. suspicié (or suspitio), fein., 
neque, neliher . . . nor. suspicion. 


6. EXERCISES. 


l. (a) Magistrátüs coniüratione incitati itis civitàtis exsequi cónà- 
bantur. (5) Non dubium est quin Orgetorix multitüdinem hominum 
coegerit. (c) Orgetorix sibi mortem conscivit, n& civitàs iüs suum 
exsequerétur. (47) Dictum est civitatem incitàtam ob conata nobili- 
tatis multitüdinem hominum cogere. 

2. (a) Orgetorix, quem esse nobilem dictum est, mortuus est, 
(bh) Is, quod plébi maximé acceptus erat, maximam coniürationem 
fecit. (c) Eorum exercitus aliis exercitibus praestabat. (d) Per- 
suadet Gallo cüius pater a senatu amicus appellatus est. 

3. (a) A great number of men from the fields was-being-collected 
by (à) the magistrates. (6) The Helvetians think that suspicion 
is not absent. (c) On-account-of the death of Orgetorix, the nobility 
did not try to seize the-supreme-power of Gaul. 

4. (a) That state extended a hundred miles in length. (6) Orge- 
torix determined to bring together the largest possible number of 
men. (c) The magistrates affirm that it-is-necessary (for) Orgetorix 
to plead his cause. (d) It is not very-easy to compel the richest | 
man of the state to plead his cause. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The gen. of all nouns in -io. 2. The stem of the 4th declen- - 
sion. 3. The endings of the 4th declension. 4. Two meanings of 
ut. 5. Two meanings of cum. 6. The formation of the pf. stem 
in the 4th conjugation. 7. The sign of the pf. subjv. active. 
8. Gender of nouns in -tas and -tio. 9. The pres. and the pf. 
stems of the verb meaning £o compel. 10. The Lat. for £o commit 
suicide. 11. Eng. derivatives from words in this Lesson. 


LESSON XLII. 203 


LESSON XLII. 


Lo TEXT. 


Post €ius mortem nihilo minus Helvetii id, quod con- 
stituerant, facere conantur, ut & finibus suis exeant. 
Ubi iam sé ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, 
oppida sua omnia, numero ad duodecim, vicos ad quad- 
ringentos, reliqua privata aedificia incendunt.! 


2. NOTES. 


1. Post éius mortem; for order, cf. XL. N. 2., Obs. 9. 

2. nihilo minus, óy-uothing the-less, more freely, nevertheless : 
(a) What is evidently the case of nihilo? (4) for minus, cf. the 
same form in XXV. What means least? Cf. VII. 

3. quod: (a) What two meanings may this word have? Cf. its 
use in XXII. with that in XXXIII. (2) Considering that the 
neuter id stands just before it, what is its probable meaning here? 
Cf. the position of the neuter régnum. before quod in XXXIII., with 
that of id in this Lesson. 

4. constituerant; for tense, cf. habuerat XXXIII. N. 8; for 
PERFECT ind. 3d plur. of the same verb, cf. cénstituérunt XXX. 
What are the exact differences between these forms ? 

9. e finibus: (a) & is occasionally used as another form of ex . 
XLI.; (4) for other preps. taking the abl., cf. à, ab V., dé X., cum 
XI., in XIL., pro XXVII. 

6. exeant: (a) a pres. subjv.; cf. the impf. subjv. of the same 
verb in exirent XX. (4) How is the difference of tense indicated in 
| the word-for-word parallel, p. 382? Cf. E. G. 37, 3; (ce) the clause 

ending with this word is explanatory of the preceding id. 


1 Note the grouping of words in this text, and conform to it in pronouncing 
the text aloud. 


204 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


7. ad eam rem. Does the demonstrative (E. G. 24, 1) adj. 
precede or follow its noun iu this phrase? | Examine the text of the 
lessons thus far aud see if this is the rule. How is it with other 
adjectives ? 

8. paratos. What is the only preceding word with which this 
adj. may agree? 

9. arbitrati sunt: (a) Of what two parts is this compound 
tense. made up? Cf, dictum est XIII. and mortuus est XLI. 
(b) Judgiug from the translation in what tense is each? (c) How 
do you explain difference of ending iu arbitrat-I, dict-um, mortu- 
us? (4) Cf. appelláàtus erat XXXIII. N. 5. Judging from its 
translation, in what tense and what voice is this? Cf. E. G. 41. 
How does it differ in form from the pf. pass.? (e) How does the 
meaning of arbitráti sunt explain the meaning and use of the 
preceding s& and esse ? 

10. numero; for explanation of this abl., cf. virtüte X. N. 3. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. In Latin as in Euglish the tenses for completed action are 
formed in the pass. by combining the pf. pass. partic. and the verb 
be. 

2. In the pf. pass., the pres. tense of esse is combined with the | | 
pf. partic. ; in the plpf. pass. the impf. tense of esse is so combined. 

3. It must be remembered that, in these compound tenses, the 
partic. still remains an adj. and, hence, agrees with the subject of the 
verb in gender, number, and case. 

4. The following preps. have been used with the abl.: à or ab, 
cum, dé, é or ex, in, and pro. 

5. The demonstrative adj. precedes its noun; other adjs. very often 
follow their nouns. ! 


1 Some may expect the statement here that the adjective commonly follows its 
noun. In view of the fact, however, that in the first four chapters of Caesar the 
attributive adjective is used forty-one times before its noun and only nineteen 
times after, the statement would be out of place here. 


LESSON XLII. 205 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The tenses of completed 

action in passive . A.&G.126,9. 4H. 222, III. 2. 
2. Position of the demon- 

strative adjective . A. & G.344,6. 4H. 569, I. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


In this and later vocabularies the pf. ind. act. and the pf. pass. (or future act.) 
partic. of all 3d conjug. and of all irregular verbs will be given. The ending of 
the gen. sing. will also be given when the form of the nom. leaves the gen. in 
doubt. Only the nom. masc. of adjs. will be given. 


l. aedificium, a building. 7. parátus (pf. pass. partic. of 
2. duodecim (duo, /wo and de- parare) prepared, ready. 
cem), indeclinable, twelve. 8. post, prep. with accus., after, 
3. 6 (or ex) prep. with abl., | behind. 
out-of, from. 9. privatus, (belonging to an 
4. incendere, incendit, incén- individual, private. 
sus, to set fire to, to set on | 10. quadringenti, adj., in nom. 
fire. Note that it takes the plur, fowr hundred; cf. 
accus., not the dative. quadraginta, indeclinable, 
5. iam, adv., at this time (as forty. 


contrasted with the past or | 11. ubi, when, where. 


future), already, at last. 19. vicus,! a growp of houses, a 
6. nihilum, zothing; nihil, the village, street. 
indeclinable form, is more 


common. 


6. EXERCISES. 


l. (a) Declension of &ius iu all genders; (4) of quod in all 
genders. (c) Write all the act. forms you know of constituere ; 
(d) all the forms you know of the deponent verb conantur. 


1 Note that, of the thirty-nine words in this Lesson, only twelve, or less than 
one third, are new. 


206 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. Conversation. Answer in Latin the following questions : — 

Quibus coniüratio Orgetorigis enüntiata est ? 

Quid hi fecerunt? 

Quae poena apud. Helvetios damnatum sequebatur ? 

Quos ad jüdicium Orgetorix coegit ? 

Quot (how many) homines coegit ? 

Cür sé eripuit ? 

Quo tempore mortuus est ? 

Quid Helvetii facere constituerunt ? 

Feceruntne ! id ? j 

3. Write in Latin. When the conspiracy of Orgetorix was made | 
known, the Helvetian rulers tried to enforce the law. Orgetorix led 
to the trial many clients and debtors, of whom he had ten-thousand, 
At that time it happened that the rulers were not able to wage war 
with these men whom Orgetorix had collected. When they were 
preparing a great army, Orgetorix committed suicide, as the 
Helvetians think. Nevertheless, those-things which had to do with 
departure (cf. XXX.) were prepared, and many things in the 
Helvetian country were set on fire. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Cf. the tenses of the passive. 2. Difference between pf. pass. 
and plpf. passive. 3. Two differences in form between pf. act. 3d 
plur., and plpf. act. 3d plural. 4. Two uses of quod and how to 
distinguish them. 5. Why id 6niintiatum est, but ea rés énün- 
tidta est? 6. Preps. with ablative. 7. Cf. the order of words. 
in ea rés and populus Rémanus. 8. The Latin for nevertheless ; 
9. ready for; 10. forty and four hundred; 11. death and to die; 
12. that they-may-go-out and that they-might-go-out. 13. Two words 
for when. 


! The ne here appended is an enclitic used in asking questions. It needs no 
translation except the tone of voice. 


LESSON XLIII, 207 


LESSON XLIII. 


a ahd) St Be 


Ubi iam sé ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, 
oppida sua omnia, numero ad duodecim, vicós ad quad- 
ringentos, reliqua privata aedificia incendunt, frümen- 
tum! omne, praeterquam quod secum portatiri erant, 
combürunt, ut, domum reditionis spe sublata, paratiores 
ad omnia pericula subeunda essent, trium ménsium mo- 
lita cibaria sibi quemque domo efferre iubent. 


2. NOTES. 


1. omne: (a) this adj. limits frümentum. What then must be 
its gender? What two cases will its form and agreement admit ? 
For the same use of the ending -e,cf. perfacile XXXV.; (2) for 
the nom. and accus. plur. neut., cf. omnia XLII., milia XL. The 
abl. sing. is Ike igni XXXIX. 

2. praeterquam : (a) a compound word made up of praeter, 
further, and quam, than; (6) id and erat are understood after it, 
and the complete sense, with quod following, is, ald the grain further 
than that was which. 

- 8. s&cum ; cum, the prep., appended as in quibuscum VIII. 

4. portátüri: (a) for meaning, ef. conciliatürum XXXVI. 
(4) How does it show the meaning of the preceding sé in sécum? 
(c) What is its object ? 

5. spé sublata: (a) for form of spé. cf. dié XL.; (4) sublata 
serves as a pf. pass. partic. of the verb tollere; (c) for meaning and 
use of spé sublata, cf. régnó occupato XXXVII. 


1 This Lesson begins with this word; what precedes is inserted that the pupil 
may have the unbroken sentence before him. 


208 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. parátiorés, readier or more-ready : (a) What degree of com- 
parison, judging from the translation? Cf. E. G. 26. (b) What is 
the nom. sing. masc. ? Cf. mercatores VII. The fem. is the same 
as the masculine. (c) Judging from paratos XLII., what are the 
nominatives sing., masc. fem. and neut., in the positive? (4) Judg- 
ing from látissimó XXIII., what are the nominatives. sing., masc. 
fem. and neut., in the superlative ? 

7. ad pericula subeunda,! for dangers to-be-undergoue, or better, 
to undergo dangers: (a) cf. ad efféminandós animos VII. and 
ad rés cónficiendás XXXII. In what respects are these three 
phrases translated alike? (4) In what respect are efféminandés, 
c6nficiendas and subeunda alike in form? All three are parti- 
ciples, limiting the nouns which follow the prep. ad. What seems 
to be the time and voice of these participles ? 

8. essent: (a) for form, cf. XXXV. N. 8; (4) for syntax, cf. 
SENA Obs. 

9. molita: (a) a pf. pass. partic. with the form peculiar to the 
2d conjug.; so habitus, from habére XXVII. What is the quantity 
of the i before the t ? (4) What cases are possible for molita ? 

10. iubent: (a) used with the accus. quemque aud the inf. 
efferre, éhey-order each-one to-bear-out; (5) sibi refers to the subj. of 
efferre, not to that of iubent; (c) cf. the literal and free translations 
of the clause ending with this word. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. The ending -e is found in the nom. sing. neut. as well as in 
the abl. sing. of all genders. 

2. Neut. nouns and adjs. in -e have the accus. sing. in -e, the abl. 
sing. in -1, the nom. and accus. plur. in -ia. In other cases they are 
declined like nouns in -is. 

3. Adjs. having, in the positive, the nom. masc. endings -us and 
-is, form the comparative and superlative by substituting -ior and 
-issimus for these endings; for the comparison of adjs. in -ns, see 


XXXVII. Obs. 3; for comparison of advs., see XXV. Obs. 2. 


1 From subire ; it is somewhat irregular in form. 


LESSON XLIII. 209 

4. The future pass. partic. (called also the gerundive) is distin- 
guished by the letters -nd- between the pres. stem and the case 
endings of the 1st and 2d declensions. 

5. The pf. pass. partic. of the 2d conjug. may be formed by 
adding t to the pres. stem and weakening 6 to i. 

6. The prep. cum when used with the abl. of a reflexive or 


relative pren. is placed after the pron. and united to it. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. Adjs. in -is and -e. A. & G. 84, lev-is, -e. H. 154, trist-is, -e. 


9. Nouns in -e. . A. & G. 52, sedile. H. 63, mare. 
3. Comparison of adjs. 
in masculine . A. & G. 89. H. 162. 


4. Position of cum with 
personal and rela- 
A. & G. 99, e; 104, e. 


tive pronouns . H. 184, 6 ; 187, 2. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


tion, a month. 
molere, moluit, molitus, 


to grind. 


14 


l. cibárius, adj. pertaining 8. periculum, Jdhat which 
to food; cibària, neut. tests, a trial, danger. 
plur. as noun, provisions. 9. portare, /o carry. 
combürere,  combüssit, 10. praeterquam, adv., further 
combüstus, /(o Óurmnm up, than, beyond, besides. 
to consume. 1l. quemque, accus. sing. 
domum (accus. sing. masc.; masc., each one, every one. 
cf. XLI. Obs. 1,) fem., 12. reditió (redire, /o yo bach), 
« house, a home. fem., a going back, return. 
efferre, extulit, élatus, 13. spés (stem, spe), fem., Zope. 
irreg., £o bear out. 14. subire, subiit, subitus, 
iubére, iüssit, iüssus, /o irreg., to go under or 
order. near, to underyo. 
ménsis, masc. by excep- 15. tollere, sustulit, sublatus, 


imreg., to lift up, to re- 


move, to destroy. 


210 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decl. of omne in all genders. (6) Decl. of ménsis ; 
(c) reditionis; (/) periculum. (e) All the cases vou know of 
spé. (/) Write all the forms you know of habére. 

2. (a) Omnia oppida ab Helvetiis incendébantur. (7) Ubi iam 
parati fuerunt, carris, quós coémerant, multum frümentum portant. 
(c) Orgetorix non arbitratus est Helvetios post suam mortem exire 
conatüros esse. (/) Helvetii, aedificiis combüstis, alias domos occu- 
pare conantur. (e) Oppida eorum numeró duodecim igui cremata 
erant. 

3. (a) Omne frümentum quod in vicis erat eos combürere iubent. 
(4) Ad maximum periculum subeundum parati suut. (c) Omnia 
oppida sua combüsseruut ne domum redire posseut. (4) Vicos 
incendérunt ut spem reditionis tollerent. 

4. (a) All the grain was not carried with them. (4) (There) 
were four hundred villages in Helvetia. (c) The-cominon-people 
were very-readv to undergo all dangers. (4) The-beasts-of-burden 
which they had bought were dragging the carts. 

5. (a) Orgetorix was ready to make a conspiracy. (6) When 
Orgetorix died, the Helvetians tried to-go out-of their territory. 
(c) They. burned all their buildings, so-that the hope of returning 
home might-be-taken-away. (d) The-space-of-two-years was sufficient 
for preparing all these things. (¢) All hope was-taken-away when 
the buildings were set on fire. 


T @LOPICSVFORESTUDY, 


1. Two uses of the ending -e. 2. Difference between high-er and . 
lat-ior in the way the comparative ending is added to the positive. 
3. Explanation of sécum and quibuscum. 4, Irreg. superlatives 
of magnus and multus. 5. Translation of the fut. pass. participle. 
6. Free translation of a phrase containing ad, a noun, and a fut. pass. 
partic. limiting.the noun. 7. Parts of the verb with which sublata 
is connected. 8. All the forms of esse used thus far. 9. Differ- 
ence of conjug. as indicated in occupàató, habitus, and ductus. 
10. The Latin for meal. 11. A new free translation of the genitive. 


LESSON XLIV. 211 


LESSON XLIV. 


LOCDIEXT. 


Persuadent Rauricis et Tulingis et Latovicis finitimis, 
uti eodem üsi consilio, oppidis suis vicisque exüstis,üna 
cum iis proficiscantur. 


2. NOTES. 


1. Latovicis ; for case of this word, cf. civitati persuásit XX. 

2. uti; another form of ut XX. 

3. eódem : (a) here a pronominal adj., not an adv., which it is in 
XL.; (4) cf. also idem, accus. sing. neut., XXXIV., and note that 
the first part of the word is changed in inflection, while the syllable 
-dem remains unchanged. 

4. asi; the pf. partic. of the deponent verb ati; see Vocabulary. 
What is the meaning of tsi? . 

5. consilio; in the abl. case with asi, where we might expect the 
accusative. What other verb takes the abl. in the same way? Cf. 
EXT..N. 7. 

6. oppidis suis vicisque exüstis; with this phrase, cf. régnd 
occupato XXXVII. N. 5, c, and spé sublata XLIIT. In what re- 
spects are these three phrases alike? Cf. also XIX. N. 6, c and d, 
and E. G. 58. 
| 1. ana; this word is an adverb, not an adjective. 

8. proficiscantur: (a) for meaning, cf. proficiscendum XXX. ; 
for inf. and partic., see General Vocabulary at the end of this book ; 
(5) a pres. subjv. of a deponent verb of the 3d conjug., after uti; 
(c) the clause uti. .. proficiscantur expresses the purpose of 
persuádent, aud is in the accus. case as its direct obj., just as id is 
the direct obj. of persuasit in XXII. ; cf. E. G. 52; (7) What par- 
tie. agrees with the subject of proficiscantur? Distinguish carefully 
between the voice and agreement of isi and exüstis ; cf. E. G. 58, 2. 


212 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The abl. with the force of an obj. accus. is used after potiri and 
ati. 

2. In Latin as in English a noun may be used independently or 
absolutely. The ablative is the absolute case in Latin. When so 
used it is most frequently limited by a participle. 


3. A purpose clause is often a noun used as the object of a verb. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


]..Abl. absolute . . . A. & G. 255 aud a. H. 431 and 1, 4. 


2. The obj. clause of pur- 
poses sods S ELLO Sg3L. H. 498 and II. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


-- 


l. cónsilium, a plan. Raurici, the Rauricians. 


2. exürere, -üssit, -üstus, fo . Tulinegi, the Tulingians. 
. ana, adv., dogether. 


. uti; cf. ut XX. and XLLE 
. üti, üsus, /o use, adopt ; takes 


burn up. 

3. Latovicli, the  Laíovicians; 
for location, see the text and 
map. the ablative. 


CO -—) OC» Ct 


6. EXERCISES. 


l. (a) Helvétii, omnibus rébus paratis, proficiscuntur. (4) Per- 
suasérunt finitimis ut, vicis incensis, dé finibus exirent. (c) Rau- 
ridi oppida sua combürunt. (4d) Vici Tulingdrum exiisti sunt. 
(e) His ut eodem consilio ütantur persuddent. 

2. (a) Idem conati domo profecti sunt. (4) Fiebat ut Latovici 
quoque suds vicos exürerent. (c) Helvetii maximis agris potiri 
conantur. (d) Frümento combüsto, spés reditionis domum tollébatur. 
(€) M. Messala et M. Pisone consulibus, angustis ex finibus Helvetii 
quemque exire iubent. 


LESSON XLV. 213 


3. (a) The Helvetians are about-to-carry with-them meal (suffi- 
. cient) for-three months. (6) The Tulingians attempt the same-thing. 
(c) They collected all their forces so-that they-might-be-able to-wage 
war with their neighbors. — (7) They-order all the soldiers to-obtain 
their-own provisions. (¢) The Helvetians prove that it-is-fitting that 
the Latovicians adopt the same plan. 

4. (a) They used the carts which they had. (4) They are ready 
to burn the towns. (c) Much grain was burned by fire. (7) The- 
rest-of the grain was carried with them. (¢) They persuaded their 
neighbors to carry a part of their grain and to burn the-rest-of (it). 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Difference in form and meaning of uti and ati. 2. The names 
of peoples with nom. plur. ending -i in text thus far. 3. Construc- 
tion with persuadére. 4. The word meaning ¢he-same. 5. Mean- 
ing of the pf. partic. of a deponent verb. 6. The absolute construc- 
tion. 7. Different appropriate free translations for it. 8. The 
clause as a noun in the Latin text thus far. 9. Appropriate meaning 
for üti in this Lesson. 10. Exact location of the three tribes 
mentioned in this Lesson. 


LESSON XLV. 


ICPEAXT- 


Persuàdent Rauricis et Tulingis et Latovicis finitimis, 
uti eodem isi consilio, oppidis suis vicisque exüstis, ina 
cum iis proficiscantur, Boidsque,’ qui trans Rhénum in- 
coluerant et in agrum Noricum transierant Noréiamque 
oppügnarant, receptos ad sé socios sibi adsciscunt. 


lLesson XLV. begins at this point; for the text which precedes, see XLIV. 


214 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. NOTES. 


1. oppügnàrant: (a) this is a contracted form; the full form is 
oppügnav-era-nt. What letters does the shorter form omit? (6) for 
tense and sign, cf. habuerat XXXIII., incoluerant and transierant 
above; (c) oppügnav-era-nt is of the lst conjugation. How may 
the pf. stem be formed from the pres. ? 

2. receptós: (4) part of speech and translation? Cf. XXXVII. 
N. 5; (4) agrees with Boios, from which it seems to be widely sepa- 
rated ; if, however, the clauses qui... oppügnaàrant be read accord- 
ing fo the direction in XL. Obs. 8, aud as a parenthetieal statement, 
it will be seen that the partic. is closely connected with its noun. 

3. adsciscunt: (a) What is the direct obj. of this verb? (4) note 
that sibi is the indirect object and hence is in the dat. case; cf. E. G. 
62 and XXV. wv. 7. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The pf. stem of the Ist conjug. may be found by adding v to 
the pres. stem. 
2. The plpf. ind. act. is, in all conjugs., formed on the pf. stem, 
and has the tense sign -era-.! 
3. Forms based on the pf. stem of the 1st conjug. sometimes drop 
out ve (or vi). : 
4. VOCABULARY. 


l. adsciscere, -scivit. -scitus, ing to the Noricans, a peo- 
to take to one's self, unite. ple of what is now Western 
2. Boil, the Boians, a wandering Austria. 
tribe of Gaul and Germany ; | 5. oppügnàre, /o fight against, 
the modern Bohemians are to storm. 
descended from some of | 6. recipere, -cépit, -ceptus, /o 
them. take back, receive. 
3. Noréia, Noreia, town in what | 7. socius, an ally. 
is now Western Austria. 8. transire, transiit, transitus, 
4. NOricus, adj., Nor/c, pertain- to go across, to cross. 


1 When the & of this sign stands before the personal endings -t and -nt it is 
treated as short. 


LESSON XLV. 915 


5. EXERCISES. 


l. (a). Declension of qui; (6) agrum (cf. XXXIV. w. 2); 
(c) socios. (d) Write all the forms you know of incoluerant; 
(¢) oppügnarant. 

2. (a) Boii ab Helvétiis recepti sunt. (4) Boii, qui in Galliam à 
Germania vagati erant, amici appellàbantur. (c) Ager Noricus ab 
finibus Belgarum longé abest. (7) Noréia nou proxima finibus 
Helvetiorum est. 

3. (a) Helvetii; Boiis receptis, parati ad profectionem sunt. 
(b) Bons ut Rhénum irànsirent persuasérunt. (c) Id oppidum à 
Boiis oppügnatum erat. (4d) Frümentum trium mensium secum por- 
tavérunt. (¢) Boiis suum consilium enüntiaverant. 

4. (a) They-are-using the carts which — they-have-prepared. 
(^) Those who used-to-dwell (were-dwelling) across the Rhine, are 
dwelling iu Gaul. (c) Noréia had been stormed by the Boians. 
(d) The Boiaus, after-wandering ! in many territories and storming ! 
one large town, are at-length the allies of the Helvetians. 

5. (a) The Helvetians think it is fitting that Orgetorix be 
condemned. (6) They persuaded many thousand men? to depart 
with them. | (c) The Boians had-gone-back-and-forth through Gaul 
and Germany. (d) They did not persuade the Haeduans because 
they were friends of the Roman people. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


‘1. The pf. stem of the 1st conjugation. 2. Of the 2d. 3. Ot the 
3d. 4. Of the 4th. 5. Names of countries and towns ending in -a 
in text thus far. 6. The pf. ind. active. 7. The plpf ind. active. 
8. The pf. ind. passive. 9. The plpf. ind. passive. 10. Use of dat. 
in this Lesson. 11. Order of words in this Lesson. 12. Eng. 
derivatives from words in this Lesson. 


1 Use a partie. ; cf. XLIV. 
2 For thousand men, cf. a phrase in XL. 


216 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XLVI. 


l. TEXT. 


Erant omnino itinera duo. quibus itineribus domo ex- 
ire possent: ünum per Séquanos, angustum et difficile, © 
inter montem Iüram et flümen Rhodanum, vix quà sin- 
guli carri dücerentur; mons autem altissimus impende- 
bat, ut facile perpauci prohibére possent. 


2. NOTES. 


l. erant, there were; the Eng. expletive there (cf. E. G. 51) 
has no corresponding word in Latin. 

2. duo; limits itinera, ways; peculiar in form. What ending 
would you expect ? 

3. domo, /rom-home: (a) cf. the same word and its translation 
in XLIII. Is it usual to omit the Lat. preps. meaning zz and rou 
when speaking of places on the earth's surface? Cf. examples 
TX EL, - XITE; AVE XVIL XX XXII, XX SSR 
(6) Note that domum meaning home in the sense of fo-home is used 
in XLIII. without a prep., just as in Eng.; cf. E. G. 60, 2. 

4. possent: (a) for form, cf. XXXVI. N. 3. (6) Why is 
itineribus au abl.? What adj. limits it? Ch X. N. 1. (c) May 
any Latin word in this clause be properly omitted in translating into 
Enelish ? 

9. difficile ; a neut. sing. limiting, like the preceding ünum and 
angustum, the Lat. word for way to be supplied in thought; for 
decl., cf. omne XLIII. n. 1. 

6. qua; here an adv., meaning where, not a relative pronoun. 

4. ut . . . perpauci . . . possent, so that very-few could; 
(a) Does the clause express the purpose or the result of móns 
impendébat? Cf. E. G. 69, 3, 4, and 6; (5) the form of the 


LESSON XLVI. 217 


preceding facile allows it to be either one of two parts of speech. 
What are they? Cf. facile XXV., perfacile XXXV. Which is it 
here? (c) The obj. of the preceding prohibére is eds to be 
supplied. 

3. OBSERVA TIONS. 


1. The place ix which aud the place from which are regularly 
expressed in Latin by the abl. with a prep., when the place referred 
to is any locality on the earth’s surface. 

2. The Lat. accus. domum is usei as the limit of motion like the 
Eng. home, and the Lat. abl. domo, without a prep., often means 
from. home. 

3. RrEsurT, as well as purpose, is often expressed by ut (uti) 
with the subjunctive. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1, The place ex which 

and from which <A. & G. 258, and c, 1. H.425,1.; 412, I. 
2. The subjv. of re- 

SUR E urn. GI3IS, H. 500 and II. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. difficilis, d/fficult. 5. perpaucus, very tile; 
. 9. duo, irreg., £wo. in plur., very few. 
3. impendére, no pf. ind. 6. qua, adv., where. 
act. and no pf. pass. par- 7. singuli, adj. in nom. plur. 
tic., intransitive, to over- mase., one to each, one at 
hang. a time. 
4. omnino, adv., altogether, 8. vix, adv., with effort, with 
: in all. difficulty, scarcely. 


6. EXERCISES. 


.. 1. (a) Decline completely difficilis ; (/) angustum ; (c) singuli. 
| (d) Write all the forms you can of dücerentur; (e) prohibére. 


218 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. (a) Flümen quod sé posse transire spérabant, erat Rhodanus. 
(6) Nostra provincia Rhodano flumine continetur. (c) Quam 
maximus numerus carrorum itinere angusto inter flimen et montem 
dücébàatur. (4) Allobroges, quibuscum Romani contenderant, proximi 
Sequanis fuerunt. 

3. (a) Belgae longé aberant ut ad eos mercatores minimé saepe 
commearent. (6) Hoc itinere singulos carros dücébant. (c) Duo 
itinera ad occásum solis ducunt. (47) Multos carros, ut eis inultum 
frümentum portarent, comparabant. 

4. (a) Jura was the mountain which was-overhanging. (4) It 
happened that the Helvetians could go-out from home by these ways. 
(c) They thought that the high mountain was-overhanging. (47) They 
try to drag their carts to the river. (¢) The sun is higher. 

9. (2) They did not try at this time to-go-out by the narrow way. 
(6) It-was-necessary to drag the carts so-that grain might-be-at- 
hand. (c) The very-high mountain reaches from the lake to the 
river. (7) The noble-(man) whose death was made-known was the 
richest in his state. (e) For many days the carts were-being- 
dragged from the Helvetian boundaries into the country of the 
Sequanians. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. When to use a Lat. preposition. 2. When an Eng. prep. has 
no corresponding Lat. preposition. 3. The comparative frequency of 
preps. in English and Latin. 4. An Eng. expletive with no corres- 
ponding word in Latin, 5. A Lat. noun in the text with no 
corresponding word in the free Eng. translation. 6. Why the two - 
neut. singulars angustum and difficile have different endings. 
7. Why the 3d decl. accus. flümen does not end in -em like the 
3d decl. aceus. montem. 8. Two possible meanings for quà, so 
far as the form is concerned. 9. Difference in thought between a 
purpose and a result. 10. Similarity of meaning of per- and 
-issimus in perpauci and altissimus. 


LESSON XLVII. 219 


LESSON XLVII. 


dasa ep <b ep WA 


Alterum! per provinciam nostram, multo facilius 
atque expeditius, propterea quod inter fines Helvetiorum 
et Allobrogum, qui nüper pacati erant, Rhodanus fluit 
isque nonnüllis locis vado trànsitur. Extremum oppi- 
dum Allobrogum est proximumque Helvetiorum finibus 
Genava. Ex eo oppido pons ad Helvetios pertinet. 


2. NOTES. 


l. alterum, /4e other (way), the second; cf. inum XLVI. and 
ünà ... altera in XXIII. and XXIV. How does alterum differ 
in meaning from aliam II. ? 

2. multo facilius, easier by-much, much easier ; cf. nihiló minus 
XLII.: (a) facilius is here the neut. comparative of the adj., in the 
nom, case, What else might it be, so far as the form is concerned ? 
Cf. facilius XXII. What is the positive? Cf. XLVI. N. 7, 6; 
(5) for decl. cf. tempore XXXIV., the nom. sing. of which is 
tempus ; facilius, however, has a long o in the stem — faciliór-e — 
unlike tempore; (c) the nom. and accus. plur. of both end in -a; 
ef. the neuters ea VIL, cónáta XXXV., itinera XLVI.; (4) the 
gen. plur. ending is -um not -ium. (^) What is the nom. sing. 
mase.? Cf. XLIIL. Nn. 6. 

3. expeditius: (a) for degree of comparison and decl, cf. 2; 
(4) the nent. positive is expeditum. What is the superlative ? 
Cf. XLIIL. x. 6, d; (c) expeditum is, in form, the pf. pass. partic. of 
the 4th conjug. verb expedire. How is it formed? | Cf. occupáto 
XXXVIL, 1st conjug. ; molita XLIII., 2d conjug. ; adducti XXX., 
3d conjugation. How does the pf. partic. of the 4th differ from that 
of the 2d conjug. ? 


1 The pupil should review the text of the last Lesson to see how this text is 
connected with what precedes. 


2920 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 
pacati erant ; cf. appellátus erat XXXIII., and XLII. Obs. 
3 


is: (a) What is its antec. ? (6) Why is it that this masc. 
pron. must be translated by an Eng. neut.? Cf. XXIIL. N. 4, Obs. 7. 

6. locis; exceptionally omits the prep. ; cf. XLVI. N. 3 

7. transitur ; from the inf. tránsire, to go across, to cross, cf. 
exirent XX., trànsierant XLV., exire XLVI. 

8. pons; for decl., cf. orientem XVI. N. 6. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The adj. altera means the other, the second, one of two, while 
alia means another, one of any number. 

2. Neut. adjs. are compared with the endings -ius, comparative, 
and -issimum, superlative. The neut. comparative of the adj. is the 
same in form as the comparative of the adverb. 

3. The neut. comparative 11 -ius has -oris in the gen. ; some neut. 
nouns in -us have -oris. 

4. The pf. pass. partic. of the 1st and 4th conjugs. may be found 
by adding t and the case ending to the pres. stem; that of the 2d 
conjug. by doing the same and weakening the final & of the stem to i; 
that of the 3d, in many cases, by doing the same and dropping out 
the final e of the stem. 

9. The words loco and locis when used to express a place in which 
exceptionally omit the preposition. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. Alius and alter . . A. & G. 203, a. H. 459. 

2. Comparison ofadjs.in — * 
all genders |... « « A. & G.. 89. H. 162. 

3. Decls. of comparatives A. & G. 86, melior, H. 154, tristior, 
completa. coc f qu melius. tristius. 


4. Decl. of neut. nouns in 

-us, gen. -oris . . A. & G. 49, corpus. H. 61, corpus. 
5. Prep. omitted with 

locó and locis . . À.& G.258,/;, ]1. H. 425, IT., 2. 


LESSON XLVII. 221 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. Allobroges,! -um, the Allo- | 3. fluere, flüxit, fluxus, to flow. 
broges, a Gallic people; see | 4. Genava, Ge»eva, a town on 


map. Lake Geneva; see map. 

2. expedire, -pedivit, -peditus, | 5. nonnüllus, not none, some. 
4th conjug., £o set free from | 6. nüper, recently. 
something; the pf. pass. | 7. pacare, to pacify, to subdue. 
partie. is commonly used | 8. póns, masc. by exception, a 
without verbal force and bridge. 


means unencumbered, with- | 9. vadum, a ford, a shallow. 
out baggage, open. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline finés; (4) expeditius in all genders; (c) is in 
all genders. (4) Decline oppidum ; (e) pons. (/) Write all the 
forms you know of pacati erant. 

2. Conversation.” Answer in Latin the following questions : — 

Quot (how many) itinera € finibus Helvetiorum erant ? 

Cir ano itinere carri dücébantur singuli ? 

Quam per provinciam alterum dücit ? 

Cir id facilius est ? 

Quorum fines erant angusti ? 

Qui mons impendébat ? 

Quod flümen proximuin huic monti erat ? 

3. (a) The Helvetians were much braver than (quam) the Allo- 
broges. (4) At another time it happened that the Allobroges were- 
being-subdued. (c) Two? states were very-near so-that (only) the 
river, which was not deep, divided them. (7) Many were kept out 
by (à) few in that place. (+) They were trying to draw their carts 
by the easier way. 


1 Note that the e of the ending -es is short in this word. 

? [t should now be' easy for the pupil to answer these questions orally and with- 
out previously studying them. The teacher is advised in subsequent Lessons to 
frame others similar to them for exfempore conversation. 

? Here regular and of the 1st declension. 


222 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. (a) The Helvetians are more-fond of-warring than the Sequa- 
nians. (4) The highest mountains are not often very near to deep 
rivers. (c) The river which was called the Rhone is crossed by many 
fords. (4) The Helvetiaus tried to go out into the territory of the 
Allobroges in-order-that they might cross the Rhone by the fords. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Difference between masc. and neut. adjs. in the comparative ; 
2. in the positive. 3. To what decl. the comparative belongs; 4. the 
superlative. 5. To what are comparative and superlative endings 
added? 6. Latin for another, the other; "|. for nevertheless, much 
easier. 8. The similarity between pf. pass. partic. in the lst and 4th 
conjugations. 9. An exception to the rule for place in which. 
10. One for place from which. 


LESSON XLVIII. 


BR os i Oo se 


Allobrogibus sese vel persuasüros, quod nondum bono. 


animo in populum Romanum viderentur, existimabant, 
vel vi coactüros, ut per suos fines eos ire paterentur.' 


2. NOTES. 


1. persuásüros, about-Lo-persuade : (a) How does this word ex- 
plain the case of the preceding Allobrogibus? (4) it is a partici- 
ple. With what does it agree? (c) esse, of which the preceding 
sésé is the subj., is understood with it. 


2. vidérentur: (a) mode and tense, and voice? (5) note the | 


meaning of the verb in both act. and pass.; (c) the preceding boné 


1 The pupil must not forget to study the word-for-word parallel on p. 383. 


| 


LESSON XLVIII. 299 


animo is in the abl. case; with-good-mind, of-good-disposition, well- 
. disposed. 

.. 9. existimabant. How is the esse mentioned in 1, c to be trans- 
lated? Cf. XXVII. N. 6. 

4. coáctüros, about-to-compel: (a) from cogere, to compel; cf. 
cogerent XLI.; (4) esse understood, as with persuásürós above 
aud with conciliatirum XXXVI.; cf. E. G. 75, 1, (1). (c) What 
similarity in form between persuásürós, coáctürós, conciliaátürum 
XXXVL, portátüri XLIIL.? What two conjugs. are represented in 
these forms? How do they differ in form from pf. pass. parties. ? 
(2) In what respect are they alike in meaning? Are they act. or 
pass.? (¢) the preceding vi is an abl. ; cf. igny XXXIX. 

5. ut . . . paterentur: (a) for use of clause, cf. XLIV. n. 8, 
c. (5) Is the verb cógere always followed by an ut-clause? Cf. 
XXXIX. (c) What are the antecs. of the preceding suos and eos ? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. The fut. act. partic. of all conjugs. may be found by adding the 
letters ar and the case endings of the lst and 2d decls. to the supine? 
stem; or by inserting the letters -ür- before the case endings of the 
pf. pass. participle. 

2. The fut. act. inf. is found by combining esse with the fut. act. 
partic. ; this esse often omitted without affecting the sense. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. bonus, good. 6. vel, or; vel. . . vel, eather 
2. existimare (ex and aesti- AP Uf, 

i mare) fo estimate, think. 7. vidére, vidit, visus, to see; 
9. ire, ivit, itum, fo go. in pass., often, £o seem. 

4. nondum, "oí yet. 8. vis, fem., force, violence ; in 
5. pati, passus, £o endure, permit. plur. virés, strength. 


1 j, e, the base to which the endings of the pf. pass. partic. are added. 


994 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Write all the forms you can of vidérentur; (4) existi- 
mabant, (c) coáctüros. (d) Decline together suós finés. 

2. (a) Existimant sé régna conciliatüros esse. — (/) Enüntiàtum 
est flümen, quod esset proximum, sé vado tràusire posse. — (c) Fini- 
iimis ut eddem consilio üterentur persuasérunt. (4) Allobroges in 
ROmands, qui eds nüper pàcàverunt, bond animo nondum sunt. 

3. (a) Quod sé Allobrogibus persuadére posse arbitrabantur, hoc 
itinere profecti suut. (+) Populus Romanus Helvétios expeditiore 
itinere exire nón passus est. (c) Multi existimant Allobroges 
Helvetios ire passüros esse. (7) Dixerunt agros quós Allobroges 
obtinerent esse bonos. 

4. (x) The Helvetiaus thought that the Allobroges would allow | 
them to draw the carts through their territory. (4) They determined 
to compel the Allobroges to allow these wagons to cross the fields, 
(c) They tried to depart on the appointed day. (47) The town 
Geneva is very-near Lake Geneva. (¢) They collected all their (men) 
in-order-to go-out by the easier way. 

9. (2) Geneva, which is very-near the Helvetians, is very-far dis- 
tant from the towns of the Belgians. (6) After-trying (partic.) to- 
take-away the hope of-return, they persuade their neighbors. 
(c) These things tend to weaken minds. (4) They think that these-— 
things will weaken minds. (e) They did not think that a brave 
Roman would lead an army into Gaul. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. The ending -ürus. 2. Difference in the form of pf. pass. and 
fut. act. participle. 3. Difference in meanng. 4. The form and 
translation of fut. pass. participle. (Cf. XLIII. N. 7, Obs. 4.) 
5. A frequently omitted word in Latin. 6. Best translation of fut. 
act. infinitive. 7. Pass. meaning of vid&re. 8. Verbs meaning fo 
think. 9. Likeness in form between vis, vi and ignis, ignT. 
10. Noun clauses. 


LESSON XLIX. 


n2 
bo 
cn 


LESSON XLIX. 


LREEXT ty 


Omnibus rébus ad profectionem comparatis, diem 
dicunt, qua dié ad ripam Rhodani omnés conveniant. 
Is dies erat ante diem quintum Kalendas Apriles, L. Pi- 
sone, A. Gabinio consulibus. 


2. NOTES. 


1. dicunt, they appoint: (a) cf. the meaning of dictum XIII. 
and dicere XXXIX.; (4) for preceding phrase r&bus . . . com- 
paratis, cf. régnó occupato XXXVII. By what clause may it be 
appropriately translated ? 

9. quá di8 .. . omnés conveniant, /Aat-on-this day all may-come- 
together: (a) quà is equivalent to ut eà ; cf. X. N. 1, e and Obs, 3; 
for use of clause, cf. XL. N. 5 ; (4) for use of die, cf. di& XL.; 
(c) conveniant is a pres. subjv. of the 4th conjug.; note the 
characteristic i; cf. the pres.subjv. proficiscantur (XLIV.) of the 
9d conjug. How is each formed from the pres. stem? (d) for 
other 4th conjug. forms, cf. oriuntur, orientem XVI., exirent 
AX. potii XXI., afficiébantur XXVI., cónficiendàás XXXII., 
consciverit XLI., transitur, expeditius XLVII., ire XLVIII. 
Name each one of these forms and explain its formation. How 
does each differ from the corresponding form of the 3d conjug.? Of 
the Ist ? 

. 8. ante diem! quintum Kalendas Aprilés, a peculiar expression 
for diés quintus ante Kalendas Apriles, the fifth day before the 
April Oalends: (a) Aprilés is an adj.; (7) Kalendae, nom. plur. 
fem., is the Latin for the first day of the month; (c) the reckoning 


1 Note that diem is here masculine. What is the gender of dié 2? 
: 15 


226 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


is backward from the first day of the month instead of forward as 
with us; (7) in reckoning the time between two dates, both extremes 
are counted, thus: April 1, March 31, 30, 29, 28; the fifth day be- 
fore the April Calends is, therefore, March 28, not March 27, as our 
way of reckoning would make it. 

4 consulibus ; on the phrase ending with this word, cf. a similar 
phrase in XIX. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. The pres. subjv. of the 4th conjug. may be formed by inserting 
-a- between the characteristic and the personal ending ; that of the 
3d conjug. by changing the characteristic to a. 

2. In forms based on the pres. stem, the 4th conjug. is similar to 
the 3d ; the 4th conjug., however, always retains its characteristic 1, 
while the 3d conjug. loses or weakens its characteristic e in several 
places. 

3. In forms based on the pf. and supine stems, the 4th and 1st 
conjugs. differ only in their characteristic letters. 

4. Purpose clauses are often introduced by relative prons., which 
are then equivalent to ut and a demonstrative having the gender, 
number, and case, of the given relative. 

9. Dicere may mean /o say, to plead, or to appoint. The mean- 
ing of a Latin word varies with the context (7. e. the words in con- 
nection with it) just as that of an Eng. word varies. No Latin sen- 
tence can be even tolerably translated without attention to this fact. 

6. The Romans reckoned the days of the month backward instead 
of forward, and in reckoning the time between two dates counted 
both the day from which and the day to which. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Purpose clauses intro- 
duced by a relative A. & G. 317, 2 and N. under3. H.497,1.! 


1 Study examples. 


LESSON XLIX. 297 


5. VOCABULARY. 


1. Aprilis, adj. (probably from , 4. Gabinius, a Roman name. 
aperire, to open), of the | 5. Kalendae, -árum, the Cal- 
month of April, April. ends, the first day of a 

2. Aulus, a Roman first or indi- month. 


Or 


vidual name; generally re- | 6. Lücius, a Roman first name 
presented in Latin authors | usually represented by L. 
by the initial A. | 7. quintus, fi/th. 

9. convenire, -vénit,! -ventus, | 8. ripa, a bank of a river. 


to come together, to meet. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Give all the cases you know of rébus. (4) Write all the 
forms you know of dicunt; (c) conveniant; (d) comparatis ; 
(e) erat. (/) Decline profectionem. 

2. (a) Omnes rés ad profectionem comparatae sunt. (4) Sperant 
omnés constitütà dié ad ripam Rhodani conventüros esse. (c) Eo 
tempore L. Piso et A. Gabinius erant consulés Romani. — (4) Ut ad 
occásum solis proficiscerentur, omnés convenerunt. 

3. (2) Omnia ea quae ad proficiscendum pertinebant coacta erant. 
(4) Dudrum itinerum ünum perfacile, alterum multo difficilius erat. 
(c) Allobroges nón amici Romanis sunt. (7) Persuadent omni plébi 
ut tina dié ad ripam flüminis conveniat. (^) Déligunt eum hominem 
qui exercitum dücat. 

4. The Helvetians were neighbors to the Allobroges, who were 
not far distant from the Romans. The Allobroges were not well- 
disposed to the Romans because they had been recently subdued by 
(ab) them. The Helvetians think that the Allobroges will allow 
them to go through their territory and that the Romans cannot 
keep them out. For this reason they name a day for departure and 
prepare all things. 


1 Of the 4th ccnjug. only in the forms based on the pres. stem. 


228 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Likeness and difference in form of conveniant and proficis- 
cantur ; 2. potiri and sequi; 3. déligitur and transitur ; 4. com- 
parare and fre; 5. cónscivit and oppügnávit ; 6. occupatus and 
expeditus. 7. The free translation of every abl. absolute used in 
the text.thus far. 8. Examples in English of the variation in the 
meaning of a word because of a different context; e. g. “ the House 
of Representatives," “a brick house." 9. Two meanings for altis- 
simus ; cf. XXIII. and XXIV.; 10. confirmare ; cf. XXXI. and 
XXXVI.; 11. dücere ; cf. XXXII. and XLVI. 12. To what are 
the following relatives equivalent when they introduce purpose 
clauses: qui, sing.; qui, plur.; qué, quam, cüius ? 


GALLIC ARMS. 


Pick out the shields? The spears? The animal in the picture is carried on the top 
of a pole as a military standard. What is the animal, and what does it symbolize? Cf. 
the coins on p. 199; cf. also the Roman standard, p. 269. The four queer heads at 
the ends of tubes form the mouths of trumpets. 


LESSON L. 229 


h | LESSON L. 


REVIEW. 


Lessons XXXIX.- XLIX. 


The student who thoroughly masters the first fifty lessons of this book may 
congratulate himself upon having learned the most difficult things about the forms 
of the language. There is nothing else in the forms of the language so hard as 
the 3d declension, the 3d conjugation, and the decl. of pronouns, and nothing more 
necessary in using the language than a thorough knowledge of these three things. 
Remenber that you will pay dearly for any neglect in learning them thoroughly. 
Read the note at the head of Lesson IX. 


LIU LEX. 


Casar’s * GALLic Wan," Book I., Chapters 4, 5, 6. 
.1, 2, 3, 5. Follow implicitly the directions given in IX. under 
Belext, 1, 2,°3 and 5. 

4. Write out a grammatical analysis of the material of the text 
of Chaps. 4, 5, and 6, under the following heads: (1) noun, pronomi- 
nal and adj. forms, class'fying separately in both sing. and plur. 
(a) nom. forms, (4) gen. forms, (c) dat. forms, (7) accus. forms, 
(e) abl. forms; (2) verb forms, classifying separately, (4) pres. inds., 
(5) impf. inds, (c) pf. inds., (7) plpf. inds., (¢) pres. subjvs., 
Cf) impf. subjvs., (y) pres. infs., (4) pf. pass. partics., (7) fut. act. 
parties., (7) fut. pass. participles. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Inflection ! of nouns and adjectives. («) The abl. sing. of 
nouns and adjs. in -is, XXXIX. Obs. 1; A. & G. 84, levis; H. 154. 
tristis. (4) Stems in -e, XXXIX. Obs. 4, XL. Obs. 5. (c) Stems 
in -u, XLI. Obs. 1. (7) Stems in -ón, XLI. Obs. 2; A. & G. 49, 
led; H. 60,1eo. (^) Decl. of nouns and adjs. in -e, XLIII. Obs. 1, 
2; A. & G. 52, 84; H. 63, 154. (/) Comparison of adjs, all 
genders, XLIII. Obs. 3, XLVIT. Obs. 2; A. & G. 89; H. 162. 
(g) Decl. of neut. nouns and adjs. in -us, gen. -oris and -óris, 


XLVI. Obs. 3; A. & G. 49, 86; H. 61, 154. 
1 Review all the inflections in XXIX. and XXXVIIT. 


230 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. Verb stems. (a) Characteristic of the 4th conjug., XXXIX. 
Obs.3; A. & G. 122 anda; H. 201. (6) The three stems of the 
verb, XL. Obs. 1, 2. (c) The pf. and supine stems of the 3d 
conjug., XL. Obs. 8. (4) The pf. stem of the 4th conjug., XLI. 
Obs. 3. (e) pf. stem Ist conjug., XLV. Obs. 1. (/) Stems of 
different conjugs. compared, XLIX. Obs. 2, 3. 

3. Formation of verb forms. (a) The pres. inf. pass, XXXIX. 
Obs. 2. (^) Pf. iud. act., XL. Obs. 4. (c) Pf. aud plpf. pass., 
XLEII-Obs:1,27; 4,9 G126797 H^ 222 UI DLE 2 er 
XLII. Obs. 3; XLIII. Obs. 4,5; XLVII. Obs. 4; XLVIII. Obs. 1. 
(e) Plpf. ind. act., XLV. Obs. 2. (/) Dropping of ve or vi in pf. 
tenses, XLV. Obs. 8. (vy) Fut. act. inf, XLVIII. Obs. 2. (4) Pres. 
subjv. of 3d and 4th conjugs., XLIX. Obs. 1. 

4. Use of cases. (a) The time a£ which, XL. Obs. 6; A. & G. 
256; H. 429. (4) The place i or from which, XLVI. Obs. 1; 
A. & G 258 and c, 1; H. 425, I.; 412, I. (c) Exceptions to 
the above, XLVI. Obs. 2; XLVII. Obs. 5; A. & G. 258, f 1; H. 
425, IL, 2. (4) Preps. with abl., XLII. Obs. 4. (e) Abl. with 
potiri and ati, XLIV. Obs. 1. (^) Abl. absolute, XLIV. Obs. 2; 
A. & G. 255 and a; H. 431 and 1, 4. 

5. Use of verbs. (a) Purpose with ut and ne, XL. Obs. 7; 
A. & G. 317; H. 497 and II. (4) Obj. clause of purpose, XLIV. 
Obs. 3; A. & G. 331; H. 498 and 2. (c) Relative clause of 
purpose, XLIX. Obs. 4: A. & G. 317, 2 and N. under 3; H. 497, I. 
(d) Result clauses, XLVI. Obs. 3; A. & G. 319; H. 500 and II. 

6. Meaning of words. (a) Of ut, XLI. Obs. 4. (6) Of 
alterum and alium, XLVII. Obs. 1; A. & G. 203, a; H. 459. 
(c) Variation of meaning with context, XLIX. Obs. 5. (7) Meaning — 
of Roman expressions for the day of the mouth, XLIX. Obs. 6. 

1. Order of words. (a) Force of the last word, XXXIX. Obs. 
5. (^) Of every new word, XXXIX. Obs. 6. (v) Grouping of 
words, XL. Obs. 8. (4) Position of obj., XXXIX. Obs. 7. (e) Of 
prep, XL. Obs. 9. (/) Of demonstrative and other adjs., XLII. 
Obs. 5; A. & G. 344, b; H. 569, I. (y) Of the prep. cum, XLIII. 
Obs. 6; A. & G. 99, e; 104, e; H. 184, 6; 187, 2. 


LESSON L. 


| 


7-2. © e @ 9 @ eene | e + © 59 9 | Ipu-oonp e ^ © © € “eee 9 a ae! Men @ Ipu-euleJO | 
(‘furs *uob) spunsar 

D We f. sn-jIpedxa sn-jonp qs Nus sn-jrqeu cese DDR $n-]jeuro1o UTD Jd 

snpu-e-rpedxo snin-jIpedxoe V s el snin-jonp Lge SRE snin-jiqey SNPU-vIUdII SNAD-JVUIAD | “PN 

$e os sg gug-rpedxo Ar. dee sik aera Bor ert n men RM Ea | sade 

'sajdioi4ng 
3.209 Pod | osso snin-jtpedxo ‘es |esse snin-jonp ecg aes esso su. In-3Iq'[ 2 der: Me esso snin-j€UIOJIO | IN 
pees) o1-rpedxo ronp 91-00np 11-9qvq 91-9q BY LI-BUIOJO 91-BUI9JO | "SAU 
‘apopy aamuiyuy 

Ty. s Si ve ]-L19-Atpodxoa oo. we So «nie | «ese X. e Cane Oi exe INS Lue eive: "MUR UJ 

1n3-a1-tpod xo 4-a1-Ipodx9 | Inj-a1-30np j-9.-9onp | n3-e.-9qeq jqer-eqeu| .in3-91-EUIOIO j-91-&uro19 | fduy 

j 40j}-v-1pedxe }-e-Ipodxa 1nj-e-onp j-9-onp c o a d a Se hea EU Lo LY 'S94d 

‘apoyy aanoun(qngy 

3€10 sn-31pedxo 4-B19-AIpod xo 41a sn-3onp ]-€19-xup | yao Sn-j1quq ]-'&19-nq'*?q | 3€19 SN-JBUIIIO j-v19-Aeur9IO | /d]d 
jse sn-j1ped xo j-rArpedxe | 3s9 sn-joup Trxup | jso sn-31quq 1r nquQq| 359 sn-j€eurod9 Tr49*ureJo| V4 | 

In3-9q-9-rtped xo ]-9q-e-rpedxo | 1n3-eq-oonp ]-eq-9oup , 1n3-Eq-9qeq q-eq-aquy | 1nj-Eq-Buro1o j-9eq-quro19 |: fd 

Jn3-rped xo q-Ipedxa inj-ronp yup | 1nj-9quu j-9qeu Jn3-8UIO9J2 ]-UUI9JIO | "SA 

| 1 i 
apoJy 2avoipuf 
OAISSeq- 'eAnoy 'eAISSUq- ‘QATIVV “OAISSUG 'eAnoy 'OAISSUq 'eADnov 


‘NOILVOOLNOD HIS Q0,q “NOILVOOLNOD GUID 


‘NOILVONALNOD ANOOAS 


19] sni? peureo[ qi9A urmnerr 


\ 


‘NOILVDOALNOO LSHIQ 


eq} jo uiio0j ie[n3goi A19A9 re[nguis uOsIed piri ey} ur so[durexo Aq Surmoys | WIeIseIq — 


1d 
232 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


SUGGESTIONS AND QUESTIONS ON THE DIAGRAM. 


The supine, of which we have an example in facta XXXV., is 
found with a few verbs. 

Note that in the 4th conjug. the vowel e is inserted between the 
pres. stem and the tense sign. 

Remember that all the partics. having a masc. in -us have fem. 
and neut. endings also. | 

How does the 3d person plur. differ as a rule from the 3d sing. 
and what exceptions to this rule? 

Give in classified form the three stems of each conjugation. 

Give all the teuse signs. What signs and endings are the same 
for all conjugs.? : 

The pres. inf., the pf. iud. act., and the pf. pass. (or fut. act.) 
partic., since they are very commonly found and invariably show the 
three stems of the verb, may properly be called the principal parts 
(or the parts) of the verb.! 


3. WORD REVIEW. 


Classified alphabetical list of all the new words occurring in Chapters 4, 5 
aud 6, of Cazsar’s * Gattic War.” 
Let the pupil give the meaning of each word, and be prepared to decline every 
noun and adj. and to give the principal parts of every verb. 


VERBS. 
lst Conjugation. 3d Conjugation. 4th Conjugation. 
1. cremare 1. adsciscere 10. incendere l. convenire 
9. damnàre 2. cogere 11. molere 2. expedire 
9. énüntlàre — 3. combürere 12. mori 3. Ire 
4. existimàre 4. condücere 13. pati 4. subire 
5. incitàre 5. consciscere 14. recipere 9. transire 
6. oppignare (pf. conscivit) 15. sequi 
7. pacare 6. eripere 16. tollere (pf. partie. Irregular. 
8. parare 1. exsequi sublatus) 1. efferre 
9. portare 8. exurere Iul 


9. fluere 


l'These principal parts, though not the same as those usually given, will answer | 
the purpose equally well. The Ist pers. sing. of the pres. ind., which is usually | | 
included, is almost never found in Caesar, and in many cases does not show the | 
pres. stem. 


LESSON L. ' | 233 


2d Conjugation. 
1. impendére 2. jubére 3. oportet 4. vidére 


Nouxs, Pronouns, AND ADJECTIVES. 


lst Declension. 


1. familia 3. Kalendae, pl. 5. poena 
2. Genava 4. Noréia 6. ripa 
2d Declension. 
l. aedifidum 8. Gabinius 15. Noricus 22. Raurici 
2. arma, pl. 9. indicium 16. obaeratus 23. singull, plur. 
3. Aulus 10. iidicium — 17. periculum 24. socius 
4. Boii 11. Latovici 18. perpaucus 25. Tulingi 
5. bonus 12. Lücius 19. privatus 26. vadum 
6. cibària, pl. 13. nihilum 20. quadringenti, ol. 27. vicus 
1. consilium 14. ndnnillus 21. quintus 28. vinculum 
3d. Decleusion. 
l. Allobroges 6. ignis, masc., by 10. mors, fem. 
2. Aprilis, m. & f... - exception ll. pons, mase. by ex- 
Aprile, ueut. 7. itis, neut. | ception 
3. cliens 8. ménsis, masc. by 12. reditio, fem. 
4. dictio, fein. exception 13. suspicio, fem. 
5. difficilis, am. & f. 9. mores, masc. 14. vis, fem. 


difficile, sent. 


-u STEMS. -& SrEMs. UNCLASSIFIED, 
1. domum, acces. sing. 1. diés 1 decem, txdeclinable 
2. magistratls, vom. plur. 2. spes 9. duo, wregular 
3. duodecim, txdeclinable 


4. quemque, accus. sing. 


ADVERBS. PREPOSITIONS. | CONJUNCTIONS. 
1. eddem 6. praeterquam 1. ob l. ne 
2. iam 7. quà 2. post 2. neque 
3. nóndum — 8. ana 3. ubi 
4. nüper 9. vix 4. uti 


5. omnino 5. vel 


234 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. Conversation. Quos ad iüdicium Orgetorix condüxit ? 
Quid hi fecérunt ? 

Cir magistratis hominés ex agris coegerunt ? 
Magistratüsne ! Orgetorigem cépéruut ? 

Quam ob rem Helvétii vicos suds incendérunt ? 

Quds socios receperunt ? 

Quot. (ow many) itineribus sé exire posse arbitrati suut? 
Quorum per finés difficile erat ? 

Quorum per finés facilius erat ? 

Allobrogesne bono animo in Romanos erant ? 

Quem diem ad profectionem dixérunt ? ? 


2. Write in Latin. When the conspiracy of Orgetorix was made 
known to the Helvetiaus, they tried to compel him to plead his cause. 
He escaped, through (the presence of) his many clients and debtors 
whom he brought to the trial, and committed suicide, as many 
Helvetians think. The Helvetians after his death, having prepared all 
things for departure, burned their villages and all the grain which 
was not carried with them. Grain enough for three months was 
carried in the carts. They persuaded three neighboring peoples to 
go out with them, and said that they would come together from- 
all-sides on the 28th of March. They thought they were able to 
persuade the Allobroges, who lived in the Roman province, to allow 
them to go through their boundaries by the easy way which was very 
near the Rhone. 


1The -ne here appended indicates that a question is asked ; it is not translated 
by any separate English word. Answer this question by a complete sentence, not 
by a single word. 


? [n later lessons the teacher should give ex ¢empore conversation exercises of his 
own framing. 


LESSON LI. 200 


LESSON LI. 


l. TEXT. 


Caesari cum id nüntiatum esset, eos per provinciam 
nostram iter facere conari, matirat ab urbe proficisci, et 
quam maximis potest itineribus in Galliam ulteriorem 
contendit, et ad Genàavam pervenit. Provinciae toti 
'quam maximum potest militum numerum imperat (erat 
omnino in Gallia ulteriore legio tina), pontem, qui erat 
ad Genavam, iubet rescindi. 


2. NOTES. 


1. Caesari: (a) dat. case; (5) other uses of the ending -1? Cf. 
XXVI. N. 8; XXXIX. Obs. 1, 2. 

2. nüntiátum esset: (a) a new compound tense, the plpf. sub- 
junctive passive. What are its two component parts?  Cf., for esset, 
XXXV. N. 8. (4) How does it differ from the plpf. ind. pass. ? 
Cf. appellatus erat XXXIII; (c) the preceding dat. Caesari, 
though standing before the conj cum, is used with this verb; cf. 
this use of the dat. with its use with dat XXXIV., probat XXXV., 
énüntiata XXXIX., coónsciverit XLI. Under what two heads 
may these verbs be classified? Cf. E. G. 62, 1. 

9. iter facere, to make a journey, to march (when used of an 
army); iter (ire, ¢o go) is the accus. sing. neut., shortened form of 
stem itiner-; cf. itiner-e XXXI., itiner-a, itiner-ibus XLVI. 

4. eds . . . c6nari; the clause is in apposition with id preceding. 
How should it be translated after the preceding verb of saying ? 

9. proficisci; for form and meaning, cf. XLIV. x. 8. 

_ 6. quam maximis potest itineribus ; a peculiar shortened expres- 

|! sion for tam màgnis itineribus quam potest maximis itineribus, 
by so great journeys as he is able (to hasten) by means of the greatest 
journeys, i. e., by the longest possible stages; cf. quam maximum 
numerum XXX., where possunt, ¢hey are able, is omitted ; for pot- 
est, cf. est I., possent XXXVI., posse XXXVII. 


236. INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


7. toti; peculiar dat. of tótus; it is the same for all genders; 
cf. tótius XXI., eius XLII., cüius XXXIII, also eI XXXIV. and 
out X AX[IV. N.9, b. 

8. imperat ; takes dat. of the person, provinciae ; cf. persuddére. 

9. iubet; note in this Lesson the rapid succession of pres. 
indicatives, impressing us with the energy and rapidity of Caesar's 
movements. It was Caesar who said ‘I came, I saw, I conquered.” 

10. rescind-r; cf. the ending -i in this verb and in proficisc-i 
with -rz in c6na-ri. Where is each of these forms found ? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The plpf. subjunctive pass. is formed in all conjugs. by combin- 
ing the pf. pass. partic. with the impf. subjunctive of esse. 

2. The 3d decl. noun iter is neuter by exception, and its stem is 
itiner-. 

3. The use of quam with the superlative, where the translation 
possible may be added to that of the superlative, involves the omission 
of tam, so, of the positive of the adj., and sometimes of the verb 
posse. 

4. I'he ending -ius (or -ius) occurs as a gen. sing. and -1 (or -i) 
as a dat. sing. ending in tótus and the prons. is and qui. 

9. Imperáre, like persuádére, is followed by the dat. of the 
person. 

6. The dat. is used with verbs of giving and saying to designate 
the person to whom something is given or said. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


1. Caesar, Caesaris, full name | 2. imperdre,! /o command ; pxo- 


Gàius Iülius Caesar, a vinciae milites imperdare, | 
great Roman, — writer, to levy soldiers upon the 
general, statesman. province. | 


1 The pupil must not forget that all verbs with inf. in -àre form pf. regularly | 
in -Avit, and partic. in -At-us, .a, -um. | 


LESSON LI. 981 


3. legio, fem., (for decl., cf. XLI. 8. rescindere, -scidit,-scissus, 
N. 9), a legion; the Roman to break down. 
legion was a body of sol- 9. ulterior, adj., positive want- 
diers, numbering in the ing, farther. 
army of Caesar about 3600 | 10. urbs, fem., for decl, cf. 
men. XXXIV. N. 5, a city; toa 
4. matirare, fo hasten. ~ Roman, often ¢he city of 
5. milités, soldiers. Rome, just as ** the city” 
6. nüntiàre, to announce. means Boston to one living 
7. pervenire, fo come through, in the suburbs of that city. 


to arrive. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Caesari niintiant Helvétios facilidre itinere exire cOnatirés 
esse. (4) Caesar, ut provincia Helvetios prohibéret, quam maximàs 
copias cogere matürabat. (c) Erat omnino pons ünus qué ad Genà- 
vam iter facere possent. (4) Caesar, factis itineribus magnis, Gallis 
qui provinciam incolebant milites multos imperavit. (e) Cum quam 
maximae copiae coáctae essent, in provinciam matiravit. (/) Pons 
rescinditfr. — (g) Dicit poutei rescindi. 

2. (a) He-sets-out from Rome, makes (his) way through the far- 
ther province, and comes to! Geneva. (4) After the bridge had been 
broken down (abl. absolute) by (à) Caesar, the Helvetians tried to 
cross the Rhone by-a-ford. (c) Caesar, who was at-that time in the 
city, hastened to the Rhone, which was many miles distant. 
(7) When they had-set-out, they marched through our province. 

39. (a) Caesar tries to keep out the Helvetians by breaking down 
the bridge (abl. absolute), and levies soldiers upon the province. 
(6) Many who lived in our province were well-disposed (of good 
mind) toward Caesar. (c) The Helvetians hope to be able to seize 
the bridge, so-that by-this bridge they-may-cross into the province. 
(d) He-is-able to-bring-together a large number of soldiers. (v) He 


1 Tt is a safe rule for the beginner in Latin composition to use ad with the 
accus, wherever ¢o is used in English unless there has been special instruction to 
the contrary. Note that here /o means Zo the vicinity of, like ad in the text. 


238 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


says he is-able to-bring-together a-very-large number of soldiers. 
(f) Caesar tells them that there is one legion in farther Gaul. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The Latin for £o set out, to march, to come, to go, to go back and 
forth, to arrive at. 2. A word with two more syllables in the gen. 
than in the nom. singular. 3. Lat. for a great number, a very great 
number, the greatest number, the greatest possible number. 4. Forma- 
tion, pronunciation, and meaning of totius, éius, and cüius. 5. Com- 
parison of the English expression £o arrive at and the Latin. 
pervenire ad.! 6. Similarity in formation of plpf. ind. pass. and 
plpf. subjv. passive. 7. Different uses of the dative. 8. The ex- 
panded form of quam maximum numerum coémunt. 9. English 
derivatives from words 1n this Lesson. 


1 To or at in English like ad in Latin often means toward, to the vicinity of. 


ROMAN LEGIONARY SOLDIER. 


Why is this picture appropriately given with the above 
Lesson? What offensive weapons has this soldier? What 
defensive ? What does he wear on his feet? What is the 
position of his sword belt? Cf the Gallic foot-soldier, p. 364, 


LESSON LII. 239 


LESSON LII. 


l. TEXT. 


Ubi dé eius adventü Helvetii certiores facti sunt, lega- 
tds ad eum mittunt, nobilissimos civitatis, cüius legatio- 
nis Nammeius et Verucloetius principem locum obtiné- 
bant, qui dicerent sibi esse in animo sine ullo maleficio 
iter per provinciam facere, propterea quod aliud iter 
haberent nillum: rogare, ut eius voluntate id sibi facere 
liceat. 


2. NOTES. 


l. certiórés facti sunt, they-are haviug-been-made more-certain, 
they were made more certain, they were informed: (a) for facti sunt 
cf. facere and arbitrati sunt XLII.; (/) facti and certiores are 
both pred. adjs. agreeing with the subj. of sunt ; cf. XXXIII. N. 5, d. 
(c) in dé adventü, modifying this phrase, dé means of in sense of 
concerning. 

2. cüius legationis ; cüius is here an adj.; cf. qua dé causa X. 

3. qui dicerent, thal they might say, to say; cf. XLIX. Obs. 4. 
To what is qui equivalent here ? 

4. sine malefició; a new prep. with the abl.; for other preps. 
with abl., cf. XLII. n. 5. 

5. sibi esse in animo, if is to (hem in mind, they have (it) in mind, 
they intend ; antec. of. sibi? 

6. aliud, neut. accus. sing., limiting iter; for ending -d, cf. i-d, 
quo-d. 

7. proptereà quod . . . habérent; cf. proptereà quod .. 
absunt VI., quod . . . contendunt XI., quod . . . continentur 
XXIL, proptereà quod . . . fluit XLVIL, with propterea quod 

. . . Obtentürus esset XXXV., quod... vidérentur XLVIII., 


240 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


and the present instance. Which of the above verbs are in the sub- 
junctive? Which stand after a verb of saying or thinking, or in indi- 
rect discourse? All these quod clauses are of course subordinate 
(cf. E. G. 49, 2). 

8. rogáre; sé is to be supplied as its subject. 

9. ut . . . liceat: (a) au obj. clause of purpose; cf. XLIV. x. 
8, c; (2) liceat is a pres. subjunctive of the 2d conjugation. In what 
respect is it like that of the 4th? Cf. XLIX. Obs. 1; (c) subj. of 
liceat? (4) antec. of éius and sibi? (e) the translation of what 
the Helvetians actually said, beginning with rogare, is, ** We ask that 
it may be permitted to us to do this with your consent ; " freely ** We 
ask permission ete." 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The 2d conjug., like the 4th, forms its pres. subjunctive by 
inserting a between the pres. stem and the personal ending. . 
2. The subjunctive is used in subordinate clauses of indirect 

discourse. 

3. An expression freely translated £o inform, but meaning literally 
to make more certain, is found in Caesar. It is formed by combining 
facere and certior, an adj. in the comparative, agreeing with the 
name of the person who is informed. 

4. The prep. of, when used in the sense of concerning, is repre- 
sented in Latin by dé with the abl. and not by the genitive. 

5. He intends is represented in Latin by a clause meaning literally, 
it is to him in mind. 

6. The following preps. are used with the abl.: à or ab, dé, cum, 
8 or ex, in, pró and sine ; in is also used with the accusative. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The subordinate clauses of in- 
direct discourse. . 6 s... . Ay & G»336, 9... H3 5248 
2. Preps. with the ablative. . . . A. & G. 152, 0. H. 434. 


LESSON LII. 241 


5. VOCABULARY. 


1. adventü, abl. sing., a coming | 6. Namméius, a  Helvetian 
to, approach. noble. 

9. certus, sure, certain ; homi- 7. nüllus, adj. (né, xot, and 
nem certiorem facere, /o üllus, any), not any, no, 
inform a man. none. 

3. licet, licuit, licitum est,! // 8. princeps, principis, adj. or 
is permitted ; ei licet, it is noun, chief. 
permitted to hin, he may. 9. rogare, to ask. 

4. maleficium (male,  adv., | 10. sine, prep. with abl., without. 


badly, and facere), wrong- | 1l. üllus, adj., avy. 


doing, an evil deed. 19. Verucloetius, a Helvetian 
5. mittere, misit, missus, /o leí noble. 
go, send. 13. voluntas, wish, good-will. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Compare certiores; (^) nobilissimos. (c) Decline eum in 
all genders. (7) Decline voluntate; (^) iter. (f£) Write all the 
forms you know of mittunt; (y) obtinébant; (4) rogare; (/) esse. 

2. (a) Ubi Helvétids certidrés dé Caesaris adventü fécérunt, hi 
lecationem mittunt. (4) Namméius et Verucloetius principés nobi- 
lissimi suae civitàtis fuerunt. (c) Légatos, qui ad Caesarem irent, 
misérunt. (4) Eis est in animo vi cogere Sequanos ut itinere diffi- 
eiliore eds exire patiantur. (^) Dixerunt eos qui per provinciam iter 
factüri essent nullum aliud iter habere. 

.3. (a) They determined to go; they tried to go; he can go; he 
hastens to go. (+) They ordered them to go; they compelled them 
to go; they allowed them to go. (c) They persuaded them to go ; 
they asked them to go. (7) They tried to persuade Caesar not * to 
keep them out of the province. 

4. (a) Caesar, being informed of the plans of the Helvetians, 
hastened into his province. (5) They intend, because they have no 


L. Found only in the 3d sing. with an inf. or clause as its subject. 
? O. n6 . . . diceret XL. 
16 


242 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


other way, to march through the province without wrong-doing. 
(c) They ask permission to do this. (7) After getting everything 
readv, they may go. (e) Ambassadors are sent to Caesar. (f°) They 
say that ambassadors are sent to Caesar. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


]. The Latin for £o march, to intend, to inform, he may. 2. Ullus, 
nüllus, nón, neque. 3. Two ways of translating of into Latin. 
4. Two ways of translating for. 5. Two ways of translating had. 
6. Two very common uses of the subjunctive. 7. When, as a rule, 
to translate £o by the complementary inf.; cf. E. G. 68, 5; 8. when 
by the subjunctive. 9. The pres. subjunctives of the 2d, 3d, and 4th 
conjugations. 10. The meaning of every prep. used with the abl. in 
the text thus far. 


LESSON LIII. 


l. TEXT. 


Caesar, quod memoria tenebat L. Cassium consulem 
occisum exercitumque Gius ab Helvétiis pulsum et sub 
iugum missum, concedendum non putabat; neque 
hominés inimico animo, data facultate per provinciam 
itineris faciundi, temperatüros ab iniüria et maleficio 
existimabat. à 


2. NOTES. 


1. tenébat ; for mode, cf. LII. n. 7. 

2. missum: (@) esse understood, as with the preceding occisum 
and pulsum ; cf. XLVIIT. N. 4, &. (6) the pf. pass. partic. with 
esse forms the pf. inf. pass.; cf. the pf. ind. pass. missus est and 
E. G. 41, 1, (2), (6) ; (c) inf. in indir. discourse, memoria tenébat 


LESSON LIII. 248 


being equivalent to a verb of thinking; cf. XXVII. Obs. 5. (7) What 
is the pres. inf. pass. ? (e) It will be seen at this point, that the 
preceding ab Helvétiis means dy the Helvetians; cf. à senatü 
XXXIII. N. 5, c, and note that both senatü and Helvétiis are 
names of PERSONS. Is the prep. used with the names of THINGS 
by which something is done? Cf. examples in IIT., XIV., XIX. and 
in this Lesson. 

3. putabat: (a) note that in the principal clause, ending here, 
the subj. stands first, the verb last. How many clauses in this 
chapter of the text have exactly this order? (6) esse is understood 
with concédendum, a fut. pass. partic. in the neut. ; the clause is 
translated, literally, he did not think it was about-to-be-allowed, a little 
more freely, ¢¢ ought to be allowed. 

4. inimico animo ; cf. bond animé XLVIII. Is a prep. used 
with the abl. in either of these instances? What limits the noun 
animé in each case? Note that both abl. phrases describe preceding 
nouns. Does the abl. usually limit a noun, or a verb? Cf. examples 
iu the last four chapters. — Does it ever limit an adv. or an adj.? Cf. 
nihiló XLII. 

9. faciundi: (a) another form for the fut. pass. partic. faciendi ; 
(b) limiting itineris, which depends on facultate ; literally, 74e 
opportunity of a journey about-to-be-made, more freely, the opportunity 
of making a journey; cf. XLILI. N. 7. 

6. temperátürós ; for form, cf. XLVIII. N. 4. With what does 
it agree and how do you know this? 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The pf. inf. pass. of all conjugs. is compounded of the pf. pass. 
partic. and the pres. inf. esse ; the pf. ind. pass. is compounded. of 
the same partic. and the pres. ind. of esse. 

2. The fut. pass. partic. is sometimes so used as to imply necessity 
or obligation, and may then be translated by must or ought. 

3. The abl. without a prep. and limited by au adj. (or genitive) is 
used to describe or qualify a noun. It is then called a descriptive 
abl. or an abl. of quality. In this use the abl. seems to have the 


244 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


force of an adj., but in almost all other uses it has the force of an 
adverb. . 
4. With passive verbs the person or agent by whom something is 


done is expressed by the abl. case with the prep. 4 or ab. Such 
an abl. is called an abl. of AGENT. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. The fut. pass. partic. mean- 

ing ought or must. . . | A. & G. A13, 4. H. 234. 
24e abl: ofquality- qa SAT CAG esl H. 419, IT. 
9. wlieabl of agents. ve TE SUDAN SO 246. H. 415, I. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. Cassius, the name of a Roman à spear lail on two up- 
family. rights; ef. Eng. subjugate. 
2. concédere, -cessit, -cessus, 7. memoria, memory. 
to yield. 8. occidere, -cidit, -cisus (ob 
3. facultas, opportunity, ability ; and caedere, /o cut), to 
in plur., ziches. eut down, to kill. 
4. inimicus (in, negative, and 9. pellere, pepulit, pulsus, /o 
amicus), wifriendly. drive. | 
5. iniüria (in, negative, and iüs), | 10. putare, £o think. | 
injustice, wrong. 11. sub, prep. with accus. or abl., | 
6. iugum, that which joins, a under. | 


yoke; conquered armies, in | 12. temperáre, /o govern one’s 
token of submission, were self, to refrain. I 
often compelled to pass | 13. tenére, tenuit, tentus, fo | 


under a yoke consisting of hold. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decl. of memoria; (4) iugum ; (c) animo ; (d) facultate. 
(e) Write four infs. of existimabat with meaning of each; (/^) four 
of missum. 


LESSON LIII. | 245 


2. (a) L. Cassius consul ab Helvetiis occisus est. (6) Romani 
certiores facti sunt L. Cassium cdnsulem occisum esse. (c) Exercitum 
Cassii Helvetii sub iugum miserunt. (47) Facultas itineris faciendi 
per provinciam, quod memoria patrum ab iniürià non temperavérunt, 
Helvétiis non data est. (e) Facultas noun danda est. (^) Exercitü 
Romano sub iugum misso, Helvetii omues Romanos se pulsüros 
putabant. 

3. (a) That (man) who was killed was consul. (^) He was the 
consul of the Roman people, who dwell in Italia. (c) A Roman army 
"ought-to-be-sent into Gaul. (47) The province must not be yielded 
to the Helvetians. (¢) The Romans think that they possess all the 
province. 

4. (a) The Helvetians remembered that hostile men had been 
driven out by the Gauls. (4) Their fathers said that these men were 
the Romans. (c) They can do, as they think, that which their fathers 
did. (4) They are about-to-make a journey through the province, 
which is very-near. (e) The Allobroges who live in this province are 
not-yet well-disposed towards the Romans, because they have recently 
been subdued by them. (/) They are separated from the Allobroges 
by the Rhone. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. All the compound tenses used thus far. 2. Mittere, mitti, 
missi, missus est, missus esse. 3. Possible meanings of the form 
quam. 4. How to say must or ought. 5. Howto say cav. 6. How 
to say could. J. Peculiarities of the abl. of quality. 8. Difference 
between abl. of agent and abl. of instrument. 9. The literal transla- 
tion of the fut. pass. participle. 10. Of the fut. act participle. 
1l. The Lat. for £o remember. 12. The part of a compound tense 
which is frequently omitted. 13. Order of words in this Lesson. 
14. More regular form for faciundi. 


246 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LIV. 


1. TEXT. 


Tamen, ut spatium intercédere posset, dum milités, 
quos imperaverat, convenirent, legatis respondit diem sé 
ad deliberandum sümptürum: si quid vellent, ad Idüs 
Apriles reverterentur. 


2. NOTES. 


1. posset: (a) for form, cf. possent XXXVI. ; (/) for use, cf. 
XIz N. 5. Obs. 7. 

2. imperáverat ; for form, cf. XLV. N. 1. 

3. dum... convenirent: (^) impf. subjv. of 4th conjug.; cf. 
pres. subjv. same coujug., conveniant XLIX., and that of the 3d 
conjug., proficiscantur XLIV.; (4) until they should come together, 
but just as accurately, for them to come together. In what respect, 
then, is this clause like ut . . . posset just before ? 

4. sé: («) How do we know that this word is an accus. sing. ?. — 
Cf, XXXII. v. 10. (4) What is the number of the same word in 
XLV.? Number of sibi in XXXII.? In LII. ? 

5. déliberandum; gerund; cf. XXX. N. 5. 

6. quid, indefinite pron., anything; cf. the meaning of quemque 
XLIIT. ; note the position of quid immediately after st. 

7. vellent ; an irregular impf. subjv., from velle, £o iis. 

8. ad Xdàüs Apriles, o» the April Ides: (v) Idüs is a -u stem. 
What is its case? For other cases, cf. XLI. x. 6; (6) the Ides in 
April came on the 13th; cf. XLIX. N. 3. What is the usual way of 
expressing the time a£ which? Cf. XL. nN. 1. 

9. reverterentur, /e£ them return; what Caesar said to the legates 
was, *I will take time to think about it; if you want anything, 
return on the Ides of April.” 


LESSON LIV. 947 


3. OBSERVATION. 


1. The conj dum meaning until is often used with the subjv. (like 
ut) to express PURPOSE. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Dum-ciauses of purpose. <A. & G. 328. H. 519, II. 2. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


1. déliberare (from dé and 1i- 
brare, to weigh), to weigh 
well, ponder. 

2. dum, conj., while, until. 

3. Id-üs, -uum, fem. by excep- 


6. respondére,-spondit, -sp6n- 
sus, to answer. 

7. reverti, reversus, dep., fo 
return; in the pf. tenses, 
the stem of the pf. act. 
form 


tion, the Ides, the 13th of 
the month, except in March, 
May, July, and Oct., when 


revertit was used 
bv Caesar. 


. SI, conj., 7f. 


they came on the 15th. 9. spatium, ertent, either of 
4, intercedere, -céssit, -céssü- space or time. 
rus, £o go between, to inter- | 10. sümere, sümpsit, sümptus, 


vene. to take up, to assume. 
5. quid, indefinite pron. any- | ll. tamen, adv., yet, nevertheless. 
thing. 12. velle, voluit, irreg., to wish. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Ea facultas, quam Helvétit rogaverunt, nón concédenda est. 
|, (^) Romans exercitü ab Helvétiis iam pulso, Caesar eds Ire per pro- 
| vinciam nón patébatur. (c) Caesar diem ad deliberandum, ut quam 
(d) Caesar dixit sé 
(c) Légati, quibus respondit, nobilis- 
(/) Milites, quos toti provinciae im- 


. maximus numerus militum conveniret, sümpsit. 
. dé ea ré deliberatürum esse. 

simi civitatis Helvetiae erant. 
peravit, nóndum convénérunt. 


248 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. (a) Men of unfriendly mind are not likely to (about to) refrain 
from wrong. (4) For many years the Romans had an army in the 
province. (c) It is not permitted to the Helvetians to go through 
the province, because in the consulship of Lucius Cassius they did 
harm. (47) The ambassadors who asked permission! to cross the 
province are about to return to Caesar. 

3. (a) The province must not be seized. (4) Caesar does not 
intend? to allow the Helvetians to cross the Rhone. (c) The good 
son may? see the soldiers of! whom he has been informed.’ (d) 
Caesar says that the ambassadors may return on the Ides of 
April (e) Caesar asked the ambassadors to return.’ 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Difference of quid and quod, in form; 2. in meaning. 
3. Different forms of the verb posse in text thus far. 4. The dat. 
sing. of the accus. sing. sé; 5. the dat. plural; 6. the accus. 
plural. 7. The pf. stem of the Ist conjugation; 8. of the 4th. 
9. The impf. subjv of the 4th conjugation. 10. The impf. ind. 
of the 4th conjugation. 11. Likeness between proficiscendum 
and d&liberandum ; 12. difference. 13. Position of quid. 14. The 
Ides. 15. The Kalends. 16. A conj. which may express both time 
and purpose. 


LESSON LV. 
Late xm, 


Intereà eà legione, quam secum habébat, militibusque, 
qui ex provincia convénerant, a lacü Lemanno, qui in 
flamen Rhodanum influit, ad montem Iüram, qui fines 
Sequanorum ab Helvetiis dividit, milia passuum decem 
novem, mürum in altitüdinem pedum sédecim fossam- 


que perdicit. 
1 Cf. LII. 


1 
é 


LESSON LV. 249 


2. NOTES. 


1. quam: (a) What is the gender, number, and case of this 
pron.? How, then, shall we know its antec. ? Cf. milites, quos LIV. 
(6) Why must it, though fem., be translated which? Cf. XXILI. Obs. 
7. (c) What is another use of the form quam? Cf, LI. x. 6. 

2. s&.cum habébat: (a) for position of cum, cf. sécum XLIII. 
N. 3; (4) uote that sé must here be the abl. sing. ; why? What is 
the number of the same form in XLIII.? With what other case does 
it agree in form? Cf. LIV. nN. 4. 

3. milia passuum ; for form and use, cf. XXVIII. nx. 2, 3. 

4. pedum: (4) gen. plur.; stem? Forms its nom. sing. like 
civitas; cf. XX. N. 1; (/) limited by sedecim and depends on 
mürum, describing it like an adj.; similar to what abl. use? 
(c) Note the numerals in this Lesson. What others have been used 
in the text ? 

9. perdücit: (a) the long sentence ending here is not difficult if 
mastered in the Latiu order, since the words are arranged in natural 
groups; cf. XL. Obs. 8; (4) the verb is modified by legione and 
militibus, ablatives of means; by the phrases à lacü and ad 
montem, by milia, and by mürum and fossam, direct objects. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Third decl. stems in -d, like stems in -t, form the nom. sing. by 
adding s and dropping the final consonant of the stem. 

2. The reflexive pron. is the same in the sing. as in the plur. ; the 
dat. is sibi, the accus. and abl. sé. A gen. form sui is sometimes 
used. 

3. The gen., like the abl., when limited by an adj., may be used to 
express a quality. This quality is very frequently a measure of the 
thing described by the genitive. 


1 Although names of persons, they are ablatives of means rather than of agent. 
because the persons are not regarded here as voluntary agents but as the instru- 
ments which Caesar used. 


250 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The decl. of the reflexive 
PrONOUN ys, Pegs eh UO Ue ees 
2. The gen. of quality (es- 
pecially measure). . A.&G.215andd. H.396, V. andy. 1. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. altitüdinem, accus. sing., | 7. perdücere, -düxit, -ductus, 


fein., height, depth; cf. to lead through, bring 
altus. along, prolong, draw out, 
2. Influere, -flüxit, -fluxürus, /o extend. 
flow into. 8. pés, pedis, a foot of man or 
3. fossa, that which has been beast, and also a measure 
dug, a ditch. of length. 
4. interea, adv., meanwhile. 9. sédecim (sex and decem), 
5. mürus, a wall. indecl. numeral, sir aud 
6. novem, indecl. numeral, nine. ten, sixteen. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Eis rébus quàs sécum habébant firmissimi milites Romani 
castella comminivérunt. (6) Lacü Lemannd Helvétit continebantur. 
(c) Caesar, né in provincia üllum maleficium facerent, mürum fossam- 
que perdüxit. (4) Si vi transire conàti erant, miird fossaque prohi- 
bébantur. (¢) Altus mürus, ut Helvetios prohiberet, à Caesare factus 
est. (f) Flümen, dé quo certior factus est, per hos fines centum et 
decem millia passuum influébat. 

2. (a) All the legions, which were-coming-together, had not-yet 
urived at the Rhone. (4) The soldiers who were already with Caesar 
were prolonging the ditch to the mountain for several days. 
(c) At that time the boundaries of Italy (Italia) were far distaut 
from the Rhone. (47) Mount Jura was overhanging, so that a very 
narrow way intervened between the mountain and the river. 

3. (a) Caesar thought it was not fitting for the Helvetians to go 
through our province, the men of which were not-yet well disposed. 
(^) Caesar, when they asked his permission, did not inform the Hel- 
vetians that he was about-to-make a wall (c) Caesar intends to 


LESSON LV. ; 951 


extend the ditch from the lake to the river. (d) He does this that 
the Helvetians may not. be able to accomplish their undertakings. 
(e) The legion which is in Gaul can prolong the ditch. (j^) The 
river which flows toward the west is the Rhone. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The decl. of pés; 2. of the relative pron. in the feminine. 
3. The position of cum. 4. Four possibilities for the form sa. 
5. The literal and free translation of mürus pedum sédecim. 
6. Two cases which express quality. 7. Cases and phrases in this 


Lesson which are used, like adverbs, to limit verbs. 8. Different 


tenses in the Lesson. 9. Why perdücere is an appropriate word 
for the building of a wall or ditch. 10. English derivatives from 
words in this Lesson. 


a 
wna 
o Ni 3 
= 


mss 
A UN G0 "23 
€ AUN IY WES 


~“Tabulae modulus 1:200,000 
Kilometer 


ep sk C44 ae Sep Ww AWE S pet Rt Aot 
b 2 1 6 ss =m 


Milia passuum S 


RIPAE RHODANI INTERCISAE CUM MURO 
FOSSAQUE 


MAP AND PLANS SHOWING CAESAR'S WALL AND TRENCH. 


1 2 3 4 
[*] A Castella Murus fossaque 


Note that the wall and trench are not continuous. The spaces between these fortifications 
were sufficiently protected by the depth and swiftness of the river or the steepness of the hank. 
Traces of Caesar’s works have been discovered in modern times. For the castella on the 
map, see LVI. 


252 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LVI. 


l. TEXT. 


EO opere perfecto, praesidia disponit, castella com. 
münit, quo facilius, si, sé invito, transire conarentur, 
prohibere possit. Ubi ea dies, quam constituerat cum 
legatis, venit, et legati ad eum revertérunt, negat sé 
more et exemplo populi Romani posse iter ülli per pro- 
vinciam dare, et, si vim facere conentur, prohibitürum 
ostendit. 

. NOTES. 


1. opere; from the nom. sing. neut. opus; cf. XLVII. wn. 2. 
2. possit: (a) pres. subjv.; cf. posset, impf. subjv., LIV.; 


(6) qué, the introductory word of this claus», — ut eo, that by this 
(means) ; cf. XLIX. N. 2, a... What degree of comparison immediately 
follows qué in the word facilius? (c) The preceding sé invito, he 
(being) unwilling, against his will, is an, abl. absolute construction 
consisting of a noun and an ordinary adjective, not a participle as 
is more common ; cf. XLIV. N. 6; the pres. partic. of esse, appro- 
priate to such a phrase, is wanting in Latin; (4) supply eds as the 
obj. of the preceding prohibére. 

3. dare: (a) The translation of Caesar's words, when speaking 
to the legates, is: “I cannot, consistently with the custom and 
precedent (because of the custom and precedent) of the Roman people, 
give to any one the right of way through the province;" (4) the 
preceding ülli is here a pronoun in the dat. case; for form, cf. toti 
LI.; for use, cf. LI. n. 2, c. 

4. cónentur; in form, a pres. subjv. pass. of the lst conjug.; cf. 
proficiscantur XLIV., conveniant XLIX., liceat LIT. 

9. prohibitürum : (a) based ou prohibit-, a supine stem of the 
2d conjug.; cf. XLIII. xn. 9, Obs. 5; (/) supply esse, the subj. of 
which is sé in the preceding clause; (c) Caesar's words, when speak- 
ing to the legates, were “I shall keep (you) out." 


LESSON LVI. 253 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The sign of the pres. subjv. is -&- in the 1st conjug., and -à- in 
the 2d, 3d, and 4th. Ln the 1st and 3d conjugs. this sign takes the 
place of the final vowel of the pres. stem, in the 2d and 4th it is 
added to that stem. 

2. Some neuts. in -us have the gen. in -oris ; others in -eris. 

3. The relative qué = ut eG is used to introduce purpose clauses 
containing a comparative. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Third decl. neuts. 


in -us, gen. -eris A. & G. 48, d and 49, genus. H. 61, opus. 
2. The subjv. of pur- 


pose after qué A. & G. 317, X. H. 497, II. 2. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. castellum, a small fort, a re- 7. opus, -eris, neut., a work, a 
doubt, a castle. piece of work. 

2. commünire, fo fortify strongly. 8. ostendere, -tendit, -tentus, 

3. disponere, -posuit, -positus, (obs for ob and tendere, 
to place apart, to place here to stretch), to stretch in the 
and there. way of, to show. 

4. exemplum, an example. 9. praesidium, a sitting before, 

5. invitus, unwilling. a guard. 

6. negare, to say . . . not, to | 10. venire, venit, ventum, fo 
deny. come. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decl. of eó opere together. (6) Decl. of praesidium ; 
(c) iter. (4) Write all the forms you know of posse; (e) pro- 
hibére. (/) Subjv. forms of negare. (9) Parts of negare; 
(4) commünire. 


254 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. (a) Praesidis dispositis, castella à Caesare comminita sunt. 
(6) Id opus, ut Helvetios prohiberet, perfecit. (c) Negat provinciam, 
quam -Allobroges incolant, traiseundam esse. (47) Ea diés cum 
levatis Helvetiorum coustitüta est. (e) Ostendit se, si flümen 
transeant, vim factürum esse. (f) Caesar Helvetiis, qui rogant ut 
sibi transire provinciam liceat, iter dare non potest. 

3. (a) The legates return on the appointed day. (4) The legates 
whom Caesar had seut home returned to him. (c) Caesar did not 
allow them to march through the boundaries.of the Allobroges. 
(d) They say they will use force. (e) The work which was completed 
was very-great. i 

4. (a) They did not try to cross against Caesar's will. (6) It 
happened at that time that they could persuade the Sequanians. 
(c) The ambassadors say they will return to him on the Ides of April. 
(d) The-right-of-way must not be given to those who are not well 
disposed towards the Romans. | 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Neuts. in -us; 2. in-um; 3. in-e. 4. The pres. subjv. in 
three conjugations. 5. The impf. subjv. in all conjugations. 6. What 
to expect after quó introducing a purpose clause. 7. Possit and 
posset. 8. Example from text of an abl. absolute consisting of a | 
noun and a partieiple; 9. a noun and an ordinary adjective; 10. a 
noun and another noun. 11. The Lat. for they return, they returned ; 
ef. Text of this Lesson with Text and Vocab. of LIV. 12. Against 
his will, with his consent. 


LESSON LVII. O50 


LESSON LVII. 


LURE XT, 

Helvetii, ea spé déiecti, nàvibus iunctis ratibusque 
complüribus factis, alii vadis Rhodani, qua minima alti- 
tüdo flüminis erat, nonnumquam interdiü, saepius noctü, 
si perrumpere possent, conati, operis münitione et mili- 
tum concursü et telis repulsi, hoc conatü destiterunt. 


2. NOTES. 


1. quà; for meaning and use, cf. qua XLVI. x. 6. 

2. altitüdo ; nom. sing. fem.; for stem, cf. altitadinem LV. and 
XXVIII. N. 5, Obs. 4. 

3. Helvetii. . . déstiterunt: (a) cf., for order and translation 
of this sentence, LIIL. xn. 8, a; LV. N. 5; (6) find in it two abls. of 
separation, six abls. of means; (c) note how the successive adjs. 
déiecti, alit, conati, repulsi, keep the subj. Helvétii in mind; 
(4) the clause si . . . possent is the obj. of cónàti, and si would 
better be translated whether; (e) note and explain the similarity of 
form but difference of voice in d&iecti and conati; cf, also usi and 
exüstis XLIV., and consider why these two parties. have to be used 
in different cases. 

3. OBSERVATIONS. 

l. All nominatives in -tüdo of the 3d decl. have stems in -tüdin-. 

2. From the nature of deponent verbs, the partic. which is pf. 
pass. in form is pf. act. in sense. Other Latin verbs have a pf. 
pass. but not a pf. act. partic.; cf. E. G. 41, participles. The pf. 
pass. partic. must often be used to supply the place of a pf. active. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. Third decl. nouns in 

-d6 and -g6 . . A.&dG. 49, virgo. H. 60, virgo. 
2. The lack of a pf. act. 

partic. and how to 

supply its place . °A. & G. 290, Zand 1, 2. 4H. 550, w. 4. 


256 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. complürés (complüra neut.) | 8. minimus (irreg. sup. of par- 
very many. vus), least, very small; 
9. cónàtü, abl. sing., (conàri), cf. minime VII. 
an attempt; cf. conata | 9. münitio, a fortifying, a for- 
XXXV. tification. 


3. concursü, abl. sing. (con | 10. nàvis,! fem., a ship, a boat. 
and currere, £o run), arun- | 11. noctü, adv., by night. 


ning toyether. 12. nonnumquam,  »woí never, 
4. déicere or déiicere, -iécit, sometimes; cf. nónnüllus 
-iectus, to cast down. ATLVLE 
5. desistere, déstitit, désti- | 13. perrumpere, -rüpit,-ruptus, 
türus, (o stand off, to de- to break through. 
sist. 14. ratis, fem., a raft. 
6. interdiü, adv., dy day. 15. repellere, -pulit, -pulsus, /o 
7. iungere, iunxit, iunctus, /o drive back. 
join. 16. telum, a missile weapon. 


6. EXERCISES. 


l. (a) Navés, quibus flümen transire conati sunt, minimae 
fuerunt. (4) His omnibus conàatis repulsis, difficiliore itinere inter 
montem Juram et flümen Rhodanum ire constituerunt. (c) Cum. 
perrumpere couarentur, telis à militibus Romanis repulsi sunt. 
(4) Ripam flüminis müro sédecim pedum communivit. (4) Si flumen 
altissimum esset, conatus est. (/) Usi multis nàvibus, ut flumen - 
transirent, et repulsi, eo conato desistere constituerunt. 

2. (a) The Helvetians went iuto the territory of their neighbors, 
that thev-might-roam-about more-widely. (4) The Helvetians were 
not able to break down the works of the Romans. (c) Caesar says 
that he will not allow the Helvetians by using (having used) force to 
hold the bank of the river. (4) The Helvetians tried to destroy the 
strong fortification which the Romans had made. 


lTt will be understood that nouns in -is have the gen. like the nom. unless 
otherwise stated. Nouns in -is with gen. in -idis are mostly Greek, and but few 
of them are found in Caesar. 


LESSON LVIII. 951 


3. (a) Caesar intends to keep the Helvetians out of the province. 
- (6) If Caesar is unwilling, they think they will break through the 
wall which he has made. (c) The Helvetians were trying to drive 
back the Romans from the wall. (47) In order to cross the river, 
they use very many boats whieh they have seized. (e) They think 
that the depth of the river is not great. (/) They said that in the 
boats which they were-joining-together! they would try to cross the 
Rhone. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. The nom. sing. of multitüdine, fortitüdinis, and longitidi- 
nem. 2. Two uses of the form qua. 3. Two meanings for si. 
4. A verbal form not found in Latin. 5. Two nouns from cónàri. 
6. A noun from münire. 7. Difference between minimé and mini- 

, mus. 8. Nouus having the same form in the gen. as in the nom. 
singular. 9. Different uses of the abl. without a prep. in text thus 
far. 10. Eng. derivatives from words iu this Lesson. 


LESSON LVIII. 


TTETEXT! 


Relinquebatur üna per Sequanos via, qua, Sequanis 
invitis, propter angustias ire non poterant. His cum 
sua sponte persuadere non possent, legatos ad Dumno- 
rigem Haeduum mittunt, ut, eo deprecatore, a Sequanis 
impetràrent. Dumnorix gratia et largitione apud Séqua- 
nds plürimum poterat et Helvetiis erat amicus, quod ex 
ea civitate Orgetorigis filiam in matrimonium düxerat, 
et cupiditate régni adductus novis rebus studébat et 
quam plürimas civitates suo beneficio habere obstrictas 


volebat. 
1 Cf. LII. n. 7, Obs. 2. 


17 


258 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2. NOTES. 


1. Relinquébatur ... via; for order, cf. Erant . . . duo 
XLVI. and erat . . . tina LI. 

2. poterant: (4) impf. ind. of posse; (4) for preceding Séqua- 
nis invitis, cf. sé invito LVI. Nn. 2, c. . 

3. possent: (a) impf. subjunctive after cum, which is not the 
prep. as one might at first suppose from position of sponte ; when 
this verb is reached, sponte proves to be an abl. of means, which is 
used without a prep.; cf. a similar use. of the conj. cum before an 
abl. in XXI; (4) note that his is drawn out of its position within 
the cum-clause and becomes the first word in the sentence, because it 
is the word of the sentence most closely connected with what precedes. 
What is its antec. in the preceding sentence ? 

4. eo d&precátore: (4) eo is here a substantive, not an adj. ; 
(6) const. of e6 d&precatore? Cf. XIX. N. 6, XLIV. w. 6, and 
Séquanis invitis above. What parts of speech may be combined 
to form this coast. ? | 

9. plürimum poterat : (a) cf. XXXVI. N. 3; (4) note the position 
of the adv. aud ef. that of the adv. non used twice, above. Do these 
advs. stand before or after the words which they modify ? 

6. erat; cf. the preceding poterat and note the difference in form 
and meaning ; cf. also est [. with potest LI., esse XXI. with posse 
XXXVIL, essent XLIIL. with possent XXV.; cf. also sunt VI., 
possit LVI. 

7. studébat; used with rébus, the dat. of the thing desired; cf. 
LI. x. 8. 

8. volébat, he was wishing: (a) irreg. verb velle, to wish ; cf. 
vellent LIV.; (4) expanded form for quam plürimas? Cf. LI. w. 
6 ; (c) vol&bat is completed by habére, the obj. of which is civitatés. 
What partic. agrees with civitatés ? 

1 The teacher will find a full discussion of the order of words and clauses in the 
Latin sentence, abundantly illustrated by examples, in Pott’s “ Hints toward Latin 
Prose Composition " (Macmillan). The point here noted is treated on pp. 91 and 
92. On the whole subject, Thacher's Madvig, pp. 425—440 may also be consulted. 
Weil's *The Order of Words in the Ancient Languages compared with that of the 
Modern Languages" is a very valuable work. It has been translated into English 
by C. W. Super. 


LESSON LVIII. 259 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The verb posse is an abbreviated compound of esse, £o Je, and 
potis, aó/e ; thus potis esse, pot-esse, potse, posse. The pres. 
and impf. tense of esse and posse are as follows : 


INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres. est (sunt) potest (possunt) sit possit 
| Impf. erat poterat . esset posset 


2. In Caesar the adv. commonly precedes the word which it 
modifies. ! 
3. The first place in a sentence. is often held by that word which 


is most closely connected in thought with the preceding sentence. 


4. The verbs persuaddére, imperàre, studére take the dative. 
..-6. A noun and a noun, a noun and a pron., a noun and a. partic., 
or a noun and an ordinary adj. may be combined to form the abl. 


absolute construction. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


.]. Component parts of the abl. 


absolute construction. . A.& G. 255and a. H. 431 and 4. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. angustiae, -àrum (angustus), 5. impetrare, /o obtain one's 
narrowness, straits, a nar- request. 

TOW pass. 6. largitio, lavish giving, brib- 

2. beneficium (bene, well, and ery, liberality. 
facere), well-doing, a favor, 7. novus, ze: ; novae res, new 

a kindness. things, revolution. 

3. déprecátor (déprecari, fo 8. obstringere, obstrinxit, ob- 
beg off, to intercede), an in- strictus, fo bind. 
tercessor, mediator. 9. propter, prep. with accus., 

4. gratia, favor either shown or on account of. 


received, hence, either sind- | 10. relinquere, -liquit, -lictus. 


ness or popularity. to leave. 


260 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


ll. spontis, sponte, wanting in | 12. studére, studuit, partic. 


other cases; in abl, with wanting, to be eager for, to 
sua, it means of one’s own desire. 
accord, by one’s self. 13. via, a way. 


6. EXERCISES. 

1. (a) Decl. together of e6 déprecátore ; (4) eA civitate ; (c) fa- 
cilis via. (/) Write the 3d sing. ind. and subjv. of relinquébatur, 
hoth voices ; (^) the same of impetrarent. (/) Principal parts (ef. 
L. “Suggestions on Diagram”) of mittunt; (y) persuadére ; 
(A) habére. 

2. (a) Helvetii Dumnorige déprecatore à Sequanis impetrant. 
(P) Séquani à Dumnorige inducti eos per suos fines ire patiuntur. 
(c) Altera via Helvetii, quod aliam viam habent nüllam, exire volunt. 
(7) Sua sponte Sequanis persuadere non possunt ut sibi eorum vo- 
luntàte iter facere inter montem et flümen liceat. 

3. (a) If their neighbors are not willing, the Helvetians intend to 
compel them. (4) They say it is necessary to go through the terri- 
tory of the Sequanians, because Caesar did not allow them to go 
through the province. (c) That (woman) whom Dumnorix had 
married was the daughter of Orgetorix. (4) The way which was 
left was narrow. | (e) Orgetorix and Dumnorix were friends. 


4. (a) They seut an embassy to persuade tlie Sequanians. (6) Dum- 


norix, the Haeduan chief, was of an unfriendly mind toward the Ro- 
mans, because he desired revolution. (c) Dumnorix asks that the 
Helvetiaus inay cross the territory of the Sequanians. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. The Latin for £o marry (said of the man), to give in marriage; 
9. revolution, to favor revolution ; 8. to be very powerful; 4. as many 
as possible; 5. he can, he could, he may, he might. 6. Difference 
between imperáre and impetrare. 7. Two nouns plur. in form 


which may be sing. in sense. — 8. List of verbs used thus far which. 


are followed by the inf. without a subject. 9. Difference between the 
use of the dat. with studére and its use with persuadere. 10. He 
was, he was able, he is, he can. 11. Order of words in this Lesson; 
three important points. 


LESSON LIX. 961 


LESSON LIX. 


1. TEXT. 


Itaque rem suscipit et à Sequanis impetrat, ut per 
finés suos Helvétios ire patiantur, obsidésque uti inter 
'S&s& dent, perficit: Sequani, ne itinere Helvetios pro- 
hibeant ; Helvetii, ut sine maleficio et iniuria transeant. 

Caesari renüntiatur Helvétiis esse in animo per 
agrum Sequanorum et Haeduorum iter in Santonum 
finés facere, qui non longe a Tolosatium finibus absunt, 


quae civitas est in provincia. 


l. patiantur: («) pres. subjv. in an obj. clause of purpose; cf. 
XLIV. n. 8, c; (6) a 4th conjug. form; cf. paterentur (XLVIII.), 


à 
| 
| 2. NOTES. 
: 


impf. subjv. 3d conjug.; also persuádére but persuasit, facere but 


afficiébantur XXVI., cónsciscere but cónsciverit X LI., conveni- 
ant XLIX. but convénerant LV.; (c) cf. proficiscantur, pres. 
subjv. 3d conjug., XLIV. 

weeuti. .. dent: (a) uti isithe conj. not the inf. of the verb 
meaning £o use; (4) the clause is the obj. of perficit; (c) ob- 
sidés is the obj. of dent; (47) mode and tense of dent? Cf. 
conentur LVI. 
| 3. Séquani; the subj. of dent understood, which is drawn 
"orward from preceding clause; the following Helvétii has the same 
'onstruction. 
? 4. prohibeant: (a) pres. subjv. 2d conjug.; for form, cf. liceat 
‘IL, dent, patiantur, proficiscantur, and LVI. Obs. 1 ; (5) case 
of the preceding itinere, and why? Cf. finibus XII.; (c) for use 
Xf preceding ne, cf. XL. N. 5. 

5. renüntiatur ; for use of the preceding Caesari, cf. LI. Nn. 2, c 


ind Obs. 6. 


262 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. Helvétiis . . . animo ; for construction and free translation, 
cf. LII. x. 5: 

4. Tolosaátium; gen. plur.; cf. same case in Santonum, just 
before. What difference in ending? For 3d decl. nouns having i in 
gen. plur., cf. inflections in XXIX., XXXVIII., and L. 

8. civitàs ; the state of the Tolosates is here referred to. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Some verbs have forms of different conjugations. The most 
common of those already used are facere, capere, pati, iubére, 
suüdére, venire aud their compounds. Such verbs are said to 
belong to the conjug. indicated by the pres. infinitive. 

2. Third decl. nouns aud adjs. in -is, -e, -1, -ns, -rs, and mono- 
syllables in s preceded by a consonant usually have -ium in the gen. 
plur.; most other nouns have -um. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. itaque, and so, therefore. 3. renüntiàre, fo bring back 
2. obses, obsidis, a hostage ; word, to report 
hostages were human beings | 4. Santones, -um (or Santoni, 
given by one person or -6rum), a people living on 
nation to another, in order the western coast of Gaul; 
to guarantee the fulfilment see map. 
of an agreement; if the | 5. Tolésates, -ium, a Gallic peo- 
agreement was broken, the ple living in the Roman 
hostages might be killed. province; see map. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Helvétii, obsidibus datis, sese obstrinxérunt ut sine iniürià 
finés Séquanorum transirent. (2) Non perfacile factü est à maleficio 
maximam multitüdinem cupidam bellandi prohibere. — (c) Civitas, 
quam Caesar non longé à Toldsatibus abesse dixit, à provincia qua- 


dragintà passuum milia abest. 


LESSON LIX. 268 


2. (a) He took this commission? upon himself, and had (perficere) 
the two states exchange (impf. subjv.) hostages. (6) Influenced by 
the desire to-roam-about,? the Helvetians give hostages to the 
Sequanians, in order that they-may-cross their territory. (c) On- 
account-of the narrowness of the way, it was necessary to draw the 
carts one-at-a-time. | (7) The Sequanians allow the Helvetiaus to go 
through their territory. 

3. (a) The mountain was-overhaugiug, so-that a-very-few could 
stop them. (4) They used to give (were giving) their sons and 
daughters as hostages (appositive). (c) Caesar is informed that the 
Helvetians are about-to-make a journey to a state of the province. 
(d) They tell Caesar that the Helvetians are trying to obtain a 

request from the Sequanians. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Decl. of itinere. 2. The best Eug. for obsidés uti inter sé 
dent perficit; 3. for quae civitas. 4. Different kinds of purpose 
clauses in this Lesson. 5. The object, in general, of giving hostages. 
6. The correctness of Caesar's statement about the distance of the 
Santones froin the Tolosates. 7. The pres. subjv. in all conjugations. 
8. Third decl. nouus in this Lesson which have i in the gen. plural. 
9. Verbs which have forms of both the 3d and 4th conjugations ; 
|.10. of the 2d and 3d. 11. Use and translation of n&. 12. The 
Latin for £o exchange; 13. to intend. i 


1 Cf. rés in above text and in General Vocabulary. 
2 Of. régni cupiditate XIX. 


264 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LX. 


1. TEXT. 


Id si fieret, intellegebat magnod cum periculo provin- 
ciae futürum, ut homines bellicosos, populi Romani ini- 
micos, locis patentibus maximéque frümentariis finiti- 
mos habéret. Ob eas causas, ei münitioni quam fecerat 
T. Labiénum legatum praefécit; ipse in Italiam màgnis 
itineribus contendit duasque ibi legiones conscribit, et 
trés, quae circum Aquileiam hiemabant, ex hibernis 
edücit et, qua proximum iter in ulteriorem Galliam per 
Alpes erat, cum his quinque legionibus ire contendit. 


2. NOTES. 


1. id ; for position, cf. his LVIIT. w. 3, 6. 

2. fieret: (7) for voice, see fi&bat XXV. and General Vocab. ; 
(^) mode and tense ? 

3. cum ; for position, cf. XXIV. N. 1. 1 

4. futürum : (7) with esse, to be supplied, forms the fut. inf. act. 
of esse ; cf. XLVIII. x. 4, Obs. 2 ; (?) for syllable fu-, cf. fu-it XIXS 

9. maximé frümentariis, most fruitful, very fruitful; a superla- 
tive degree formed by prefixing the adv. maxime, most greatly, most, 
to the adj., instead of by adding -issimus ; cf. E. G. 27, (4). 

6. ut . . . habéret: (2) a substantive clause, subj. of futürum 
(esse); cf. ut . . . vagarentur XXV., which is the subj. of fi&bat ; 
(^) the subj. is provincia, suggested bv the gen. provinciae in 
preceding clause ; (c) for case of locis, cf. Germanis VIII. and pl&bi. 
XXXIV. With what part of speech is the dat. used in all three 
instances? (4) patentibus is here an ordinary adj. limiting locis, 
though in form a pres. partic. ; nom. paté-ns, lying open, from 
patére; cf. orié-ns, poté-ns. In what respect are all three alike ? 

1. praefécit; followed by direct obj. légatum, and indirect | 
münitioni; cf. XXV. v. 7. 


LESSON LX. 


8. ipse ; cf. XXXV. Nw. 5. 
9. trés ; agreement ? 

10. contendit: (v) Ou reaching the end of the sentence with this 
word, how may we decide whether quà in the preceding clause is a 
pron. or an adv.? (4) for the effect of rapid succession of pres. 
tenses 1u this sentence, cf. LI. x. 9. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 
l. The nom. siug. ending of the pres. act. partic. is -ns. This 
ending is added to the pres. stem. 
2. The stems of esse are es- pres., fu- pf., fut- supine. 
3. A dat. is used with many adjs. as the indirect object of the 
quality expressed by the adjective. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


m- 


. The dative with adjectives . 


A. & G. 284. H. 391. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


]. Alpés, -ium, the Alps. 9. hiemáre, /o pass the winter, 
2, Aquiléia, a town in upper to winter. 
Italy. 10. ibi, there; cf. ubi, where, 
3. bellicosus (bellum), warlike. when. 
4. circum, prep. with accus., | 1]. intellegere or -ligere, -léxit, 
around, about. -léctus (inter, between, and 
5. conscribere, -scripsit, -scrip- legere, to choose), to uuder- 
; tus, /o write together, enroll, stand, to know. 
enlist. 12. Italia, Italy. 
6. &dücere, -düxit, -ductus, /o | 13. Labiénus, a Roman family 


lead out. 


name. 
1. frümentàrius (frümentum), | 14. praeficere, -fécit, -fectus, 
belonging to grain, fruitful. to put before, to set over, to 
8. hibernus (hiems, wintcr), put in command of. 


belonging to winter; hi- 
berna, -6rum (with word 
for quarters, camp, wnder- 
stood), winter quarters. 


. quinque, five. 
. Titus, a Roman first name, 


usually represented by the 
initial T. 


266 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decl. of locis; (^) minitién3. (c) All the ind. forms 
you know of intellegébat. (4) All the subjunctive forms you know 
of habéret. (e) All the foris you know of esse. ! 

2. (a) Tres legidnés, quas circum Aquiléiam habebat, ex hibernis 
éductae sunt. (4) Novae legiones in eà parte Italiae quae proxima 
Galliae est conseribendae sunt. (c) Futürum est cum periculo ut 
provincia hominés inimico animo finitimos patentibus agris habeat. 
(d) Ea münitio, ne Helvetii per provinciam iter facerent, facta est. 

3. (a) Caesar, having led three legions out of winter quarters, de- 
termines to enroll new (ones). (5) It happened that three legions 
were already in winter quarters near Aquileia." (c) The soldiers of 
the legions which were about-to-wage war were very-brave. (d) Cae- 
sar did not allow the Gauls to seize the territory of the Roman people. 
(¢) Caesar knows that those men will be warlike. 

4. (a) The senate had put Caesar in command of the legions. 
(6) Caesar knows that those places which the Tolosates inhabit ? are 
very fruitful. — (c) For-several days he-was-hastening into Italy by- 
forced marches. (d) Caesar collected five legions to keep-out the 


Helvetians. 
7. LORICS, FOR STUDY. 


1. The Latin for arms, lieutenant, winter quarters, forced marches, 
Jortification ; 2. to march, to enroll, to levy upon, to put in command 
of. 3. Superlative of magnus. 4. Gen. sing. of ei. 5. Connection 
between derivation of intellegere and its meaning £o understand. 
6. The formation of pres. and fut. parties. in all conjugations. 
1. The tenses in which esse is used as an auxiliary. 8. Three ways 
of saying very. 9. Substantive clauses in text of XIIT., XX., XXL, 
XXXIL, XXXIX. 10. The Latin for one, two, three, five, six, nine, 
ten; ll. third, fifth. 


1 The teacher should be particular to review the principal parts of all the verbs 
in these Lessons. 

2 Pronounced in English A-qwé-lé’-yah. 

8 What mode in Latin? Cf. LII. x. 7, Obs. 2. 


LESSON LXI 267 


LESSON LXI. 


l. TEXT. 


Ibi Centronés et Graioceli et Caturiges, locis superió- 
ribus occupáàtis, itinere exercitum prohibere conantur. 
Complüribus his proeliis pulsis, ab Oceld, quod est cite- 
rioris provinciae extrémum, in finés Vocontiorum ulte- 
rioris provinciae die septimo pervenit; inde in Allo- 
brogum fines, ab Allobrogibus in Segusiàvos exercitum 
dücit. Hi sunt extra provinciam trans Rhodanum primi. 


2. NOTES. 


l. superioribus ; for form of nom. sing. masc., cf. XLIII. N. 6; 
for the nom. sing. neut., cf. XLVII. N. 2. 

2. complüribus his proeliis pulsis: (4) for form of pulsis, cf. 
pulsum LIII.; (4) pulsis agrees with his, with which it forms au 
abl. absolute; (c) proeliis is an abl. of means, limited by compla- 
ribus. 

3. dié; why abl.? Cf. XL. N. 1. 

4. septimo, seventh ; tells which one, or the order, in a series ; 
hence called an ordinal ; cf. the ordinals, primi, first, below ; tertiam, 
third, VIT. ; note that the ordinals are of the lst and 2d declensions. 

5. pervenit; note that the pf. pass. partic. in the abl. absolute 
his pulsis, is well translated by a pf. act. partic. in agreement with 
the subject of this verb; thus, having defeated these, he arrives. So, 
too, with a similar abl. absolute in the first sentence of the lesson. 
Why is not a pf. act. partic. used? Cf. LVIT. x. 3, e, and Obs. 2. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. A numeral adj. which gives the number of anything in a series 
is called an ORDINAL, and should be distinguished from the CARDINALS 
which tell how many. The following ordinals have been met in the 
text: primus, first ; tertius, ¢hird ; septimus, seventh. All ordinals 
are adjs. of the 1st and 2d declensions. 


268 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


1. Caturigés, a Gallic people 6. inde, from that place, thence ; 


living among the Alps ; see cf. ibi, (Aere. 

map. - 1. Ocelum, a towu in Cisalpine 
2. Centrónes, a Gallic people Gaul. 

living among the Alps; 8. primus, /irst. 

see map. 9. Segusiavi, a Gallic people 
3. citerior, adj. in comp., (posi- living just west of the 

tive not found), mearer, | Rhone; see map. 


hither; citerior Gallia, | 10. septimus, seventh. 
Gaul this side the Alps, i.e. | 11. superus, superior comp. 


the Roman or eastern side ; suprémus or summus 
ulterior Gallia, Gaul óe- sup., high, higher, highest ; 
yond the Alps. superior when used of 
4. extra, prep. with accus. ; de- time means former. 
yond. 12. Vocontii, a Gallic tribe liv- 
5. Gráioceli, an Alpine people ing in the Roman province ; 
living in Gaul; see map. see map. 


5. EXERCISES 


l. (a) Decl. of superioribus in masc. and fem.; (^) in neuter. 
(c) Decl. of septimo in all genders. (4) All the iufs. and parties. 
that you know of pulsis, with meaning of each. 

2. (a) Milites quos Caesar conscripserat citeriore ex provincia 
conveniebant. (4) Caturigés itinere nostras legidués prohibere co- 
nàt: erant. (c) Caesar, multis occisis, inde reliquos pepulit. 
(4) Caesar, quod Helvetios frümentàrios agros transire intellegebat, 
ut eos prohiberet, magnis itineribus trans Alpes contendit. 

3. («) The last town which is in the hither province is called Oce- 
lum.! (4) It was necessary (for) the Helvetians to buy up carts, in- 
order-that they-might-carry a supply of grain. (c) The Helvetians 
had at length marched across the territory of the Sequanians and 
were-roaming-about in the fields of the Haeduans. 

1 [n English O-c2-/in, not O’-cé-litm; cf. E. G. 10. 


LESSON LXI. 969 


4. (a) For many years the Haeduans had been friends of the Ro- 
mans. (6) When these had-been-put-to-flight by Caesar, he led his 
army across the Alps. (c) The result was (it came to pass) that the 
Gauls who dwelt near the mountains could not drive back the 
Romans. (4) Caesar's five legions were marching toward the west. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Adjs. irreg. in comparison found thus far. 9. Other cases of 
di&. 3. Uncertainty as to the nom. of Oceló iu the mind of one 
who knows only this one form as an abl. singular. 4. The geus. plur. 
of Centrénés, Gráiocelt, Caturigés. 5. The Latin for /Aere, thence, 
where. 6. The difference in meaning between ordinals and cardinals, 
7. Different possible translations of the abls. absolute in this Lesson. 
8. The route of Caesar as described in this Lesson ; see map. 9. The 
Hither and Farther Provinces. 10. English derivatives from words 
in this Lesson. - 


A ROMAN ARMY ON THE MARCH. 


Why is this picture appropriate for this Lesson? The standard of a legion was a gold or 
silver eagle. Find one in the picture. Note that the standards are of different kinds and that 
some of the standard bearers have skins of animals on their heads. How are these soldiers 
carrying their personal baggage? (Cf. the modern knapsack.) How, their helmets ? Cf. the 
single soldier, p. 238. 


270 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LXII. 


REVIEW. 
Lessons LI.-LXI. 


mR Ss oh Ce be 
Carsar’s “ Gattic- War,” Book L, Chapters 7, 8, 9, 10. 


Let the pupil make in writing a translation of these four Chapters as literal as 
is consistent with good English. Let this translation be subjected to the criticism 
of the teacher and the class. 

Follow the directions given under ‘“‘ Text " in L., noting very carefully any new 
verb fozms that have occurred. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The 3d declension. (a) Decl. and gender of iter, LI. Obs. 2. 
(6) Stems in -d, LV. Obs. 1. (c) Neuts. in -us with gens. in -eris, 
LVI. Obs. 2; A. & G. 48, V and 49; H. 61. (v) Nouns in -tad6, 
LVII., Obs. 1; A. & G. 49; H. 60. (ve) Nouns having -ium in gen. 
plur, LIX. Obs, 2. (/) The following 3d decl. nouns and adjs. 
represeut large classes of nouns and adjs. in the way they form the 
stem from the nom. or the nom, from the stem. Note how this is 
done in each case. 


Nominative, Genitive, Nominative. Genitive. 
léx légis tempus temporis 
(pax pácis) (facilius ^ facilióris) 
civitàs civitatis opus operis 
dolor doloris navis navis 
0. atid Orationis omne omnis 
(legio legionis) paténs patentis 
longitüdó . longitüdinis (pars partis) 
flümen flüminis 


Note that the words in parentheses are much like the words 
immediately above them. State the exact difference in each case. 


LESSON LXII. 211 


Explain the formation of the nom. from the stem (or from the gen.) 
when the nom. ends in -x? in -tas? in-or? in -i62 in -tid62 in 
-men? iu -us ?! in -is ?? in -e? in -ns (or -rs) ? 

(7) Note the GknDER and the mnpINGs of the following nouns. 
Note that all these nouns are so-called Eug, neuts, ; i, e, in Eng, the 
corresponding words have no gender (cf. Whitney's Eng. Gram. 
115). Remember that only in such words i$ the Latin gender deter- 
mined by the endings; cf, XIV. x, 4, Obs, 4 ; E. G. 42, 


Masculine. Feminine. Neuter, 
dol-or civi-tas omn-e 

1é-x (1é-gs) fli-men 
pá-x (p&-cs) tem-pus, -oris 
pa-rs Op-us, -eris 
plé-bs (facili-us, -dris) 
leg-ió 
orà-tió 


longi-tüdó 


Verify from the above nouns the following rules. In Latin, nouns 
and adjs. in -or are masc,; those in -t&s, -i6, -tüdó and in -s 
preceded by a consonant (except those in -ns) are fem,, those in -e, 
-men and -us are neuter,? 

2. Inflection of other nouns, pronouns, and adjectives, 
(a) The gen. ending -Yus, LI. Obs. 4. (4) The decl. of the reflexive 
pon Obs 2: 5A x G.9G 1) 104 p84. (e) Decl. and 
definition of ordinals, LXI. Obs, 1. 

3. Verb forms. (a) Plpf. subjv, pass. all conjugs., LI. Obs. 1. 
(0) The pres. subjv. of the 2d conjug., LIT, Obs. 1. (e) Pf. inf. 
pass. of all conjugs., LIT. Obs. 1. (7) The pres, subjv. in the Ist 
and in all conjugs., LVI. Obs. 1. (e) The pf, act. partic., LVIE. Obs. 


! In what other declensions is the nom. sing. ending -us found? The gens. 
-üris, -ütis and -üdis from the nom. -üs are found in but few words common in 
Caesar. 

? Note that in these nouns and adjs. the nom. and gen. are exactly alike. 

3 Neither f nor g is intended to cover all the nouns which occur. Very much 
time is often wasted in the class-room by drill upon the most uncommon classes of 
nouns, 


2-9 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


2; A. & G. 290, d and 1, 2; H. 550, v. 4. (jf) Forms of esse 
and posse, LVIII. Obs. 1. (9) Verbs having forms of different 
conjugs., LIX. Obs. 1. (4) The formation of pres. act. partic., 
LX. Obs. 1. (/) Stems of esse, LX. Obs. 2. 

4. Use of cases. (a) The gen. of quality, LV. Obs. 3; A. & G. 
215 aud 4; H. 396, V. and w. l. (4) Dat. with persuadére, 
imperare, and studére, LVIII. Obs. 4. (c) Dat. with verbs of 
giving and saying, LI. Obs. 6. (d) Det. with adjs., LX. Obs. 3. 
(e) Preps. with abl., LIT. Obs. 6; A. & G. 152, 6; H. 434. (^) Abl. 
of quality ; the usual adverbial force of the abl, LILI. Obs. 33 
A. & G. 251; H. 419, II. (9) Abl. of agent, LIII. Obs. 4; A. 
& G. 246; H. 415, IL. (7) Component parts of the abl. absolute 
construction, LVIII. Obs. 5; A. & G, 255 anda; H. 431 and 4. 

5. Use of verbs. (a) Subjv. in the subordinate clauses of 
indirect discourse, LII. Obs. 2; A. & G. 336, 2; H. 524. (7) Dum 
with subjv., LIV. Obs. 1; A. & G. 328; H. 519, II. 2. (c) Purpose 
expressed by the subjv. with qué and a comparative, LVI. Obs. 3; 
A. G.317; 6; H. 497; T1: 2. 

6. Translation. (a) Ellipsis in use of quam with the superla- 
tive, LI. Obs. 3. (4) The Latin for £o inform, LII. Obs. 3. 
(c) For of in sense of concerning, LIT, Obs. 4. (d) For he intends, 
LII. Obs. 5. (e) Must or onght in the translation of a fut. pass. 
partic., LIII. Obs, 2; A. & G. 113, d; H, 234. 

7. Order of words. (^) Position of the adv., LVIIT. Obs. 2. 
(P) Position of word most closely connected with preceding sentence, 
LVIII. Obs. 3. | 


3. WORD REVIEW. 


Classified alphabetical list of all the new words occurring in Chaps. 7-10 of 
Book I. of Caesar's ‘‘ Gallic War." Let the pupil give the meaning of each word 
and be prepared to decline every noun and adj. and to give the principal parts of 
every verb. 


VERBS. 
1st Conjugation. 
l. deliberare 4. impetrare 7. nüntiare 9. renüntiare 
2. hiemàre 5. maturare 8. putare 10. temperare 
3. imperare 6. negàre 


LESSON LXII. 97 

2d Conjugation. 3d Conjugation. 
‘l. licet l. concédere 1l. mittere 21. rescindere 
2. respondére 2. conscribere — 12. obstringere 22. reverti 
3. studére 3. déicere 13. occidere 23. sumere 
4, tenére 4. desistere 14. ostendere 

5. disponere 15. pellere Ath Conjugation. 
Irregular. 6. edücere 16. perdücere 1. commünire 
l. velle. 7. influere l7. perrumpere 2. pervenire 

8. intellegere 18. praeficere 9. venire 

9. intercédere 19. relinquere 

10. iungere 20. repellere 


Nouns, Pronouns, AND ADJECTIVES. 


| lst Declension. 


18 


©) 
e 


l. angustiae, plur. 3. fossa 5. iniüria 7. memoria 
2. Aquileia 4. gratia 6. Italia 8. via 
9d Declension. 3d Declension. 
1. bellicosus — 16. mürus l. Alpes 15. nàvis 
2. beneficium 17. Namméius — 2. altitudo 16. obses, -idis 
3. Cassius 18. novus 8, Caesar 17. opus, -eris 
4. castellum 19. nüllus 4. Caturigés 18. pés, -edis 
5. exemplum — 20. Ocelum 5. Centronés 19. princeps,-ipis 
6. frümentàrius 21. praesidium — 6. certior 20. ratis 
7. Graioceli 22. primus 7. citerior 2]. Santones 
8. hibernus 23. Segusiavi 8. complürés, p/. 22. sponte, adi. 
9. inimicus 24. septimus 9. deprecàtor — 25. superior 
| 10. invitus 25. spatium 10. faeultàs 94. Tolosates 
ll. iugum 26. telum 11. largitio 25. ulterior 
12. Labienus 27. Titus 12. legio 26. urbs 
IE. léeatus 28. ullus 13. miles, -itis 27. voluntas 
14. maleficium 29. Verucloctius 14. münitio 
15. minimus 30. Vocontii 
-u Stems. Unclassified. 
l. adventü, adl. 1. novem, indecl. 
2. conatü, abl. 2. quid, ?7reg. 
9. coneursü, al. 3. quinque, indecl. 
4. Idiis, nom. plur. 4. sedecim, ezdecl. 


914 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 
ADVERBS. — PREPOSITIONS. CONJUNCTIONS, 
l. ibi l. circum ]. dum 
2. inde 2. extrà 2. itaque 
3. interdiü 9. propter 3. si 
4. interea 4. sine 
5. noctü 5. sub 
6. nóunumquam 
7. tamen 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Write the gen. sing. and the gen. plur. of all the 3d decl. 


nouus and adjs. in the “ Word Review." (4) Give the gender and _ 


write the gen. sing. and gen. plur. of the following new nouns: ars, 
ovile, egestas, commutàtió, nómen, daps, similitüdo. (c) Give 
the nom. sing. of the following case forms : necis, palüdem, praetori, 


fulmine, turpitüdinem, fictionis, frontem, lénitatis, litora, latera, 


maria. 


2. Write in Latin. When Caesar was informed of these things, 


he came into Gaul and prepared to keep out the Helvetians from the | 


Roman province. He did not allow them to make their way through | 


this province because he thought that those by whom the Romans 


had formerly been sent under the yoke would not refrain from 


wrong-doing. 

He therefore made a wall and a ditch from Lake Lemannus to the 
river Rhone so that the Helvetians might not be able to break through 
into the province. After trying to cross the river and being repulsed 
by the Romans and their fortifications, they determined to go out by 


the way which remained. | They ask permission to do this and obtain | 
their request by the influence of Dumnorix, the Haeduan, who was à | 


friend both to the Helvetians and the Sequanians. 


When it was made known to Caesar that they were about to make | 
their way to the boundaries of the Santones, who lived toward the | 


west and were not far from the Roman province, he hastened into 


Italy, and led from that place into Gaul five new legions so as to | 


keep the Helvetians from their journey. 


] 


| LESSON LXIII. 215 


LESSON LXIII. 


l. TEXT. 


Helvetii iam per angustias et finés Sequanorum suas 
copias tràdüxerant, et in Haeduorum fines pervenerant, 
eorumque agros populabantur. Haedui, cum se suaque 
ab iis defendere nón possent, legatos ad Caesarem mit- 
tunt, rogatum auxilium: ita sé omni tempore de populo 
Romano meritos esse, ut paene in cónspectü exercitüs 
nostri agri vastari, liberi eorum in servitütem abdüci, 
oppida expügnari non debuerint. 


2. NOTES. 


| 1l. possent: (a) When this word is reached, it will be seen that 
the preceding cum is a conj., not a prep. and that sé is an accus., 
not an abl. with the prep. cum ;! cf. LVIII. v. 8; for the position of 
icum, prep., when used with a reflexive, cf. s&cum XLIII.; (/) the 
preceding sua is a noun in the accus. plur. neut. meaning thei own 
things or possessions, not an adj.; cf. ea VII.. cmnibus XXI, and 
E. G. 19; (c) What is the antec. of the preceding iis? Why is not 
sé used here? 

' 9. mittunt; note the disagreement between the impf. tense in the 
subordinate verb possent and the pres. tense here; this is because 
this pres. tense has much the force of a past; we may say either 
when they could, they sent or when they can, they send; cf. persuadet 
ut occuparet XXXIII. cum nüntiátum esset, mátürat LI., and 
IE G. 67, 2. 

| 3. rogatum, /o ask. (a) a supine in -um, not a pf. partie. ; it 
denotes purpose after mittunt, a verb denoting motion; cf. facta 


1JIn the first book of Caesar's Gallic War, the conj. cum is immediately 
followed, in the order of the text, eight times by an ablative. The lesson of this 
fact for the beginner is: Be cautious, and wait for the Latin to develop its own 
meaning. 


276 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


XXXV.; (4) it is evident at this point that the preceding cum, 


which is followed by the subjv. possent, denotes cause as well as 


time; they sent for aid because they could not defend themselves, 
not simply at the time when they could not defend themselves. In 
LI. and LVIII. also, cum with the subjv. expresses both time and 
cause; cf. E. G. 69, 9. In XXL, the force of cum with the subjv. 
seems to be almost wholly causal. 

4. omni: (^) -iis the ending of the abl. sing., as it is in all adjs. 
in -is, -e ; cf. igni XXXIX. Obs. 1; (/) omni tempore, literally, a£ 
every time, freely, at all times. 

9. meritós esse: (a) for mode and tense, cf. LIII. N. 2. Obs. 1; 
(^) for stein merit-, cf. LVI. x. 5, a. | 

6. exercitüs: (a) the gen. sing. masc. of a -u stem; for four 
other cases of such stems, cf. XLI. N. 6; (4) the u is long because 
the form is contracted. from the 3d decl. form exercitu-is ; (c) the 
nom. sing. is formed by adding -s to stem as in the case of pars, 
omnis ; the cases not mentioned in this note are like the same cases 
in the 3d declension. 

1. nostri: (a) gen. sing., limiting exercitüs ; (4) Caesar, a 
Roman, writing for Roman readers, uses the word nostri, our; to 
the Haeduan ambassadors the army was not our army but the 
“Roman army.” 


8. d&buerint: (a) pf. subjv. of the 2d conjug., stem d&bu-; cf, 
habu-erat XXXIII.; tense sign -eri-, as in all conjugs.; ef. c6nsciv- 


erit XLI.; (4) a subjv. of result; cf. XLVI. w. 7, a; (c) when. 
this verb in a past tense is translated oxght, the pres. inf., after it, 1s. 
best represented in English by the pf. inf. ; thus, our children ought 


uot to have been led away. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The u or 4th decl. is composed of -u stems which have in. 
general the suffixes of the 3d decl., but in several cases contract these 
suffixes with -u of the stem. Most of these nouns end in -us and. 


are masc. They are declined as follows : 


| 


LESSON LXIII. DR 
Singular. Plural. 
Nom. exercit-us exercit.üs 
Geu. exercit-üs exercit-uum 
Dat. exercit-ui exercit.ibus 
Accus. — exercit.um exercit-üs 
Abl. exercit ü exercit.ibus 


2.’ The pres. ind. is often used in Latin narrative with the force of 
It is then called the HISTORICAL PRESENT. 
3. The supine in -um is sometimes used after a verb of motion to 


a past indefinite. 


express purpose. 
4. Cum denoting CAUSE or TIME and CAUSE, takes the subjunctive. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


A. & G. 68, lacus H.116, früctus and 
and N. foot-note 4. 


A. & G. 276, d. H. 467, III. 


1. The 4th decl. . 


2. The historical present 
3. The uses of the su- 
pine in -um 


A. & G. 302. 
A. & G. 326. 


H. 546. 


4. Cum causal. H2517. 


5. VOCABULARY. 
sine 


l. abdücere, -düxit, ductus, /o | 8. liberi (the g., meaning 


lead away. 


. auxilium, Zelp, aid. 
. cOnspectus, -üs (conspicere, 


to see) sigh. 


. débére, débuit, débitus (dé 


and habére, £o have or keep 
Jrom some one) to owe, to be 
bound ; débet, he ought. 
défendere, -fendit, -fénsus, 
to ward off, to defend. 
exptignare (lo fight out), to 
take by storm. 


Sita, adv., so. 


IS: 


14. 


child, not found), children. 
mereri, meritus, (0 merit, 
deserve, earn. 


. paene, almost. 
. populari fo /ay waste. 
. servitüs, -ütis, fem., (ser- 


vus, a slave) servitude ; 
for form, cf, virtüs X. 
tradücere or tránsdücere, 
-düxit, -ductus, to lead 
across; cf. meaning of 
transire. 
vastare (vastus, empty) to 


make empty, to lay waste. 


278 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Agri Haeduorum eraut finibus Séquandrum  proxiui. 
(^) Haedui, legatis missis, auxilium rogàáverunt. (c) Ob eas causàs 
nostris agris prohiberi nou debemus. (7) Cum homines inimicéd 
auimo agros vastent, exercitüs mittuntur. 

9. (a) Almost in sight of a brave army, our children are-being- 
carried-away into slavery. (6) When the Helvetians were marching 
through fruitful fields, they did not refrain from wrong. (c) Since 
Caesar was not very far distant, the Haeduans sent ambassadors to 
him. | 

3. (a) The Helvetians ought to have crossed the territory which 
was near their route (iter) without wrong-doing. (6) The Haeduans 
have deserved so well (have so deserved) at-the-hands-of (from) the 
Romau people, that Caesar ought to have sent an army into their 
fields. (c) They had crossed their own boundaries, and were leading 
their army through the fields of those whom they surpassed in valor 
and in number of men. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. | 


l. The tense sign -era-. 2. The tense sign -eri-. 3. The abl. | 
sing. of adjs. in -is. 4. The two supines and their uses. 5. The | 
mode used with cum causal. 6. How long we must wait before we | 
can decide on the meaning of cum. 7. Where the subj. is, in the 
sentence est. 8. Difference between dicit sé rogare and dicit eum | 
rogüáre. 9. Two ways of saying ali things in Latin. 10. The | 
conjug. aud exact meaning of the Eng. verb ought. 11. The histori- 
cal present. 12. Three uses of the ending -üs. 13. Difference of | 
form and case between -us and -üs. 14. Four gens. possible for the 
nom. -us. 15. Two ways to say they sent to ask aid. | 


1 


LESSON LXIV. 279 


LESSON LXIV. 


l. TEXT. 


Eddem tempore Haedui Ambarri, necessarii et con- 
sanguinei Haeduorum, Caesarem certiorem faciunt, 
sese, dépopulatis agris, non facile ab oppidis vim 
hostium prohibére. Item Allobroges, qui trans Rhoda- 
num vicos possessionesque habebant, fuga sé ad Cae- 
sarem recipiunt et demonstrant sibi praeter agri solum 
nihil esse reliqui. Quibus rébus adductus Caesar non 
exspectandum sibi statuit, dum, omnibus fortünis so- 
ciorum consümptis, in Santonos Helvetii pervenirent. 


2. NOTES. 


l. eddem tempore, at the same time: (a) eodem is the abl. 
sing. neut. of idem XXXIV.; it is composed of is, ea, id and the 
undeclined termination -dem. (0) for use of tempore without a 
prep., cf. dié XL. N. 1. 

2. Ambarri, the name of a people; in apposition with Haedui. 

9. Caesarem certiórem faciunt: (a) for pass. form of the 
expression, cf. LII. N. 1; (4) for this 4th conjug. form while the 
inf. is facere, cf. LIX. Obs. 1, and recipiunt just beyond. 

4. dépopulatis ; though a dep. verb, pass. in sense as well as in 
form in this instance. 

9. sé... prohibere : (a) certiorem faciunt is equivalent to a 
verb of saying, and is therefore followed by an inf. with subj. accus. ; 
(4) note that the abl. case with prohibére is preceded by a prep. and 
ef. use of prohibere in XII.; (c) the preceding vim is an accus. ; 
E vi XLVITI. 

6. recipiunt: (a) for meaning in connection with sé, see the 
General Vocabulary at the end of the book; (6) for tense and its use 
with the impf. tense of the subordinate verb habébant, cf. LXIII. 
N. 2. 


280 | INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


7. sibi... reliqui: (a) reliqui is a partitive gen. (cf. VI. N 
3, d) from reliquum, which is here a neut. noun meaning ¢he rest, 
it depends upon nihil: (4) for the use of the dat. sibi in counectior 
with the verb esse, cf. the use of the dat. Helvetiis in LIX.; the 
literal translation is nothing of the rest is to them except the soil of the 
field; free translation, they have wothing left except the soil of thi 
jield. Note that the dat. case here names the POSSESSOR. 

8. Quibus rébus adductus: (a) for translation of quibus, cf. 
X. N. 1, e; (4) note that the abl. of means is here used immediately 
before the nom. case of the pf. pass. partic. which it modifies ; cf. 
similar phrases in XIX., XXX., XXXVII, LVIII. 

9. statuit: (a) may from its form be either pres. or pf. ind.; it is 
probably the pf. in this case; (2) for the translation of preceding ex- 
spectandum, cf. LIII. N. 3, 0; (c) sibi is a dat. used with the fut, 
pass. partic. with the force of the abl. of ageut ; cf. ab Helvetiis LIII. 

10. pervenirent: (7) impf. subjv. of the 4th conjug.; (6) for 
explanation of mode, cf. LIV. Nn. 3, 6. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The abl. of means (or agent) is very frequently found in Latin 
standing immediately before, and modifying, a pf. pass. partic. in the 
nom. case. 

2. With the verb esse the name of the person who possesses 
something is often put in the dat. case. This dat. of possessor may 
generally be best translated as the subject of the verb have. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 
l. The dat. of the possessor A. & G. 231. H. 387. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. Ambarri, a tribe living near | 3. consümere, -sümpsit, -sümp- 


the Haeduans ; see map. tus (con, intensive, wholly, 
2. consanguineus, adj. or noun and sümere, to take), to 
(con and sanguis, 4/ood), consume, destroy. 


akin by blood. 4. demonstrare, fo sho. 


LESSON LXIV. 281 


5. dépopulàri, to lay waste. noun, a close friend or near 
6. exspectare, to wait, wait for. relative, 
7. fortüna, fortune (either good | 11. possessio, a possession. 
or bad); in plur. goods, | 12. praeter, prep. with accus., 
gossessious. along by, beyond, except. 
8. fuga, flight. 13. solum, the soil, the ground. 
9. hostis, a stranger, au enemy; | 14. statuere, statuit, statütus, 
more frequeutly in the to cause to stand, to estub- 
plur., the enemy. lish, to decide. 


10. necessarius, wecessury; as 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Quibus rébus démonstratis, Caesar in agrés Haeduorum 
contendere constituit. (4) Multa milia iümentorum ab Helvetiis iam 
cousümpta eraut. (c) Hae rés Caesari, principi Romano, cum Haedui 
Romauis amici sint, non concé.lendae suut. (4) Caesar, eum certior 
factus esset maguam multitüdinem Helvétiorum, oppidis expügnàtis, 
liberos sociorum abdücere, perinotus est. 

2. The Helvetiaus had gone out of their own boundaries and had 
crossed the boundaries of the Sequanians. From the country of the 
Sequanians they had gone into the fields of the Haeduans and were 
laying them waste. These (people) and their neighbors went to 
Caesar and asked him to drive the Helvetians from their boundaries. 
They said that they had been the allies of the Romans for many years, 
and ought not to be led into slavery by the Helvetians while (cum) 

the. powerful Romans were very-near. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. Peculiarity in decl. of idem. 2. Analysis! of pervenirent. 
3. The Latin for he informed Caesar, Caesar was informed. 4. Two 
cases which express agency. 5. The lit. meaning of the fut. pass. 
partic., and how the idea of necessity comes from this meaning. 


| 
1 i, e. separation into stem, tense sign, and personal ending. 


282 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. Three ways of expressing necessity or obligation in Latin. 7. Two 
ways of saying he has in Latin. 8. The two parts of speech possible 
for the form facile. 9. The comparison of certior.! 10. The nom. 
sing. and gender of possessi6nés. 11. The pf. pass. partic. modified 
by the abl. of means. 12. The pf. pass. partic. agreeing with a noun 
in the abl., i. e. the abl. absolute construction ; examples of 11 and 
12 in this Lesson. 


LESSON LXV. 


WEPex dt 


Flümen est Arar, quod per fines Haeduorum et 
Séquanoórum in Rhodanum influit, incredibili lenitate, 
ita ut oculis, in utram partem fluat, iüdicari non possit. 
Id Helvetii ratibus àc lintribus iunctis transibant. Ubi 
per exploratores Caesar certior factus est, tres iam 
copiarum partes Helvetios id flümen tradüxisse, quar- 
tam feré partem citra flümen Ararim reliquam esse, dé 
tertia vigilia cum legionibus tribus 6& castris profectus, 
ad eam partem pervenit, quae nondum flümen trans- - 
ierat. 

2. NOTES. 


1. incrédibili lénitáte : (4) the abl. limited by an adj. modifies 
the preceding verb influit and tells how (i. e. in what MANNER) the 
river flows ; with remarkable smoothness ; cf. voluntate LII.; (5) for 
abl. ending -1, cf. LXIII. n. 4, a. 

2. possit: (a) for form, cf. LVIII. Obs. 1; (4) for construction, 
cf. XLVI. N. 7; (c) in utram partem fluat; this clause is a 
question indirectly quoted and the subj. of possit; cf. E. G. 67, 5, h, 
aud 5; the thought of a person looking at the river would be, “In 
utram partem fluit? " 

Cf. XLIII. Obs. 3. 


LESSON LXV. | 288 

3. tránsibant : (a) impf., because they were in the act of crossing; 
(4) for position of id, the first word in the sentence, cf. LVIII. N. 3, 6. 

4. Caesar certior factus est; cf. the similar expressions in LII. 
and LXIV., aud note that the adj. certior always agrees with the 
name of the person who is informed. 

5. trádüxisse: (a) a pf. iuf. active. On what stem is it formed ? 
With. what ending? Cf. the pres. inf. act. düce-re ; (4) the preced- 
ing word flimen is governed by trans, with which dücere is here 
compounded. 

6. profectus : (7) from deponent verb proficisct. How, then, is 
it translated ? (6) dé vigilia, just before, lit. from (i. e. beginning iu) 
the watch, may be translated during or in the watch. 

7. transierat ; from transire, -v of the pf. stem being dropped ; 
cf. the impf. of the same verb in transibant 3. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The pf. inf. act. is formed in all conjugs. by adding -isse to the 
pf. stem. 

2. The pf. of the simple verb ire is regularly ivit, but compounds 
of ire usually drop -v of the pf. stem. 

3. After some compound verbs a second accus. is used which is 
the obj. of the prep. in composition. 

4. The MANNER of an action is expressed by the ablative. When 
this abl. is limited by an adj. or a gen. no prep. is used. 

5. An indirectly quoted question has its verb in the subjunctive. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Two accusatives after com- 

pound’ verbs 4) $10 A. & G. 289, 6. — H, 376. 
myAbl.of manner...” « \.) A. & G. 248. H. 419 III. 

3. The question indirectly quoted A. & G. 334. H. 529, I. 


284 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


1. Arar or Araris (Ararim ac- | 8. linter, -tris, fem. by ex- 
cus, atid Arari abl., are ception, a boat. 
found), a river in Gaul. 9. oculus, an eye. 


2. castra, -órum (the sing. cas- | 10. quartus, fourth. 
trum, a fortress, is not | ll. uter, utra, utrum, which (of 


found in Caesar), a camp. two)? | For form, cf. 
3. citra, prep. with accus., on this XXXIV. Obs. 2 and LI. 
side of. Obs. 4. 
4. explórátor (expl6rare, /o | 12. vigilia, watch/ulness, a watch 
search out), a spy, a scout. of the night; the Romans 
5. incrédibilis, not to be believed, divided the night from sun- 
incredible, remarkable. set to sunrise, whatever its 
6. iüdicàre, to judye. length, into four equal 
1. 1&nitàs (lénis, smooth), smooth- watches. 


ness, gentleness. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline incrédibilis lénitas together. (4) Write all the 
forms that you know of posse. (c) Write all the infs., act. and 
pass., that you know of trádüxisse. 

2. (a) Helvetii rates ac lintrés iungébant ut flümen transirent. 
(P) Qui Caesarem certiorem faciunt trés partes flümen transiisse ? 
(c) Rogàvit qui dé his rébus certiorem Caesarem facerent. (4) Caesar 
eo die ab exploratoribus certior factus erat. 

3. («) Caesar saw a river which was of remarkable smoothness. 
(P) Three parts of the forces had crossed the river. (c) The 
Helvetians were hastening, that Caesar might not destroy their boats. 
(d) The river flows neither toward the east nor toward the west. 

4. (a) Caesar could not judge with his eyes in which direction 
the river was flowing. (^) They inform Caesar that the remaining 
fourth part is at-last being led across the river. (c) Caesar led to 
the river the three legions which he had with him. 


teint mtm tm sn Oe 
\ 


- LESSON LXV. 985 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. The ending -isse. 2. The pres. stem of transire. 3. The pf. 
stem of ire; of transire. 4. Difference in form and mode of fluit 
aud fluat. 5. Two kinds of abls. which are usually qualified by an 
adjective. 6. All the kinds of abl. learned thus far. 7. The exact 
literal meaning of the Latin translated to inform, 8. The principal 
elauses of indir. discourse. 9. The subordinate clauses of indir. 
discourse. 10. The interrogative clauses of indir. discourse. 11. The 
position of the word most closely related to the preceding sentence. 
12. The time of the third watch. - 


imi 


Se 
SSS TOUTS 
o ENSSSSSUQGE 
rUencipatlt 
Sl 7 
Si 3. S 
P. 5 
NI E S Rv 
WS 
vo. 
Ro 
S SS SIS Es 
N NN J 
= S 
2 


| ESSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS NS 


CASTRA ROMANA, LOOKING FROM THE REAR. 


Why is this plan appropriate with this Lesson ? What is the shape of the camp? 
How many gates has it and what are their names? What are the principal streets 
of the camp and how do they run? The praetorium in the centre is the head- 
quarters of the commander. ‘The camp was fortified by a wall and a ditch. 


286 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LXVI. 


l. TEXT. 


Eos impeditos et inopinantes aggressus magnam 
eorum partem concidit: reliqui fugae sésé mandarunt, 
atque in proximas silvas abdiderunt. Is pagus appel- 
labatur Tigurinus; nam omnis civitas Helvetia in 
quattuor pàgós divisa est. Hic pagus ünus, cum domo 
exisset patrum nostrorum memoria, L. Cassium con- 
sulem interfecerat et eius exercitum sub iugum miserat. 


2. NOTES. 


1. impeditos: pf. pass. partic. formed from the supine stem of 
the 4th conjug. verb impedire. 

2. mandáürunt: (7) shortened form for mandavérunt; cf. 
oppügnàrant XLV.; (4) for its subj. (the noun reliqui), cf. reliqui 
XA Ne 7 ee 

3. in silvas abdidérunt ; cf. XXVIII. n. 5, 4, Obs. 5. 

4. hic; nom. sing. masc. of the pron. ht IV. What other forms 
have been used ? 

5. exisset; for exi(v)isset: (^) plpf. subjv. act., sign -isse-; 
cf. plpf. subjv. pass. nüntiátum esset LI. and the plpf. ind. act. 
habu-era-t XXXIII. ; (4) cf. instances of the use of cum meaning 
when in XIL, XLI., LL, LVILI., and note that, whenever it is used 
with the impf. and plpf. tenses, it is followed by the subjv.; (c) for 
omission of prep. with domó, cf. domo XLVI. 

6. memorià ; for construction, cf. XL. N. 1, a. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. The plpf. subjv. act. has the sign -isse- in all conjugs., and is 
formed on the pf. stem because it denotes completed action. 

2. In Caesar, the conj. cum meaning when, if followed by the 
impf. or plpf. tenses, commonly takes the subjunctive. 


LESSON LXVI. 287 


4. VOCABULARY. 


.]. abdere, -didit, -ditus, to put 6. interficere, -fécit, -fectus, 


away, to hide. to kill. 
2. aggredi, -gressus (ad and 7. mandàre (manus, the hand, 
gradi) to yo towards, to | and dare), £o give into 
| attack. one’s haud, to commit. 
3. concidere,  -cidit,  -cisus 8. nam, conj., for. 
(con intensive and cae- 9. pagus, district, canton. 
dere, to cut), to cut (o | 10. quattuor, indeclinable adj., 
pieces, to kill. four. 


4. impedire, -pedivit, -peditus | ll. silva, « forest. 
(in, against, aud pés), ¢o | 12. Tigurinus, the name of an 


impede, to place at a disad- Helvetian district; its in- 

vantaye. habitants are called Ti- 
5. inopinans, adj), wnewpecting, gurini. 

unaware. 


5. EXERCISES. 


l. (a) Write all the forms you know of impedire ; (4) of man- 
dàre ; (c) of miserat. 

2. (a) liqui nondum flümen transierant impediti sunt. (6) Cum 
multi concisi essent, reliqui in silvas exierunt. (c) L. Cassio inter- 
fecto, exercitus quem Romani in Galliam düxerant sub iugum 
missus est. 

3. (a) His army is very brave. (4) The territory of the Helvetians 
is divided into four districts, of which one is called Tigurinus. 
(c) Those whom the Romans did not kill, fled.. 

4. (a) The forests, into which they went, were very-near. 
(b) Lucius Cassius, who had been killed in Gaul, was not consul 
within the memory of Caesar. (c) When the Romans were attacking 
those who were on this side of the river, their friends were informed. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The stems of all conjugs., and how to find them.’ 2. Likeness 
between the Ist and 4th conjugs. in formation of stems. 3. Difference 


1 Review the inflections of verbs in L. 


288 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


in the formation of pf. stem in 3d and 4th conjugations. 4. Difference 
between the 2d and 4th coujugs. in quantity of i in supine stem. 
5. Difference in characteristic of 2d and 3d conjugations. 6. In- 
stances from the text in which a prep. expressed in the English 
translation is omitted in Latin. 7. In which the Latin uses a 
different prep. from that which the English translation suggests. 
8. All you know about the form cum. 9. All you know about plpf. 
tenses. 


LESSON LXVII. 


l. TEXT. 


Ita sive casi sive consilio deorum immortalium, 
quae pars civitatis Helvetiae insignem calamitatem 
populo Romano intulerat, ea princeps poenas persolvit, 
Qua in ré Caesar nón solum püblicas, sed etiam priva- 
tas iniürias ultus est, quod eius soceri L. Pisonis avum, 
L. Pisonem legatum, Tigurini eodem proelio, quo Cas- 
sium, interfecerant. 


2. NOTES. 


l. intulerat; for construction of preceding populo, cf. inferre 
XXV. 

2 persolvit: (a) ea, the subj. of this verb, refers to pars in the 
preceding relative clause; what part . . ., that instead of the more 
usual order éhat part . . . which; (b) princeps is here an adj. 
limiting ea (pars), and may be best translated by a clause; thus, 
that part was the first to pay the penalty, Vit. that part first paid the 
penalty, t. e. before the other parts, not before doing something else. : 

3. quà in r8; for order, cf. XXIV. N. 1 and his LVIII.; for 
meaning, ef. qua X. 

1 The pupil should remember that many difficulties unprovided for in the Notes 


are fully met in the Vocab., which must, of course, be consulted in translating the 
Text. 


LESSON LXVII. 289 


4. interfécerant: (a) supply this verb in the subordinate clause, 
qu5 Cassium, where it will have Tigurini understood for its subj. 
and Cassium for its obj.; (6) éius, referring to Caesar, depends 
upon soceri; it is not an adj. agreeing with soceri; (c) appositives 
in this sentence? (7) antec. and const. of qué? 


3. VOCABULARY. 


l. avus, grandfather. to loose thoroughly, to pay 
2. calamitàs, disaster, calamity. in full. 
9. casus, -üs (cadere, /o fall), | 8. püblicus, adj., public. 
a falling, accident, misfor- 9. sed, conj., but. 
tune, chance. 10. sive, conj., (si and vel), or 
4. deus, a god. if; sive . . . sive, whether 
5. immortàlis (in negative, and e br Leliher autores OT. 
mors), undying, immortal. ll. socer, soceri, father-in-law. 
6. insignis (in, upon, and sig- | 12. solum, adv., only; nón 
num, a mark), marked, solum . . . sed etiam, 
remarkable. not only . . . but also. 


1. persolvere, -solvit,-solütus, | 13. ulcisci, ultus, fo avenge, to 
punish. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Decline in all genders the adjs. insignem ; (4) piblicas. 
(c) Decline calamitatem ; (7) cásü ; (¢) eius in the masculine. 

2. (a) Caesar filiam Pisonis, cüius avus ab Helvetiis interfectus 
erat, in matrimonium düxerat. (4) Pars civitatis Helvetiae quam 
Caesar pepulerat Tigurinus pagus erat. (c) Iniüriae, quas Caesar 
ultus est, à Tiguiinis Romanis illatae sunt. 

3. (a) The forests, in which the rest hid themselves, were very near 
to the river. (4) The part which was left was cut to pieces when- 
taken-at-a-disadvantage (partic.). (c) The rest of the Helvetians 
were taken at a disadvantage because they were separated from their 
friends. 

19 


290 : INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. When Caesar heard what the Helvetians were doing he set out 
for the country of the Haeduans, and attacked the Helvetian forces 
while they were crossing a river called the Arar in boats which they 
had made. He defeated that part of the enemy which had not yet 
crossed the river. These were the Tigurinians who within the 
memory of the fathers had defeated a Roman consul and killed the 
grandfather of Caesar's father-in-law. 


5. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 

1. Two cases possible for the form soceri. 2. Force of nón 
solum ... sed etiam; 3. sive . . . sive; 4. aut... aut; 
5. ita... ut. 6. The Latin for daughter, son; 1. father, father- 
in-law, grandfather ; 8. brother, kinsman (by blood). 9. The abl. of 
means in this Lesson. 10. Prons. in this Lesson. 


LESSON LXVIII. 


Ley rad 

Hic proelio facto, reliquas copias Helvétidrum ut 
cOnsequi posset, pontem in Arare faciundum cirat 
atque ita exercitum tradicit. Helvetii repentino eius 
adventü commoti cum id, quod ipsi diébus viginti 
aegerrime confécerant, ut flamen transirent, illum üno 
die fecisse intellegerent, legatos ad eum mittunt; cüius 
legationis Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux 
Helvetiorum fuerat. 


2. NOTES. 


1. hdc; for case form, cf. hoc XXII. 

2. reliquás cópiàás . . . cónsequi. What relation between 
these two words? The early introduction of reliquas cópiàs into 
the sentence emphasizes the rest of the forces on the farther side of 
the river in contrast with ¢he Tigurinians on this side. 


LESSON LXVIIL 291 


3. cürat: (a) pontem the obj. is limited by the fut. pass. partic. 
faciundum (for form, cf. LILI. N. 5, a) ; lit., he cares for a bridge 
to be made, more freely, he has a bridge built. (6) What clause gives 
the purpose of this bridge-building ? 

4. adventü commoti ; cf. LXIV. n. 8. 

5. ipsi; for meaning and use, cf. ipse XXXV. x. 5. 

6. ut... tránsirent ; a noun clause (cf. E. G. 49 and 52) in 
apposition with preceding id, which is the obj. of cénfécerant ; cf. 
ut... cremárétur XXXIX. 

7. illum . . . fécisse: (a) illum is the accus. sing. and refers 
to Caesar; cf. illis XXXV.; (/) for form and tense of fécisse, cf. 
trádüxisse LXV. (c) What is the direct discourse for illum 
fecisse ? or, in other words, what was the exact thought of the 
Helvetians ? | 

8. mittunt; for lack of harmony between the tense of this verb 
and that of intellegerent, cf. LXIII. Nn. 2. 

9. Divico ; nom. sing., not abl.; its gen. is like that of 6ratié. 

10. princeps ; here a noun ; for const., cf. XXXIII. N. 5, d, Obs. 6. 


3. OBSERVATION. 

1. In order to emphasize a word, for the sake of contrast,! it is 
often placed near the beginning of the sentence; sometimes outside 
of the clause with which it is grammatically connected. 

4. VOCABULARY. 


l. aegerrimé, or aegerrumé, | 4. cdnsequi, -secütus, £o follow 


adv. in superlative, with the up, to obtain. 
greatest trouble. 5. ctirare, to take care. 
9. Cassiànus, adj., pertaining to | 6. Divico, -Onis, an Helvetian 
Cassius; bellum Cassia- chieftain. 
num, the war with Cassins. 7. dux -cis (dücere? a leader. 
3. commovére, -movit, -mó- | 8. repentinus, sudden. 
| tus, to move deeply. | 9. viginti, iudecl. adj., twenty. 


lThe teacher can hardly insist too strongly on the fact that emphasis implies 
contrast; cf. E. G. 77, 2. Require pupils to show the contrast suggested when 


they say that any word is emphatic. 


299 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Rómáàni ponte quem Caesar fecit traducti sunt. (4) Vi- 
ginti dies id, quod Caesar fécerat tind die, faciebant. (c) Flumen, 
né Helvetii in fines Santonum pervenirent, Caesar exercitum tradüxit. 

2. (a) Caesar had married Calpurnia, the daughter of Piso. 
(^) The grandfather of Lucius Piso, from whom he received his 
name, had been killed by the Tigurinians. (c) Therefore Caesar said 
he avenged a private wrong, when he-cut-to-pieces the Tigurinians, 
(d) Caesar has boats joined together, in order to lead his army aeross 
che river. 

3. (a) For twenty days the Helvetians were building the bridge 
by which they crossed. (6) Divico, whom they sent to Caesar, had 
waged war with the Romans. (c) Caesar intended to punish those 
who had brought marked disaster upon the Romans. (d) Cassius 
led the army in which was the grandfather of Caesar’s father-in-law. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. Contrast in meaning of the form quod in this Lesson and the 
last. 2. Meaning of Cassianus. 3. The ending -isse. 4. The 
ending -isset. 5. Difference in the use of &ius and cüius in this 
Lesson. 6. Distinguish légatus, legatio, aud legio. 7. The abls. 
of time in this Lesson. 8. The abl. of place. 9. Ut clauses in 
this Lesson. 10. Lhe translation of the abl. absolute in this Lesson. 


LESSON LXIX. 


l- TEXT. 


Is ita cum Caesare egit: “Si pácem populus R6manus 
cum Helvetiis faciet, in eam partem ibunt atque ibi 
erunt Helvetii ubi eos constitueris atque esse volueris ; 
sin bello persequi persevéradbis, reminiscere et veteris 


LESSON LXIX. 293 


incommodi populi Romani, et pristinae virtütis Helvé- 
tiorum." ! 
2. NOTES. 

l. faciet: (a) a fut. ind.; translated shall make after si. 
(^) What is the tense sign? Cf the 4th conjug. pres. ind. form 
conveniant XLIX.; (c) note that we have here the exact words of 
Divico to Caesar, 1. e. direct discourse. 

2. ibunt . . . erunt . . . Helvétii: (a) 1bunt is the fut. ind. 
of ire; (/) erunt is the fut. iud. of esse; cf. the impf. ind. erant 
XLVI., and LVIII. Obs. 1; (c) What is the case of Helvetii, and 
why? 

3. cónstitu-eri-s, you shall have placed: (a) as Divico is address- 
ing Caesar he would not use the Lat. word Caesar, but the Lat. for 
thou or you, which is sufficiently expressed by the pers. ending of the 
2d pers. sing. -s; cf. -t, -nt; (4) a fut. pf. ind.; cf. E. G. 41. 
What is the tense sign? Cf. that of the plpf. in interfecerat LXVI. 
(e) for the other tenses of this same verb which are formed on the 
pf. stem, cf. cOnstituérunt XXX., constituerant XLII. 

4. volueris: (4) for form, cf. 3; (4) the preceding eds is the 
obj. of cónstitueris, and suggests another eós, which is the subj. of 
esse ; (eos) esse is the obj. of volueris. 

9. persevéra-bi-s, you shall continue. (a) What is the personal 
ending? Cf. 3, a. (6) What, judging from the translation, is the 
tense? What is the tense sign? Cf. the impf. ind. and its sign in 
hiema-ba-nt LX. On what stem are both the impf. and fut. ind. 
based ? (c) The tense sign is changed to what in the 3d plural? 
Cf. i-bu-nt 2. 

6. reminiscere et . . . incommodi... et... virtütis: (a) a 
pres. imperative sing. of a deponent verb; cf. the formation of the 
pres. inf. act. and E. G. 50 ; (6) it is used with the gen. case; cf. 
the English expression Je mindful of; (c) the word et once repeated 
as here is usually translated by both . . . and; cf. aut... aut XIT. 

1 The teacher will note that in this and several succeeding Lessons the text is 
simplified by changing the indirect discourse to direct. The subject of continuous 


indirect discourse will be amply treated in connection with a later and easier 
chapter. 


294 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. New pers. endings: -s, 2d pers. act.; -re, 2d pers. passive. 

9. New tense sigus : -bi-, fut. 1st conjug. (-bu- in 3d plur.) ;-é-, 
fut. 4th conjug.; -eri-, fut. pf. all conjugations. 

3. Examples of every tense in both the iud. and subjv. have now 
been found in Caesar. The tenses of the ind. are the pres., impf., 
fut., pf., plpf., and fut. pf.; the tenses of the subjv. are the same, 
with the omission of the fut. aud the fut. perfect. 

4. The tenses for incomplete action, viz. the pres., impf., and fut., 
are formed upon the pres. stem; those for complete action, the pf., 
plpf., and fut. pf., upon the pf. stem. 

5. Reminisci and some other verbs of remembering and forgetting 
ofteu take the gen. when we might expect the accusative. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON 


I: T The tenses: : A.& G.115. H. 197. 
2. The gen. with verbs of remember- 


ing and forgetting . A.& G.219. H.406 aud II. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. agere, egit, Actus, /o set i4 | 6. reminiscI, fo remember. 
motion, to drive, to do, to | T. sin (si and n8, uot), bul if. 
discuss. 8. vetus, -eris, old, former ; this 


2, incommodus, inconvenient ; adj. has the same form for 


as a noun in the neut., an 
inconvenience, a mild term 
for misfortune. 

. persequi, -secütus, fo follow 
up, to pursue. 

. persevéráre, fo continue, to 

persist. 
. pristinus, former. 


all genders in the nom. 
sing.; in the accus. sing. it 
has veterem, masc. and 
fem., vetus, neut.; in the 
nom. and accus, plur. ve- 
terés, masc. and fem., ve- 
tera, neuter. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Write the 3d sing. of all ind. and subjv. tenses act. and 
pass. of persevéráre, in the following order: pres., impf., fut., pf., 


LESSON LXIX. 295 


plpf., fut. pf; or, in other words, give the syNopsis of persevéráre 
in the 3d sing. act. and passive. (5) Write the synopsis of agere in 
the 3d plur. subjunctive active. (c) Write five iufs. and three parties. 
of constituere. 

2. (a) Divico dicit Helvetios pristinae virtütis suae reminisci. 
(6) Si ROmani volunt, pacem cum Helvetiis facere possunt. (c) Hel- 
vétil, quibuseum Caesar egit, arbitrabantur sé eos qui Italiam incole- 
rent virtüte praecedere. 

3. (a) Remember the former war, in-which the Roman consul 
Cassius was killed. (4) If peace shall be made by the Roman 
people, the Helvetians will go to that place where Caesar shall have 
commanded them to be. (c) It is not fitting (oportet) that Caesar 
pursue us. (7) By his speech Divico tried to persuade Caesar not 
to follow up the Helvetians. 

4. (a) Divico discussed this matter (thing) with Caesar, in order 
to obtain-his-request. (46) The Helvetians sent Divico to discuss this 
matter, because they saw that Caesar was very-powerful. (c) When 
Caesar had determined? to cross the river, he niade a bridge in one 
day. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


1. The tenses of the ind. and subj. act., formed on the pres. stem. 
9. The pf. stem in all conjugations. 3. The formation of the pres. 
indicative. 4. The tense signs of the impf., plpf., fut. pf. indicative. 
5. Of the impf., pf, and plpf. subjunctive. 6. The endings of the 
pres. and pf. inf. act. in all conjugations. 7. The formation of the 
fut. act. and pf. pass. inf. in all conjugs.; cf. XLVIIT. Obs. 2, LIII. 
Obs. 1. 8. The formation of the fut. act. and pf. pass. partic. in all 
conjugations. 9. Personal endings, act. and pass., learned thus far. 
.10. Comparison of the pf., plpf., and fut. pf. act. in the 3d person 
plural. 11. The meaning of et . . . et. 12. Decl. of vetus. 
13. Comparison of the six Lat. tenses with the nine Eng. tenses 
‘given in E. G. 38, 39, 41. 


! For mode, tense, and tense sign, cf. cum . . . exIsset LXVI. 


296 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LXX. 


l. TEXT. 


‘Quod improviso ünum pagum adortus es, cum ii, 
qui flamen trànsierant, suis auxilium ferre non possent, 
né ob eam rem aut tuae magnopere virtüti tribueris, aut 
nos despexeris. Nos ita à patribus maioribusque nostris 
didicimus, ut magis virtüte quam dolo contendamus aut 
insidiis nitamur.” 

2. NOTES. 


1. adortus es, you have attacked: (a) a deponent verb, in the 2d 
pers. sing. of the pf. ind.; (4) es is the 2d pers. sing. of the pres. iud. 
of esse ; cf. est, the 3d pers. sing. of the pres. ind., and, for the pers. 
ending, LXIX. x. 3, a. 

2. tránsierant ; for form, cf. transierat LXV. 

3. possent: (a) for mode, cf. LXVI. N. 5; (6) the preceding 
suis is a dat. case and a noun, £o theirs, to their (countrymen), cf. 
sua LXIII. 

4. n8 aut . . . tribueris, aut . . . déspexeris, do not either 
ascribe it to your own valor especially, or despise us; for translation, 
cf. E. G. 68, j, 4, and 5; (a) for pers. ending, cf. LXIX. N. 3, a; 
(b) for mode and tense, cf. débuerint LXIII.; (c) note that né is 
an adv., not a conj. as in XL. 

9. didicimus, we have learned: (a) a pf. ind. act. 1st pers. plur. ; 
(4) nós, the subj. of didicimus, is here expressed as a separate 
word because it is emphatic. 

6. contendámus, we strive: (a) for verb and conjug., cf. con- 
tendunt XI.; (^) for mode and tense, cf. XLIX. x. 2, c; (c) for use, 
cf. XLVI. N. 7; (d) for person and personal ending, cf. 5; (e) the 
preceding quam means than. 

1. nitamur: (7) pres. subjv. of a dep. verb, same construction 
as contendámus ; (4) -mur is the ending of the 1st pers. plur. pass. ; 
cf. -mus, the ending of 1st plur. act. ; (c) the clause aut nitamur is 


CA 


LESSON LXX. 297 


peculiar in its connection with the rest of the sentence ; quam is to 
be understood after aut ; or than we rely ou ambuscades ; freely, or by 
relying, etc. (d) insidiis, just before, is the abl., which is regularly 
used with niti. 


3. OBSERVATION. 


l. New personal endings: -mus, we, act.; -mur, we, pass.; cf. 
-t, -nt, -tur, -ntur and .s. 


4. VOCABULARY. 


l. adoriri, -ortus, fo rise against, opere), with great toil, 
to attack. greatly; magis, comp., 
2. déspicere, -spexit, -spectus, more; Maxime, sup., very 
to look down upon, to de- greatly, most, especially. 
spise. 9. maior (comp. of magnus), 
9. discere, didicit, ¢o learn. greater ; maiores nati or 
4. dolus, craft, deceit. simply ^ màáiórés, those 
5. ferre, tulit, látus, irreg., £o greater by birth, ancestors. 
bear. 10. niti, nisus, or nixus, to rest 
6. impr6vis6, adv. (in negative ; upon, rely upon, to strive. 
pro, before, fore; visus, | ll. nés, nom. or accus. plur., we 
seen), uneapectedly. Or 15. 
7. insidiae, nom. plur. (in, i», | 12. tuus, tua, tuum, thy, thine, 
and sedére, ¢o sit), an am- your; cf. suus. 
bush, treachery. 13. tribuere, tribuit, tribütus, 
8. magnopere, adv. (mágnóo and to assign, ascribe. 


5. EXERCISES. 


(a) Write all four partics. of tribueris, with meaning of each. 
(6) Write synopsis of didicimus in 3d pers. sing. ind. and subjv. 
active. 

2. (a) Divico dixit sé à patribus suis eam rem didicisse. (4) Ne 
ea quae ad efféminandds animos pertinent didiceris. (c) Helvetii 
eds qui dolo, non virtüte, contendunt despiciunt. (4) Caesar, si 
Helvetii transire in provinciam conabuntur, eds adoriétur. 


( 


298 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. (a) You will not surpass the Helvetians by your valor. (6) The 
Helvetians themselves proved that they were very-brave in-the-war 
with-Cassius. (c) In that war they defeated the Roman army and 
sent it under the yoke.! (4) Our fathers, when they waged war upon 
their neighbors, used to rely (were relying) on their own valor, not 
upon treachery. 

4, (a) The Helvetians will be in that land where Caesar shall 
wish (shall have wished) them to be. (4) For twenty days the 
Helvetians were crossing the river which Caesar crossed in one day 
by the bridge which he had built. (c) Divico says that Caesar is 
ascribing it to his own valor, that (because) he has killed those 
whom their friends had-left-behind. 


6. TOPICS FOR STUDY 


1. Nós aud -mus. 2. Tenses and tense sigus in this Lesson. 
3. Comparisou of magnus; of magnopere. 4. Two meanings for 
né; for quam; forquod. 5. The endings -mus and -mur. 6. The 
sign of each tense of the subjv. in the 3d conjugation; 7. in the 
Ist. 8. All the pers. endings you now know, both active and passive. 


LESSON LXXI. 


1. TEXT 


* Quàré né commiseris, ut is locus, ubi constiterimus, 
ex calamitate populi Romani et internecióne exercitüs 
nomen capiat, aut memoriam prodat." 


2. NOTES. 


l. n8 commiseris, do not cause: (a) for mode, tense, tense sign, 
and personal ending, cf. LXX. N. 4; (4) note also that it is preceded 


1 Literally: They sent the driven Roman army under the yoke. 


LESSON LXXI. 299 


by the adverb né like tribueris LXX., and that in both these instances 
we have a negative command, or (as it is called) a prohibition. 

2. cénstiterimus, we shall have taken our stand: (a) for mode, 
tense, and tense sign, cf. cónstitueris LXIX. w. 3; (6) for pers. 
ending, cf. LXX. N. 6, d. (c) What is the exact difference in the 
form. and translation of this verb and those of cénstitueris ? 
(d) What similarity in tense sign between the fut. pf. ind. and pf. 
subjunctive ? 

3. exercitüs : (a) for the possible cases of this word admitted by 
the form, cf. LXIII. N. 6, Obs. 1. (6) What case is probable here 
and why? Note that the subj. nom. locus has already been brought 
in and that an abl. sing. calamitate with dependent gen. populi is 
connected by et to internecióne. | 

4. ut... capiat . . . prédat: (a) for mode, tense, and conjug. 
of each of these verbs, cf. XLIX. n. 2, c; (/) for explanation of 
mode, cf. XLIV. N. 8, c; (c) capiat has forms of both the 3d and 
4th conjugs.; cf. LIX. Obs. 1; (4) distinguish capiat, pródat 
from capiet, prédet, fut. ind.; and from capit, pródit, capiunt, 
produnt, pres. indicative. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. We have now learned from the text the 3d pers. sing. and plur. 
of every tense of the ind. and subjv. act. and pass. in all conjugs. ; 
also the partics., gerunds, supines, aud the infs., with the exception 
of the fut. pass. inf., which is uncommon and may be omitted in 
the grammar references given below for review. | 

9. The pupil will save himself much confusiou iu learning these 
conjugs., by fixing in mind the following facts : | 

(a) The conjugs. differ, in the main, only in their characteristics 
and the formation of their stems; the method of forming the tenses, 
the pers. endings, the endings of parties. and infs., and most of the 
tense signs, are the same for all conjugations. 
| | (6) The pass. differs from the act., in tenses formed. from the pres. 

stem, only in its pers. endings, and forms all tenses of completed 
action by uniting the pf. pass. partic. and some tense of the verb 
esse. 


300 . INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


(c) The most difficult tenses are the pres. ind., fut. ind., and pres. 
subjv., which must be carefully distinguished : the 3d conjug. in the 
pres. ind. changes -e of the pres. stem to -i in 3d sing. and -u in 3d 
plur.; the tense sign of the fut. is -bi- in the Ist and 2d conjugs. and 
-&- in the 3d and 4th; and the sign of the pres. subjv. is -&- in the 
Ist conjug., but -à- in the 2d, 3d, and 4th. For stems of all conjugs., 
see L. “Verb Diagram.” ! 

SIN prohibitiou is often expressed by the adv. n& with the pf. 
subjunctive. 


4 GRAMMAR ‘LESSON. 


1. Tenses formed from the pres., 

pf., and supine stems . . A. & G. 118, 127. H. 222, I. II. Uf. 
2. The four conjugs.; ind. and 

subjv. 3d sing. and plur. 

act. and pass., and act. and 

pass. infs. and participles . A. & G. 128-132. H. 205-212.? 
3. The pf. subjv. in prohibitions A. & G. 269, 4,1. H. 484, IV. 

and N. 1. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. committere, -misit, missus, | 4. interneció, destruction, exter- 


to let yo together, to commit, inination. 

to cause that; proelium | 5. prodere, -didit, -ditus, /o put 

committere, fo join battle. Jorth, to trausmit, to hand 
2. cOnsistere, -stitit, fo fake a down, to betray. 


stand, stop; ct. constituere. | 6. quaré (qua and ré), on account 
3. nómen, a wame. of which thing, wherefore. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. («) Synopsis of commiseris in 3d sing. act. and pass. : 
(^) of prodat iu 3d plur. act. and passive. (c) Infs. and parties. of 
cónsistere in the act. with meaning of each form.? 


1 Let the pupil now supply all forms wanting in this ** Diagram." 
? Select from these articles only what the heading of this reference calls for. 
$ Very great emphasis should be given to questions such as the three which 


LESSON LXXI. 301 


2. (a) Exercitus Caesaris est fortior quam milites quos Cassius 
in Galliam düxit. (4) Divico nou persuasit. Caesari ut ex finibus 
Gallorum exiret. (c) Calamitas populi Romani loco in quo Caesar 
consistere coustituit nómen nou dabit. 

3. After the Tigurinians were defeated, Caesar made a bridge and 
crossed the Arar in one day. The Helvetians were greatly disturbed 
by this, because they were crossing the river for twenty davs. They 
sent an embassy to Caesar, and Divico, the chief of this embassy, 
asked Caesar to make peace with them. He said that Caesar ought 
not to think the Roman valor was great because he had defeated one 
fourth part of the Helvetiaus when their friends who were on the 
other side of the river could not come to them. He declared that the 
Helvetians would fight, if Caesar attacked them, and that those who 
had defeated Cassius would defeat (were about-to-defeat) Caesar. 


7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 


l. All the teuse signs of the ind. aud subjunctive. 2. All the 
endings of infs. and partics., and the stem upon which each form is 
based. 3. The tenses of the pres. system; 4. the pf. svstem ; 5. the 
supine system. 6. The impf, ind, and impf, subjv, of the 4th con- 
jugation. 7. Peculiarity of the ending of the pres, iuf, pass. in the 
3d conjugation. 8. Similarity between the Ist and 4th conjugations. 
9. Differences between the Ist and 4th conjugations. 10. Some 
verbs which have forms of different conjugations. 11. The pres. and 
fut. ind. and pres. subjv. 3d sing. of cremáre, habére, dücere, and 
impedire. 12. The tense sign -eri-. 


precede. The “ Exercises " on forms in the Lessons of this book are intended 
merely as suggestive to the teacher. In subsequent Lessons he should give many 
others of his own framing, similar to them. 


INDUCTIVE LATIN: PRIMER. 


cy 
c 
in 


LESSON LXXII. 


REVIEW. 


The most important thing in this Lesson is the subject of “ Verb forms.” Be 
sure you make a thorough review of all that you have learned on this subject. 


Give special attention to the 3d conjugation. 


Lessons LXIT.- LXXI. 


1. TEXT. 
Carsar’s ** Gattic War,” Book I., Chapters 11, 12, 13. 


Follow the directions under * Text," in LXII. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. Noun forms. The -u or 4th decl. complete, LXIII. Obs. 1 ; 
A. & G. 68, lacus and N. ; H. 116, früctus and foot-note 4. 

2. Verb forms. (a) The pf. inf. act, LXV. Obs. 1. (6) Com- 
pounds of ire drop v in pf, LXV. Obs. 2. (c) Plpf. subjv. act., 
LXVI. Obs. 1. (47) Pers. endings -s and -re, LXIX. Obs. 1. 
(v) Tense signs -bi- (-bu-), -8-, and -eri-, LXIX. Obs. 2. (f) List 
of tenses, and tenses formed from the pres. and pf. stems, LXIX. Obs. 
3, 4; A. & G. 115; H. 197. (y) Pers. endings -mus and -mur, 
LXX. Obs 1. (4) Summary of verb forms learned, LXXT. Obs. 1 ; 
A. & G. 118, 127, 128-132; 1[;. 222, ISTIS TIT S205 OI 
(/) Points to be noted as to conjug. : (1) Comparison of conjugations, 
(2) Difference hetween act. and pass. voices. (3) The pres. and fut. 
ind. and pres. subjv., LXXI. Obs. 2. 

3. Use of cases. (a) Dat. of possessor, LXIV. Obs. 2; A. & G. 
231; H. 387. (4) Second accus. after compound verbs, LXV. 
Obs. 3; A. & G. 239, 4; H. 376. (c) The abl. of manner, LXV. 
Obs. 4; A. & G. 248 and Rem.; H. 419, IIT. (4) The gen. with 
verbs of remeubering aud forgetting, LXIX. Obs. 5; A. & G. 219; 
H. 406, II. 


LESSON LXXII. 303 


4. Use of verbs. (a) The historical present, LXIII. Obs. 2; 
A. & G. 276, d; H. 467, III. (6) The supine in -um, LXIII. 
Obs. 3; A. & G. 302; H. 546. (c) Subjv. with cum denoting 
cause, LXIII. Obs. 4; A. & G. 326; H. 517. (4) The indirect 
question, LXV. Obs. 5; A. & G. 334; H. 529, I. (e) Subjv. with 
cum, when, LXVI. Obs. 2. (/) Pf. subjv. in PR S AE LXXI. 
Obs. 3; A. & G. 269, a, 1; H. 484, IV. aud n. 

j. Order of words. («) Position of abl. ^ means (or agent) 
immediately before the pf. pass. partic, LXIV. Obs. 1. (5) The first 
place in a sentence often emphatic, LXVIII. Obs. 1 


3. WORD REVIEW. 
Classified alphabetical list of all the new words occurring in Chapters 
11-13, of the first Book of Cazsar’s ‘‘Gattic War.” 


Let the pupil give the meaning of each word, and be prepared to decline every 
noun aud adj., and to give the principal parts of every verb, 


VERBS. 
ls¢é Conjugation. 2d Conjugation, 3d Conjugation. 
— l. cüràre ]. commovére — 1. abdere 19. discere 
2. demonstrar» 2. débére 2. abdücere 13. interficere 
3. dépopulari 3. merer 3. agere 14. niti 
4. expügnàre 4. aggredi 15. persequi 
5. exspectàre 4th Conjugation, 5, committere 16. persolvere 
6. itidicare 1. adoriri 6, concidere l7. prodere 
7. mandare 2, impedire 7. consequi 18. reminisci 
8. perseverare 8. consistere 19. statuere 
9. populàrt Irregular. 9. consümere — 20. tradticere 
10. vastare Dore 10. defendere (transducere ) 


]. despicere 21. tribuere 
99. uleisci 
Nouns, Pronouns, AND ADJECTIVES. 
lst Declension. 
Ll fortüna 3. insidiae ( plur.) 5. vigilia 
2. fuga 4. silva 


Ambarii ( plur.) 


auxilium 

avus 
Cassiünus 
-castra ( plur.) 
consanguineus 
deus 

dolus 


l. Arar 


(Araris) 


9. calamitas 

3. Divico, -dnis 
4. dux, -cis 

5. explorator 


4th Declension. . 


l. cAsus 


9d Declension. 


INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


9. incommodus 17. repentinus 
10. liberi ( plur.) 18. socer -eri 
ll. necessarius 19. solum 
12. oculus 20. Tigurinus 
13. pagus 2]. tuus 
14. pristinus 22. uter (utrum, accus.) 
15. püblieus 
16. quartus 
3d Declension. 
6. hostis 12. leuitas 
1. immortalis 13. linter, -tris 
8. inerédibilis 14. maior 
9. inopinans 15. nomen 
10. insiznis 16. possessio 
11. internecid 17. servitüs, -Utis 
18. vetus, -eris 
Unclassified. 


2. conspectus 


! ADVERBS. 

]. aegerrime 5. 
(aegerrum) 6. 
2. improviso ds 
3. ita 8. 


4. magis 


l. nos, irregular 


2. quattuor, z4declinable 


3. viginti, indeclinable 


PREPOSITIONS. 
magnopere l. citrá 
paene 2. praeter 
quare ; 
solum 


CONJUNCTIONS. 
nam 

. sed 

sin 


sive 


LESSON LXXIII. 305 


LESSON LXXIII. 


l. TEXT. 


His Caesar ita respondit: * Eo mihi minus dubita- 
tionis datur, quod eas res, quas commemoravistis, 
memoria teneo, atque eo gravius fero, quo minus 
merito populi Romani acciderunt." 


2. NOTES. 


l. respondit: (a) for this form, cf. LIV. Vocabulary. What is 
the form of the pres. ind. act. 3d sing.? (4) What is the antec. of 
the preceding his ? For the construction of his, cf. LI. N. 2, c. 
(c) Who is about to speak? To whom is he to reply? 

2. datur: (a) the preceding e6, ov this account, is explained by 
the next clause; for construction of eó, cf. XXV. N. 1, 0; (6) the 
subj. of datur is minus, a neut. comparative of the adj. in form, 
but here a noun; for form, cf. XLIII. x. 6, XLVII. x. 2, minima 
LVII.; (c) for dubitationis depending on minus, cf. VI. N. 3; 
the two words together are translated less doubt; cf. the phrase for 
two hundred and forty miles in XXVIII. and that for fen thousand 
men in XL. 

3. commemoravistis, you have mentioned. (a) What is the 
conjug. and tense of this verb? Cf. XLV. n.1,c. (^) Of what 
person is it? What is its object ? 

4. teneo, / hold. (a) What, judging from the translation, is the 
tense, number, and person of this verb? (6) For use, cf. memoria 
tenébat LIII. : 

5. fero, I bear. (a) What similarity of form in teneo and fero ? 
What similarity in meaning? What verb ending, then, sometimes 
means J? (+) fero is modified by the preceding adv. gravius 
(cf. XXV. v. 6, Obs. 2); literally, J dear more heavily, freely, 1 am 
more angry; (c) e6, before the comparative gravius, has the same 
use as nihilo before the comparative minus in XLIT.; such an abl. 
is called an abl. of DEGREE OF DIFFERENCE. 

20 


306 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. accidérunt: (a) qué, in the abl. neut., has the same con- 
struction with minus that e6 5 has with gravius ; literally, dy that 
I bear these things more heavily, by which less they happened because of 
the desert of the Roman people; very freely, my indignation at these 
things is as deep as your attack upon the Roman people was unpro- 
voked. 

3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The lst pers. sing. of verbs sometimes has the ending -ó. 

2. The partitive gen. is used with superlatives, numerals, and many 
neuters denoting quantity. In translating it with numerals and 
neuters the prep. of should not be used. 

3. The abl. is used with comparatives to show the degree of 
difference. 

4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The use and translation 
of the partitive gen. A. & G. 216, 2 and 3. H. 397, 2 and 3. 
9. The abl. of degree of 
difference 2 /.;. -.. A.'&'G:- 250; Rem. H. 423. 


and Nw. 


5. VOCABULARY 


l. accidere, -cidit (ad and ca- | 4. gravius, adv. in comp., more 


dere), to full upon, fall heavily ; gravius ferre, fo 
out, happen (used generally be more annoyed or angry. 
of unfortunate occurrences, | 5. meritum (meréri), desert, 
hence Eng. accident). merit. 
2. commemoráre, to call to | 6. mihi, dat., me. 
mind, to mention. 1. minor, adj. in comp., smaller: 
9. dubitàtio, dow/t. less. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Caesar said there was no doubt! that the Helvetians 
attacked the Romans without cause. (4) I am more angry because 


1 Qf, XXXVI. Text and v. 3. 


LESSON LXXIV. 307 


that former disaster did not happen on account of any wrong which 
the Romans had done. (¢) The Romans were not waging war upon 
the Helvetians when the Helvetians attacked them. (4) lt is not 
easy to send the brave Helvetians under the yoke. 

2. (a) If Caesar contends (shall have contended) with the 
Helvetians, he will defeat them.’ (4) I remember that a Roman 
army was defeated and a Roman consul killed by the Helvetians. 
(c)) Having prepared all things for waging war, Caesar on that 
» day discussed the matter with the Helvetiaus. 


LESSON LXXIV. 


LaTex: 

** Qui si alicüius iniüriae sibi conscius fuisset, nón fuit 
difficile cavere; sed eo déceptus est, quod neque com- 
missum à sé intellegébat, quare timéret, neque sine 
causa timendum putabat.”’ 


2. NOTES. 


1. fuisset: (4) for form, cf. exisset LXVI.; (4) for translation 
of the preceding qui, cf. qua dé causa X. N. 1, e; (c) the antec. of 
qui is populus, which though a collective noun is treated as a sing. 
in its grammatical relations, not as a plur., as the word people would 
more commonly be treated in English; (7) cónscius is a predicate 
adj agreeing with qui; its meaning is completed by the dat. sibi 
and the gen. iniüriae; (e) alicüius is an indefinite adj. (from the 
| nom. masc. aliqui) and limits iniüriae ; (,/) the plpf. subjv. is used 
instead of plupf. ind. to imply that the Romans were NoT conscious 
of wrong-doing ; the whole clause may be literally translated, if 
‘the Roman people had been conscious to itself of any wrong-doing. 

2. fuit difficile cavére: (^7) for a clause constructed in exactly 
the same way, cf. perfacile esse . . . potiri XXI.N. 7, d; (5) the 


308 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


subjv. fuisset, // would have been, is more common in a clause like 
this than the ind. fuit, i£ was. 

3. intellegébat: (a) the clause in which this verb stands is in 
apposition with the preceding e6, an abl. of means; cf. E. G. 52, 5; 
(6) the subjv. of commissum (esse) is understood ; it would be 
some such word às aliquid, anything. 

4. putabat: (a) follows quod like the preceding intellegébat ; 
cf. E. G. 53, 1; (^) for timendum, cf. concédendum LIII. x. 3, 4 
and Obs. 2; (c) the last part of this Lessou begiuning with sed 
may be thus translated very literally, dué (¢he Rowan people) was 
entrapped by this, because it knew that it (or anything) had not been 
committed by itself wherefore it should fear, and it did not think it was 
to be feared without a cause; very freely, but the Roman people were 
entrapped because of their knowledge of their own innocence, and their 
belief that they did not need to fear without reason. 


3. VOCABULARY. 


l. aliqui, iudef. adj., ay. with one’s self or with 
2. cavére, cávit, cautus, to be others, conscious. 
on one’s guard, to take care, | 4. décipere (dé and capere), 
beware of. -cépit, -ceptus, to catch 
3. cónscius (con, with, and away, entrap, deceive. 


scire, fo know), knowing | 5. timére, timuit, to fear. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) The Romans were entrapped because they did not fear any 
danger. (^) It was easy to defeat those who were not conscious of 
any wrong-loiug. (c) They were not on their guard because they 
thought the Helvetians would not attack them. 

2. (a) The Romans ought not to be entrapped, if they are doing 
no (nüllus ; cf. iter nüllum LII.) harm. (4) The Romans were not 
often defeated by those with whom they fought. (c) If they were in 
the boundaries of men of unfriendly minds, they-were-on-their-guard. 


LESSON LXXY. 309 


LESSON LXXV. 


l. TEXT. 


* Quod si veteris contumeliae oblivisci volo, num 
etiam recentium iniüriarum, quod, me invito, iter per 
provinciam per vim temptavistis, quod Haeduos, quod 
Ambarros, quod Allobrogas vexaàvistis, memoriam dé- 
ponere possum?" 


2. NOTES. 


1. quod: (a) an adverbial accus. (ef. E. G. 60) frequently 
occurring in the phrase quod si; this phrase is literally translated 
as to which if, freely, but if, now if; (5) the antec. of quod is the 
whole preceding sentence. 

2. volo, I «au willing: (a) for the ending -6, cf. fero LXXIIT. ; 
(^) for the form of the preceding oblivisci, cf. sequi XXXIX. Obs. 
ae (c) for case of veteris contuméliae, cf. veteris incommodi 
LXIX. Obs. 5. 

3. mé invito: (7) mé is the abl. sing. of the personal pron. of 
the Ist person; cf. mihi LXXIII. and nós LXX.; (2) for the 
const. and translation of the phrase mé invito, cf. sé invitó LVI. 

&. véx&vistis: (a) like the preceding temptavistis, follows the 
conj. quod, which is repeated by Caesar before each object of this 
verb, in order to call attention to the repeated instances of wrong- 
doing on the part of the Helvetiaus ; (4) for form, cf. commemo- 
ravistis LXXIII.; (c) the preceding Allobrogas is a peculiar form 
of the accus. plur.; the word is of the 3d not the Ist decl.; cf. 
Allobrogibus XLVIII. 

5. num... iniüriáàrum . . . memoriam déponere possum ? 
Ca I lay aside the memory of wrongs? (a) the interrogative word 
is num, which expects a negative answer; the meaning of num 


|» possum may be expressed in Eng. by I cannot, can I? or merely hy 


can 12 with the appropriate tone of the voice; (4) -m in possum 


means J, like 6 in volo. 


310 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The ending -m, as well as -6, is used as a personal ending of 
the 1st sing. in the act. voice. 

2. The interrogative particle num (except when used in an indi- 
rect question) stands first in its sentence aud expects a negative 
answer. | 

3. When quod stands immediately before si it is usually the rel. 
pron. in the adverbial accus. It may be freely translated dué or now. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. The interrogative particles 
-ne nónne,num . . A.&6G.210,«andc. II. 351, 1, w. 


15921737 
2. The use of the rel. quod 


as an adverbial accus. . A. & G. 240, 6. H. 453, 6. 


-5. VOCABULARY. 


l. contumélia, effroutery, insult. | 4. oblivisci, -litus, /o Jorge ; 


. déponere, -posuit, -positus, usually takes the geuitive. 
to place aside. 5. recéns, fresh, recent. 
3. num, interrogative particle; | 6. temptare or tentare (tenére), 
in direct questions expects to handle, to try. 
a negative answer. 1. véxare, to annoy, vex. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) By deceiving the Roman people (the Roman people having 
been deceived), the Helvetians were able to overcome the Roman 
army in battle. (4) I fear because you have already committed evil- 
deeds. (c) I ought not to fear (it is not to be feared by-me?), for 
no wrong has been done by me. (d) Forget that wrong which the 
Helvetians brought-upon the Roman people. 


1 For the use of this particle, cf. L. Exercises 1. 
? Cf. exspectandum sibi LXIV. 


LESSON LXXVI. 311 


2. (a) The Helvetiaus use force,’ in order to make a way through 
the province. (4) Though Caesar was unwilling, the Helvetians per- 
sisted in wandering ? through the fields of the Haeduaus. — (c) Caesar 
told the Helvetians that he was iore indignant, because they had at- 
tacked? the Romans, who were? not conscious of any wrong-doing. 


LESSON LXXVI. 


l. TEXT. 


* Quod vestra victoria tam insolenter gloriàmini, 
quodque tam diü vos impüne iniürias tulisse admira- 
mini, eodem pertinet." 


2. NOTES. 


l. glériamini: (a) a 2d pers. plur. of a dep. verb in the 1st 
conjug.; note the pers. ending of the 2d plur. pass. and cf. -mur, 1st 
plur. pass. in nitàmur LXX., and also -tur, -ntur ; (4) the preceding 
vestrà, your, is used when a plur. antec. is referred to; cf. tuae, your, 
LXX., which is used when a sing. antec. 1s referred to ; cf. also nostri 
LXIII. and suus. What part of speech are these words? Cf. E. 
G. 20, 3. (c) victoria is an abl. of cause, because of victory. 
What would be a good free translation of it ? 

2. admirámini: (a) for form, cf. 1; (5) for the form of tulisse, 
cf. ferre, Vocab. below, and LXV. N. 5; (c) the preceding vós is an 
accus. plur., the subj. of tulisse ; (7) tulisse is used in an unusual 
sense, you wonder that you have borne wrongs with impunity, i. e. tne 
euilt of them has rested upon you without doing you harm. 

3. pertinet: (a) has the two preceding quod clauses as its subj. ; 
cf. E. G. 52; (4) the two clauses form a unit; the -que which 
connects them denotes a closer union than et; for the sing. verb, cf. 


1 Cf. vim facere LVI. 
- 2 Cf. persequi persevérabis LXIX. 
8 Cf, for mode, LII. n. 7. 


312 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. | 
V. Nn. 6, 0 ; (c) the sentence may be translated, in part, the fact that. 
you glory and wonder tends to the same thing, i. e. to your fimal| 


punishment ; this is explained in the next Lesson. | 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. The pers. endings of the pass. voice, supplying two endings not 
yet used, are : 


Ist pers. J, -r we, -mur 
2d pers. thou, -ris (-re) you, -mini 
3d pers. he, she, it, -tur they, -ntur 


2. The possessive pronominal adjs. are : 
meus, my, noster, -tra, -trum, our. 
tuus, your, referring to a sing. antecedent. 
vester, -tra, -trum, your, referring to a plur. antecedent. 
suus, his, her, its, or their, according to the meaning 
of the subj. to which it refers. 
3. The conj. -que connects more closely than et. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The possessive pronom. adjectives A. & G. 98, 3. H. 185. 
2. Tlie use of-que& . 7) . - . . A. & GG. 15670. T5904 TE 


5. VOCABULARY. 


]. admirari, fo wonder, to wonder 7. tam, so, (used mostly befor 
at, to admire. advs. aud adjs.); cf. iti| 
2. diü, adv., doug; used of time, LXLIL, used with verbs. 
not space ; cf. longé LIX. 8. vester, -tra, -trum, yow 
3. ferre, tulit, latus, (o dear. plur.; for -decl, 278! 
4. glériari, fo boast, to glory. XXXIV. 584.2, | 
5. impüne, adv., without punish- | 9. vós, nom. and accus. plur. 
ment, with impunity. you; cf. poss. adj. veste 
6. insolenter (in, neg., and so- and nós, noster. 
lére, fo be accustomed), | 10. victoria, victory. 


strangely, insolently. 


LESSON LXXVII. 919 


6. EXERCISES. 


l. (a) Caesar says that the Helvetians are boasting of their 
rictory. (5) Caesar, you are glorying in your victory. (c) Do not 
scribe your victory to your bravery. (d) Our victory was great. 

2. (a) We glory in the victory which Caesar mentions. (6) I 
wouder at the bravery of these men. (c) You have brought great 
wrongs upon the Romans. (4) Their boundaries extend to-the-same- 
lace. 


LESSON LXXVII. 


Ad TRNDESUT. 


* Consueverunt enim di immortales, quó gravius 
hominés ex commiütatione rerum doleant, quós pro 
scelere eorum ulcisci volunt, his secundiores interdum 
es et diüturniorem impünitatem concédere.” 


2. NOTES. 


. l. cónsuévérunt: (a) pres. in sense, though pf. in form; 
^b) for force of position in sentence, cf. LXVIII. x. 2, Obs. 1; 
‘you are surprised " (cf. admirámini, last Lesson), says Caesar, “ at 
vhat is customary." 
.. 9. di; nom. plur., contracted from dei; cf. deórum LXVII. 

3. rérum ; a gen. plur. ; for other cases, cf. rés XXXIX. Obs. 4. 

4. doleant: (4) for form, cf. liceat LII. x. 9, ^; cf. also LVI. 
)bs. 1; (4) for use of mode, cf. LVI. x. 2, 6, and Obs. 3. 

9. concédere: (a) this word rounds out the sense; cf. XXXIX. 
Jbs. 5. Of what preceding verb is this the complementary inf.? 
4) Why should this verb take a dat. as well as an accus.? Cf. LI. 
i. 2, c; (c) his is the antec. of quós, which begins the preceding 
‘lause ; with this use of the relative before the principal, or demon- 
itrative, clause, cf. quae pars . . . ea LXVII.; (d) degree of com- 
jürison of secundiorés and diüturniorem ? 


314 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3. OBSERVATION. 


1. In Lat. more frequently than in Eng., the relative clause 
precedes the clause which contains the antec. of the relative. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. The relative clause before 
the antec. of the relative A. & G. 201, c. H. 572, II. and x. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. commütátió! (mütàre, fv | 5. enim, for ; used generally after 
change), a changing, change. the first word of the clause. 
9. consuéscere, -suévit, -sué- | 6. impünitàs, impunity. 
tus, fo accustom one’s self; | T. interdum, adv., sometimes, for 


in pf, £o have accustomed a tune. 
one’s self, to be wont. 8. scelus, -eris, a crime. 
3. diüturnus, adj. (from diu), | 9. secundus, /ollowing, second, 
long (in time). Javorable (a wind following, 
4. dolére, doluit, dolitürus, /o or right astern, would be a 
Jeel pain, to grieve for. favorable wind). 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) We glory in our victory, because we overcame the brave | 


Romans. (6) We think that, when we defeated Cassius, the victory 
was a-very-great (one). (c) The Helvetians have brought many 
wrongs upon the-rest-of the Gauls. (7) The immortal gods are wont 
to punish those men who glory in their crimes. 

2. (a) The Helvetians wished to fight continually with their 
neighbors. (2) The way was so narrow that carts could be drawn 
(only) one-by-one. (c) All those countries of? which Caesar was 
informed stretch toward the north. (7) Against my will you were 


trying to make your way through our province, after annoying our ~ 


allies. 


1 Do not forget that gender and genitives in the 3d decl. have been provided © 
for by LXIT. 2, 1, f and g. , 
2 Cf. dé adventü LIT. 


LESSON LXXVIII. 915 


LESSON LXXVIII. 


l. TEXT. 


* Cum haec ita sint, tamen, si obsides à vobis mihi 
dabuntur, uti ea quae pollicemini factüros intellegam, 
et si Haeduis de iniüriis quàs ipsis sociisque eorum 
intulistis, item si Allobrogibus satisfacietis, ego vo- 
biscum pacem faciam." 

Divico respondit: ‘‘Ita Helvetii à maioribus suis 
institati sunt, uti obsides accipere, non dare, cónsué- 
rint: eius rei populus Romanus est testis." Hoc re- 
sponso dato, discessit. 
2. NOTES. 

1. sint: (a) for form, cf. LVIII. N. 6, Obs. 1; (5) the preced- 
ing haec is a nom. plur. neut., meaning these things; cf. meaning 
of ea VII.; (c) like ea, haec has the same form in the nom. and 


| . . . 
accus. plur. neut. and the nom. sing. fem. ; the nom. sing. masc. is 


hic ; cf. LXVI. ; the nom., accus., and. abl. sing. neut., and the abl. 
sing. masc. are hóc ; cf. XXII. ; the gen. sing. all genders is hüius, 
like ius ; the dat. sing. all genders is huic ; the accus. sing. masc. is 
hunc, fem. hanc ; the abl. sing. fem. is hac. Note that several of 
these irregular forms are made so only by the addition of c; (7) The 
other forms are perfectly regular. Decline in all genders; (e) note, 
in the examples of the use of hic above quoted, that it refers to 
what is near the speaker or writer. 

2. tamen, yet; when this word is reached, it will be seen that the 
loreceding eum is more appropriately translated by although than by 
when or since. By what mode is cum followed here? 

| 3. dabuntur: (7) for form, cf. ibunt LXIX. v. 2, 5; (5) vóbis 
Ws the abl. plur. of vós LXXVI. ; (c) for mihi, cf. LXXIII.; 


(d) note that Caesar is speaking to the Helvetian legates. 


316 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. uti... intellegam: (a) for form both of uti and intellegam, 
cf. uti. .. proficiscantur XLIV.; (4) for pers. ending -m, cf. 
possum LXXV.; (c) the subject of factüros (esse) is vos under- 
stood. (d) Of what is ea, the obj. of factüros, the autec.? Cf. the 
use of id LXVIIL., ii LXX., and note that is, ea, id is constantly 
used as the antec. of a relative. 

9. intulistis : (4) from the irregular verb inferre ; (4) for tense, 
number, and person, cf. commemoravistis LXXIII. How many of 
the final letters are common to the two verbs? Note the difference 
in the formation of their pf. stems and cf. LXXI. Obs. 2, a; (c) for 
the case of ipsis and sociis, cf. XXV. N. 7; (4) ipsis refers to 
Haeduis; upon the Haeduans themselves. 

6. satisfaciétis: (4) a fut. of the 4th conjug.; cf. faci-el-t LXIX. 
What is the sigu? (4) What pers. ending is common to this verb 
aud to intulistis 5? For other pers. endings in the act. voice, cf. 
intellega-m 4, fer-6 LXXIII., cénstitueri-s LXIX., contendá-mus 
LXX. and -t, -nt; (c) both Haeduis and Allobrogibus are in the 
dat. case with this verb. Of what two words is it compounded ? 
Literally, you will do enough for the Allobroges, freely, you will satisfy 
the Allobroges. 

4. ego, J: (a) the gen. sing. is mei, the dat. mihi (cf. 3, c), the 
accus. m8, the abl. mé (cf. LXXV.) ; (6) the nom. and accus. plur. 


is nos LXX., the gen. nostrum or nostri, the dat. and abl. nobis, - 


like vobis 3, 0. 

8. vobiscum ; for form, cf. quibuscum VIII. 

9. faciam, J will make; note that -8-! the sien of the fut. ind. in 
the 3d and 4th conjugs. is varied to -à-* in the Ist singular. 

10. maioribus ; for meaning, cf. LXX. Vocabulary. 

ll. cónsuérint: (a) for full form cénsuéverint ; (/) for mode, 
tense, and explanation of mode, cf. d&buerint LXIIL.; (c) for force 
of the pf. tense in this verb, cf. LXXVII. N. 1, a and Vocab. ; (4) cf. 
the form and meaning of the whole sentence with those of nds . . . 
nitàmur LXX. 

12. rei: (a) the gen. sing. of the -8 decl. noun rés; cf. rérum 


1 This letter becomes short in quantity before nt, and final m and t. 


| 
| 


| 


LESSON LXXVIII. LL 


LXXVII., dié XL., and XXXIX. Obs. 4; other cases have the same 
endings as those of 3d decl. nouns. Write out the whole decl. and 
compare it with that of omnis ; (4) for gender of & nouns, cf. ea rés 
XXXIX. 


18. responso; here from the noun responsum, a reply. 


3. OBSERVATIONS 


1. Nouns with stems in -€ have the endings of the 3d decl. in 
most of their cases, but the gen. sing. ending is -i, the gen. plur. 
-rum, the e of the abl. sing. is loag and the ending -bus of the dat. 
and abl. plur. is added directly to the stem. Nouns having -8 stems 
are of the 5th declension. They are regularly fem. and end in -és. 

2. The pron. hic, haec, hoc is of the 1st and 2d decl., but has the 
following peculiarities: («) the gen. sing. is hüius (like éius) and 
the dat. sing. is huic,like ef with c added; (4) the abl. sing. is 
regular except that c is added ; 1n the accus. sing. masc. and fem., c 
is added and m before it is changed to n ; (c) the following irregular 
forms occur: hic, nom. sing. masc.; hóc, nom. and accus. sing. 
neut. ; haec, nom. sing. fem., and nom. and accus. plur. neuter. 

3. The pronoun of the 1st person is thus declined : 


Singular. Plural. 
Nom. ego, I nOs, we 
Gen. mei, of ie nostrüm, nostri, of us 
Dat. mihi, me nobis, us 
Accus. mé, me nods, 7s 
AL mé, me nobis, ws 


4. The sien of the fut. in the 3d and 4th conjugs., -é-, is changed 
to -&-! in the Ist pers. singular. 
5. The pers. endings of the act. are : 


lst pers. -G orm, . -mus, qe 
9d pers. -8, thou or you -tis, you 
3d pers. — -t, he, she, it -nt, they 


For pers. endings of the passive, cf. LXXVI. Obs. 1. 


l This letter becomes short in quantity before nt, and final m and t. 


318 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. The pron. hic, haec, hóc, refers to what is near the speaker or 
writer. 

7. The pron. is, ea, id is regularly used as the antec. of relatives. 

8. The conj. cum sometimes means although. It is then followed 
by the subjunctive. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


l. The 5th declension. . A.& G. 72, 73. H. 120. 

9. The decl. of ego. . . A.& G. 98, 1. H. 184. 

8. The decl. of hic . X; A, & G. 101. H: 186, I. aud 
foot-note 4. 

4. The pers. endings . . A.& G. 116. H. 247. 


5. The meaning and use of 
hicandis. . . . A.&G.102,aandd.  H. 450, 451. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


]. discédere, -cessit, -cessirus, | 4. pollicéri, -itus, to promise. 


£o go apart, to depart. 5. responsum, a thing said in 
2. ego, J; cf. mihi, mé, nos. reply, a reply. 
3. Instituere, -stituit, -stitütus, | 6. satisfacere, -fécit, -factirus, 
to arrange, begin, construct, to do enough, to satisfy. 
instruct. 7. testis, a witness. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) If you shall give me hostages, I will do you no harm. 
(^) But if, after annoying the allies of the Roman people, you shall 
lay waste their fields, I will kill the largest possible number of your 
army. (c) The Helvetians said they would not satisfy the Allobroges 
for the injuries which they had inflicted upon them. 

2. Caesar told Divico that the Romans were defeated in the former 
battle, because the Helvetians attacked them without reason when 
they were not on guard. He said he could not forget the recent 
wrongs which the Helvetians had inflicted on the allies of the 
Romans; nevertheless if the Helvetians would give hostages to 
him and would satisfy the Haeduans, he would make peace with 
them.  Divico said he would not give hostages and went away. 


LESSON LXXIX. d19 


LESSON LXXIX. 


L. TEXT: 


Postero dié castra ex eo loco movent. Idem facit 
Caesar equitatumque omnem, ad numerum quattuor 
milium, quem ex omni provincia et Haeduis atque 
eorum sociis coactum habebat, praemittit, qui videant 
quas in partes hostes iter faciant. Qui cupidius novis- 
simum agmen insecüti aliéno loco cum equitatü Hel- 
vetiorum proelium commi*tunt; et pauci de nostris 
cadunt. 


2. NOTES. 


1. idem: (a) for form, cf. XXXIV. x. 7; (4) for position, cf. 
LVIII. N. 3, 6. 

9. ex . . . Sociis ; sociis is goverued by ex, like próvincià 
aud Haeduis ; cf. E. G. 53, 1. 

3. habébat: (a) note that the preceding omni, like all adjs. in 
-is, -e, ends in -1 in the abl. sing. ; cf. XXXIX. Obs. 1. (5) What 
is the obj. of hab&bat? (c) coactum agrees with quem ; (7) coàác- 
tum habébat is similar in meaning to the Eng. partic. with have, 
but lays more emphasis on the idea of possession and continuing to 
possess, thus, he was holding after having collected ; note that, in the 
Eng. expression he has held the cavalry, the pass. partic. held really 
limits cavalry, the obj. of the verb has, just as in the case above 
coáüctum limits quem; cf. E. G. 64, 13. 

4. videant: (4) mode, tense, and tense sign? (4) why subjv.? 
Cf. XLIX. x. 2, LII. x. 3; (c) plur., although its subj. refers to the 
sing. collective noun equitatum ; for more usual agreement, cf. 
LXXIV. wn. 1, c. 

5. in; for position, cf. XXIV. x. 1, 4. 

6. faciant: (4) for mode, cf. LXV. x. 2, c; (4) cf. the forms of 
the text: adficiébantur, facere, facti sunt, perficit, faciunt, 


390 - INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


faciundum, fécisse, factürum ; cf. also forms in LIX. n. 1, 4, 
Obs. 1. -Which forms are of the 4th conjug.? On what stem are 
all the forms of the 4th conjug. based ? 

7. committunt: («) Might the preceding cupidius agree with 
agmen, so far as its form is concerned? How do you know that 
it does not so agree? (0) it means too eagerly rather than more 
eagerly; cf. XXIII. N. 8, a; (c) for use of locd, cf. XLVII. x. 6. 

8. pauci; for form and use, cf. perpauci XLVI. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The comparative is sometimes translated by foo. 

2. Capio, I take, facio, I make, gradior, J go, morior, I die, 
patior, / suffer, and their compounds, and some other verbs not yet 
found in the text, are of the 3d conjug., though having the vowels -i6 
in the pres. ind. lst sing., like the 4th conjugation. The following 
forms, all based on the pres. stem, are of the 4th conjug. in both act. 
and pass.: the pres. ind. lst sing. and 3d plur., the impf. and fut. 
ind. and. pres. subjv. throughout, and the 3d plur. of the fut. imper- 
ative; also the pres. act. and fut. pass. parties. and the gerund. All 
other forms drop the i, and are of the 3d conjugation. 

3. The Lat. by combining the verb habére aud the pf. pass. partic. 
sometimes forms a verb phrase like the pf. ind. act. with have or had 
in English. It differs from the regular form in both Lat. and Eng. 
in laying more emphasis on the idea of possessing aud continuing to 
possess. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


". 


1 Conjug. of capere . . . A.& G.p. 100. H. 217,218, 219. 
2. The pf. pass. partic. after 
habére °°. 5. 5. es AL & Uu 292-0 oo INN 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. agmen (agere), that which is novissimum agmen, the 
set in motion, an army on the newest, or last line, the 
march, a line (of march) ; rear. 


LESSON LXXIX. 321 


2. aliénus (alius), delonging to 1. insequi, -secütus, /o follow 
another, foreign, unfavorable. * Ap, 

3. cadere, cecidit, cásürus, 4o 8. movére, movit, motus, to 
Jal. move. 

4. cupidé (cf. adj. cupidus), 9. pauci (sing. very rare), 
eagerly; cf. XXV. N. 4, 6. few. 


- 5. equitatus, -üs, a collection of | 10. posterus (post), coming 
horsemen, cavalry. - after, following. 

6. hostis, a stranger, an enemy; | ll. praemittere, -misit, -mis- 
in plur., the enemy. sus, to send before. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) Caesar had with him four thousand men. (5) Those men 
who had been collected out-of all the province he sent ahead. 
(c) Having attacked the enemy in an unfavorable place, the horsemen 
were defeated. (d) Caesar sent the cavalry to follow up the enemy. 

2. (a) A few of the cavalry fell, since the battle had been joined in 
a very unfavorable place. (0) Caesar told Divico that, if the Helvetians 
would-do ? what they had promised, he would make peace with them. 
(c) When hostages had been given, Caesar established friendship with 
the nearest states, and levied? several legions upon-them. 


1 Use the impf. subjunctive. ZU bb 


GALLIC HORSEMAN. 


Why is this picture appropriate with this Lesson? Does this horseman wear any armor? 
For Gallic foot-soldier, cf. p. 364. The cavalry of Caesar's army was composed wholly of Gallic 
allies of the Romans. 


322 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LXXX. 


l. TEXT. 


Quo proelio sublati Helvetii, quod quingentis equiti- 
bus tantam multitüdinem equitum propulerant, audacius 
subsistere nonnumquam et novissimo agmine proelio 
nostros lacessere coepérunt. Caesar suos à proelio 
continébat ac satis habebat in praesentia hostem rapinis, 


pabulatidnibus, populationibusque prohibére. 


2. NOTES. 


1. sublati: (a) pf. pass. partic., from tollere, means raised (in 
spirit), elated ; (5) for meaning of quo, cf. X. N. 1, e; (c) for order 
and use of proelio, cf. LXIV. x. 8, 3. 

2. equitibus ; for use, cf. LV. n. 5, 4, and foot-note. 

3. equitum ; why not equitium? Cf. LIX. n. 7, Obs. 2: 

4. agmine ; though translated by iz, an abl. of means rather than 
oliplacesref- SUV La ue 

5. nostrés; for use, cf. suis LXX. Nn. 3, /. 

6. prohibere: (4) obj. of habébat, which here means he held in 
sense of cousidered ; (b) satis is an accus. in agreement with pro- 
hibére ; he considered it sufficient to keep, etc.; (c) hostem, the obj. 
of prohibere, means each one of the enemy ; our Eng. expression, the 
enemy, is plur. in sense and is generally represented in Lat. by the 
plur. ; cf. hostés LXXIX.; (4) contrast & proelio and rapinis (both 
in this sentence), and cf. XII. N. 8, c and d. 


3. VOCABULARY. 


l. audacius, more boldly. 4. lacessere,  lacessivit or 
2. coepit, coepisse, he began ; lacessiit, lacessitus, (0 
lacks the pres. system. provoke, assail. 


3. eques, equitis (equus, a | 5. pábulatio (pabulari), a get- 
horse), a horseman, a knight. ting of food, a foraging. . 


LESSON LXXXI. 323 


6. populatid (populari), a /ay- 9. quingenti, five hundred. 
ing waste, ravaging. 10. rapina (rapere, ¢o seize), 
7. praesentia (prae and esse), plunder. 
a being present, presence; | ll. subsistere, -stitit, to make 
in praesentia at present. a stand, resist. 
8. propellere, -pulit, -pulsus, | 12. tantus, adj. so much, so 
to drive before. great. 


4. EXERCISES. 

l. (a) The Helvetians were elated by this battle. (^) It is 
enough to keep the soldiers from battle and the enemy from foraging. 
(c) The horsemen who were-driven-forward by the Helvetians were 
not Romans but Gauls. (4) Five hundred. Helvetiaus are not able 
to drive before (them) four thousand Romans. 

2. Caesar followed the Helvetians and sent the cavalry, which he 
had collected from his allies in Gaul, to see what the enemy was 
doing. His cavalry was put to flight by the Helvetians, who were 
so elated by this victory that they began to annoy those of the Romans 
who were first in the line-of-inarch. 


LESSON LXXXI. 


1 9 eg by 


Ita diés circiter quindecim iter fé€cérunt, uti inter 
novissimum hostium agmen et nostrum primum non 
amplius quinis aut senis milibus passuum interesset. 

Interim cotidié Caesar Haeduos frümentum, quod 
essent püblice polliciti, flagitare. 


2. NOTES. 


l. fécérunt ; for const. of preceding diés, cf. XXXIII. N. 4, 0. 

2. primum; limits what word understood ? 

3. interesset: (a) why subjv.? (4) its subj. is amplius, which 
is in form a neut. comparative; (c) milibus is the abl. case after the 


924 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


comparative amplius; quam, ¢han, being omitted, and the abl. trans- 
lated by than; (d) quinis and sénis are distributive adjs. meaning 
five and six, to each or at a time (cf. singuli XLVI.) ; used here to 
show that the armies were five or six miles apart on each day. 

4, flagitare: («) though an inf, its subj. is the nom. Caesar, 
and it is translated like the ind., Caesar kept earnestly asking or kept 
importuning ; (5) for the use of its two objects, Haeduos, the name 
of the persons who are asked, and frümentum, the name of the thing 
asked for, cf. E. G. 59, c, e and 1; (c) essent in the subordinate 
clause is subjv., because of the idea of saying implied in flagitàre; 
Caesar asked for (he corn which, as he said, was promised. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. Distributive adjs. tell how many are taken at a time; cf. ordi- 
nals and cardinals, LXI. Obs. 1.  Distributives are of the Ist and 2d 
declensions. 

2. When quam, ¢han, is omitted with comparatives, they are 
followed by the abl., which is then translated by than. 

3. In Lat., as in Eng., two accus. may be used with some verbs of 
asking and teaching, — one of the person, the other of the thing. 

4. The inf. is sometimes, though rarely, used independently in the 
animated narrative of Caesar. It then has a nom. as its subj. and is 
translated like an impf. indicative. Such an inf. is called an historical 


infinitive. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The form and meaning of 
distributives . . . . A. & G. 95%and a. C H2374: 20D) 
2. The abl. after comparatives 
without quam. . . . . A. & G. 247. H. 417. 
3. Two accusatives with verbs 
of asking and teaching . A. & G. 239, c. H. 374. 
4. The historical infinitive . . A. & G. 275. H. 536, 1. 


LESSON LXXXII. 320 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. amplus, ample, much, great ; 6. interim, meanwhile. 
adv. amplé. 1. püblicé, publicly, by prd 

2. circiter, adv., about. authority. 

39. cotidié or quotidie, adv., 8. quindecim (quinque and 

| daily. decem), fifteen. 

4. flagitare, to ask repeatedly or 9. quini, distributive, five to 
earnestly. each, five at a time. 

9 interesse, interfuit, /o be | 10. séni (sex), distributive, 
between or among, to take siz to each, sim at a 
part in; interest, i£. makes time. 


a difference, it interests. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) For many days the van of our army was following the rear 
of the enemy. (0) The enemy were driven six miles. (c) The rear 
of the enemy was six miles distant from the van of the Romans. 

2. (a) The Haeduans ought to give Caesar the grain which they 
have promised. (4) Caesar asked for grain so that he might give it to 
his soldiers. (c) The Romans have deserved so well at-the-hands-of- 
the Haeduans that grain ought to be given to them. (Cf. LXIIL.) 


LESSON LXXXII. 


A alot tp DD Se 


Nam propter frigora, quod Gallia sub septentriónibus, 
ut ante dictum est, posita est, nón modo frümenta in 
agris matüra nón erant, sed né pabuli quidem satis 
magna cópia suppetébat: eo autem frümento, quod 
filümine Arare nàvibus subvéxerat, propterea minus üti 
poterat, quod iter ab Arare Helvetii averterant, 4 quibus 


326 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


discedere nolebat. Diem ex dié dücere Haedui: c6n- 
ferri, comportàri, adesse dicere. 


2. NOTES. 


l. ut . . . dictum est ; for ut with ind., cf. XLI. N. 10. 

2. frümenta in agris; note that the plur. is here used for the 
grain in the fields, while the harvested grain for which Caesar asks the 
Haeduans (cf. LXXXI.) is frimentum. Why is the plur. more appro- 
priate for the standing grain ? 

3. subvéxerat; note that flimine and navibus are both neces- 
sary means in bringing up the grain. 

4. poterat: (a) followed by the complementary inf. ati; 
(2) const. of frümento? Cf. XLIV. N. 5, Obs. 1. 

9. dücere: (a) for use, cf. LXXXI. n. 4, a, Obs. 4; (6) diem 
is not its obj. but an accus. of time; (c) ex, out of, has here the 
force of after, diem ex die, day after day; (d) dücere has Caesarem 
understood as its obj., and means £o put off, to delay. 

6. conferri: (a) pres. inf. pass.; note the doubling of the r ; 
(4) cf. differunt IV., efferre (for efferere) XLIIL, intulerat 
LXVII., fero LXXIII., tulisse LXXVI., and sublati LXXX. (which 
though not from ferre, shows the supine stem of that verb); note 
that the three stems fere-, tul-, and lat- have no common base, aud 
that final -e of the pres. stem is sometimes dropped. | 

7. dicere: (^4) historical inf., its subj. is Haedui; (4) conferri, 
comportari, adesse, infs. in indir. disc.; subj., frümentum under- 
stood. 


3. OBSERVATION. 


l. The verb ferre is irregular in having three stems which have no 
common base and in dropping the final e (or its modified form i) of 
the pres. stem in the pres. ind., impf. subjv., and pres. infinitive. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


lw Conjug. of: ferres.. 50291513 As 19947 T2920 0L 


LESSON LXXXII. 3217 


5. VOCABULARY. 


l. adesse, -fuit, fo be near, to | 17. modo, adv., only. 
be present, to assist. 8. nélle, nóluit (né and velle), 
2. ávertere, -vervit, -versus, /o to be unwilling. 
turn away. 9. pábulum (pàscere, /o feed, 
9. comportare, to carry together. pasture), that which feeds, 
4. conferre, -tulit, collatus, /o Jood, especially for animals, 
bring together, collect, com- Jodder. 
pare; whereconisintensive, | 10. ponere, posuit, positus, to 
to bring vigorously or rapidly ; place. 
sé conferre, to betake one’s | 11. quidem, indeed; in Caesar, 
self. (In this Lesson cón- mostly in the phrase né 
ferri means vs deimg collected . .. quidem enclosing the 
among the Haeduans; com- emphatic word, thus né 
portàri, is being brought to- Caesar quidem, not even 
gether to Caesar.) Caesar. 
5. frigus, -oris, cold; in plur. | 12. subvehere, -véxit, -vectus, 
with same meaning. to carry from below, i. e. 
6. matirus, ripe, early. to carry up. 


6. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) The Haeduans did not bring the grain which they had 
promised. (4) Caesar kept-asking-for the grain, because (as he 
said)! the supply of food which he had was not large enough. 
(c) The ships which were carrying the grain were left (behind) when 
Caesar turned away from the river. (7) The cold is greater in Gaul 
than in Italy (Italia), because Gaul stretches toward the north. 

2. (a) Caesar turned away from the river, in-order-to follow up 
the Helvetians. (4) The beasts-of-burden, which were drawing the 
wagons of the Helvetians, had consumed all the fodder. (c) Having 
used very much fodder, Caesar asked the Haeduans for the grain 
which they were collecting. (d) Caesar asked the Haeduans to bring 
‘the largest possible supply of grain. 


Ul RDXXXI- x4 c 


328 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LXXXIII. 


BL OSDBENWI: 

Ubi sé diütius düci intellexit et diem instare, quo die 
frümentum militibus métiri oportéret, convocatis eorum 
principibus, quorum màgnam copiam in castris habebat, 
—in his Divitiaco et Lisco, qui summo magistratui 
praeerat, quem vergobretum appellant Haedui, qui 
creatur annuus et vitae necisque in suos habet potesta- 
tem, — graviter eos accüsat, quod, cum neque emi neque 
ex agris sümi posset, tam necessario tempore, tam 
propinquis hostibus, ab iis non sublevétur; praesertim 
cum magna ex parte eorum precibus adductus bellum 


susceperit, multo etiam gravius, quod sit destitütus, 
queritur. 


2 NOTES. 


1. intellexit : (4) follows ubi, when; cf. instances of the use of 
ubi in XLII., LIL, LVI., LXV. What mode and tense follow ubi 
in all these instances? (6) diütius is the comparative of dia, with 
sense of ¢oo rather than more; cf. cupidius LXXIX.; (c) dict is 
used in the same sense as in the preceding Lesson; subj.? voice? 

2. oportéret : (a) for use, cf. oportébat XXXIX.; for meaning, 
cf. the meaning of concédendum LIII. v. 3, 6; d&buerint LXIII.; 
(^) quó di& ; note the repetition of the antec. with the relative, as in 
quibus itineribus XLVI.; (c) militibus ; for case, cf. LI. N. 2, c. 

3, Divitiaco, Lisco ; form an abl. absolute const. with convoca- 
tis. to be supplied from what precedes. 

4. praeerat; for dat. used with it, cf. XXV. N. 7. 

9. vergobretum ; accus. in apposition with quem ; magistrátur, 
just before, means the magistracy (office not officer), and the antec. 
of quem is Lisco. 


LESSON LXXXIII. 329 


d 


6. annuus ; adj., agreeing with qui, which refers to vergobret 1m. 

4. in sués ; into, toward, over, his (countrymen). What would 
mean among his (countrymen) 2? Cf. a phrase in this Lesson and also 
one in XIX. 

8. graviter: (a) adv., formed by substituting the ending -iter, 
for -is of the corresponding adj. gravis; (4) cf. the comparative 
gravius LXXIIT. For what is the comparative ending -ius substi- 
tuted ? 

9. accüsat; the principal verb of the sentence ; for position, cf. 
XXXIX. Obs. 5. 

10. posset: (a) for mode, cf. LXVI. xn. 5; (4) the subj. is 
frümentum to be supplied; (c) for form of preceding emi aud 
sümi, cf. XXXIX. Obs. 2. 

ll. propinquis hostibus ; for const., cf. LVI. Neorc: 

19. sublevétur: (v) mode and tense? why? Cf. LXXXI. N. 4 
c; (6) the subj. is Caesar understood, 

13. magna ex parte, out of or from a great part, freely, in a 
great measure, largely ; note position of preposition. 
| 14. suscéperit: (4) pf. subjunctive. What other tense has the 
same form? Cf. LXIX. n. 3, 6; (4) for reason of mode, cf. LXIIT. 
N. 3, 6. 

15. multó gravius ; for use of multo, cf. LXXIII. N. 5, c. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. Adverbs are formed from adjs. in -is by substituting for this 
ending, -iter, positive, -ius, comparative, and -issimé, superlative ; 
ef. XXV. Obs. 1 

2. The conj. ubi is commonly followed in Caesar by the pf. 
indicative. 

3. Necessity or obligation may be expressed by the personal verb 
débére, the impersonal verb oportet, or by the fut. pass. participle. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


|]. Mode and tense used after ubi A. & G. 324. H. 518 and Nn. 1 


330 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


5. VOCABULARY. 


]. accüsáre (ad and causa), ¢o | 11. potestás (posse), power, 


call to account, blame, accuse. lawful authority. 
2. annuus (annus), yearly. 12. praeesse, -fuit, fo be over, 
3 convocare, to call together, to command; cf. praefi- 
SUMMON. | cere, to put in command. 
4. creare, to make, to elect. 13. praesertim, especially. 


5. déstituere, -stituit, -stitü- | 14. precés, prayers. 
tus, to set away from, to | 15. propinquus, «ear; as noun, 
abandon. a relative. 
6. emere, émit, emptus, /o duy. | 16. queri, questus, £o complain. 
1. instare, -stitit, -statirus, fo | 17. sublevare, fo lift up from 


' stand upon, to approach, to beneath, to aid. 
press upon. 18. summus (irreg. sup. of su- 
8. Liscus, a ruler of the Hae- perus), highest. 
duans. 19. vergobretus, the title of the 
9. métirl, ménsus, ¢o measure. chief magistrate among the 
10. nex, necis, death, especially Haeduans. 
a violent death. 20. vita, life. 


6 EXERCISES. 


1. (a) The chief magistrate among the Haeduans is called by 
them vergobretus. (4) Caesar ought to measure out grain to-day 
(on this day). (c) Although? Caesar cannot buy grain or take it 
from the fields, yet the Haeduans do not bring together into the 
camp the grain which they have promised. | 

2. The Haeduans did not bring Caesar the grain which they had 
promised him. Caesar, since he had left the river on which were the 
ships which carried his grain and since the grain was not yet ripe in 
the fields, kept-asking the Haeduans for the grain. When they did 
not furnish it, he called together the leaders and sternly chided them 
because they had deserted him after he had undertaken the war at 
their petition. 

1 Cf. LXXVIIT. x. 2. 


LESSON 


LXXXIV. 


991 


LESSON LXXXIV. 


Lo TEXT, 


The passage of indir. discourse in this Lesson is changed to its direct Lat. form 


just below on the left of the page. 
parison with the direct. 


On the right the indir. form is given for com- 
The words changed in passing from the original to the 


quoted form are underlined ; on the subject of indirect discourse, review E. G. 67. 


Tum démum Liscus oratione Caesaris adductus, quod 


antea tacuerat, proponit : 

* Sunt nonnülli, quorum 
auctoritás apud plebem 
plürimum valet, qui priva- 


esse nonnüllos, quorum 
apud plebem 


auctoritàs 
plürimum valeat qui priva- 


tim plüs possunt, quam | tim plüs possint, quam 
ipsi magistratis.” ipsi magistratis. 
2. NOTES. 


1. proponit: (a) its obj. is id understood, which is the antec. of 


quod ; (4) quod is the obj. of tacuerat, which is here transitive. 
2. esse; why the iuf. here? For change from the direct form, cf. 


XXVII. nN. 6, Obs. 5. 


9. plürimum valeat; for 


meaning, cf. plürimum possent 


XXXVI.; for change from direct form, cf. LII. N. 7, Obs. 2. 

4. magistratis : (4) a nom. plur.; it has the same const. as the 
qui before quam, 7. e. it is the subj. of possint to be supplied ; lit. 
translation from qui, who can more than the magistrates themselves 


| (cau) ; (6) reason for mode of possint? 


(c) plüs is the irreg. 


neut. comparative of multum and plürimum. 


3. VOCABULARY. 


]. antea, adv., before. 
9. démum, at /ast. 


3. plüs, plüris (neut. comp. of 


multus and multum), adv. 
or adj., more. 


4. privatim, privately, as private 
cilizens. 

5. proponere, -posuit, -positus, 
to put or set forth, to 
declare. 


9902 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


6. tacére, tacuit, tacitus, /o | 7. tum, adv. of time, then. 
be silent; also. sometimes | 8. valére, valuit, valitürus, fo 
transitive, £o be silent about, be strong or powerful, to 
to pass over in silence. avail, 


4. EXERCISES 


1. (a) Caesar by his speech persuaded Liscus to declare what 
some powerful men were doing. (4) The leader whose influence is 
very great is not far away. (c) He says that the leader whose 
influence is very great is not far away. 

2. (a) The ruler whom the Haeduans have elected cannot bring 
grain to Caesar because very powerful leaders do not aid him. 
(^) Liscus says that the ruler whom the Haeduans have elected 
cannot bring grain to Caesar because very powerful leaders do not 
aid him. (c) Caesar says that he has been deserted by those who 


asked him to undertake the war. 


SARCINAE, personal baggage. 


The rations of grain referred to in Lesson LXXXIIT. were carried in packs like that repre- 
sented in the picture. Besides provisions for twelve or fifteen days, each soldier carried a change 
of clothing, cooking utensils, and often tools — axes, spades, etc. — for fortifying the camp 
every night (cf. p. 285). The whole weighed fifty or sixty pounds. For method of carrying the 
sarcinae, cf. p. 269. 


LESSON LXXXV. 999 


LESSON LXXXV. 


i LEAL. 


*Hi seditiosa atque im- Hos séditiosà atque im- 


proba oratione multitüdi- |, proba oratione multitüdi- 


nem déterrent, né frai- | nem deterrere, né fri- 
mentum conferant, quod | mentum conferant, quod 


praestare débent:’’ *siiam | praestare debeant: si iam 


principatum Galliae ob- | principatum Galliae ob- 
tinere non possumus, Gal. | tinere non possint, Gal. 
lorum quam Romànorum | lorum quam Romanorum 
imperiapraeferimus,neque | imperia praeferre, neque 
dubitamus quin, si Helvé- | dubitare quin, si Helvé- 
tios superaverint Romani, | tios superaverint Romani, 
ina cum reliqua Gallia | tna cum reliqua Gallia 
Haeduis libertatem sint | Haeduis libertatem sint 
ereptürl." ereptüri. 


2. NOTES 


1. déterr&re : (4) note that we have in this verb the principal, 
not a subordinate, verb of the indirect discourse; cf. the correspond- 
ing verb of the direct discourse and XXVII. Obs. 5; (4) cf. hos of 
the indir. dise. with hi of the direct and explain the difference. 

2. cónferant: (a) for const. cf. XL. nN. 5, and note that the 
same mode is required in both direct and indir. disc. ; (5) for the use 
of the plur., cf. LXXIX. N. 4, c. 

3. d&beant; for form, and for use of mode, cf. valeat LXXXIV. 

4. possint: (a) for form, cf. possit LVI.; (^) for reason of 
mode, cf. débeant 3; (c) the direct form possumus is a pres. ind. ; 
for its ending -mus, cf. LXX. N. 5. 

5. praeferre : (a) for form, cf. LXXXIT. N. 6, Obs. 1; (4) the 
subj. is sé, understood, referring to noónnüllós, in last Lesson, 2. e. 
to the influential Helvetian chiefs who were unfriendly to the Romans ; 


994 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


(c) these chiefs say to the multitude, 7f we cannot any longer hold the 
chief place of Gaul, we choose the rule of the Gauls (i. e. to be ruled 
by the Gauls) rather than the rule of the Romans. ! 

6. superaverint: (a). a pf. subjv. in a subordinate clause of 
indir. disc. after the present tense, proponit. What tense of the 
subjv. would have been used after a past tense? Cf. E. G. 67, 2; 
(0) changed from a fut. pf. ind. in dir. dise., where, however, its 
form was the same; cf. LXXI. N. 2; (c) conjug. and analysis of 
form ? 

7. sint éreptürr: (a) sint is in the subjv. after quin in both the 
dir. and indir. discourse. What mode follows quin in XXXVI. and 
XLI.? Note that in all of these three instances the clauses on which 
the quin clause depends contain a negative, and that two of these 
clauses express doubt; (4) ünà before cum is an adv. meaning 
together; cf. ina cum XLIV.; (c) Haeduis is here a dat. (not abl.) 
of separation with éreptüri; (7) éreptiri is from éripere (cf. éri- 
puit XL.), a verb in -i6 of the 3d conjug. ; what partic.? how different 
in form and in meaning from &repti? Cf. XLVIIT. x. 4, Obs. 1. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. Since the subjv. has no fut. nor fut. pf. tense, subordinate 
verbs in the fut. or fut. pf. ind. cannot be changed to the same tense 
of the subjunctive. Verbs in the fut. pf. are changed to the pf. or 
plpf. subjunctive. 

2. The conj. quin, dué that, that, that not, is followed by the subjv. 
like ut. It is used after negative expressions, especially those of 
doubting and hindering. 


4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. The fut. pf. in subordinate 
clauses of indir. discourse . A. & G. 286, H. 525, 2. 
Rem. 
9. The use of quin with the sub- 
junctive....: «. deine ae dux daa D NEISSDTRUNCE 
and Rem. 504. 


LESSON LXXXV. 330 


5. VOCABULARY. 


| l. déterrére, regular, £o frighten | 4. libertàs, freedom, liberty. 


away from, to deter. 9. praeferre, -tulit, -latus, fo 
2. dubitàre, (o doubt, (o hesi- bear before, to prefer, to 
tate. choose. 
9. improbus, deyoud or below | 6. séditidsus, full of discord, 
the proper standard, base, seditious. 
excessive, violent, wicked. 1. superáre, lo overcome, surpass. 


6. EXERCISES 


l. (a) Dumnorix, the brother of Divitiacus, was 
more powerful than Liscus himself. (5) When Caesar 
ordered grain to be brought together, some did not do 
what he ordered. (c) Some were persuading the mul- 
titude not to bring grain to Caesar. 

2. (a) The multitude, (because) influenced by the 
violent talk of the chiefs who desired revolution, did not 
bring the grain to the camp. (4) The common people 
ought to furnish the grain which thev have promised. 
(c) All prefer the rule of their own (countrymen) to 
(than) the rule of strangers (aliénus, as noun). 


ROMAN GLADIUS, 


Note the reference in the text above to the conquering power of the Romans. With the 
gladius the Romans conquered the world. Cf. it with the Gallic swords, p. 155, and the 
pictures under the word **sword in Webster's “International Dictionary." Read carefully 
what Dr. O. W. Holmes says about our American nation : — 

* We are the Romans of the modern world, — the great assimilating people. Conflicts and 
conquests are, of course, necessary accidents with us as with our prototypes. And so we come 
to their style of weapon. Our army sword is the short, stiff, pointed gladius of the Romans; 
and the American bowie-knife is the same tool, modified to meet the daily wants of civil society. 
Iannounce... anaxiom . . , : — 


The race that shortens its weapons lengthens its boundaries." 
Autocrat of the Breakfast Table. 


336 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LXXXVI. 


l. TEXT. 


* Ab eisdem tua consilia | Ab eisdem nostraconsilia 
quaeque in castris geruntur | quaeque in castris gerantur 
hostibus enüntiantur: hia | hostibus €nuntiari: hos a 
m8 coércéri nón possunt: Sé coérceri non posse; 
quin etiam, quod necessá- | quin etiam, quod necessa- 
riam rem coactus tibi | riam rem coactus Caesari 
enüntiavi, intellego ——, | enüntiarit, intellegere sese, 
quanto id cum periculo | quanto id cum periculo 
fecerim, et ob eam causam, | fecerit, et ob eam causam, 
quam diü potui, tacui." quam diü potuerit, tacuisse. 


2. NOTES. 


l. &nüntiàri: (a) the subjs. are consilia, and ea, the omitted 
antecedent of quae; (4) for the preceding tua, of the direct form, cf. 
tuae LXX.; cf. also LXXVI. w. 1, 4, Obs. 2, and remember that 
Liscus is addressing one man, Caesar; Caesar, in reporting the inter- 
view, uses nostra, our, because he is writing a book to be read by 
the Romans, of whom he himself was one; (c) gerantur means are 
being done. Why is a subjv. used here? Cf. the direct form. 

2. énüntiürit: (7) used for the full form 8&nüntiaverit; cf. 
XLV. w. 1, a; (6) why subjv.? Cf. the direct form. (c) What 
partic. agrees with its subj.? (4) The whole clause introduced by 
the conj. quod is an adv. accus. (cf. E. G. 52 and 60), and may be 
translated as £o the fact that he hes made known, etc. ; (e) the direct 
form énüntiàvi is the 1st pers. sing. of a pf. ind. active. 

9. intellegere sésé: (a) note that the subject of intellegere, 
though a pron., is expressed by the separate word sésé since the inf. 
does not have a personal ending. Why is it unnecessary to express 
the subject separately when the direct form intellego is used? 


LESSON LXXXVI. 5387 


(6) introduced by quin, which means nay more, in fact, not that or 
| but that, which is its meaning when followed by the subjunctive. 

4. fécerit: (a) By what interrogative word is this verb introduced 
and what does this word limit? (4) for mode, cf. LXV. N. 2, c; 
(c) its object id has the quod clause for its antecedent. 

.. B. quam dia, «s lony as. 

6. tacuisse: (a) for ending, cf. trádüxisse LXV.; (5) for the 
ending of the direct form tacui, cf. énüntiàvi 2, e, (c) for the other 
endings of this tense, cf. XL. N. 3, vexav-istis LXXV., didic-imus 
LXX.; the 2d pers. sing. is the same as the 2d pers. plur. with the 
omission of the final -s. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The endings of the pf. ind. act. are as follows in all conjugs. : — 


Singular. Plural. 
1st pers. -I -imus 
2d pers. -isti -istis 
3d pers. “it -érunt 


2. Since the inf. has no personal endings, its subject must 
regularly be expressed by a separate word. 


4 VOCABULARY. 


1. coércére, coércuit, coérci- | 2. quantus, adj., (quam, how), 
tus, to hold on all sides, how great, as much as, traus- 
restrain, coerce. lated as after tantus. 


5. EXERCISE. 


Liscus, the chief magistrate of the Haeduans, said that some of 
the Haeduans who had great power among the common people and 
were unfriendly to the Romans persuaded the people who had the 
grain not to bring it to Caesar, because (as they said) the Romans 
were about-to-snatch-away their liberty. ‘“‘These men are reporting 
your plans to the enemy, and T cannot restrain them." 

22 


338 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON LXXXVII. 


| REVIEW. 
Lessons LXXIII.-LXXXVI. 


DEE OP. Wy, 
Carsar’s ‘‘Gattic Wan," Book I., Chapters 14-17. 


Follow the directions under ** Text" in LXII.: 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON 


1. Noun, pronominal and adjective forms. () The posses- 
sive pronominal adjectives, LXXVI. Obs. 2; A. & G. 98,3, H. 185. 
(6) The & or 5th decl., LXXVIII. Obs. 1; A. & G. 72,73; H. 120. 
(c) The decl. of hic, haec, hoc, LXXVIII. Obs. 2; A. & G. 101; 
H. 186, I[. and foot note 4. (4) The decl. of ego, LXXVIII. Obs. 3 ; 
A. & G. 98, 1; H. 184. (e) The forin and meaning of distributives, 
LXXXI. Obs. 1; A. & G. 95 and e; H. 174, 2, 1. 

2. Verb forms. (a) The endings -6 aud -m in the Ist pers. 
sing., LXXIII. Obs. 1; LXXV. Obs. 1. (4) The personal endings 
of the passive, LXXVI. Obs. 1. . (c) The sign of the fut. in the 3d 
and 4th conjugs., LXXVIII. Obs. 4.. (7) Personal endings, act. 
and pass., LXXVIII. Obs. 5; A. & G. 116; H. 247. (e) Verbs in 
-id of the 3d conjug., LXXIX. Obs. 2; A. & G. p. 100; H. 217- 
219. (/) Conjug. of ferre, LXXXII. Obs. 1; A. & G. 139; .H. 
292 and 1. (5) The endings of the pf. ind. act., LXXXVI. Obs. 1. 

3. The use of cases. (a) The use of the partitive genitive, 
LXXIII. Obs. 2; A. & G. 216, 2 and 3; H. 397,2 and 3: (0) Of; 
the abl. of measure of difference with comparatives, LXXIII. Obs. 3 ; 
A. & G. 250, Rem. and n.; H. 423. (c) Of the adverbial accus. 
quod before si, LXXV. Obs. 3; A. & G. 240, 4; H. 453, 6. 
(d) Of the abl. with comparatives without quam, LXXXT. Obs. 2; 
A. & G. 247; H. 417. (e) Of two accusatives with verbs of asking 
and teaching, LXXXT. Obs. 3; A & G. 239, c, H. 374. 

4. The use of verbs. (^) The use of the subjv. with cum, 
although, LXXVIII. Obs. 8. (4) Of the pf. pass. partic. with 


LESSON LXXXVII. 339 


habére, LXXIX. Obs. 3; A. & G. 292, c; H. 388, 1, N. (c) The 
historical iuf. LXXXI. Obs. 4; A. & G. 275; H. 536, 1. (d) Mode 
and teuse used after ubi, LXXXIII. Obs. 2; A. & G. 324 ; H. 518 
and N. l. (¢) Different ways of expressing necessity or obligation, 
LXXXIII. Obs. 3. (/) The fut. and fut. pf. in subordinate clauses 
of indirect. discourse, LXXXV. Obs. 1; A. & G. 286, Rem.; 
H. 525, 2. (y) Use of the subjv. with qum LXXXV. Obs. 2; 
A. & G. 332, g and Rem.; H. 501, II. 2, 504. 

9. The use of pronouns, adverbs, and conjunctions. 
(2) The use of num, LXXV. Obs. 2; A. & G. 210, a and c; H. 351, 
I (0) The use of -que, LXXVI. Obs. 3; A. & G. 156, à; H. 


554, I. 9. (c) Of hic aud is, LXXVIII. Obs. 6, 7. 


6. Miscellaneous. (a) The relative clause before the antec., 
eve Ose DE wats. 2OLeo wel o72) IT^ and" N.” (0)'*T B6 
comparative sometimes translated by £00, LXXIX. Obs. 1. (c) Forma- 
tion of adverbs from adjectives in -is, LXXXIII. Obs. 1. (7) The 
subj. of the inf. must be expressed, LXXXVI. Obs. 2. 


3. WORD REVIEW. 
New words in Chapters 14-17. Prepare as in last Review. 


VERBS, 
1s Conjugation. 2d Conjugation.’ 3d Conjugation. 
l. acciisare Le cavéere 1. accidere 12. lacessere 
2. adinirari 2. coércére 2. avertere 13. oblivisci 
3. commemorare 3. déterrére 3. cadere 14. ponere 
4. comportàre 4. dolere 4. cOnsuéscere 15. praemittere 
5. convocare 5. movére 5. décipere(io)? 16. propellere 
6. creàre 6. pollicéri 6. deponere 17. proponere 
7. dubitare 7. tacére 7. déstituere 18. queri 
8. flagitare 8. timére 8. discédere 19. satisfacere (10)? 
9. gloriari 9. valére 9. emere 20. subsistere 
10. instàre 10. insequi 21. subvehere 
ll. sublevare 1l. instituere 


12. pupae 1 The pupil must remember that many 2d conjug. verbs 
19. temptare have the pf. or supine of another conjugation. 
14. vexare 2 For verbs thus marked, see LXXIX, Obs. 2. 


340 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


Irregular or defective. 


1. adesse 3. conferre 
2. coepisse 4. interesse 


5. nolle 
6. praeesse 


Noun, PRONOMINAL, AND ADJECTIVE FORMS. 


9d Declension. 


lst Declension. 


7. praeferre 
8. tulisse (ferre) 


l. contumélia 1. aliénus 9. meritum l7. responsum 
2. praesentia 2. amplus 10. pabulum 18. secundus 
3. rapina 3. annuus ll. pauci (plur.) 19. séditidsus 
4. victoria 4. conscius 12. posterus 20. sent ( plur.) 
5. vita 5. diüturnus 13. propinquus 21. summus 
6. improbus 14. quantus 22. tantus 
4th Declension. 7. Liscus 15. quini (plur. 23. vergobretus 
l. equitatus 8. màtürus 16. quingenti « 24. vester 
3d Declension. Irregular or 
]. agmen 7. impünitàs 13. populatio indeclinable. 
2. commütatio 8. testis 14. potestas 1. aliqui 
3. dubitatid 9. minor 15. precés (p/.) 2. ego (mé, 
4. eques 10. nex 16. recéns mihi) 
5. frigus 1l. pabulatio 17. scelus 3. quindecim 
6. hostis 12. plüs 18. testis 4, vos 
ADVERBS. CONJUNCTION. 
l. anteà 6. démum . 1l. interdum — 16. privatim 1. enim 
2. audacter 7. diu 12. interim 17. püblice 
3. circiter 8. graviter 13. modo 18. quidem 
4. cotidie — 9. impune 14. num 19. tam 
5. cupidé 10. insolenter 15. praesertim 20. tum 


LESSON LXXXVIII. 941 


LESSON LXXXVIII. 


l. TEXT. 
Caesar, B. G. I. 18,! through audeat n&mo. 
2. NOTES. 


1. plüribus praesentibus: (a) for const. ef. LVIII. N. 4, 0; 
(^) plüribus, from nom. plur. masc. plürés, means here many. 

2. celeriter: (a) for formation, cf. LXXXIII. x. 8, Obs. 1; (4) the 
nom. masc. of the corresponding adj. is celer; the sup. of celeriter 
is celerrimé not celerissimé ; cf. aegerrime LXVIIL, of which the 
corresponding adj. in the positive degree is Rege What likeness of 
form in celer and aeger ? 

3. $010; agrees with eo understood, referring to Liscum. 

4. liberius ; for form, cf. XXV. Obs. 2; for superlative, cf. 2, 5. 

5. esse; the subj. is ea, those things, to be supplied. 

6. ipsum ; in the sense of ¢he very one rather than himself. 

4. gratia: (a) qualified by the preceding magna; (^) for const. 
aud also for that of audacia, cf. inimicó animo LIII. 

8. vectigalia ; declined exactly like. neuters in -e; cf. XLIII. 
Obs. 2. 

9. redempta habére: (4) for use, cf. LXXIX. x. 3; (/) the 
preceding parvó pretio tells at how much he bought the revenues.? 


1 B. G. I. 18— Bellum Gallicum, Book I., Chapter 18. The teacher will 
have noted the progressiveness of these Lessons ; very gradually help is withdrawn 
and a smaller amount of repetition is required. In the following Lessons the pupil 
will refer to the connected text in the back of the book (p. 363.) for the text of 
the Lesson and to the General Vocabulary (p. 403) for all new words. 
| 2 Among the ancients, taxes were not always collected by the state as with us. 
. Often “those taxes which, like the portGria, produced variable amounts according 
to the state of trade were sold to 'tax-farmers' for lump sums, and the taxes were 
collected by the tax-farmers and not by the state.” In * buying " portoria, Dum- 
norix agreed beforehand to pay a definite sum for the privilege of collecting and 
having for his own all the money raised from exports and imports in the Haeduan 
country for a definite period. But by intimidating others, who might have bought, 
he secured the taxes at a price far below the receipts for customs during the period 
for which he bought them and thus, after he had made the collections, realized a 
- Jarge fortune. Sce Gow's “ Companion to School Classics,” p. 257. 


342 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


10. licente: (4) for form, cf. LX. Obs. 1; (4) the pres. partic. 
represents the action as actually going on at the time represented 
by the verb of the clause in which the partic. stands; here it may 
be translated with illo, he bidding or while he was bidding ; this is 
the first pres. partic. whieh has been used as such in the text thus 
far; other words haviug the form of pres. parties. were adjs. in all 
respects; (c) note that licéri, though deponent and therefore pass. 
in form, has the pres. act. partic. licente. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Adjectives in -er form the superlative by adding -rimus (not | 
-issimus). The correspouding adverb is formed by substituting — 
-rimé for -8 or -iter of the positive. A. & G. 89,a and 92. H. 163 
land 306. 

2. Deponent verbs have the two act. parties. as well as the two 
parties. which are pass. in form; ef. LVII. Obs. 2. A. & G. 135 and a. 
H. 231, 1; 232. 

3. The pres. act. partic. is used in Lat. only to represent the 
action as actually goiug on at the time of the verb on which the 
partie. depends, and never loosely as in Eng. to describe an action 
which preceded that of the principal verb; cf. E. G. 74, e, / and 2. 
À.& G. 290. H. 550. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. (a) After very quickly dismissing the council, Caesar ordered 
Liscus to speak freely. (6) Caesar did not allow these things to be 
discussed when many were present. (c) Among the chiefs who were 
in the camp was Dumnorix the brother of Divitiacus. 

2. (a) When Dumnorix is a bidder, the rest do not dare to buy up 
the taxes. (2) Dumnorix was a man of so great popularity among 
the common people that the magistrates could not restrain him. 
(c) Having bought up the taxes at a very small price, Dumnorix 
tried to obtain very-much money (pecünia). | 


LESSON LXXXIX. 949 


LESSON LXXXIX. 


l. TEXT 


Caesar, B. G. [. 18, His rébus through gratia déspéráre 


2. NOTES 


l. comparásse: (a) full form? Cf. XLV. Obs. 1,3; (/)et .. 
et, both . . . and; (c) largiendum ; for form, cf. XXX. N. 5; with 
ad it here expresses purpose like ad rés cénficiendas XXXII. 

2. domi, at home; not a gen.; it will be explained later. 

3. largiter posse; cf. plürimum possent XXXVI. 

4. collocasse, has placed, has given in marriage: (a) hüius poten. 
tiae causa, because of, or for the sake of this power, i. e. in order to 
secure this power ; the phrase expresses purpose; for other ways of 
expressing purpose, cf. XL. N. 5 and XLIX. Nw. 2. 


9. sororem ex matre, «a sister from the mother, a sister on the 


mother’s side (only), i. e. a half sister. 
— 6. nüptum collocasse; for form and use of nüptum, cf. LXIII. 
Obs. 3; collocásse has in this expression the force of a verb of 
motion. 

7. Helvétiis; dat. with favére and cupere; cf. XX. Obs. 3, 
IEVIITU Ne. 

8. odisse, he hates; for translation, cf. LXXVII. N. 1, a; it lacks 
the pres. system. 

9. suo nomine ,; 22 his own name, on his own account. 

10. d&minüta; supply sit ; why not est? why not esset ? 

11. si quid ; cf. st quid LIV. 

12. accidat. What is its mode and tense? It stands for a fut. 
ind. in the dir. discourse. 

13. régni obtinendi; for use and translation, cf. LITT. N. 5. 

14. imperio populi Romani, wzder the government of the Roman 
people; imperio, like adventü, above, is an abl. of both time and 
cause ; cf. E. G. 69, 9. 

15. dé eà quam habeat grátià ; note that gratia is the antec. of 
quam, aud that quam habeat has the force of an adj. restricting the 


344 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


meaning of ea, and is for that reason placed after it; the phrase 
might be translated of his existing popularity; cf. magna apud 
plébem propter liberalitatem gratia, of great popular, bribe-bought 
influence, LXXXVIII. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. We have found thus far four different ways of expressing pur- 
pose in Lat.: (a) by the subjv. with ut (sometimes qui— ut is) or 
n8; (6) by ad with the gerund or gerundive; (c) by causa with a 
gen. depending upon it; (d) by a supine in -um, after a verb of 
notion. 

2. Some verbs, the ordinary meaning of which would lead us to 
expect the accus., are used with the dative. Four such verbs have 
already been found in the text, viz., favére, (o fuvor ; imperare, £o 
command ; persuadére, to persuade ; studére, to desire. 

3. Some verbs pf. in form are pres. in sense. A. & G. 143 w. 
tae 29 7522. 

4. A fut. in the subordinate clause of direct discourse is changed 
in indirect discourse to a pres. subjv. after a pres. or fut., and to an 
impf. subjv. after a past tense; cf. E. G. 67, 2 and LXXXV. Obs. 1. 

9. A phrase containing a fut. pass. partic. is often translated by an 
Eng. verbal noun in -ivg with a direct object. A. & G. 296. H. 544, 1. 

6. Phrases and clauses often have both the force and position of 
adis. cB. G, 48, 15.3. 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. Write first in Eug. and then in Lat. the dir. dise. which is 
indirectly quoted in this Lesson. 

2. (a) Influenced by this relationship, Dumnorix favors the Hel- 
vetians. (6) Influenced by his Helvetian wife, Dumnorix, in-order-to 
furnish aid to the Helvetians, tries to take away (to snatch away) the 
grain from the Romans. (c) For-the-sake (causa) of possessing the 
royal power, Dumnorix wished to defeat the Roman army. | 

3. (a) The high-born chiefs of Gaul were always longing to seize 
the kingdoms which their fathers had held for many years. (6) In 


LESSON XC. 945 


former times Divitiacus had been more powerful than Dumnorix. 
(c) Dumnorix, after amassing large means and marrying a Helvetian 
wife, was influential both with the common people of his own country 
and with the Helvetiaus. 


LESSON XC. 


JIASTIEXIS 


Caesar, B. G. I. 18, Reperiébat etiam tlirough animadvertere 
iubéret in 19. 


2. NOTES. 


1. reperiébat . . . Caesar: (a) note the expressiveness of the 
order in this clause ; the verb first, to show that something important 
was found out,— not simply related by Divitiacus, who has been 
speaking ; cf. LXVIII. Obs. 1; (7) quaerendó is a gerund, seeking ; 
distinguish queritur LXXXIII. What is the exact difference in the 
forms of the pres. stems ? 

9. equestre ; note the neuter ending -e ; cf. omne XLIII. 

3. paucis ante diébus ; ante is here an adv.; defore by a few 
days, a few days before; cf. LXXIII. N. 5, c. 

4. quod . . . esset factum ; for const. and trauslation of clause, 
ef. LX XXVI. Nn. 2, d. 

9. factum (after fugae) ; cf. LIII. Obs. 1 and E. G. 75, 1 (1), 3. 

6. miserant; the preceding dat. auxilió means for aid, i. e. in 
order to aid, and the dat. Caesari means /o Caesar. 

7. accéderent: (a) accédere, meaning strictly £o go £o, comes to 
have the pass. meaning £o de added; (5) for mode, cf. possent LXIII. 
. 8. tradüxisset: (a) its subj. is Dumnorix to be supplied; 
(b). subjv. in a subordinate clause of indir. disc.; the thought of 
Caesar, as suggested by the word suspiciénés, is here quoted. 

9. dandos cürásset: (a) dandos agrees with obsidés, not eos ; 


346 t INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


(^) for use of dandés, cf. pontem faciundum LXVIII.; (c) for the 
circumstances referred to, cf. LVIII. and LIX. 

10. iniüssü sud et civitátis: (a) iniüssü, without the command, 
is an abl. of manner; (4) suó here refers to Caesar, the unexpressed 
subj. of a verb which follows; (c) su6 and civitatis (which depends 
on iniüssü) are connected by the co-ordinate conj. et; note that the | 
adj. suo and the gen. civitatis have exactly the same possessive 
force ; cf. E. G. 63, 2. 

ll. ipsis; itsantecs. are civitátis aud Caesaris (the latter implied 
in suo) ; for const., cf. LVIII. N. 4. 

19. accüsárétur; the four quod clauses which end with this word 
have the same const.; they are in apposition with rés (the subj. of 
accéderent) and may each be introduced in translating by the phrase 
the fact that; cf. E. G. 52. 

13. satis causae; for const., cf. minus dubitationis LXXIII. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. Accédere, though active in form, has often the pass. meaning, 
to be added. 

2. The gen. often has exactly the force of an adjective, and is 
sometimes called the adjective case; cf. the adverbial force of the 
abl., LIII. Obs. 3. | 


4. EXERCISES. 


Dumnorix the Haeduan was a man of great boldness and popularity. 
He desired revolution and used-to-have about him a large number of 
horsemen, whom he supported by the means which he amassed from 
the taxes, which he had bought up. He was desirous of holding the 
royal power and hated the Romans because they were about-to-snatch- 
away his hope of overcoming the state. "Therefore he was keeping 
the common people from bringing grain to the Romans, and tried to 
frighten Caesar's cavalry, a part of which he commanded (as) leader 
of the Haeduan horsemen. 


LESSON XCI. 347 


LESSON XCI. 


LUTEXI: 
Caesar, B. G. |. 19 His omnibus through sé crévisset in 20 
2. NOTES. 


l. repügnàábat, was opposed (or repugnant) ; the subj. is ünum, 
one (thing) ; note that we have here an inanimate thing, as the sub- 
ject of an active verb, and cf. E. G. 55, 9. 

2. cógnóverat; uote that the conj. is entirely omitted between the 
different objects of cognoverat; cf. lingua, institütis, légibus IV. 
and Garumnà, Oceano, finibus XIV., but contrast Rauricis et 
Tulingis et Latovicis XLIV. 

3. n8 . . . offenderet verébatur, he feared that he would offend : 
(a) né, following verébatur in thought, is translated that; (5) the 
impf. subjv. offenderet refers to the fut.; cf. XCI. n. 6, b; (c) the 
antec. of 6ius is Dumnorix. 

4. quicquam, sometimes written quidquam, anything: (a) the 
accus. sing. neut. of the indef. pron. quisquam, quaequam, quicquam 
(quidquam); (4) cf. quemque, each one, XLIII.; it is from quis- 
que, quaeque, quidque ; note that both of these prons. have only 
the first syllable declined and that this is the indef. quis, quae, 
quid; for which, see LIV. How does quis differ in form from the 
relative pronoun ? 

5. cui... habébat, to whom he was having the highest confidence 
of all things, more freely, in whom he had the greatest confidence re- 
specting everything: (a) case and antec. of cui? (4) note that the 
gen. rérum is not best translated by of, and cf. dictionis, for plead- 
ing, XL.; trium ménsium, sufficient for three months, XLIII.; in- 
commodi, disaster (like accus.), LXIX.; minus dubitatidnis, less 
doubt LX XIII. 

6. quae . . . dicta sint: (a) ea understood is the antec. of quae 
and the object of commonefacit ; (4) the antec. of ipso is Divitia- 
cum, above; (c) for mode of dicta sint, cf. XC. N. 8, 0. 


348 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


4. statuat: (a) for const., cf. XLIV. N. 8, c, Obs. 1, and examples 
of the same const. in XLVIII., LIL, LU LXXI., and note that in 
all these instances the subjunctive object clause is used where in Eng. 
we use an inf.; cf. XXXLV. Obs. 3 and E. G. 68, 7; (4) éius 
depends upon animi and refers to Divitiacus; (c) ipse refers to 
Caesar, eo to Dumnorix. 

8. statueret: (4) for coust., cf. 7, a; (b) note the position of 
quid with respect to né, aud cf. si quid LXXXIX. ;.(c) gravius is 
here au adj. ; gender and agreement? it means £oo severe rather than 
more severe; (d) in fratrem, against his brother. 

9. ex eo, from that fact, i. e. the behavior of Dumnorix. 

10. posset: (4) What was the mode of this verb in the dir. disc. ? — 
Cf. exisset LXVI. ; (^) modified by both plürimum aud minimum. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


1. The Latin has an indefinite pronoun which has in general the 
forms of the relative; but the nom. sing. masc. is quis and the nom. 
and accus. siug. neuter is quid. This pronoun in Caesar usually | 
stands immediately after si, nisi, né, or num. 

2. The pronouns quisquam, avy one, and quisque, every one, are 
compounds of the indefinite quis; the first syllable of each is declined 
while the last syllable remains unchanged. A. & G. 104, 105, v, e. 
H. 190 and 2, 1), 2), and w. 1. 

3. The translation of the gen., like that of all cases, depends upon 
the context; it should Nor be invariably translated by of. 

4. The neg. né, introducing a subjunctive clause which is the obj. - 
of a verb of fearing, is regularly translated by the affirmative that. 
This will seem less strange if we observe that, where né is used, the 
obj. is not desired. A. & G. 331, H. 498, III. and x. 1, foot-note 4. 

5. Ina series of coórdinate words, where in Eng. a conjunction is 
expressed only between the last two, the Latin either connects them 
all by conjunctions or omits the conjunction altogether. <A. & G. 
208,/and1. H. 554, I. 6. 

6. In Latin as in English, an inanimate thing may be the subject 
of an active verb. 


LESSON XCII. 349 


4. EXERCISES. 


1. Write in Eng. and then in Lat. the dir. disc. which is indirectly 
quoted in this Lesson. 

2. Caesar thought he ought to punish Dumnorix, but he was afraid 
that he would offend Divitiacus, his brother, who had been a friend 
of the Romans for many years. He called Divitiacus to him, and, 
when he had removed all, asked him through an interpreter either 


| to examine aud decide the case himself, or to direct the Haeduan state 
to decide it. 


LESSON XCII. 


Le TEXT. 
Caesar, B. G. I. 20, quibus opibus to the end. 


2. NOTES. 


l. üterétur: (a) why subjv.? (4) what case used with it? Cf. 
XLIV. xn. 5; (e) for translation aud force of ad minuendam 

gratiam, cf. XLIII. n. 7, LXXXIX. N. 1, c. 
| 2. fraterno ; note that this adjective has here the same force as 
the gen. vulgi, just beyond, and cf. XC. N. 10, c. 

3. sés8 .. . commoveri, fe was moved: (a) the direct form is 
commoveor, J AM moved, and the quotation is made after a past 
tense of a verb of saying, implied in obsecràre coepit XCI. ; 
(6) note that in a principal clause the inf. commoveri is retained in 
the pres. tense after a past tense, contrary to the Eng. usage; cf. 
E. G. 67, 2. (c) How is it with the subordinate verbs of indir. 
disc. ? Cf. tenses of subordinate verbs in this Lesson. 

4. existimátürum : (a) cf. XLVIIT. xn. 4, Obs. 1, 2; (6) for the 
direct form of the preceding accidisset, after si, cf. LXXXV. n. 6, 
Obs. 1; the exact Eng. for the dir. form of the Lat. would be “ If any- 
thing shall have happened, no one will think ; " the Lat. uses the fut. 
pf. in the si clause, but the simple fut. in the conclusion, to indicate 


350 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


that something must happen before there can be any thought about 
it; contrast the vague use of the pres. *happeus " in the idiomatic 
Eng. sentence, ‘ If anything happens, no one will think," and cf. 
E. -G,. 74, 9,4, 2,3 3 (¢) for. quod, ci. LX OY 

5. factum ; with esse, understood, Z£ was done; cf. LIII. Obs. 1. 

6. àverterentur: (a) cf. futürum ut... haberet LX.; (/) cf. 
averterant LXXXII., and note that the pres. stem àverte- differs 
from the pf. stem Avert- only in the final -e of the present. Verbs 
like àvertere in this respect have the same form in the pres. and pf. 
ind., 3d sing.; examples of such verbs already used are minuit, os- 
tendit, statuit, incendit, offendit, solvit ; cf. XL. N. 4, Obs. 3. 

7. peteret: (a) the introductory cum is here best translated 
while, as very often when used with the impf. subjunctive. (6) Why 
does haec precede cum? Cf. His cum LVIII. v. 3,4; (c) fléns, 
pres. partic. in form and use; for use, cf. licente LXXXVIII. N. 10. 

8. faciat: (7) ut before faciat is exceptionally omitted; cf. 
rogare ut LII.; (5) for orandi, cf. bellandi XXVI. 

9. ostendit; tanti, the gen. sing. of tantus, is a predicate after 
esse, lit., he shows that his favor is of so much, freely, ts of so much 
(account), is worth so much. ) 

10. rerpüblicae: (a) really two words, rés and publica; cf. iüsiü- 
randum XXXVII. Vocab.; (4) note the gen. ending -i of the -& 
declension. 

ll. praeterita: (a) in form a pf. pass. partic. plur. neut. from 
praeterire, to go by: lit. the things which have been passed by, more 
freely, dygones, the past; (4) cf. the following forms of ire and its 
compounds: exirent XX., exeant XLII., subeunda XLIII., exire 
XLVL, transitur XLVIL, ire XLVIII., transibant, tránsierat 
LXV., ibunt LXIX., and the derivatives iter, initium, reditio. 
What is the pres. stem of ire? How is this stem changed when it 
stands before a vowel? How is the supine stem formed? What is 
true of its tense signs and pers. endings as compared with those of 
other verbs ? 

12. adicit: (a) note the position of this word with reference to the 
clause which follows it in thought, and contrast the position of verbs 


of saying or thinking in LXXXVIII, XC., XCI.; cf, however, 


LESSON XCII. ool. 


position of dicere LXXXIL, arbitrabatur XC. What is true of 
the length of the quoted clauses which PRECEDE the verb of saying 
or thinking ? (4) cf. also (as to the position of the verb of urging) 
monet ut vitet and rogat faciat, above; hortatur ut statuat 
and obsecrare n8 statueret XCI.; note also the position of result 


clauses in XLVI., LXILI., and in this Lesson. 


3. OBSERVATIONS. 


l. Several common verbs of the 3d conjug. neither lengthen the 
vowel nor add any letter to form the pf. stem. This stem is the 
same as the pres. less the final -e. 

2. After a past tense of a verb of saying or thinking, the English 
as a rule changes the teuse of indirectly quoted verbs in both principal 
and subordinate clauses ; the Latin, however, changes the tense of the 
subordinate verbs alone, while that of principal verbs remains the 
same as in the direct discourse. 

3. The pres. stein of ire is 1-, the supine stem is it-, with a short i. 
Before a vowel the pres. stem is changed to e. It has the tense signs 
and personal endings of the 4th conjug., but has no connecting 8 in 
the impf. ind., and uses the tense sign -bi- (-bu-) in the fut. indic- 
ative. Compounds of ire regularly shorten ivit to iit in the perfect. 
A. & G. 141 and 7. H. 295 and 1, 3. 

4. Quoted clauses more frequently follow a verb of saying than 
precede it, though short quoted clauses often precede it. In like 
manner the obj. clause of purpose and all result clauses usually follow 
the verb on which they depend. 

5. Cum with the impf. subjv. is often best translated wAile. 


4. EXERCISES. 


When Divitiacus begged him not to punish his brother, Caesar 
pardoned him for the sake of Divitiacus, who said that if Caesar gave 
too severe a sentence upon his brother all the Haeduaus would think 
that Divitiacus, Caesar's friend, had advised him to do this. He calls 
Dumnorix and urges him to avoid conspiracy in the future. He 
chooses men to see what Dumnorix is doing, and to inform him. 


352 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XCIII. 


REVIEW. 


Lessons LXXXVIIT. - XCII. 


oh kere 
Carsar’s “ Gattic War,” Book I., Chapters 18-20. 


Follow the directions under ** Text," in LXII. 


2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 


1. Study again very carefully the Observations in the five Lessons 
covered by this Review. 

2. Formation of words (cf. Ej, G. 42-46). 

(a) Study the following nouns selected from the text of Caesar, 
B. G. I. 1-20: — | 


audac ia (audax, -cis, Jold), bold-ness. 
amici-tia (amicus, friendly), friend-ship. 
cupidi-tas (cupidus, desirous), desire. 
inop-ia (inops, Aelp-less), helpless-ness. 
adfini-tas (adfinis, near), uear-ness. 
iüsti-tia (iüstus, just), Justice. 
longi-tüdo (longus, lowg), leng-th. 
forti-tüdo (fortis, drave), bravery. 


From what part of speech are the above derivatives formed? What 
four different endings are used above? What seems to be the force 
of these endings? Cf. E. G. 42, 5. 

(4) Study the following words : — 


redi-tid (redire, £o return), a returning. 

dic-tio (dicere, fo say), a saying. 

adven-tus (advenire, /o come to), a coming to. 
cónspec-tus (conspicere, /o see), a seeing, sight. 


LESSON XCIII. 353 


am-or (amare, /o love), love. 

^ dol-or (dolére, /o feel pain), pain. 
benefic-ium (beneficere, to do a kindness), kindness. 
init-ium ! (inire, to begin), beginning.” 


From what part of speech are the above derivatives formed ? What 
four different endings are used above? What seems to be the force 
of these endings? Cf. E. G. 42, 4. What. likeness in form between 
conspectus and the pf. pass. partic. of conspicere? (For parts, cf. 
déspicere.) What difference in decl., however, between the two ? 

. (e) Note the following common adj. endings as a help in sight 


reading : — 
Cassi-anus consanguin-eus : fac-ilis 
repent-inus égreg-ius immort alis 
früment-arius cup-idus incrédi-bilis 


Explain so far as you can the derivation of each adjective; cf. 
E. G. 43 and General Vocabulary. For -ilis and -bilis in fac.ilis 
and incredi-bilis, cf. E. G. 43, 7 and 8. 

(d) For derivation of adverbs, cf. XXV. x. 4, Obs. 1; LXXXIII. 
Ni. 8, Obs; 1. 


3. WORD REVIEW. 


1. Remembering that all new words in the connected text are 
printed in bold-faced tvpe, prepare from the text a classified list of 
all new words which have occurred in Chaps. 18, 19, and 20. 
Arrange your lists as in Lesson LXXXVII., giving the nom. sing. 
of nouns, prons., and adjs., and the infs. of verbs. 

2. Review carefully the words contained in Appendix C. 


1 The nom. ending -ium is also very often found in words not derived from 
verbs. 
.2 Tt will be understood that only the most primitive meaning has been given. 
The meaning, of course, varies widely in different contexts. Sometimes words of 
the class given under are hardly distinguishable from those under a. 


23 


904 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


LESSON XCIV. . ‘ 


GRAMMATICAL REVIEW and INDEX of LESSONS I: to 
XCIII. 


The most important grammatical points discussed in the foregoing Lessons are 
here arranged in the order usually followed in the grammars. This Lesson may be 
used both for systematic study and for reference. The pupil should remember that 
the subject of reference is almost always treated under the Observations, Grammar 
Lesson, Exercises, and Topics for Study as well as in the Notes, of the Lesson 
referred to. 

The grammatical principles referred to below are always discussed in immediate 
connection with their application. It is therefore possible and very desirable, in the 
systematic study of this Lesson, for the pupil to prepare classified sets of examples 
taken from the text and illustrating the most important principles which he has 
been studying. The teacher cannot too strongly urge upon his pupils the necessity 
of associating every principle with a definite, concrete example of its use. Special 
attention is called to the references headed * Translation." These references are 
specially designed to aid the pupil in the every-day work of using the language. - 


PRONUNCIATION. 


Marks of quantity, and accent of words of two syllables I.; sounds 
of the vowels, 1, 1, e, €, &, 6, and of the consonants v, s, I. ; sounds 
of à, ü, á, ae, g and qu, II.; accent, complete statement, IÍI.; 
sounds of 6, t, c, and gu; division into syllables, VIII. ; summary 
of pronunciation, IX. ; sound of au X.; oe XI.; change of e to i, 


XXIII. ; consonant i, XXXIII. 


INFLECTION. 


NOUNS. 


Gender: of the 1st and 2d decls. I.; IX. 2, 6; XVIII. 2, 2, 5 ; 
XIX.; XXIX.; gender by endings applies only to names of things, 
XIV.; summary of gender in 3d decl., LXII. 2, 1 ; gender of -u or 
4th decl. LXIII.; of the -&, or 5th, decl., LXXVIII. 

Declension : the ending -rum III.; nom. endings, sing. and plur., 
IV.; abl. endings, V.; the stem, IX. 2, last paragraph; -s in nom. 


LESSON XCIV. 355 


sing., XIII.; neut. has nom. and accus. alike, XV.; -a in neuters, 
XVI.; abls. sing. end in a vowel, XXIV. ; different uses of -i, XXVI. 

-a decl.: endings -a and -am, II.; -à, and -ae nom. plur., III. ; 
endings in sing., -a, -am, -à; plur. -ae, -is, V.; -àrum and -ae, 
gen. VI.; summary, VI.; completely given and explained, IX. 

-o decl.: the plur. endings, -i, -6s, and -is; ending -6rum VI. ; 
-a as neut. plur., VII.; the endings -is, dat., and -um, accus., VIII.; 
ending -i, gen., XVI.; review and observations XVIII. ; -us, and -1 
gen, XIX.; -6 as abl. sing., XXIII. ; nouns in -us and -um, 
completed decl., XXIX. 2, 1; noms. in -er, XXXIV. 

3d decl.: the endings -is, nom. sing., -s, nom. aud accus. plur., 
IV. 7 ending -ium VI. ; -ibus in abi. VIII; -e inabl., XIII. ; -is, gen., 
and -em, accus., XVI. ; review aud observations, XVIII. ; -1 as dat. 
sing., XX.; nom. of stems in -t, XX.; -ibus as dat. plur., XXI. ; 
change of e to i in nouns in -men, XXIII.; gen. plur. -um or -ium 
and accus. plur. -6s or -is, XXVIL ; the stem ending -tüdin-, 
XXVIII.; nom. of -g stems, XXX.; nom. of -c stems, XXXI.; stems 
in -b and noms. in -er, XXXIV. ; abl. ending -1, XXXIX. ; nom. 
sing. of stems in -6n, XLI.; neuts. in -e complete, XLIII.; neuts. 
in -us, XLVII.; decl. and gender of iter, LI.; stems in -d, LV. ; 
neuts. with gen. in -eris, LVI.; nouns in -tad6, LVII.; nouns with 
-ium in gen. plur., LIX.; complete view of 3d decl, for genitive and 
gender, LXII. 

-u decl.: the abl. ending -à, XXIV.; four cases, XLI. ; complete 
decl., LXIII. 

-8 decl.: certain cases, XXXIX. ; abl. sing., XL.; complete decl., 


LXXVIII. 


ADJECTIVES (INCLUDING PARTICIPLES). 


In general: the name of a nation and the adj. meaning Jelonging 
to that nation often have the same form, XXIII. 

-1s£ and 9d decl. : difference between suus and sé, XII. ; formation 
of advs. from adjs., XXV.; decl. of pf. pass. partic., XXX. ; inflection 
for gender, and 1st and 2d decl, XXXI. ; complete decl. of 1st and 
2d decl. adjs., XXXVIII. 2, 1; ordinals, LXI. ; the possessive pro- 
nom. adjs., LXXVI. ; form and meaning of distributive adjs., LXXXI. 


356 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


3d decl.: the abl. ending -1 XXXIX.; decl. of the comparative, 
XLVII.; formation of advs. from adjs., LXXXIII. 

Irregular : some numerals not declined, XXVIII. ; -Yas and -1in © 
totus, LI. 

Comparison: the superlative sign -issim-, VI.; superlative of 
adjs. in -ns, XXXVII. ; comparison, XLIII.; comparison of adjs. 
in neut., XLVII.; the comparative translation too, LXXIX. ; superla- 
tive of adjs. in -er and of advs. from them, LXXXVIII. 


PRONOUNS. 


The relative has a different form for each gender, X.; two uses 
of form quae, XVII. ; certain forms of is, ea, id, XXII. ; qui, two 
uses, XXIII.; cüius and quod, XXXIII.; complete decl. of is and 
qui, XXXIV.; complete decl. of is and qui, XXXVIII, 2, 2; -ius 
and -i in is and qui, LI.; decl. of the reflexive, LV. ; decl. of hic and 
ego, LXXVIII.; decl. of quis, quisquam, and quisque, XCI. 


VERBS. 


In general : the pers. ending, -t, V.; -nt, -ntur, and three classes 
of verbs from formation of pres. ind., VII.; iuf. ending -re, XIII. ; 
pers. ending, -tur, XIV.; pass. form, act. meaning, XVI.; the Lat. 
pf. often like a simple past, XIX.; the tense sign -re-, XXV.; 
deponent verbs, XXVII.; definition, translation, and sign of impf. 
ind., XXVIII. ; formation of pf. pass. partic., XXX. ; classification of 
verb by characteristic, XXX.; the gerund and its sign, XXX. ; past 
indefinite and pf. have one set of forms, XXXII.; the pf. ending . 
-érunt, XXXII.; past pf. and its sign, XXXIII.; the pass. iuf. | 
ending in all conjugations, XXXIX. ; the three stems and how to find 
them, endings of pf. ind. act., XL.; formation of tenses for completed 
action in pass., XLII.; the fut. pass. partic., XLIII.; plpf. ind. act. 
and dropping of ve (or vi) from pf. forms, XLV.; pf. pass. partic., 
XLVII.; fut. act. partie. and inf, XLVIIL; ‘Verb Diagram," 
suggestions and principal parts, L.; plpf. subjv. pass., LI.; pf. inf. 
pass., LIIL ; pres. subjv. in all conjugs, LVI.; lack of pf. act. | 
partie. except in deponents, LVII.; verbs having forms of different 


LESSON XCIV. 351 


| conjugs., LIX.; pres. act. partie, LX.; the ending -isse, LXV. 


plpf. subjv. act., LXVI. ; pers. endings -s and -re, tense signs, rom 
-6-, -eri-, list of tenses and the stem of each tense, LXIX. ; pers. 


endings -mus and -mur, LXX.; summary of verb forms PUT 


points of conjug. to be SB noted, LXXI.; pers. ending -é, 
LXXIII.; pers. ending -m, LXXV.; the pers. endings of the pass., 
LXXVI.; pers. endings act. and pass. LXXVIII.; endings of the 
pf. ind. act., LXXXVI. ; parties. of deponent verbs, LXXXVIIL. ; 
verbs pf. in form, pres. in sense, LXX XIX. ; verbs having the same 


form in 3d sing. pres. ind. act. and 3d sing. pf., XCII. 


1st conjug.: characteristic, XXX.; pf. pass. partic., XXXVIL. ; pf. 
stem, XLV. ; pres. subjv., LVI. | 

2d conjug.: characteristic, XXX.; pf. stem, XXXIII.; pf. pass. 
partic., XLIII.; pres. subjv., LII. 

3d conjug.: characteristic, the formation of the pres. ind. XXX. ; 
pf. pass. partic, XXXVII.; pass. inf., XXXIX. ; how to find pf. and 
supine stems, XL. ; pres. subjv., XLIX.; sign of the fut., LXXVIII. ; 
verbs in -io of 3d conjug., LXXIX. ; verbs having the same form in 
the 3d sing. pf. ind. act., as in the 3d sing. pres., XCII. 

4th conjug.: characteristic, XXXIX.; the pf. stem, XLI.; pf. 
pass. partic., XLVII.; pres. subjv., XLIX.; compared with 1st aud 
3d conjugs., XLIX. 

Irregular : forms of esse and posse, LVIII. ; stems of esse, LX. ; 


compounds of ire drop v of pf. stem, LXV.; the sign of the fut., 
 LXXVIII.; conjug. of ferre, LXXXII.; conjug. of ire, XCII. 


PARTICLES (;. e. advs., conjs., preps.). 


The adverbial ending -8, VII.; two uses of form cum, XII.; 
aut ... aut, XII.; two meanings of ad and of inter, XVII.; 
formation of advs. in -& and comparison of adverbs, XXV.; quam 
with the superlative, XXX. and LI.; meaning of ut, XLI.; position 
of cum, XLIII.; use of num, LXXV.; use of -que, LXXVI; 


formation of advs. from adjs. in is, LXXXIIT. ; comparison of advs. 
from adjs. in -er, LXXXVIII.; use and omission of conjunctions, 


XCI. 


308 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 


Formation of advs. in -&, XXV.; formation of advs. from adjs. in 
-is, LXXXIIL.; General Summary, XCIII. , 


SYNTAX. 
NOUNS. 


Agreement: of appositive, V.; of verb and subj, VIIL: of 
predicate noun, XXXIV. | 

Nom.: subj., II. ; an inanimate thing as subj. nom., XCI. 

"Accus. : obj. of verb or prep., II. ; after in and inter, IV. ; after 
ad, VII.: after in, XII.; subj. of an iuf, XIII.; of thing after 
persuádére, XXII. ; of extent of space, XXVIII. ; of time, XXXIII. ; 
domum, XLVI.; after compouud verbs, LXV.; quod as adverbial 
accus., LXXV.; two accus. with verbs of asking etc., LXXXI. 

Gen.: possessive and partitive, VI.; of quality, LV. ; with verbs 
of remembering etc., LXIX.; use of partitive gen. LXXIII.; adj. 
force of the gen., XC.; translation of gen. depends on context, 
XG, 

Dat.: like Eng. dative, VIII.; with persuadére, XX.; with 
compounds, XXV.; with imperáre and with verbs of giving aud 
saying, LI.: with studére, LVIII.; with adjs., LX. ; of possessor, 
LXIV.; with special verbs, LXXXIX. 

"bl. : the case name, and use with preps., V.; used with à or ab, 
VII.; with cum and dé, and abl. of respect, X.; prep. i» not 
always translated by the abl. of respect, XI.; abl. with in, XII.; of 
separation, XII.; of means, XIV.; of cause, XXV.; with ex and 
pro, XXVII.; four uses without a prep., XXXII.; time at which, 
XL.; preps. with, XLII.; with potiri and üt, and absolute, — 
XLIV.; with prep. to denote place i» which and from which, but 
dom6 without prep. XLVI.; 1ocó and locis, XLVII.: preps. 
with abl., LIT. ; usual adverbial force of abl., abls. of quality and 
agent, LIII.: component parts of abl. absolute const., LVIII.; abl. 
of manner, LXV.; of degree of difference, LXXIII. ; after compara- 
tives without quam, L XXXI. 


LESSON XCIV. 359 


ADJECTIVES. 


Agreement, VI.; the noun is often omitted, XXIV.; includes 
parties, even in verb combinations, XLII.; dat. with adjs., LX.; adj. 
use of plirases and clauses, LXX XIX.; alter and alius, XLVII. 


PRONOUNS. 


Agreement, VIII.; relative may be used as an adj., has forms for 
each gender, may be used in principal clauses, X.; distinction be- 
tween suus, and sé and between suus and sé, and eórum, XII.; 
is, ea, id used as a demonstrative and personal, XXII.; use of sé 
and suus, XX XII. ; use of hic and is, LXXVIII. 


VERBS. 


In general : agreement with subj., VIII.; verbs expressing state or 
condition rather than act, XXXI. ; act. form with pass. translation, 
XC.; an inanimate obj. may be a subj., XCI.; difference between 
Eng. and Lat. in teuse of principal clause indirectly quoted after 
past tense, XCII. 

Ind.: historical present, LXIIT. ; pf. after ubi, LXXXIII. ; change 
of a fut. pf. in indir. dise; LXXXV.; change of a fut. in indir. 
disc., LXXXIX. 

Subjv.: ut clause after persuadere, XXXIV.; subjv. of purpose 

with ut or né, XL.; substantive use of obj. purpose clause, XLIV. ; 
subjv. of result, XLVI.; relative purpose clauses, XLIX.; subjv. 
in subordinate clauses of indir. disc., LII.; with dum, LIV.; of pur- 
pose with qué and comparatives, LVI.; with cum, causal, LXIIIL. ; 
in a question indirectly quoted, LXV. ; with cum, temporal, LXVI. ; 
pf. in prohibitions, LXXI. ; with cum, although (i. e. concessive), 
LXXVIIL; with quin, LXXXV.; with né after verbs of fearing, 
IX CI. 
: Inf.: after verbs of saying or thinking, XXVII.: inf. a noun, 
XXXV.: the historical inf, LXXXT.; subj. must be expressed, 
LXXXVI.; difference between Eng. and Lat. in tense of principal 
clause quoted after past tense, XCII. 

Gerunds, Supines, and Partics.: gerund like Eng. verbal in -2zg, 
XXVI.; the partic. always an adj, XLIL; the translation of the 


360 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


fut. pass. partic., LILI.; use of supine in -um, LXIII.; use of abl. 
of means (or agent) with pf. pass. partic., LXIV.; the pf. pass. 
partic. with habére, LXXIX.; use of the pres. act. partic. and of 
parties. of deponent verbs, LXXXVIII. 


ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 


Position of à and of ab, V. ; quibuscum, VIII. ; position of verb, 
XI.; two or more objs. after one prep., XV.; position of monosyl- 
labic prep., XXIV.; force of last word, of every new word, position 
of obj., XXXIX. ; grouping of words, and placing of words between 
prep. aud its noun, XL. ; position of demonstrative and other adjs., 
XLII.; position of cum, prep., XLIII.; position of the adv., and 
of word most closely connected with preceding sentence, LVIII.; 
abl. of means (or agent) immediately before pf. pass. partic., LXIV. ; 
emphasis expressed by the first placé in a sentence, LXVIIL ; the 
relative clause before the antec., LXXVII.; position of adj. phrases 
and clauses, LXXXIX.; position of the indefinite quis, XCI. ; 
position of quoted clauses, and of purpose and result clauses, XCII. 


TRANSLATION. 


Two or more words of translation. for one word of Lat., II.; 
translation of ending -rum, and of Galli and Gallia, III.; Lat. 
ending = Eng. prep., IV. and XIV. ; no article in Lat., VI.; of not 
always trans. by gen., X.; i4 does not always indicate abl. of respect, | 
XI.; trans. of i with accus. and with abl, XIJ.; aut... aut, | 
XII.; Lat. words not always trans. by Eng. derivatives, XIII. ; two 
translations of ad and of inter, XVII.; the Lat. pf. often trans. like a 
simple past, XIX.; trans. of cum, XXI.; very a trans. of superlative, 
a masc. or fem. pron. may be trans. which, XXIII.; that = ut, 
is or ,XXV.; Lat. verbal like Eng. noun in -ing, XXVI. ; trans. - 
of an inf. clause after verb of saying or thinking, XXVII., XXV. ; 
preps. denoting motion £o or /rom. trans. by preps. denoting res/, 
XXVIII.; verbs expressing state or condition rather than act, 


XXXI.; trans. of four kinds of abls., XXXII.; trans. of ut with 


LESSON XCIV. 961 


ind. and with subjv., XLI.; trans. of alter and alius, XLVII.; 
trans. of dicere and variation of trans. with context, XLIX.; ellipsis 
in use of quam with the superlative, LI. ; the Lat. for £o inform, for 
of iu sense of concerning, for to intend, LII.; the trans. of fut. 
pass. partic., LIII.; trans. of abl. absolute, LXI.; the trans. foo 
‘for a comparative, LXXIX. ; different ways of expressing necessity 
or obligation, LXXXIII.; different ways of expressing purpose, 
LXXXIX.; pass. trans. of the act. accedere, LXXXIX.; trans. of 
an obj. purpose clause, XCI. N. 7; trans. of gen. depends on the 
context, XCI.; cum trans. while, XCII. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


Roman reckoning for dates, XLIX.; different ways of expressing 
necessity or obligation, LXXXIII.; different ways of expressing 
purpose, XC. 


ROMAN SCUTUM, shield. 


For method of carrying it, cf. pp. 238 and 269. For Gallic shields, 
cf. pp. 228 and 364. 


y 


if YooouoW . 
YJ sy[no19 HH. 81146, 


? 


o 
unus[ptpemA 


Var SHUDPOY 


e 


FOG 


Pe, 
= 


Shoal 


X E. 
apr 
o 


ET UP, e, 


N 


S321IW 40 31v0S 


VITIVY 


362 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. 


B. G. I. 1-29. 


Notes. — Every word upon its first occurrence is printed in full-faced type, 
later in. ordinary type. The student can, therefore, by a glance at the page, see 
what words are new and what he has met already in his reading. 

The numbers in parentheses indicate the Lessons in which the text is treated. 


The divisions of Gaul. 


1. (1) Gallia est omnis divisa in partés trés, (2) quàrum 
ünam incolunt Belgae, aliam Aquitàni, (3) tertiam, qui ipsorum 
lingua Celtae, nostra Galli appellantur. (4) Hi omnés lingua, 
Institütis, légibus, inter sé differunt. (5) Gallos ab Aquitanis 
Garumna flümen, à Belgis Matrona et Séquana dividit. (6) Ho- 
rum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, proptereà quod à cultü atque 
himdanitate provinciae longissimé absunt, (1) miniméque ad 
eos mercátorés saepe commeant atque ea, quae ad efféminandós 
animos pertinent, important, (8) proximique sunt Germànis, qui 
trans Rhénum incolunt, quibuscum continenter bellum gerunt. 
(10) Quà dé causa Helvétii quoque reliquos Gallos virtüte prae- 
cédunt, (11) quod feré cotidianis proeliis cum Germanis conten- 
dunt, (12) cum aut suis finibus eos prohibent, aut ipsi in eorum 
finibus bellum gerunt. (13) Edrum üna pars, quam Gallos obtinére 
dictum est, initium capit à flimine Rhodano ; (14) continétur 
Garumnà flimine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum ; (15) attingit etiam 
ab S&quanis et Helvetiis flimen Rhénum ; vergit ad septentriones. 
(16) Belgae ab extrémis Galliae finibus oriuntur; pertinent ad in- 
feridrem partem flüminis Rhéni; spectant in septentrionem et ori- 


bm 


5 


entem solem. (17) Aquitània à Garumna flümine ad P¥rénaeds 20 


montés et ad eam partem Oceani quae est ad Hispaniam pertinet ; 
spectat inter occásum solis et septentriones. 


964 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


Orgetoriz, an Helvetiau noble, forms a plot to seize the government in 
Gaul. The warlike Helvetians prepare to leave their narrow 
boundaries in a body. | 


2. (19) Apud Helvetios longé nobilissimus et ditissimus fuit 
Orgetorix. Is, M. Messala et M. Pisone consulibus, régni 
cupiditate inductus conitizationem nobilita- 
tis fécit, (20) et civitati persuasit, ut dé 

sfinibus suis cum omnibus copiis exirent: 
(21) perfacile esse, cum  virtüte omnibus 
praestarent, totius (Galliae imperio potiri. 
(22) Id hoc facilius eis persuasit, quod undique 
loci nàtüra Helvetii continentur: (23) una 
i0 ex parte flümine Rheno, látissimo atque altis- 
simo, qui agrum Helvétinm à Germanis 
dividit; (24) alterà ex parte monte Iürà 
altissimo, qui est inter Séquands et Helvetios ; 
tertià lacüà Lemanno et flümine Rhodano, qui 


15 provinciam nostram ab Helvetiis dividit. (25) His 
rébus. fiebat, uf et minus làte vagarentur, gazpric rOOT-SOLDIER. 


et minus facile finitimis bellum Inferre pos- cr the Roman soldier, 


p. 238. Which is better 
armed? Cf. also the Gale 


cupidi magn6 dolore afficiébantur. (27) Pro lic horseman, p. 321; 


sent; (26) qua ex parte hominés bellandi 


20 multitüdine autem hominum et pro gléria belli atque fortitüdinis 
angustos sé finis habére arbitrabantur, (28) qui in longitüdinem 
milia passuum ducenta et quadrazinta, in latitidinem centum 
et octoginta patebant. 

3. (30) His rébus adducti et auctoritate Orgetorigis permoti 
25cónstituérunt ea, quae ad proficiscendum pertinerent, comparare, 
iümentorum et carrorum quam maximum numerum coémere, 
(31) s&mentés quam maximas facere, ut in itinere cópia frümenti 
suppeteret, cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam cón- 
firmáre. (32) Ad eàs rés cónficiendàs biennium sibi satis esse 
3odüxérunt: in tertium annum profectionem lége confirmant. Ad 
eas rés cdnficiendis Orgetorix déligitur. Is sibi légationem ad 


civitatés suscépit. (33) Iu eo itinere persuadet Castico, Cata- 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. 365 


mantaloedis filio, Séquand, cüius pater regnum in Séquanis 
multos annos obtinuerat et à senátü populi Rómàni amicus 
appellatus erat, ut réguum in civitate suà occupáret, quod pater 
ante habuerat; (34) itemque Dumnorigi Haeduo, fratri Divi- 
tiacl, qui eo tempore principatum in civitate obtinebat ae 
maxime plébi acceptus erat, ut idem conaretur, persuadet 
eique filiam suam in mátrimonium dat. (35) Perfacile factü 
esse illis probat cónàta perficere, propterea quod ipse suae civitatis 
imperium obtentiirus esset; (36) nón esse dubium, quin totius 
Galliae plürimum Helvetii possent; sé suis copiis suoque exercitü 
ilis régna conciliatürum coufirmat. (37) Hac oratione adducti 
inter sé fidem et iüsiürandum dant ct, regno occupàato, per tres 
potentissimós àc firmissimós populos totius Galliae sésé potiri 
posse sperant. 


The plot of Orgetorix discovered ; his sudden death. 


4. (39) Ea rés est Helvétiis per indicium &nüntiata. Moribus 
suis Orgetorigem ex vinculis causam dicere coégérunt. Dam- 
nátum poenam sequi oportébat, ut igni cremarétur. (40) Die 
coustitüta causae 'dictionis Orgetorix ad iüdicium omnem suam 
familiam, ad hominum milia decem, undique coegit et omnés 
clientés obaerátósque suds, quorum magnum numerum habebat, 
eodem  condüxit: per eos, né causam diceret, se eripuit. 
(41) Cum civitàs ob eam rem incitáta armis iüs suum exsequi 
conaretur multitüdinemque hominum ex agris magistrátüs cogerent, 
Orgetorix mortuus est; neque abest suspicio, ut Helvétii arbi- 
trantur, quin ipse sibi mortem consciverit. 


The Helvetians continue their preparations ; they gain allies. 


.9. (42) Post eius mortem nihiló minus Helvétii id, quod con- 
stituerant, facere conantur, ut & finibus suis exeant. Ubi iam sé 
ad eam rem paratés esse arbitrati sunt, oppida sua omnia, numero 
ad duodecim, vicés ad quadringentos, reliqua privata aedificia 


25 


incendunt, (43) frümentum omne, praeterquam quod sécum 3o 


portátüri erant, combürunt, ut, domum reditionis spé sublata, 


366 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


paratidyés ad omnia pericula subeunda essent, trium ménsium 
molita cibária sibi quemque domo efferre iubent. (44) Per- 
suadent Rauricis et Tulingis et Latovicis finitimis, uti eodem 
üsi consilio, oppidis suis vicisque exüstis, ina cum iis proficis- 
Scantur, (43) Boiosque, qui tràus Rhénum incoluerant et iu agrum 
Noricum transierant Noréiamque oppügnàrant, receptos ad se 
socios sibi adsciscunt. 


The Helvetians plan to cross the Roman Province. Caesar suddenly 
appears and keeps them out. 


6. (46) Erant omnino itinera duo, quibus itineribus domo exire 
possent: ünum per Séquands, angustum et difficile, inter montem 
io lüram et flümen Rhodanum, vix quà singuli carri dücerentur; 
mons autem altissimus impendébat, ut facile perpauci prohibere 
possent; (47) alterum per proviuciam nostram, multo faciliug 
atque expeditius, proptereà quod inter fines Helvetiorum et 
Allobrogum, qui nüper pàácati erant, Rhodanus fluit isque 
r;nónnüllis locis vadó trausitur. Extrémum oppidum Allobrogum 
est proximumque Helvetiorum finibus Genava. Ex eo oppidc 
pons ad Helvetios pertinet. (48) Allobrogibus s6s3 vel persuasti:ds, 
quod nóndum bonó animo in populum Ronàaum vidérentur, 
existimabant, vel vi coáüctüros, ut per suos finés eds ire 
2o paterentur. (49) Omnibus rébus ad profectionem comparatis, 
diem dicunt, quà dié ad ripam Rhodani omnés conveniant. Is 
diés erat ante diem quintum Kalendàs Aprilés, L. Pisone, A. 
Gabinio consulibus. 
@ (51) Caesari cum id nüntiatum esset, eds per provinciam 
25nostram iter facere cOnari, mátürat ab urbe proficisci et quam 
maximis potest itineribus in Galliam ulteriorem contendit et ad 
Genavam pervenit. Provinciae toti quam maximum potest militum 
numerum imperat (erat omnino in Gallia ulteriore legio ina), 
pontem, qui erat ad Genàvam, iubet rescindi. (52) Ubi de eius 
3oadventü Helvetii certiores facti sunt, légátós ad eum mittunt 
nobilissimos civitatis, cüius legationis Namméius et Verucloetius 
principem locum obtinébant, qui dicerent sibi esse in animo sine 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. 367 


ülló maleficio iter per provinciam facere, proptereà quod aliud 
iter haberent nüllum: rogàre, ut eius voluntàte id sibi facere 
liceat. (53) Caesar, quod memoria tenebat L. Cassium cón- 
sulem occisum exercitumque Gius ab Helvetiis pulsum et sub 
iugum missum, concédendum nói putabet, neque hominés 5 
inimico auimó, data facultate per próviuciam itineris faciundi, 
temperatirés ab iniüria et maleficio existimabat. (54) Tamen, 
ut spatium intercédere posset, dum wilités, quos imperaverat, 
|convenireut, legatis respondit diem sé ad déiberandum sümp- 
türum: si quid vellent, ail Idüs Apriés reverterentur. IO 
0. (55) Interea ea legione, quam secum habébat, militibusque, 
qui ex provincia convenerant, à lacü Lemanno, qui in flümen 
Rhodanum influit, ad montem Iüram, qui finés Sequanorum ab 
Helvetiis dividit, milia passuum decem novem mürum in altitü- 
dinem pedum sédecim fossamque perdücit. (56) Eo operers 
perfecto, praesidia disponit, castella commoünit, quo facilius, «i, 
sé invito, trànsire conarentur, prohibére possit. Ubi ea dies, quam 
constituerat cum légatis, vénit, et l&vati ad eum reverterunt, negat 
sé more et exemplo populi Romani posse iter ülli per provinciam 
dare, et, si vim facere cOuentur, prohibitürum ostendit. (57) Hel-20 
vétli, ea spé déiecti, navibus iunctis ratibusque complüribus 
factis, alii vadis Rhodani quà minima altitüdo fluminis erat, 
nonnumquam interdiü, saepius noctü, si perrumpere possent, 
conàti, operis münitione et militum concurzü ct télis repulsi, 
hoc cónátü déstitérunt. 25 


The Helvetians obtain permission to go out by the only remaining 
way, — that through the country of the Sequaniaus. 


9. (58) Relinquébàtur tina per Séquands via, qua, Séquanis 
invitis, propter angustiàs ire non poterant. His eum suà sponte 
persuadére nón possent, légatés ad Dumnorigem Haeduum mittunt, 
ut,eó déprecátóre, à Sequanis impetrarent. Dumnorix gratia et 
largitione apud Séquands plürimum poterat et Helvétiis erat amicus, 
quod ex eà civitate Orgetorigis filiam in mátrino.ium düxerat, et 
eupiditate regni adduetus novis rébus stud&bat et quam plürimàs 


[99] 
o 


568 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


civitatés sud beneficio habére obstrictas volebat. (59) Itaque 
rem suscipit et à Séquanis impetrat, ut per fiues suds Helvetios 
ire patiantur, obsidésque uti iuter sésé dent, perficit: Sequani, né 
itinere Helvetios prohibeaut; Helvétit ut sine maleficio et iniurià 
5 trauseant. 


Caesar again objects, and quickly brings up his legions. 


10. Caesari renüntiátur Helvétiis esse in animó per agrum 
Sequanorum et Haeduorum iter in Santonum fiues facere, qui non 
longé à Tolésatium finibus absuut, quae civitas est iu provincia. 
(60) Id si fieret, intellegebat màegno cum periculo provinciae 

rofutürum, ut hominés bellic6sds, populi Romani inimicos, locis 
patentibus maximeque frümentariis finitimds habéret. Ob eas 
causas ei münitionl quam fecerat, T. Labiénum légàatum prae- 
fécit; ipse in Italiam magnis itineribus contendit duàsque ibi. 
legidnés cónscribit et trés, quae circum Aquiléiam hiemàbant, 

15ex hibernis édücit et, qua proximum iter in ulteriorem Galliam 
per Alpes erat, cum his quinque legiduibus ire contendit. (61) Ibi 
Centronés et Gráioceli et Caturigés, locis superioribus occupatis, 
itinere exercitum  prohibére conantur.  Complüribus his proeliis 
pulsis, ab Oceló, quod est citerioris provinclae extrémum, in fines 

20 Vocontiórum ulterioris provinciae dié septimo pervenit; inde in 
Allobrogum fines, ab Allobrogibus in Segusiavés exercitum ducit. 
Hi sunt extra provinciam trans Rhodanum primi. 


Caesar aroused by the entreaties of Roman allies, whose fields are 
being ravaged, at once attacks and defeats a fourth part of the 
Helvetiaus. | | 

1l. (63) Helvetü iam per angustias et fines Sequanorum suis 
cOpias trádüxsrant et in Haedudrum finés pervenerant eorumque 
25agros populabantur. Haedui cum sé suaque ab iis défendere 
non possent, légatds ad Caesarem mittunt rogatum auxilium: ita 
sé omni tempore dé populo Romaind meritos esse, ut paene in 
cónspectü exercitüs nostri agri vastári, liberi eórum in servi- 
tütem abdiici, oppida expiignari nón debuerint. (64) Eodem 
3otempore Hiedui Ambarri, necessárii et cOnsanguin2t Haeduorum, 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. 369 


Caesarem certiorem faciunt sésé, dépopulatis aeris, non facile ab 
oppidis vim hostium prohibere. Item Allobroges, qui trans 
Rhodanum vicos possessiénésque habébant, fuga sé ad Caesarem 
reciplunt et dém6nstrant sibi praeter agri solum nihil esse 
reliqui." Quibus rébus adductus Caesar nón exspectandum sibi 
statuit, dum, omnibus fortünis sociorum cónsümptis, in Santonds 
Helvetii pervenirent. 

19. (65) Flümen est Arar, quod per finés Haeduorum et 
Sequanorum in Rhodanum influit incrédibili lenitate, ita ut 


Es z 
WW, 
RS JA ES 
E 
& cos 

PIU D. 


> 


WIL, 


MES < 
> zn m; 
TA e 


> 
e. 
e 
b ud 


EJ 
S," 
s 


, 


HELVETIANS Amberieu 
nap.12 


l A 
CEA 


2 VLugdunüm 
(Lyons) 


SEAT OF THE HELVETIAN WAR. 


oculis, in utram partem fluat, iüdicári non possit. Id Helxétii 
ratibus àe lintribus iunctis transibant. Ubi per exploratores 
Caesar certior factus est, trés iam copiarum partes Helvétios id 
flümen tràdlüxisse, quartam feré partem citra flümen Ararim 
reliquam esse, dé tertia vigilia cum legionibus tribus 6 castris 
profectus ad eam partem pervenit, quae nondum flümen transierat. 
(66) Eds impeditos et inopinantés aggressus magnam eorum 
partem concidit: reliqui fugae sés? mandarunt atque in proximas 
silvas abdidérunt. Is pázus appellabatur Tigurinus ; nam omnis 
24 


15 


370 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


civitàs Helvétia in quattuor pàgos divisa est. Hic pagus ünus, 
cum domo exisset patrum nostrorum memoria, L. Cassium consulem 
interfecerat et eius exercitum sub iugum miserat. (67) Ita sive 
casi sive consilio deorum immortalium, quae pars civitatis 
5 Helvétiae insignem calamitatem populo Romano intulerat, ea 
princeps poenas persolvit. Qua in ré Caesar nón solum püblicas, 


sed etiam privatis inifirias ultus est, quod eius soceri L. Pisonis 
avum, L. Pisonem légatum, Tigurini eodem proelio, quo Cassium, | 


interfécerant. 


The Heloetiaus proudly ask for peace, but refuse to accept the terms of - 
Caesar. 


10 613. (68) Hoc proelio facto, reliquas copias Helvetiorum ut cdn- 
sequi posset, pontem iu Arar» faciundum cürat atque ita exercitum 
tradücit. Helvetii repentino eius adventü commoti cum id, quod 
ipsi diébus viginti aegerrime confécerant, ut flumen transirent, illum 
üno dié fecisse intellegerent, légatds ad eum mittunt; cüius legationis 

I5Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiánoó dux Helvétiorum fuerat. 
(69)? Is ita cum Caesare égit: “Sr pacem populus Romanus cum 


1 It will be noted at this point that the difficult indirect discourse of Chaps. 
13 and 14 has been chauzed to the direct form. ‘This alone is to be studied by 
the pupil. The indirect discourse as it appears in Caesar is added for the con- 
venience of the teacher. 

Is ita cum Caesire egit; si pàzem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis faceret, in 
eam partem ituros atque ibi futuros Helvetios, ubi eos Caesar constituisset atque 
esse voluisset ; sin bello persequi perseveraret, reminiscerétur et veteris incommodi 
popuh Romani, et pristinae virtutis Helvetiorum. Quod impróovis? ünum pagum. 
adortus esset, cum ii, qui flumen transissent, suis auxilium ferre nón possent, ne ob 
eam rem aut suae magnopere virtuti tribueret, aut ipsos despiceret. Se ita a 
patribus maioribusque suis didicisse, ut magis virtüte quam doló contenderent 
aut insidiis niterentur. Quare ne committeret, ut is locus, ubi constitissent, ex 
calamitate populi Romani et internecione exercitüs nomen caperet, aut memoriam 
proderet. 

14. His Caesar ita respondit: ed sibi minus dubitationis dari, quod eas res, 
quas legati Helvetii commemorassent, memoria teneret, atque eo gravius ferre, quo 
minus merito populi Romani accidissent: qui si alicuius iniüriae sibi conscius 
fuisset, non fuisse difficile cavere; sed ed déceptum, quod neque commissum a sé 
intelligeret quare timeret, neque sine causa timendum putaret. Quod si veteris 
contumeliae oblivisci vell-t, num etiam recentium iniüriarum, quod, ed invito, iter 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. 911 


Helvetiis faciet, in eam partem ibunt atque ibi erunt Helvétii, ubi 
eds costitueris atque esse volueris; sin bello persequi persevérübis, 
reminiscere et veteris incommodi populi Romani, ét pristinae 
virtütis Helvetiorum. (70) Quod improviso inum paguin adortus 
es, cum i, qui flumen transierant, suis auxilium ferre nón possent, 
ne ob eam rem aut tuae magnopere virtüti tribueris, aut nos dé- 
spexeris. Nos ita à patribus maioribusque nostris didicimus, 
ut magis virttite quam dolo contendaàmus aut insidiis nitamur. 
(71) Quaré né commiseris, ut is locus, ubi cónstiterimus, ex 
calamitate populi Romani et internecióne exercitus nómen capiat, 
aut memoriam pródat." 

14. (73) His Caesar ita respoudit : * Eo mihi minus dubita- 
tionis datur, quod eas rés, quàs commemoraàvistis, memoria teneo, 
atque eo gravius fero, quo minus meritó populi Romini accidérunt : 
(74) qui si alicüius iniuriae sibi conscius fuisset, non fuit difficile 
cavére; sed eo déceptus est, quod neque commissum à sé intelle- 
eébat, quaré timéret, neque sine causi timendum putabat. (75) 
Quod si veteris contuméliae oblivisci vo!d, num etiam recentium 
iniuriarum, quod, mé invito, iter per provinciam per vim tempta- 
vistis, quod Haeduos, quod Ambarros, quod Allobrogas vexavistis, 
memoriam dépónere possum? (76) Quod vestra victorià tam 
Insolenter glériamini quodque tam diü vós impüne iniürias tu- 
lisse admiramini, eodem pertinet. (77) Consuévérunt enim di 
immortales, quo gravius homines ex commütatione rérum doleant, 
quós pro scelere eorum ulcisci volunt, his secundiores interdum 
rés et diüturniorem impünitátem concédere. (78) Cum haec ita 


per provinciam per vim temptassent, quod Haeduos, quod Ambarr:s, quod Allo- 
brogas vexassent, memoriam dépónere posse? Quod sua victcria tam insolenter 
glóriarentur quodque tam diü sé impine iniürias tulisse admirarentur, eodem 
pertinere. Cónsuésse enim deos immortales, quo gravius homines ex commuta- 
tione rérum doleant, quis pro scelere eorum ulcisci velint, his secundiores inter- 
dum rés et diüturniorem impünitàtem concédere. Cum ea ita sint, tameu si 
obsides ab iis sibi dentur, uti ea quae polliceantur factüros intellegat, et si Haeduis 
dé iniüriis quàs ipsis sociisque eórum intulerint, item si Allobrogibus satisfaciant, 
sésé cum iis pacem esse factürum. Divicd respondit: ita Helvetios a maioribus 
snis Institütos esse, utl obsides accipere, nón dare, consuérint; eius rei populum 
Ro:nanum esse testem. — Hoc respónsó dato, discessit. 


Las] 


S 


372 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


sint, tamen, st obsidés à vobis mihi dabuntur, ut ea quae pollicémini 
factüros iutelleram, et si Haeduis dé iniüriis quàs ipsis sociisque 
eorum intulistis, item si Allobrogibus satisfaciétis, ego vobiscum 
picem faciam." —Divicó respondit: “ Ita Helvetii à maioribus suis 
$institüti sunt, uti obsides accipere, non dare, cOnsuérint ; eius rei 
populus Romanus est testis." Hoe responso dato, discessit. 


Caesar continues to pursue the Helvetians, who are elated by a success- 
Jul skirmish. 

15. (79) Postero die castra ex eo locd movent. Idem facit 
Caesar equitatumque omnem, ad numerum quattuor milium, quein 
ex omni provincia et Haeduis atque corum socis coactum habébat, 

I0 praemittit, qui videant quas iu partes hostés iter faciant. Qui 
cupidius novissimum agmen insecüti aliénd loco cum equitatü 
Helvetiorum proelium committunt; et pauci dé nostris cadunt. 
(80) Quo proelio sublàti Helvetii, quod quingentis equitibus 
tantam multitülinem equitum pr6pulerant, audacius subsistere 


I5nonuumquam et novisslinó agmine proelio nostros lacessere coe- 
pérunt. Caesar suds à proelio continebat ac satis habebat in 
praesentia hostem rapinis, páabulátionibus populàationibusque 
prohibere. (81) Ita dies circiter quindecim iter fecerunt, uti 
iuter novissimum hostium agmen et nostrum primum nón amplius 


20 quinis aut sénis milibus passuum interesset. 


The Haeduans fail to furnish supplies ; Liscus tells why. 


16. Interim cotidie Caesar Haeduos frümentum, quod essent 
püblicé polliciti, flagitáre. (32) Nam propter frigora, quod Gallia 
sub septentrionibus, ut ante dictum est, posita est, nón modo 
frümenta in agris mátüra nón erant, sed né pábuli quidem satis 

25magni copia suppetébat: ed autem frümento, quod flümine Arare 
navibus subvéxerat, proptereà minus üti poterat, quod iter ab Arare 
Helvetii averterant, à quibus discedere nól&bat. Diem ex dié 
ducere Haedui: cónferri, comportari, adesse dicere. (83) Ubi 
sé diütius duci intellexit et diem instare, quo dié frümentum 
30 militibus métiri oporteret, convocátis eorum principibus, quorum 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. 313 


o 


magnam copiam in castris habebat, — in his Divitiacd et Liscó, qui 
summo magistratul praeerat, quem vergobretum appellant Haedui, 
qui creatur annuus et vitae necisque in suds habet potestatem, — 
graviter eOs accüsat, quod, cum néque emi neque ex agris sumi 
posset, tam necessario tempore, tam propinquis hostibus, ab iis non 
sublevétur ; praesertim cum magna ex parte eorum precibus 
adductus bellum suscéperit, multo etiam gravius, quod sit désti- 
tütus, queritur. 

17. (84) Tam démum Liscus orátione Caesaris adductus, quod 
anteá tacuerat, proponit: esse nonnullos, quorum auctoritàs apud 
plébein plürimum valeat, qui privatim plüs possint, quam ipsi 
magistratüs. (85) Hos séditiosa atque improba orátione mul- 
titidinem déterrére, né frümentum conferant, quod praestare 
débeaut: si iam priacipatum Galliae obtinere non possint, Gallorum 
quam Romanorum imperi) praeferre, neque dubitàre quin, si 
'Helvetios superáverint Romani, tna cum reliqua. Gallia Haeduis 
‘Tibertatem siut ereptüri. (86) Ab eisdem nostra consilia quaeque 
in castris gerantur hostibus enüntiàri: hos à sé coércéri nón posse: 
quin etiam, quod necessàriam rem coactus Caesari éntintiarit, 
intellegere sésé, quantó id cum periculo fecerit, et ob eam causam, 
quam diü potuerit, tacuisse. 


Dumnorix, the Haeduan noble; his influence aud his hate of the Romans. 


18. (88) Caesar hac dratidne Lisct Dumnorigem, Divitiact fra- 
trem, désignári sentiébat, sed, quod, pluribus praesentibus, eas 
b. iactari nolébat, celeriter concilium dimittit, Liscum retinet. 
Quaerit ex sóló ea, quae in conventü dixerat. Dicit liberius 
aique audacius. Eadem s8crétó ab aliis quaerit; reperit esse 
véra: ipsum esse Dumnorigem, summa audacia, magna apud 
plébem propter liberalitatem gratia, cupidum rérum novarum. 
Complüris annos portória reliquaque omnia Haeduorum vectigalia 
parvó pretio redempta habére, proptereà quod, illo licente, contra 
licàri audeat námo. (89) His rébus et suam rem familiarem 
auxisse et facultatés ad largiendum maznas comparasse ; magnum 
numerum equitütüs sud sümptü semper alere et circum sé habere, 
neque solum domi, sed etiam apud finitimàs civitates largiter posse, 


Oo 


t3 
o 


30 


914 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


atque hüius potentiae causà matrem in Biturigibus homini illi 
nobilissimo ac potentissimo collocasse, ipsum ex Helvetiis uxóren 
habere, sorórem ex matre et propiuquás suas nüptum in alia 
civitatés collocisse. Favére et cupere Helvétiis propter ean 
Saffinitatem, óOdisse etiam sud nomine Caesarem et Romanos 
quod eorum adventü potentia eius déminüta et Divitiacus frater ir 
antiquum locum gratiae atque honoris sit restitütus. Sj quic 
accidat ROmanis, summam in spem per Helvetios régni obtinend: 
veurre; imperio populi Romani nón modo dé reguo, sed etiam dé 
toca quam habeat eratià, d&sparare. (90) Reperiébat etiam in quae 
rendo Caesar, quod proelium equestre adversum paucis ante diebus 
esset, factum, initium eius fugae factum à Dumnorige atque eius equi: 
tibus (nam equiiatui, quem auxilio Caesari Haedui iniserant, Dumno: 
rix praeerat) : eorum fuga reliquum esse equitatum perterritum. 


Caesar spares Duinnorix out of friendship for his brother Divitiacus. 
Dumnorix is reprimanded and watched. 


15-419 Quibus rébus cognitis, cum ad has suspicionés certissimae 
rés accéderent, quod per finés Sequanorum Helvetios tracdüxisset, 
quod obsides inter eds dandos curasset, quod ea omnia non modo 
iniüssü sud et civititis, sed etiam inscientibus ipsis fécisset, 
quod à magistrati Haeduorum accüsarétur, satis esse causae 

2oarbitrabatur, quàr& in eum aut ipse animadverteret, aut civitatem 
animadvertere iuberet. (91) His omnibus rébus ünum repügnàá- 
bat, qnod Divitiaci fratris summum in populum Romanum studium, 
summam in sé voluntatem, égregiam fidem, iüstitiam, tempe- 
rantiam cognoverat: nam, mà &Gius supplicio Divitiacl animum 

25 Offenderet, ver&bàtur. Itaque priusquam quicquam conaretur, 
Divitiacum ad sé vocari iubet et, cotidiànis interpretibus remótis, 
per C. Valerium Procillum, principem Galliae provinciae, familiarem 
suum, cul summam omnium rérum fidem habébat, cum ed collo- 
quitur: simul commonefacit, quae, ipsd praesente, in concilid 

3o Gallorum dé Dumnorige sint dicta, et ostendit, quae séparatim 
quisque dé ed apud sé dixerit. Petit atque hortatur, ut sine Gius 
offénsióne animi vel ipse dé eo, causa cdgnita, statuat, vel civitatem 
statuere iubeat. 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. OO 


20. Divitiacus multis cum lacrimis Caesarem complexus ob- 
secrare coepit, ne quid gravius in fratrem statueret: scire sé illa 
esse véra, nec quemquam ex có plüs quam sé doloris capere, propterea 
quod, cum ipse gratia plürimun domi atque in reliqua Gallia, 

5ille minimum propter adulescentiam posset, per se crévisset ; 
| (92) quibus opibus à: nervis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, 
sed paene ad perniciem suam iiterétur. Sésé tamen et amore 
fraterno et existimatione vulgi coinmovéri. Quod si quid ei à 
Caesare gravius accidisset, cum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud eum 
fotenéret, neminem existimatürum nón sua voluntate factum ; quà ex 
| ré futürum, uti totius Galliae animi à sé Averterentur. — Haec 
cum pluribus verbis fléns à Caesare peteret, Caesar Gius dextram 
prendit; consolatus rogat, finem Orandi faciat; tanti eius apud 


| sé gratiain esse ostendit, uti et reipüblicae iniüriam et suum 


t5dolorem eius voluntati ac precibus condénet. Dumnorigem ad sé 
vocat, fratrem adhibet ; quae in eo reprehendat, ostendit, quae ipse 
intellegat, quae civitas queratur, proponit; monet, ut in reliquum 
tempus omnes susplcionés vitet: praeterita sé Divitiaco fratri 
| conddnare dieit. Dumnorigi custódés ponit, ut, quae agat, quibus- 
?o cum loquatur, scire possit. ! 


Caesar plans to attack the enemy in front and rear; his plan is 
defeated by the mistake of Considius. 


21. Eodem die ab exploratoribus certior factus hostes sub monte 
cónsédisse milia passuum ab ipsius castris octo, qualis esset natüra 
montis et qualis in circuitü ascensus, qui cognoscerent, misit. 
Renüntiatum est, facilem esse. Dé tertia vigilia Titum Labienum, 

25légatum pro praetoro, cum duabus legionibus et iis ducibus, qui 
iter cognoverant, summum iugum montis ascendere iubet; quid sui 
cousilil sit, ostendit. Ipse dé quarta vigilia eodem itinere, quo 
hostés ierant, ad eds contendit equitàtumque omnem ante sé mittit. 
P. Considius, qui rei militaris peritissimus habebatur et in 

joexerciti L. Sullae et posteà in M. Crassi fuerat, cum explórà- 
toribus praemittitur. 


1 The Lessons end at this point. Notes on the following Chapters will be 
found in Appendix B, and all new words in the General Vocabulary. 


\ 


316 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


22. Prima lüce, cum summus mons à T. Labieno tenérétur, ipse 
ab hostium castris nón longius mille et quingentis passibus abesset,| 
neque, ut poste’ ex captivis comperit, aut ipsius adventus aut. 
Labiéni cognitus esset, Considius, equó admisso, ad eum accurrit, 

5dicit montem, quem à Labiéuo occupari voluerit, ab hostibus tenen: 
id 8 à Gallicis armis atque insignibus cognovisse. Caesar iai 


copiàs in proximum collem subdücit, aciem instruit.  Labiénus,| 
2 : ; ae | 
ut erat ei praeceptum à Caesare, né proelium comunitteret, nisi 


ipsius cópiae prope hostium castra visae essent, ut undique tnd 
Io tempore in hostés impetus fieret, monte occupato, nostros exspecta- 

bat proelioque abstinébat. Multo dénique dié per exploratores 

Caesar cognovit et montem à suis teneri et Helvetios castra movisse 

et Considium timore perterritum, quod non vidisset, pro viso sibi 

renüntiàsse. E6 die quo cónsuérat intervallo hostes sequitur et 
15 milia passuum tria ab eorum castris castra ponit. 


The Romans, having turned aside to go to Bibracte, are followed by the | 
Helvetians. 


23. Postridie eius diei, quod omnino biduum supererat, cum 
exercitul frümentum metiri oporteret, et quod a Bibracte, oppido 
Haeduórum longé maximo et cópiósissimo, non amplius milibus 
passuum octodecim aberat, rei frimentariae préspiciendum existi- 

20màvit: iter ab Helvetiis avertit ac Bibracte ire contendit. Ea res 
per fugitivos LL. Aemilii, decuriónis equitum Gallorum, hostibus | 
nüntiatur. Helvetii, seu quod timore perterritos Romanos. disce- 
dere à sé existimarent, eo magis, quod pridié, superioribus locis 
occupatis, proelium non commisissent, sive eO, quod ré frümentarià 
25interclüdi posse cónfiderent, commütàtoó consilio atque itinere 
converso, nostros à novissimó agmine insequi ac lacessere coeperunt. 


A pitched battle is fought; the Helvetians are utterly defeated after a 
desperate struggle. 


24. Postquam id animum advertit, cópiàs suas Caesar in 
proximum collem subdücit equitatumque, qui sustinéret hostium 
impetum, misit. Ipse interim in colle medio triplicem | aciem 

3oiustrüxit legionum quattuor veteranarum [ita uti supra]; sed in 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. OTT 
sumind iugo duàs legiones, quàs in Gallia citeriore proximé cón- 
scripserat, et omnia auxilia collocavit ac totum moutem hominibus 
complévit; intereà sarcinas in ünum locum conferri et eum ab 
his, qui in superiore acié cOustiterant, müniri iissit. Helvétii cum 
omnibus suis carris secüti impedimenta in ünum Jocum contulérunt ; 
ipsi confertissimà acié, réiectó nostro equitati, phalange facta, 
sub prinam nostram aciem successérunt. 


TTT 
7/44 WV 


HELVETIORUM CLADES, 
CAESAR BELL. GALL. I, 23--29. 
anctore Alb. v. Kampen. 


500 1000 
PASSUS 


We 
SN 


7N SE 
xo 
YS o 


27 


SS Bore’ 1 
PRO 
NGA 
SU, 


a 


= 
Ceteram 


ae 


Za 


mm 
— 


: 27 i p 
d - TRA, f 
ULL 
Ke Ze 


un! 


SS 


SN 
x 


SN 


ER P 


SS 
= 


Z, 


Th S AN NN 
IN AW » 


Py \ 
iy NN 
(i) 
NW ^. 
M c 

N QW 
4 SS SS 
Ay SS aS SS 
Why, <e " EM 
i, 27 NS LE: 


Wily, FZ 
SN Wid Ws “i, 


A) D 


A} 


25. Caesar primum sud, deinde omuium ex conspectii remotis 
equis, ut, aequato omnium perieulo, spem fugae tolleret, cohortatus 
suós proelium commisit. Milites & loco superiore pilis missis fa 
eile hostium phalangem. perfrégérunt.  Eà disiecta, gladiis dé- 
strictis in cós impetum fécérunt. Gallis magnd ad pügnam erat 
impedimento, quod, plüribus eorum scütis üno ictü pilorum trans- 


— 


Oo 


fixis et colligátis, cum ferrum sé infléxisset, ncque évellere 


| al 


neque, sinistra impedità, satis commode ptgnare poterant, multi ut, 
diü lactàtó bráchio, praeoptarent s. ütum mani &mittere et nado 
corpore pügnàre. Tandem vulneribus défessi et pedem referre et, 
quod mons suberat circiter mille passuum, eó se recipere coeperunt. 
Capto monte et succedentibus nostris, Boii et Tulingi, qui hominum 


5 


378 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


milibus circiter quindecim agmen hostium claudébant et novissi 
mis praesidid erant, ex itinere nostros latere aperto aggress 
circumvenire, et id cónspicáti Helvétii, qui in montem sésé 
receperant, rürsus instare et proelium redintegrare coeperunt. 
.s Romàni conversa signa bipartito intulerunt: prima ac 


secunda aciés, ut victis 4c summotis resisteret, tertia, ut 
venlentes exciperet. ; 
26. Ita ancipiti proelio diti atque ácriter pugnatum est. 
Diütius cum sustinére nostrorum impetüs non posseut, alteri 
1058, ut coeperant, in montem receperunt, alteri ad impedi- 
menta et carrós suds sé contulerunt. Nam hoc toto proelio, 
cum ab horà septimà ad vesperum pügnàtum sit, àversum 
hostem vidére némo potuit. Ad multam noctem etiam ad 
impedimenta pügnatum est, proptereà quod pro vàlló carros 
15 obiécerant et & loco superiore in nostros veulentes tela 
coniciébant et nonnilli inter carros rotasque mataràüs ac 
trágulás subiciébant nostrósque vulnerabant. Diu cum 
esset, pügnatum, impedimentis castrisque nostri potiti sunt. 
Ibi Orgetorigis filia atque ünus e fillis captus est. Ex eo 
20 proelio circiter milia hominum centum et trigintà superfué- 
runt eaque tctà nocte continenter ierunt: nüllam partem 
noctis itinere intermisso in fines Lingonum [dié quarto] 
pervenerunt, cum et propter vulnera militum et propter 
sepultüram. occisorum nostri [triduum moráti| eos sequi 
25non potuissent. Caesar ad Lingonas litterás nüntiosque 
misit, ne eos frümentoó néve alia ré iuvarent: qui si 
iüvissent, sé eodem loco, quo Helvétids, habitürum. Ipse, 
triduo intermisso, cum omnibus copiis eds sequi coepit. 


The [lelvetians surrender ; Caesar sends them back home, to keep 
out the Germans; the numbers of the IIelcetian host. 


27. Helvetii omnium rérum inopia adducti legatos dé 


3odéditióne ad eum miserunt. (Qui cum eum in itinere con- 
venissent seque ad pedes proiécissent suppliciterque locüti pinum. 
flentes pacem petissent, atque eds in ed loco, quo tum essent, suum 
adventum exspectüre iüssisset, paruérunt. Eo postquam. Caesar 


THE HELVETIAN WAR. O19 


i} pervenit, obsides, arma, servos, qui ad eos perfügissent, poposcit. 

9$ Dum ea conquiruntur et conferuntur, nocte intermissà circiter 
hominum milia sex eius pagi, qui Verbigénus appellatur, sive timore 
perterriti, né, armis tráditis, supplicio afficerentur, sive spé salütis 
inducti, quod in tanta multitidine d&óditiciorum suam fugam aut 5 
occultári, aut ommniuó 1gnOrári posse existimarent, prima nocte e 
castris Helvetiorum égressi ad Rhenum finésque Germanorum con- 
tenderunt. 

28. Quod ubi Caesar resciit, quorum per finés ierant, his, uti 
conquirerent et redücerent, si sibi pürgati esse vellent, imperavit : 10 
reductós in hostium numero habuit; reliquos omnés, obsidibus, 
armis, perfugis traditis, in deditionem accepit. Helvetios, Tulin- 
vos, Latovicos in fines suos, unde erant profecti, reverti iüssit, et 
quod, omnibus früctibus &missis, domi nihil erat, quo famem to- 
lerarent, Allobrovibus imperávit, ut iis frümenti copiam facerent : x5 
ipsós oppida vicosque, quos incenderant, restituere iüssit. Id cà 

| maximé ratione fecit, quod noluit eum locum, unde Helvetii dis- 
cesserant, vacare, né propter bonitátem agrorum Germani, qui 
trans Rhénum incolunt, e suis finibus in Helvetiorum finés trans- 
irent et finitimi Galliae provinciae Allobrogibusque essent. Boios, 20 
petentibus Haeduis, quod egregià virtüte erant cogniti, ut in fini- 
bus suis colloeàrent, concessit; quibus ili agros dederunt, quosque 
posteà in parem iüris libertatisque condicionem atque ipsi erant, 
receperunt. 

29. In castris Helvetiorum tabulae repertae sunt litteris Graecis 25 
confectae et ad Caesarem relátae, quibus in tabulis néminatim 
ratio confecta erat, qui numerus domo exisset eorum, qui arma 
ferre possent, et item séparütim pueri, senés mulierésque. Qua- 
rum omnium rérum summa erat capitum Helvétidrum milia du- 
centa ct sexaginta tria, Tulingorum milia triginta sex, Latovicorum 3o 
quattuordecim, Rauricorum viginti tria, Boiorum triginta duo; ex 
his, qui arma ferre possent, ad milia nonáginta duo. Summa om- 
nium fuerunt ad milia trecenta et sexaginta octo. Eorum, qui 
domum rediérunt, cénsü habito, ut Caesar imperaverat, repertus 

| est numerus milium centum et decem. 35 


WORD FOR WORD ENGLISH PARALLEL OF B. G. 
]. 1-10. 


Nore. — The figures within parentheses indicate the Lessons of this book in 
which the text, corresponding to this parallel, is treated. 


l. (1) Gaul is all divided into parts three, (2) of-which one 
inhabit the-Belgiaus, another the-Aquitanians, (3) the-third (part 
those inhabit) who of-themselves in-language Cclts, in-our (lan- 
guage) Gauls, are-called. (4) These all in-language, in-customs, 
in-laws, among themselves differ. (3) The-Gauls from the-Aquita- 
nians the-Garummna river, from the-Belgians tlie Matrona and the 
Seine, divide(s). (6) Of-these (of) all the-bravest are the-Belgians, 
on-account-of-this because from the-civilization and-also the-refine- 
ment of-the-province farthest they-are-distant, (9) and-least to them 
merchants often resort, and-also those (things) which to enervate 
minds tend, bring in; (8) and-nearest they-are to-the-Germans, 
who across the-Rhine dwell, with-whom continually. war they-wage. 
(10) Which from cause the-Helvetians also the-rest-of the-Gauls 
in-valor surpass, (11) because almost (in) daily battles with the 
Germans they-contend, (12) when either from-their-own boundaries 
them they-keep-away, or themselves in their boundaries war wage. 
(13) Of-these one part, which the-Gauls to-hold it has been said, 
beginning takes from the-river Rhone; (14) it-is-bounded by-the- 
Garumna river, by-the-ocean, by-the-territory of-the-Belgians ; (15) it- 
reaches also on-the-side-of the-Sequanians and the-Helvetians the-. 
river Rhine; it-slopes toward the-north. (16) The-Belgians from 
the-remotest of-Gaul boundaries rise; they-extend to the-lower part ~ 
of-the-river Rhine; they-look into the-north and the-rising sun. 
(17) Aquitania from the-Garumna river to the-Pyrenean mountains 
and that part of-the-ocean which is near Spain extends; it-looks 
between the-setting of-the-sun and the-north. 


WORD FOR WORD PARALLEL. 381 


2. (19) Amoag the-Helvetians far the-highest-born and the-richest 
was Orgetorix. He, Marcus Messala and Mareus Piso (being) con- 
suls, of-the-royal-power by-a-desire led, a-conspiracy of-the-nobility 
made, (20) and the-citizens persuaded that down-from boundaries 
their with all forces they-might-go-out: (21) very-easy to-be, since 
in-valor all they-stood-before, of-entire Gaul the-supreme-power to- 
obtain. (22) This on-this-account more-easily to-them he-persuaded, 
because on-all-sides of-the-place by-the-nature the-Helvetians are- 
hemmed-in: (23) one on (ex) side by-the-river Rhine, very-broad 
and (atque) very-deep, which the-country Helvetian from the-Ger- 
ians divides; (24) the-second on side by-the-mountain Jura very- 
high, which is between the-Sequanians aud the-Helvetians; (on) 
the-third (side) by-the-lake Geneva and by-the-river Rhone, which 
proviuce our from the-Helvetians divides. (25) On-account-of-these 
things it-came-to-pass that both less widely they-wandered and less 
easily neighbors war to-bear-upon they-were-able; (26) which in (ex) 
respect men of-warring fond with-great grief were-affected. (27) Con- 
sidering the-great-number moreover of-men, and considering the-glory 
of-war and of-bravery narrow themselves territory to-have they- 
thought, (28) which into length thousands of-paces two-hundred and 
forty, into width a-hundred and eighty extended. 

3. (30) By-these things led, and by-the-advice of-Orgetorix deeply- 


. moved, they-determined those-things which to departure pertained to- 


prepare, of-beasts-of-burden and of-carts as-much-as the-greatest num- 
ber to-buy-up, (31) sowings as-much-as the-greatest to-make, in- 

order-that on the-journey plenty of-grain might-be-on-hand, with 
the-nearest states peace and friendship to-establish. (32) For these 
things to-be-accomplished two-years’-time for-them enough to-be they- 
thought: for the-third year the-departure by-law they-fix. - For these 
things to-be-accomplished Orgetorix is-chosen. He upon himself an- 


"embassy to the-states took. (33) On this journey he-persuades 


Casticus, of-Catamantaloedes son, a-Sequanian, whose father the- 
kingly-power among the-Sequanians many years had-held, and by 
the-senate of-the-people Roman friend had been called, that the-kingly- 
power in state his he-might-seize, which (his) father before had-had ; 
(34) and-also Dumnorix the-Heeduan, brother of-Divitiacus, who at- 


382 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. : 


that time the-chief-place in the-state was-holding and (ac) very-greatly 
to-the-common-people acceptable was, that the-same (thing) he- 
might-try, he-persuades and-to-him daughter his into marriage he- 
gives. (35) Very-easy in-doing (it) is to-them he-proves undertak- 
ings to-accomplish, on-account-of-this because himself of-his-own state 
the-supreme-power about-to-hold he-was: (36) not (it) is doubt- 
ful that of-the-whole-of Gaul most the-Helvetians were-able; he- 
himself with-his forces and-with-his army for-them the-kingdoms 
about-to-win (is) he-atlirms. (37) By-this speech influenced, among 
themselves a-pledge and au-oath they-give and, the-kingly-power 
having-been-seized, through three very-powerful and (ac) very-strong 
peoples of-the-whole-of Gaul (that) they to-be-masters are-able they- 
hope. 

4. (39) This thing is to-the-Helvetians through information hav- 
ing-been-made-known. — In-aecordance-with-customs their, Orgetorix 
out-of chains (his) cause to-plead they-compelled. (Him) condemned 
punishment to-follow it-was-fitting, (namely) that by-fire be-be-burned. 
(40) On-the-day appointed ofthe-cause of-the-pleading, Orgetorix 
to the-trial all his retinue, to of-men thousands ten, from-all-sides 
collected, and all clients and-debtors his, of-whom a-great number 
he-had, to-the-same-place brought-together: through these, so-that-not 
(his) cause he-might-plead, himself he-snatched-away. (41) When 
the-state on-account-of this thing roused-up, by-arms right its to- 
enforce was-trying, and-a-multitude of-men out-of the-fields the- 
magistrates were-collecting, Orgetorix died; and-not absent-is sus- 
picion, as the-Helvetians think, that himself to-himself death 
he-decreed. 

5. (42) After his death by-nothing the-less the-Helvetians that, 
which they-had-determined, to-do try, that out-of (€) boundaries 
their they-may-go-out. When at-length (that) they for that thing 
ready were they-thought, towns their all in-number to twelve, villages 
to four-hundred, the-rest-of the-private buildings they-set-fire-to, 
(43) the-grain all, further-than (that was) which with-them about-to- 
earry they-were, they-burn-up, so-that, home of-returning the-hope 
having-been-taken-away, more-ready for all dangers to-be-undergone 
thev-might-be, of-three months ground provisious for-himself each- 


WORD FOR WORD PARALLEL. 383 


one from-home to-bear-out they-order. (44) They-persuade the-Rau- 
riciaus and the-Tulingians and the-Latovicians neighbors, that (uti), 
the-same having-used plan, towns their and-villages having-been- 
burned-up, together with them they-may-depart, (45) and-the-Boians, 
"who across the-Rhine had-dwelt and into the-country Noric had- 
crossed and-Noreia had-stormed, received to themselves (as) allies 
to-themselves they-unite. 

6. (46) (There) were in-all roads two, by-which roads from-home 
_to-go-out they-were-able: one through the-Sequanians, narrow and 

difficult, between Mount Jura and the-river Rhone, with-difficulty 
where one-by-oue carts were-being-drawn ; the-mountain moreover 
very-high was-overhanging, so-that easily very-few to-keep-out were- 
able: (47) the-other through province our, by-inuch more-easy and 
(atque) more-open, on-account-of-this because between the-boun- 
daries of-the-IIelvetians and. of-the-Allobroges, who recently had been 
subdued, the-Rhone flows, and-this (in) some places by-a-ford is- 
crossed. The-last town of-the-Allobroges is aud-the-nearest of-the- 
Helvetians to-the-boundaries Geneva. Out-of that town a-bridge to- 
the-Helvetians extends. (48) The-Allobroges (that) they either (vel) 
about-to-persuade (were), because not-yet of-good mind towards (in) 
the-people Roman they-seemed, they-were-thinking ; or (vel) by-force 
about-to-compel (were), so-that through their boundaries them to-go 
they-might-permit. (49) All things for departure having-been- 
prepared, a-day they-appoint on-which day to the-bank of-the-Rhone 
all may-come-together. This day was before the-day fifth the Calends 
April, Lucius Piso, Aulus Gabinius (being) consuls. 

7. (51) To-Caesar when this had been announced, (that) they 
through province our a-journey to-make were-tryiug, he-hastens from 
the-city to-depart, and (by) as-much-as the-greatest he-can marches 
into Gaul farther he-hastens and to Geneva he-comes-through. To- 
the-province whole as-much-as the-greatest he-can of-soldiers number 
he-commands ((there) was altogether in Gaul farther legion one], 
the-bridge which was to Geneva he-orders to-be-broken-down. 
(52) When concerning his arrival the-Helvetians more-certain were- 
made, ambassadors to him they-send, the-highest-born of-the-state, 
of-which embassy Nameius and Verucloetius the-chief place were- 


984 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. =f 


holding, who might-say (that) to-them it-was in mind without any 
evil-doing a-journey through the-province to-make, on-account-of-this 
because another way they-had none: (they) ask that (with) his con- 
sent this to-them to-do it-may-be-permitted. (53) Caesar, because 
by-memory he-was-holding (that) Lucius Cassius the-consul killed 
(was) and-army his by the-Helvetians driven and under the-yoke 
sent (was), about-to-be-allowed (was) not he-was-thinking ; and-not 
men of-unfriendly mind, haviug-been-given an-opportunity through 
the-province of-a-journey about-to-be-made, about-to-refrain (were) 
from harm and evil-doing he-was-thinking. (54) Yet, in-order-that 
space (of time) to-intervene might-be-able, until the-soldiers, whom 
he-had-ordered, should-come-together, to-the-ambassadors he-replied 
(that) time he for deliberating about-to-take (was) : if any-thiug they- 
wished, at (ad) the-Ides April let-them-return. 

8. (55) Meanwhile with-that legion, which with-him he-was-having, 
and-with-the-soldiers, who out-of the-province had-come-together, 
from Lake Leman, which into the-river Rhone flows-into, to Mount 
Jura, which the-boundaries of-the-Sequanians from the-Helvetians 
divides, thousands of-paces ten (and) nine a-wall into height of-feet 
sixteen and-a-ditch he-prolongs. (56) That work having-been-finished, 
guards he-places-here-and-there, redoubts he-strongly-fortifies, by- 
which more-easily, if, he (being) unwilling, to-cross they-should-try, 
to-keep-away he-may-be-able. When that day, which he-had-appointed 
with the-ambassadors, came, and the-ambassadors to him returned, 
he-denies (that) he because-of-the-custom and because-of-the-precedent 
of-the-people Roman can the-right-of-way to-any-one through the- 
province give, and, if force to-use (make) they-should-try (he) about- 
to-keep-out (them is) he-shows. (57) The-Helvetians, from-that hope 
cast-down, by-boats joined and-by-rafts very-many made, some by- 
fords of-the-Rhone, where least the-depth of-the-river was, sometimes 
by-day, oftener by-night, whether to-break-through they-were-able, 
having-tried, of-the-work by-the-fortification aud of-the-soldiers by- 
the-running-together and by-the-darts driven-back, from-this attempt 
desisted. 

9. (58) (There) was-left one through the-Sequanians way, by- 
which, the-Sequanians (being) unwilling, on-account-of (its) narrow- 


WORD FOR WORD PARALLEL. 385 


ness to-go not they-were-able. These when by-their-own effort to- 
persuade not they-were-able, ambassadors to Dumnorix the-Haeduan 
they-send so-that, he (being) mediator, from the-Sequanians they- 
might-obtain-their-request. — Dumnorix by-popularity and by-liber- 
ality among the-Sequanians very-much could and to-the-Helvetians 
was a-friend, because out-of that state of-Orgetorix a-daughter into 
marriage he-had-led, and by-the-desire of-royal-power led new things 
was-desiring and as-inuch-as the-most states by-his kindness to-have 
bound was-wishing. (59) Therefore the-thing he-undertakes and 
from the-Sequanians obtains-his-request, that through boundaries 
their the-Helvetians to-go they-allow, and-hostages that (uti) among 
themselves (sés8) they-give, he-brings-about: the-Sequaniaus, that- 
not from-the-journey the-Helvetians they-will-keep; the Helvetiaus, 
that without wrong-doing and harm they-will-cross. 

10. To-Caesar it-is-reported (that) to-the-Helvetians (it)-is in mind 
through the-open-country of-the-Sequanians aud of-the-Haeduans a- 
journey into of-the-Santones boundaries to-make, which not far from 
of-the-Tolosates boundaries are-distant, which state is in the-province. 
(60) This if should-be-done, he-was-understanding (that) great with 
danger of-the-province about-to-be (it-was), that men warlike, of-the- 
people Roman foes, to-places lying-open and-very fruitful neighbors 
it-have. On-account-of these reasons over-that fortification, which he- 
had-made, Titus Labienus the-lieutenant he-put ; himself into Italy 
by-great journeys he-hastens and-two there legions he-enrolls and 
three, which around Aquileia were-wintering, out-of winter (quarters) 
he-leads-out and where the-nearest route into farther Gaul through 
the-Alps was, with these five legions to-go he-hastens. (61) There 
the-Centrones and the-Graiocelians and the-Caturiges, the-places 
higher having-been-seized, from-the-march the-army to-keep try. (In) 
many these in-battles having-been-driven, from Ocelum, which is of- 
the-hither province the-last (town), into the-boundaries of-the-Vocon- 
tians of-the-farther province on-the-day seventh he-comes-through ; 
thence into of-the-Allobroges boundaries, from the-Allobroges into 
the Secusiavians the-army he-leads. These are beyond the-province 
across the-Rhone the-first. 

. 25 


FREE TRANSLATION OF B. G. I. 1-6. 


Notre. — The figures within parentheses indicate the Lessons of this book in 
which the text, correspondiug to this translation, is treated. 


1. (1) All Gaul is divided into three parts; (2) one of which 
the Belgians inhabit, another the Aquitanians, (3) the third (those) 
who in their own language are called Celts, in ours Gauls. (4) All 
these differ from one another in language, customs, and laws. - 
(5) The Garumna river separates the Gauls from the Aquitanians, 
the Matrona and the Seine separate (them) from the Belgians. 
(6) Of all these the bravest are the Belgians, because they are 
farthest distant from the civilization and refinement of the province, 
(7) and merchants very seldom resort to them and bring in those 
things which tend to weaken courage ; (8) and because they are next 
to the Germanus, who live across the Rhine, with whom they wage 
war continually. (10) For this reason the Helvetians also surpass 
the rest of the Gauls in valor, (11) because in almost daily battles 
they contend with the Germans, (12) when they either keep them 
out of their own territory or themselves wage war in the territory of 
the Germans. (13) One part (of the country) of (all) these, which 
it has been said the Gauls hold, takes its beginning at the river 
Rhone; (14) it is bounded by the Garumna river, the ocean, and 
the territory of the Belgians; (15) it also reaches the river Rhine 
on the side of the Sequanians and Helvetians ; it slopes toward the 
north. (16) The Belgian (country) begins at the remotest boundaries 
of Gaul; it extends to the lower part of the river Rhine; it faces 
north-east. (17) Aquitania extends from the Garumna river to 
the Pyrenees mountains and that part of the ocean which is near 
Spain ; it faces north-west. il 

9. (19) Among the Helvetians far the highest born and the richest 
was Orgetorix. He, in the consulship of Marcus Messala and Marcus 


FREE TRANSLATION. 587 


Piso, led by a desire for the royal power, made a conspiracy of the 
nobility, (20) and persuaded the citizens to go out of their boundaries 
with all their forces: (21) saying that it was very easy, since they 
surpassed all in valor, to obtain the supreme power of the whole of 
Gaul. (22) He persuaded them of this more easily because on all 
sides the Helvetians are hemmed in by the character of their country : 
(23) on one side by the very broad and deep river Rhine, which 
divides the Helvetian country from the Germans; (24) on the second 
side by the very high Mount Jura, which is between the Sequanians 
and the Helvetians; on the third side by Lake Geneva and the river 
Rhone, which divides our province from the Helvetiaus. (25) From 
these circumstances it came about that they roamed about less widely 
and could less easily make war upon their neighbors; (26) by this 
state of things people fond of warring were greatly troubled. (27) And 
especially when they took into account the greatness of their popula- 
tion and their reputation for bravery in war did they consider that 
they had a contracted domain. (28) This extended two hundred and 
forty miles in length, a hundred and eighty in width. 

3. (30) Led by these things and deeply moved by the advice of 
Orgetorix, they determined to prepare those things which had to 
do with departure, — to buy up the largest possible number of beasts 
of burden and of carts, (31) to make their sowings as large as pos- 
sible, that upon the journey plenty of grain might be on hand, to 
establish peace and friendship with the nearest states. (32) They 
thought that two years was time enough for them to accomplish 
these things: they fix their departure by law for the third year. 
Orgetorix is chosen to accomplish these things. He took upon 
himself an embassy to the states. (33) On this journey he per- 
suades Casticus, the son of .Catamantaloedes, a Sequanian, whose 
father had held the royal power among the Sequanians many years, 
and had been ealled friend by the senate of the Roman people, to 
seize in his state the roval power, which his father had had before; 
-(34) and he also persuades Dumnorix, the Haeduan, brother of 
Divitiaeus, who at that time was holding the chief place in the state 
and was very acceptable to the common people, to try the same 
thing, and gives him his daughter in marriage. (35) He proves to 


388 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


them that it is a very easy thing to do to accomplish their under- 
takings, because he himself will hold the supreme power of his state : 
(36) that there is no doubt that the Helvetiaus are the most powerful 
people of all Gaul; he declares that he himself with his forces and 
with his army will win the royal power for them. (37) Influenced 
by these statements, they give a pledge and an oath to one another, 
and hope, after seizing the roval power, to become masters of the whole 
of Gaul through the aid of three very powerful and very strong 
peoples. 

4. (39) This conspiracy was reported to the Helvetians by in- 
formers. In accordance with their customs they compelled Orge- 
torix to plead lus cause in chains. If condemned, the punishment 
of being burned must overtake him. (40) On the day appointed 
for the pleading of the case, Orgetorix brought together from all 
sides to the trial all his retinue — about ten thousand men — and 
assembled all his clients and debtors, of whom he had a great num- 
ber, at the same place: with their assistance he rescued himself so 
as not to plead his cause. (41) When the state, roused up because 
of this act, was trying to enforce its law by force of arms, and the 
rulers were collecting a multitude of men from the fields, Orgetorix 
died; and suspicion is not wanting, as the Helvetians think, that he 
committed suicide. 

9. (42) After his death the Helvetians, nevertheless, attempt to go 
out of their country as they had determined to do. When at length 
they thiuk they are ready for this expedition, thev set fire to all 
their towns, about twelve in number, to about four hundred villages, 
and to the remaining private buildings; (43) they burn up all the 
corn except what they are about to carry with them, that, by taking 
away the hope of returning home, they may be more ready to en- 
counter all perils; they order every man to carry from home for 
himself meal enough for three months. (44) They persuade the 
Rauricians, the Tulingians, and the Latovicians, their neighbors, to 
adopt the same plan, burn up all their towns and villages, and. set 
out together with them, (45) and the Boians, who formerly lived 
across the Rhine and had stormed Noreia after crossing into the 
Noric territory, are received and joined to them. 


FREE TRANSLATION. 389 


6. (46) There were only two ways by which they could go out 
from home: one through the country of the Sequanians, narrow and 
| difficult, between Mount Jura and the river Rhone, where with diffi- 
culty carts were drawn oue by one; moreover, a very high mountain 
was overhanging, so that a very few could easily keep them out : 
(47) the second way through our province, much more easy and 
open, because between the territory of the Helvetians and the Allo- 
broges, the latter of whom had recently been subdued, the Rhone 
flows, and this is crossed in several places by a ford. The last town 
of the Allobroges and the nearest town to the territory of the Helve- 
tians is Geneva. From this town a bridge extends to the territory 
of the Helvetians. (48) They thought they would either persuade 
the Allebroges, because they did not yet seem well-disposed toward 
the Roman people, or would compel them by foree, to allow them to 
go through their territory. (49) When all things are prepared for 
departure, they appoint a day for all to come together at the bank 
of the Rhone. This day was the 28th of March, in the consulship 
of Lucius Piso and Aulus Gabinius. 


APPENDIX A. 


METHOD OF READING LATIN. 


The teacher should see to it that the text is mastered in the order 
of the original, and not by finding first predicate, then subject, ete. 
To accomplish this, the following method is recommended. 

When Lesson XXXIX. is reached, and before the ** Text” is 
studied at all, let all the pupils of the class close their books and 
give exclusive attention to the teacher. He will write upon the board 
the first word of the * Text," Ea, and a colloquy something like what 
follows will ensue : — 

Ha... 

* What do you know about ea?" Ans. “It may be a nom. or 
accus. plur. neut. (cf. ea VII.), or the nom. sing. fem. of eam in eam 
partem XVII. It may be used independently with the full force of 
a noun like the former, or may be an adj. like the latter; cf. XXV. 
NOI D 

Now add the next word, and the text will stand : — 


Ba rés ... 


* Rés is a nom. singular. We have never had, in the nom. sing., | 


any word inflected just like rés. What other forms of this word have 
we had?” Ans. *Rébus, abl. plur, XXV.; rés, accus. plur., 
XXXII.’ — * What is the stem (cf. IX. 2. 2) of the forms of this word 
which you have had?” Ans. * R&-, for these two letters are common 
to all three of the forms which we know." — “ How is the nom. formed 
from the stem?” Ans. “ By adding s." — ** Have we had any nouns 


1 The teacher will understand that several questions might be necessary to 
elicit this information. The purpose here is to show as briefly as possible how 
pupils may be led to gain mastery of the Latin for themselves. Be sure to draw 
out from your class these facts. Do not tell them the answers to the questions. 


METHOD OF READING LATIN. 591 


or adjs. before which form the nom. in this way?” Ans. ‘‘ Yes, nouns 
or adjs. like omnis, civitas, and lex." (Cf. XXX. v. 1.) — ‘‘ What, 
judging from eas rés XXXIL., is the gender of rés?” Ans. * Fem., 
| for it is limited by a fem. adjective." (Cf. VI. x. 2, 5). — * What 
now seems a probable construction for ea?" Ans. ** Nom. sing. fem., 
agreeing with ràs."— *‘ What is the rés referred to?" Ans. ** Prob- 
ably the action of Orgetorix described in the preceding chapter.” 

Ba res est . 

* What is the subj. of est?" Ans. * Res, for it is a nom. case, 
and has not the right position for either a predicate nom. or. an 
appositive, the only other uses which the nom. may have.” 

Ba rés est Helvetiis ... 

*" What cases are possible for Helvétiis?’’ Ans. * Dat. or abl. 
plural." — “Do you know which it is?" Ans. * We do not." 

Ea rés est Helvétiis per... 

* What do you know about per?" Ans. ‘‘It is a prep., takes the 

accus., and means through ; cf. per populos XXXVII." 
| Ea res est Helvétiis per indicium . . . 

“Are you sure that indicium is the accus. after per because 
it is the next word after it?" Ans. “No, the ending -um is 
found in the gen. plur.; the object of a prep. does not always follow 
it immediately (Cf. in eórum finibus XII.), and indicium might be 
a gen. plural." 

Ba res est Helvetiis per indicium énintiata. 

* Are there more words in this sentence?" Ans. * No, we see 
the period." — ** What do you know of énüntiáta?" Ans. * From 
& before t we know that it is of the lst. conjug.; from t before 
the ending, that it is probably a pf. pass. partic. ; and from final 
-a that it is a nom. sing. fem., or nom. or accus. plur. neut.; 
cf. occupato XXXVII. x. 5." — * What is its agreement?” Ans. 
“Tt must be a nom. sing. fem.; agreement with rés, for no other 
agreement is possible iu this sentence." — “ Enüntiare means to 
make known. What now is clearly the case of Helvetiis?" Ans. “ It 
must be a dat., for that case is appropriate with enüntiáta (Cf. ei 
XXXIV., illis XXXV.), while no abl. which we have had (Cf. XXXIT. 
N. 8) could be used with the words in this sentence." —'' Indicium 


392 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. ° 


just before means strictly information. What now is the literal 
translation of the sentence?” Ans. ** This thing is having-been-made- 
known to-the-Helvetians through information.” —** What would be a 
freer and better translation?” Ans. ** This proceeding was made- 
known to-the-Helvetians by informers.” 

* Let us take up the next sentence in the same way :”— 

Moribus ... 

* What cases possible for this word?” Ans. * Dat. or abl. plural.” 
— “It means customs.” 

Moribus suis ... 

* With what does suis probably agree?" Ans. ** With moribus, 
for both must be either dat. or abl. plural." — ** Why do they have 
different endings?" Ans. **Eecause, though of the same case, 
they are of different declensions.” — ** What is the meaning of suis?” 
Aus. * We do not know, because we do not know the subject of 
the sentence." (Cf. XXXII. N. 10.) | 

Moribus suis Orgetorigem ... 

* What is the case of Orgetorigem?" Ans. * The accusative." — 
* What two uses of the accus. have we had thus far?" Ans. “ It 
is used as the object of a verb or as the subject of an infinitive.” 

The next phrase consists of a noun with a prep., and it should be 
worked out in the same way as per indicium above. 

Moribus suis Orgetorigem ex vinculis causam . .. 

* What is the case of causam?" Ans. * The accus. singular." — 
* Have we had the accus. before in this Lesson ?" Ans. ‘ Yes, in 
Orgetorizem." — “Is causam au appositive or predicate nom. with | 
Orgetorigem ?" Ans. “No, for it does not refer to the same 


; 99 
thing. 


— ‘What construction is suggested for the two by such 
groups as quam Gallos obtinére XIII., sé finis habére XX VII.?”’ 
Ans. ‘That one is the subj., the other the obj., of an infinitive.” — 
‘Do we know from the order which is the subject, which the obj. ? " 
Ans. “No, the order in quam Gallós is obj. subj.; in sé finés, 
subj. obj." (Cf. also ünam incolunt Belgae II. and E. G. 76. 3.) 

Moribus suis Orgetorigem ex vinculis causam dicere.. . 

“We have now an iuf. as we anticipated. For its meaning, cf. 
dictum XIII." 


METHOD OF READING LATIN. 9593 


Moribus suis Orgetorigem ex vinculis causam dicere 
coézérunt. | 

“Where do we get the subj. of this verb?" Ans. * From 
its ending, for none of the words expressed could possibly be its 
subject." — ‘ What is its voice and tense?” — Anus. ** Act. voice, pf. 
tense; cf. düx-érunt XXXII.” — “The verb from which it is formed 
means £o compel or collect; the preceding vinculis means bonds 
or chains. What now appears to be the meaning beginning with 
Orgetorigem ?" Ans. * They compelled Orgetorix to say (or plead) 
his cause out-of chains (better in chains).” ! — * Which of the mean- 
ings possible for moribus now seems most appropriate?" Ans. 
* Ou-account-of or in-accordance-with.” — ** What then is its case?" 
Ans. “ Ablative." —** What kind of an abl.?" Ans. “An abl. of 
cause; cf. rébus XXV." ?— << What is the meaning of suis?” Ans. 
** Their, for the verb coégérunt has a plur. subj." — “Note how 
coégérunt has unlocked the whole sentence for us." 

The next sentence will be taken up in a more summary way. 

Damnatum ... 

For questions and answers on this word, cf. those on énüntiata 
above. “It agrees with eum understood. What is the case and 
antec. of this eum?" 

Damnatum poenam ... 

Cf. questions and answers on Orgetorigem causam above. 

Damnàátum poenam sequi. 

* Sequi is the expected infinitive. It is deponent of the 3d conjug. 
and means £o follow. Note the ending -i, and cf. the ending -ri in 
potii XXXVII. Potir is in the fourth conjug. which is dis- 
tinguished by the characteristic (cf. XXX. Obs. 3) 1 before the inf. 

1 Tt will be seen from this translation that the accus. and inf. are somewhat 
differently used here from what they have been before. The accus. Orgetorigem 
is both object of the verb coégérunt and subj. of the inf. dicere, and the 
inf. is translated like an English inf, not like an indicative. ‘The sense is, 
however, so obvious that the pupil need mot at this point be troubled by the 
grammatical variation from indirect discourse, with which subject he is already 
familiar. The teacher may consult A. & G. 271, 4, and foot-note; H. 534, foot. 
note 1; Whitney’s English Grammar, 449. 


2 The teacher should remember, however, that the ability to recognize and trans- 
late a form is of more importance than the knowledge of its name and classification. 


394 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


ending. The pres. inf. pass. of the Ist and 2d conjugs. ends in 
-ri like that of the 4th. Note that before the ending -3 of sequi the 
final e of the stem disappears.” 

Damnatum poenam sequi oportébat... 

* What is the mode and tense of oportebat? It means i¢-was- 
fitting. For this translation of one verb by several English words, 
cf. suppeteret XXXI. Obs. 4. For free translation up to this 
point, see page 387.” | 

Damnatum poenam sequi oportebat ut... 

* What mode has always followed this conj. ut in the text thus 
far?" Ans. “The subjunctive; cf. ut ... vagárentur XXV., 
ut... suppeteret XXXI." 

Damnatum poenam sequi oportebat ut igni . . 

*Igni is an abl. sing. Its nom. sing. is ignis, fire. Note its 
ending i. All adjs. in -is have commonly the abl. sing. ending -X 
(like this noun form) in all genders. Supply it in the inflection of 
omnis XXIX. 2, 1." 

Damnátum poenam sequi oportébat ut Igni cremarétur. 

“Voice, mode, tense, number, of cremarétur ?  Cremaàre means 
to burn.” * How is igni translated?” ‘* What preceding word does 
the clause ut . . . cremár&tur explain?” 

This method should be continued through every Lesson for 
several weeks. Such work is slow at first, but will soon grow easier 
and more rapid, since many of the questions will be so thoroughly 
impressed that they may be omitted. Note, (1) that it requires 
cautious, accurate thinking and alertness in thought; (2) that it 
shows how the order of the Latin words enables us to predict what 
is coming; (3) that it shows how the sense is dependent on forms 
and syntax, and hence is the best possible practical exercise in 
parsing; (4) that it is the only method by which the sense of the 
Latin can be taken in rapidly, or through the ear, just as the Romans 
themselves got it. 

Occasionally written exercises containing questions similar to those 
above shoul be substituted for oral, to test the progress of the class, and 
constant translation at hearing as well as at sight, should be required. 

The ** Notes " of these ** Lessons” will be adapted to this method. 


APPENDIX B. 
Notes on B. G. I. 21-29. 


CHAPTER 21. 


certior factus . . . consedisse; ct. certior factus tradiixisse 
LXV.— milia; cf. XXVIII. v. 2. — misit; its obj. understood would 
be some such word as milites; this obj. is the antec. of qui; for qui 
cognoscerent, cf. qui dicerent LII.; the clauses qualis esset na. 
türa aud qualis (esset) ascensus are indir. questions and the objs. 
of cognoscerent ; cf. LXV. w. 2, c; qualis is an interrogative adj., 
not an adverb. With what does it agree? — facilem ; limits ascensum 
understood. — de tertia vigilia; cf. LXV. Vocab. — ducibus ; in ap- 
position with iis. — ascendere; cf. ascensus above, and XCIII. 2, 
9, j. — sit; the precedinz quid is a substautive interrogative pron.; it 
is deelined like the indefinite quis; see XCI. Obs. 1; consilii is a 
predicate gen., what is of his plan, what belongs to his plan, what his 
plan is; ct. tanti XCLI.; explain mode and tense of sit. — ierant; cf. 
LXV. Nn. 7. —habébatur ; for meaning, cf. LXXX. N. 6, «4; peritissi- 
mus; rei militaris depends upon it, very experienced of military science, 
where we should say in Eng. very experienced in military science. — Sul- 
lae ; nom. Sulla, though a masculine noun; cf. III. N 4, 7. — Crassi 
depends on exercitü, supplied from what goes before. 


CHAPTER 22. 


lüce; for form of nom., cf. XXXI. N. 5. —summus mons, //^ lop of 
the mountain, not the highest mountain; ct. X. N. 2, b. — passibus ; for 
const., cf. LXXXI. w. 3, e, Obs. 2; limited by preceding mille, which is 
here an indecl. adj.; see A. & G. 94, e. H. 178. — Labieni ; cf. Crassi, 
Chap. 21. What pron. is used in such cases in Eng. to supply the place 
of the omitted noun ? — equo admisso, (his) horse having been let go, 
with loose reins, at full speed; the root meaning of mittere is to lef go ; 
distinguish equus from eques, equitatus, equester. — voluerit; a pf. 
subjv. of vellent LIV.; explain mode and tense — cognovisse; give 
the exact words which Considius addressed to Caesar, insignibus, here 


396 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 
from the noun insigne, a distinguishing mark, decoration, uniform; cf. 
the Gallic insignia on p. 228. — praeceptum erat: for mode, cf. XLI. 
N.10.— né ... committeret, nisi ... visae essent. What were 
the exact words of Caesar to Labienus? Cf. LXXXV. N. 6. — fieret ; 
voice? Cf.fiébat XXV. Vocab.; why subjv. ? — abstinébat ; for const. 
of preceding proelio, cf. XII. n. 3, c, 4. — multo die, i» the much day, 
late in the day ; why abl.? — pro viso, ix place of (a thing) seen, as seen ; 
v1sO, in form a partic., is here a noun. — quó consuerat intervall6 = 
intervallo quo consuerat, af the interval at which he was accustomed ; 
cf. quae civitas est for civitas quae est LIX. 


CHAPTER 23. 


diel; a gen. depending on postridie, which is an adv., but was origi- 
nally a noun, being contracted from postero die, ox the day after ; see 
A. & G. 214, 7. H. 398, 5. — Bibracte ; nom. same as abl. ; see A. & G. 
57, d. H. 63, 2. — aberat; for preceding milibus, cf. passibus, Chap. 
22. — existimavit ; for preceding prospiciendum, cf. LIII. v. 3,2 ; rei 
frümentariae, for the grain supply ; dat. with prospiciendum (esse) ; 
cf. respüblica, res familiaris, rés militaris, novae rés. — contendit; 
like the preceding avertit has the same form in 3d sing. pres. ind. as in 
pf. ind. ; cf. XCII. N. 6,4; here probably pf. like preceding existimavit. 
— seu fcr sive. — eo magis quod ; magis is used as the comparative 
of magnopere LXX.; for whole expression, cf. h6c facilius . . . quod 
XXII, eo... minus. . . quod LXXIII. — sive; cf. preceding 
seu. 


CHAPTER 24. 


id animum advertit; the last two words are usually written as one ; 


cf. XC. and note also the difference in Lat. between the expressions mean- 
ing £o notice and fo punish; tor two accusatives id aud animum, cf. LXV. 
N. 5, j. — qui sustinéret , . . misit; cf. other examples of the rel. 
clause of purpose in LIL, LXXIX., and Chap. 21, and note that in all 
these instances the antec. of the rel. is the obj. of the verb on which the 
purpose clause depends. — in medi6 colle; zz the middle of the hill, i. e. 
half way up, not in the middle of the summit; cf multo die, Chap. 22. 
What important difference between the way of expressing the time in 
which and the place in which ? — [ita uti supra]; in brackets because 
it is doubtful whether these words be!onc in the text; omit in transla- 
tion. — compléri; voice? — eum ; antec. ? — impedimenta ; from im. 
pedire, means ¢hat which hinders (i. e. makes the march slow), the bagg ge 


APPENDIX B. 397 


train, including the beasts of burden ; for sarcinas, above, see p. 339. — 
confertissima acié, iz a very crowded line of battle; why abl.? difference 
in meaning between acies and agmen ? 


Ea ua uva va ua ua ua ua La uva 


EZA UWA mo UA WA Ua we A UA ua 


TRIPLEX ACIES. 


The little rectangles represent companies of soldiers. Why is this plan appropriate here? 
Show how such an arrangement of an ariny would secure both strength, and ease of movement. 
See Allen's * History of the Roman People,” pp. 126, 127. 


CHAPTER 25. 


equis: What does this word suggest as to the noun with which preced- 
ing suo agrees, and what const. for this noun is suggested by remotis ? — 
aequato periculo, lit. the danger having been made equal, freely, by 
making the danger equal; cf. spé sublata XLIII. — perfregerunt ; 
from perfringere. — Gallis . . . impedimento; for const., cf. XC. 
N. 6.-—— s6 infléxisset, Aad bent itself, had become bent; the shields 
of soldiers standing next to each other were overlapped in forming 
the phalanx, and these shields, which were carried on the left arm, were 
pinned and held together by the Roman javelins; for the sctita here 
referred io, cf. pp. 228, 361, 3564. — sinistra; cf. dextram XCII. — 
emittere; for meaning, cf. admisso, Chap. 22: praeoptarent, preced- 
ing, isa subjv. of result. — mille passuum ; mille is here a noun like 
milia; but cf. mille Chap. 22. — eo ; here an adv. meaning fo that place, 
thither, not the demonstrative pron. — succedentibus ; on the use of 
this pres. partic, cf. LXXXVIII. x. 10, Obs. 3. — novissimis prae- 
sidio; cf. Gallis impedimento, above; novissimis means /o those at 
the rear, or simply fo the rear; the best Eug. for the whole expression ? 
latere ; from latus ; cf. opere LVI. ; the prep. is exceptionally omitted 
with this abl. of place. —coepérunt ; followed by circumvenire as well 
as Instare. — conversa signa . . . intulérunt, ¢hey bore in the turned 
about standards, they wheeled about and advanced. Make a list of the mili- 
tary names and expressions in this and the preceding Chapter. — resisteret; 
used with the dat.; victis, from vincere, means those conquered, the con- 
quered ; cf. novissimis, above. Of what is the preceding acies the 
subj. ? — venientés; cf. succedentibus. Note the large number of 
parties. in this Chap., and that in many cases the Eng. would have clauses 
instead. Make these parties. a special study, noting the difference in 


398 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


meaning between those of dep. verbs and the others, and the variety of 
Eng. translation required in rendering them idiomatically. Trace, on the 
plan of the battle, the movements described in this Chapter. 


CHAPTER 26. 


pugnátum est; used impersonally, lit. translated 7¢ was fought, freely 
there was fighting ; the preceding adv. may be freely translated like an 
adj.; the preceding ancipiti proelio is au abl. of manner; ancipiti is 
from nom. anceps. — diütius is a comp. from diu. — alteri . . . alteri, 
the one party . . . the other; cf. XLVII. wn. 1. —ab hora septimà ; 
the day from sunrise to sunset, whatever its length, was divided iuto 
twelve equal hours, which must, of course, have varied in length with the 
seasons; ef., for the night, LXV., vigilia, in Vocab. — pugnatum sit ; for 
coust., cf. LXX VIII. x. 2, Obs. 8. — ad multam noctem ; cl. multo die, 
Chap. 22. — pro valló ; for, in place of, «s, a rampart. — potiti sunt ; 
for ease used with it, cf. XXI. — unus e filiis, ove out of the sons, one 
of the sons; see A. &. G. 216, v. H. 397, 3, x. 3, and footnote 1. — 
ierunt; ci. ierant, Chap. 21. — Lingonas ; cf. LXXV. x. 4, c. — qui 

. .. habiturum; cf.si ... accidisset . . . existimaturum XCII.; 
force of the position of qui? For omission of prep. with loco, cf. XLVIT. 
x. 6. — Helvétios is the obj. of haberet, to be supplied; eos under- 
stood, referring to Lingonas, is the obj. of habitürum (esse); if tlic 
Lingones harbored the enemies of the Romans, they would be regarded 
as enemies by Caesar. 


CHAPTER 27. 


convénissent; here transitive; for translation and position of ils subj., 
cf. qui, X. . 1, v; LVIII. Nn, 3, 7. —iüssisset ; note the four subjvs. after 
one conj., viz. cum ; essent, preceding, is subjv. in a subordinate clause 
of indir. disc., iussisset yeing a verb of saying. — eO . . . pervenit; 
cf. eo, Chap. 25. — perfugissent; for mode, cf. essent, above. — ea - 
conquiruntur ; ea, referring to obsides, arma, servos, in precediug 
sentence, is neut. because the hostages and slaves are here regarded as 
things rather than men. — hominum milia . . . pagi; note the pos. 
sessive and the partitive gen. depending on the same noun, — perterriti ; 
limits milia, which, though grammatically neut., suggests the masc. ho- 
minés ; see A. & G. 187, 4. IT. 438, 6. — afficerentur ; for const., cf. 
XCI. n. 3. —quod .... existimárent; subjv. in indir. disc. ; Caesar 
is here quoting two reports or perhaps two conjectures of his own in 


APPENDIX B. 399 


regard to the departure of the Helvetians. — prima nocte ; iz the first of 
the night, in the early part of the night. What other adjs. have been used, 
like prima, to designate a part of a thing ? 


CHAPTER 28. 


resciit for rescivit, from resciscere; for use of tense, cf. LXX XIII. x. 
1.—imperavit, takes whatcase? LI.n.8; for quorum, preceding its an- 
tee, his, cf. quae pars . . . ea LXVII.; purgati; nom., agreeing with 
subj. of vellent; sibi, /o him, in his sight, — in numero hostium, lit. ix 
the number of enemies, {reely as enemies ; cf, pro vallo, Chap. 26. — unde, 
from which place, whence; ct. ubi, where, ibi, there, eO, thither, inde, 
thence, and E. G. 44 — tolerarent is here a result clause; the preceding 
quo = ut eo, and has nihil as its antec., lit. there was nothing (of such 
a sort) that they would by means of it endure hunger. —ips6s; the antecs. 
are Helvéti6s, Tulingos, Latovicos.— ne. , . transirent; a subjv. 
after the idea of fearing suggested in noluit; cf. XCI. x. 3, Obs. 4. — 
Galliae prévinciae; which of these two words is a dat. ? — concessit ; 
note the emphatic position of Boios; it is the obj. of collocarent, of 
which the subj. is Haedui understood ; Haeduis is the dat. of indir. obj. 
after concessit; for const. of collocarent, cf. conquirerent, above; 
for that of virtute, cf. LIII. x. 4; dederunt, pf. of dare; antec. of 
preceding quibus and illi? For force of atque, see A. & G 156, a, last 
part Hl. 554 |. 2, w.; translated lit. i&fo an equal condition and they 
themselves were, freely, into the same condition as themselves. 


CHAPTER 29. 


litterae ; this word in the plur. may mean either letters of the alphabet, 
a letter (epistle), or literature ; it is here used in the first sense. — quibus 
in tabulis; for repetition of antec., cf. quibus itineribus XLVI. — 
exisset; for form, cf. LXVI. x. 5; it is the verb of an indir question, the 
preceding qui being an interrogative adj.; cf. quas in partes LXXIX. ; 
for domo, cf. XLVI. n. 3. — senes, irreg., the nom. sing. is senex ; see 
A.& G 61. H. 66. — summa, svm, here a noun; the preceding rerum 
may be translated ilems — exat . . . milia; capitum, sow/s, rather than 
heads; a partitive gen. depending on milia. — ad milia; ad is here an 
adv. meaning about; note that fuerunt agrees with the predicate noun 
rather than with the subj.; see A. & G. 204, /£. H. 462; cf., however, 
summa erat milia, above. 


APPENDIX C. 


WORD-LISTS. 


> 


Words occurring in the “ Helvetian War ” which occur five or more times in the 
First Book of Caesar's ** Gallic War." 
While studying the later Lessons, this list should be repeatedly reviewed. 


-A Nouns. 
1. amicitia 4. copia 7. gratia 10. provincia 
2. Belgae 5. fortuna 8. iniüria ll. summa 
9. causa 6. Gallia 9. memoria 

-O Nouws. 
l. ager 12. colloquium 23. legatus 34. regnum 
9. amicus 13. consilium 94. Liscus 35. Rhenus 
3. animus 14. Divitiacus 95. locus 96. Rhodanus 
4. annus 15. equus 96. Lucius 37. Romanus 
5. arma 16. frümentum 27. Marcus 38. Séquani 
6. auxilium 17. Gallus 28. numerus 39. socius 
7. bellum 18. Germani 29. oppidum 40. solum 
8. beneficium 19. Haedui 30. pagus 41. telum 
9. carrus 20. Helvetii 31. periculum 42. Valerius 
10. castra 21. imperium 32. populus 
1l. concilium 22. Labienus 33. proelium 

3d DECLENSION NOUNS. 

1. agmen 11. finis 9]. mons 9l. pax 
2. Allobroges 19. flumen 22. multitudo 32. pés 
3. Caesar 13. frater 23. némoó 33. princeps 
4. civitas 14. homo 24. nihil 34. ratio 
5. consuetüdo 15. hostis 25. nox 35. salüs 
6. consul 16. iter 26. obses 36. tempus 
7. dicio 17:913 97. dratid 37. timor 
8. Dumnorix 18. legio 98. Orgetorix 38. virtüs 
9. eques 19. miles 29. pars 99. vis 
10. explorator 20. milia 90. pater 40. voluntàs 


APPENDIX C. 


401 


-U Novns. 
l. adventus 3. equitatus 5. impetus . passus 
2. domus 4. exercitus 6. manus . senatus 
-B Nouns. 
l. acies 2. diés 3. fides 4. rés 5. spés 
VERBS. 
ls? Conjugation (-À verbs). 
1. appellare 6. déspéràre 1l. itidicare 16. postulàre 
2. arbitrari 7. enüntiare 12. maudàre 17. pügnaàre 
3. comparare 8. existimare 13. nüntiare 18. putare 
4. confirmare 9. imperare 14. occupare 19. rogare 
9. dare 10. impetrare 15. perturbare 20. superare 
2d Conjugation (-& verbs). 
]. commovere 4. habére 7. obtinere 10. perterrere 13. respondere 
2. continere 5.iubére — 8. oportet ]l. polliceri — 14. tenere 
9. debere 6. licet 9. persuadere 12. prohibere 15. videre 
3d Conjugation (-e verbs). 
1. accidere 13. considere 91. iucolere 35. quaerere 
2. accipere 14. constituere — 25. instruere 36. queri 
3. addücere 15. consuescere 26. intellegere 37. recipere 
4. agere 16. contendere 27. intermittere — 38. redücere 
5. animadvertere — 17. deligere 98. mittere 39. relinquere 
6. capere 18. dicere 29. ostendere 40. revertere 
7. cogere 19. discedere 30. pati 4l. sequi 
8. cógnóscere 20. dividere 3l. pellere 42. statuere 
9. colloqui 21. dücere 32. perficere 43. tradticere 
10. committere 22. facere 33. petere 44. üti 
]1. conficere 23. gerere 34. proficisci 45. vincere 
12. conicere 
4th Conjugation (-1 verbs). 
1. audire 2. convenire 3. pervenire 4. reperire 9. venire 
Irregular Verbs. 
l. abesse 4. esse 7. inferre 10. praeesse 13. transire 
2. coepisse 9d. exire 8. ire 11>. referre 14. velle 
3. conferre 6. ferie 9. posse 12. tollere 


26 


402 INDUCTIVE LATIN PRIMER. 


Or HE QS WO oL 


tO 


ES 


ADJECTIVES. 


Positive degree. 


. alius 6. nonnüllus ll. reliquus 16. totus 

. alter 7. noster 12. Romanus 17. ullus 

. barbarus 8. omnis 13. suus 7 ^15 003 

. magnus 9. paucus 14. tantus 19. uter 

. multus 10. quartus 15. tertius 20. uterque 


Comparative degree. 


. amplior 2. gravior 3. maior 4. minor 68. plüs 6. superior 


Superlative degree. 


. nobilissimus 2. novissimus 3. plürimus 4. primus 5. proximus 6. summus 


ADVERBS. 


Positive degree. 


. ante 4. iam 7. neque 10. quam 13. tamen 
. cireiter 5. ibi 8. non ll. satis 14. tum 
. facile 6. ita 9. proptereà 12. tam 15. ubi, 
Comparative degree. 
i. amplius 2. gravius 3. minus 
Superlatwe degree. 
l. maxime 9. primum 
PRONOUNS. 

1. aliquis 4, ille 7s gui 

2. hic 5. ipse 8. quis (both indef. and inter.) 

3. idem 6. is 9. sui 

PREPOSITIONS. 
LH 4. apud 7. é 10. inter 13. pró 16. sub 
ab 5. cum Se Tex Tou 14. propter 17. traus 
. ad 6. de Ain 12. per 15. sine 
CONJUNCTIONS. 

l. ae 5. cum 9. nam 13. quod 

2. atque 6. dum 10. ne 14. sed 

3. aut 4. 7et 1l. -que 15. si 

4. autem 8. etiam 12. quin 16. ut 


LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 


NorE. — The following Vocabulary contains all the Lutin words found in the 
first twenty-nine Chapters of Caesar’s Gallic War. 

It has been considered not only unnecessary, but hurtful to the student constantly 
to repeat in the Vocabulary facts which he should already know, and facts which 
are governed by those simple rules, a knowledge of which is essential to even an 
elementary use of the language. The repetition of such facts blinds the pupil to 
the existence of the rules which govern them, and destroys that self-reliance which 
is necessary to success in sight reading. Accordingly, the pupil has not been told 
with every recurrence of a noun in -tas that its gen. is -tatis, or with every recur- 
rence of a verb in -àre that its pf. and partic. are in -Avit and -atus. Exceptions 
to regular rules are always given. If the gen. of a noun in -us is not given, it 
is to be considered a masc. of the -o declension. A SUMMARY TREATMENT OF 
THE GENDER AND DECLENSION OF ALL 3D DECL. NOUNS WILL BE FOUND IN 
Lesson LXII. 

A slight divergence from the usual method of giving the parts of verbs has been 
made. In the Text of Caesar, B. G. I. 1-29, neither the 1st sing. of the pres. ind. 
nor that of the pf. ind. is found at all. It would, then, be a serious departure from 
the inductive method to use these forms in giving the parts of every verb. Accord- 
ingly, the pres. ind. (except that of verbs in -io of the 3d conjug.) has been omitted, 
and the 3d sing. of the pf. has been used instead of the 1st singular. The pf. pass. 
or fut. act. partic. has been used as one of the principal parts instead of the supine. 
The objections to the use of the latter have been well stated by Mr. Tetlow in the 
Preface to his /nductive Lessons in Latin. The forms selected as the principal parts 
in this book are those which are universally given as such in English and German. 

In this connection it is not out of place to speak of the unfortunate convention by 
which the Ist sing. of the pres. ind. is used in naming verbs and in giving the prin- 
cipal parts. It seems only reasonable that a principal part should be a common 
form, and should show one of the stems of the verb. "The 1st sing. of the pres. ind. 
is almost unknown in the narrative authors usually read by beginners; and in the 
1st and 3d conjug. it does not «how the pres. stem. and, therefore, in naming verbs, 
the 1st and 3d conjugs. are entirely undistinguished. 

The words in parentheses are merely kindred with the leading word, and, in very 
many cases, are not the words from which this is derived. In so elementary a book, 
it has been thought unwise to discuss or use roots to any extent. 

The full-faced numerals after a definition refer to Chapters of the text in which 
the word occurs. Where but one of these numerals is given it indicates the Chapter 
in which the word first occurs. By means of these figures the pupil is supplied 
with the means of reviewing the USE of every word, and of examining once more 
whatever is said about it in the Lesson in which it first occurs. 


A. 404 


A; 


A.; see Aulus. 

a, ab, prep. with abl., from, by; 1; 
for use, cf. V. 

abdere, -didit, -ditus, to put away, 
hide ; 12. 

abdücere, -düxit, ductus, to lead 
away; 11. 

abesse, -fuit, futürus, fo be away 
or distant; 1. 

abstinere, -tinuit, -tentus, trans. 
and intrans., to keep from ; 22. 

ac, another form for atque; it is 
used only before consonants; 3. 

accédere, -cessit, -cessürus, to go 
to, approach, be added; accédit 
quod or ut, it is added that, more- 
over; 19. 

accidere, -cidit (ad and cadere, 
to fall), fall upon, fall out, happen 
(used generally of unfortunate oc- 
currences, hence Eng. accident); 14. 

accipere (accipio), -cépit, -cep- 
tus, to take to one's self, receive, 
accept ; 3. 

accurrere, -currit (or -cucurrit), 
to run to, run up ; 22. 

accüsáre (ad and causa), to call 
to account, blame, accuse ; 16. 

aciés, -61, a sharp edge, a sharp 
glance, a battle line (presenting 
sharp weapons); see p. 397; 22. 

acriter, sharply, fiercely; 26. 

ad, prep, to, toward, near; 1. 

addücere, -düxit, ductus, to lead 
to, draw to, induce; 3. 

adesse, -fuit, -futürus, to be near, 
be present, assist; 16. 

adficere ; see afficere. 

adfinitàs ; see affinitàs. 

adgredi; see aggredi. 

adhibere, to hold, summon, employ ; 
20. 

admirari, to wonder at, admire; 14. 

admittere, -misit, -missus, fo let 
go to, send to, allow; 22. 


altus 


adoriri, -ortus, to rise against, at- 
tack; 13. 

adsciscere, -scivit, -scitus, to take 
to one’s self, unite; 5. 

aduléscentia, youth; 20. 

adventus, -üs, a coming to, ap- 
proach ; 7. 

adversus (in form the pf. partic. of 
advertere), turned toward, in front 
of, adverse, unfavorable; 18. 

advertere, -vertit, -versus, to turn 
to or toward ; 24. 

aedificium, a building; 5. 

aegerrumé or aegerrime, adv. in 
sup., with the greatest trouble ; 13. 

Aemilius, a Roman name ; 23. 

aequare, to make equal; 25. 

afficere (adficio), -fécit, -fectus, 
to do to (somebody), affect; 2. 

affinitàs (finés), nearness, relation- 
ship by marriage; 18. 

ager, agri, field, territory ; 2. 

agere, egit, actus, fo set in motion, 
drive, do, discuss; 18. 

aggredi (aggredior), -gressus (ad 
and gradi), to go towards, attack ; 
12. 

agmen (agere), that which is set in 
motion, an army on the march, a line 
(of march); novissimum ag- 
men, the newest or last line, the 
rear; 15. 

alere, aluit, altus or alitus, to 
nourish, support; 18. 

alienus (alius), belonging to another, 
foreign, unfavorable ; 15. 

aliqui, indefinite adj., any ; 14. 

alius, -a, -ud (gen. -Ius, dat. -1), 
adj. or pron., one of any number, 
another ; 1. 

Allobroges, a-Gallic tribe in the 
Roman province ; 6, 10, 11, 14, 28. 

Alpes, the Alps; 10. 

alter, -era, -erum, adj. or pron., one 
of two, the other ; 2. 

altitüdo, height, depth; 8. 

altus, high or deep; 2. 


amicitia 


amicitia, friendship; 3. 

amicus, friend; 3. 

amittere, -misit, -missus, fo let (a 
thing) go away, send away, lose ; 28. 

amor (amare), love, desire; 20. 

Ambarri, a Gallic tribe; 11, 14. 

ample, largely, greatly; 23. 

amplus, ample, much, great; 15. 

anceps, -cipitis (ambo, both and 
caput, a head), having a head on 
both sides, double, doubtful; 26. 

angustiae, -àrum (angustus), nar- 
rowness, straits, a narrow pass ; 9. 

angustus, narrow ; 2. 

animadvertere (animum, ad, and 
vertere), to turn the mind or atten- 
tion to, notice (in this sense takes 
simple accus.); in hominem ani- 
madvertere, fo punish a man; 19. 

animus, «soul, mind, feeling, cour- 
age; 1. 

annus, a year; 3. 

annuus, annual, for a year; 16. 

ante, adv., and prep. with accus., 
before ; 3. 

antea, adv., before ; 17. 

antiquus (ante), old, ancient, for- 
mer; 18. 

aperire, -peruit, -pertus, fo un- 
coter, open; the partic. apertus is 
commonly used as a simple adj. 
meaning uncovered, open; 25. 

appellare, fo call (by name); 1. 

Aprilis (probably from aperire, 
to open), of the month of April, 
April; 6. 

apud, prep. with accus., among, near, 
with; 2. 

Aquiléia, a town at the head of the 
Adriatic Sea; 10. 

Aquitani, the Aquitanians; 1. 

Aquitània, Aquitania; 1. 

Arar or Araris (Ararim accus., 
and Arari abl., are found), the 
name of a Gallic river, the Sadne ; 
12. 

arbitrari, to judge, think; 2. 


405 


biennium 


arma, nom. plc. neut., armor, arms ; 
see pp. 228 and 238; 4. 

ascendere or adscendere, -scen- 
dit,-scensus (ad and scandere), 
to climb up, ascend ; 21. 

ascensus or adscénsus, -üs, a 
climbing up, ascent ; 21. 

atque, and, and also; 1. 

attingere (ad and tangere, to 
touch), -tigit, -tactus, to touch 
upon, reach; 1. 

auctoritas, advice, 
fluence ; 3. 

audácia (audax), 
dacity ; 18. 

audacter, boldly; 15. 

audére, ausus est, to dure; 18. 

augére, auxit, auctus, trans., to 
increase ; 18. 

Aulus, a Roman first, or individual, 
name; generally represented in 
Lat. authors by the initial A. ; 6. 

autwore ant 5. aut; ethers. 
Olgas 

autem, but, moreover; 2. 

auxilium, help, aid; in plur. aux- 
iliary troops; 11. 

avertere, -vertit, -versus, to turn 
away ; 16. 

avus, grandfather ; 12. 


authority, in- 


boldness, au- 


B. 


Belgae, the Belgians; 1. 

bellàre, to war, wage war; 2. 

bellicosus (bellum), warlike ; 10. 

bellum, war; 1. 

beneficium (bene, wel/, and fa- 
cere), well-doing, a favor ; 9. 

Bibracte (hasthe same form in nom., 
accus. and abl.) the name of a 
town; 23. 

biduum, the space of two days, two 
days: 23. 

biennium (bis, twice, and annus), 
the space of two- years; 3. 


bipartito 


bipartito, adv. (bis, twice, and 
pars), in two parts ; 25. 

Bituriges, a Gallic tribe; 18. 

Boii, à tribe which joined the Hel- 
vetians ; 5, 25, 28, 29. 

bonitàs, goodness; 28. 

bonus, good ; 6. 

brachium, the fore-arm, the arm; 25. 


C. 


C. ; see Caius. 

cadere, cecidit, castirus, to fall ; 
15. 

Caesar, -is, full name Gaius Iülius 
Caesar, a great Roman, — writer, 
general, statesman ; 7. 

Caius, more correctly written Gaius, 
a Roman first name, usually repre- 
sented by C.; 19. 

calamitas, disaster, calamity; 12. 

capere (capio), cepit, captus, fo 
take; 1 

captivus, a captive; 22. 

caput, itis, a head; 29. 

carrus, a cart; 3. 

Cassianus, adj., pertaining to Cas- 
sius; 193. 

Cassius, a Roman name ; 7, 12. 

castellum, a small fort, a castle; see 
p. 251; 8. 

Casticus, a noble Sequanian ; 3. 

castra, -orum (the sing. castrum, 
a fortress, is not found in Caesar), 
a camp; see p. 285; 12. 

casus, tis (cadere, fo fall), a falling, 
accident, misfortune, chance; 12. 

Catamantaloedés, -is, masc., a 
Gallic name; 3. 

Caturigés, an Alpine tribe ; 10 

causa, cause, reason; 1. 

cavere, cavit, cautus, to take care, 
beware of; 14. 

celeriter, adv. (celerius, celer- 
rimé), quickly ; 18. 

Celtae, the Celts; 1 


406 


colloqui 


cénsus, -üs (censere, to rcckon), a 
numbering or rating, a census; 29. 

Centronés, an Alpine tribe; 10. 

centum, indecl., one hundred ; 2. 


certus, sure, certain; hominem 
certiorem facere, to inform a 
man; '. 


cibarius, adj, pertaining to food ; 
cibaria, neut. plur. as noun, pro- 
visions ; 5. 

circiter, adv., about; 15. 

circuitus, -üs (circum and Ire), a 
going around, a circuit; 21 


circum, prep. with accus., «round, 
about; 10. 
circumvenire, -vénit, ventus, 


to come around, surround, impose 
upon, circumvent ; 25. 

citerior, adj. in comp. (positive not 
found), nearer, hither ; 10. 

citra, prep. with accus., on this side 
of; 12. 

civitas, citizenship, a state, the bod y- 
politic ; 2 

claudere, 
close; 25. 

cliens, a client, dependent ; 4. 

coémere (con and emere), -émit, 
-emptus, to buy up; 3. 

coepit, coepisse (he, she, it) began; 
it lacks the present system ; 15. 

coércere, to enclose on all sides, re- 
strain, coerce; 17. 

cogere, coégit, coactus (con, fo- 
gether, and agere, to drive, lead), 
to drive together, collect, compel; 4. 

cognoscere, cognovit, cognitus, 
to learn thoroughly ; cognovit, he 
has learned, he knows; 19. 

cohortari, to urge wali J, €n- 
courage : 25. 

colligàre, to fasten together; 25. 

collis, masc. by exception, a hill; 22. 

collocare, to place together, set up, 
establish; 18. 

colloqui, locütus, to confer, con- 
verse ; 19. 


clausit, clausus, to 


combirere 


comoürere, -büssit, -büstus, to 
burn up, consume ; 5. 

comme§are, to go back and forth, 
resort ; with ad, to visit; 1. 

commemorare, to call to mind, to 
mention; 14. 

committere, -misit, -missus, to 
cause to go together, commit, cause ; 
13, proelium committere, to 
join battle. 

commode, adv. (con and modus, 
a, measure), in due measure, conven- 
tently; 25. 

commonefacere (com-mone- 
facio), -fécit, factus, to bring to 
mind; also with accus. of the per- 
son, to remind, to impress upon; 
19. 

commovére, -moóvit, -motus, to 
move deeply ; 13. 

commiünrire, to fortify strongly; 8. 

comm ütare, to change entirely ; 23. 

comméütàtio (mütare, fo change), 
a changing, change; 14. 

comparare (con, intensive, and 
parare), to prepare with zeal; 3. 

comperire, -perit, -pertus, fo find 
out certainly (by searching) ; 22. 

complecti, -plexus, to embrace; 
20. 

complére, -plévit, -plétus, to jill 
out, complete ; 24. 

complüres (complüra or com- 
plüria, neut.), many, very many; 8. 

comportare, to bring together; 16. 

conari, to try ; 3. 

conatum, a thing attempted, an at- 
tempt, undertaking ; 3. 

conatus, -üs, an attempt ; 8. 

concédere, -cessit, -cessus, to go 
«away, yield ; 7. 

concidere, -cidit, -cisus (con, in- 
tensive, and caedere, to cut), to 
cut to pieces, kill; 12. 

conciliüre, to bring togeiher, win 
over ; 3. 

concilium, an assembly, council ; 18. 


407 


cOnsidere 


concursus, -üs (con and currere, 
to run), a running together; 8. 

condicio and, less correctly, con- 
ditio (condicere), an agreement, 
condition ; 28. 

condonare, to give up, pardon; 20. 

condücere, -düxit, -ductus, x 
bring together, hire ; 4. 

conferre, -tulit, collatus, fo bring 
together, collect, compare; 16; sé 
conferre, to betake one's self. 

confertus (confercire, to cram to- 
gether), pressed together, crowded ; 
24. 

conficere, -fécit, fectus (con and 
facere), to accomplish, complete; 3. 

confidere, -fisus est (with act. 
meaning), to trust fully, confide 
1:123: 

confirmare, to strengthen, establish, 
encourage, affirm ; 3. 

conicere or coniicere (cOnicio), 
iécit, -iectus, fo throw or put to- 
gether, conjecture, hurl with force ; 26. 

coniüratiO (con and iüráre, fo 
swear, take oath), a swearing to- 
gether, a conspiracy; 2. 

conligare ; see colligare. 

conquirere, -quisivit, -quisitus 
(con and quaerere), to search 
for ; 27. 

consanguineus, adj. or noun (con 
and sanguis, blood), akin by blood, 
a kinsman ; 11. 

consciscere, -sclvit, -scitus, to 
decree, determine; 4. 

conscius (con, with, and scire, to 
know), knowing with one's self or 
with others, conscious ; 14. 

conscribere, -scripsit, -scriptus, 
to write together, enroll ; 10. 

consequi, -seciitus, to follow up, to 
obtain ; 13. 

considere, -sédit, -sessürus, to 
sit down (used especially of a large 
number), to hold a session, to en- 
camp; 21. 


F 


Cónsidius 


Considius, a Roman name ; 21. 

consilium, a plan, 5. 

consistere, -stitit, (o take a stand, 
stop. 13. 

consolari, to console, comfort ; 20. 

conspectus, -üs (cOnspicere, to 
see), a sight , 11. 

conspicaàri, to get sight of, see; 25. 

constituere, -stituit, -stitütus, to 
set together, arrange, determine ; 3. 

consuéscere, -suévit, -suétus, to 
accustom one’s self; in pf. to have ac- 
customed one's self, to be wont ; 14. 

consul, consul, the title of one of the 
two chief executive officers at 
Rome: 2. 

consümere, -sümpsit, -sümptus 
(con, intensive, wholly, and sü- 
mere, (o take), to use up, con- 
Sume; 11. 

contendere, -tendit, -tentus, to 
stretch vigorously, strive, hasten ; 1. 

continenter, continually ; 1. 

continére, -tinuit, -tentus, to hold 
together, bound ; 1. 

contra, adv., and prep. with accus., 
against ; 18. 

contulérunt; see conferre. 

contumelia, effrontery, insult ; 14. 

convenire, -vénit, -ventus, to 
come together, to meet: 6 ; convenit, 
itis agreed, it is fitting. 

conventus, -üs, a coming together, 
a meeting ; 18. 

convertere, -vertit, -versus, to 
turn or wheel about; 93. 

convocare, to call together : 16. 

copia, plenty, a supply: 3; in plur. 
forces, troops: 2. 

copisésus, well-supplied, copious ; 23. 

cotidianus or quotidiànus, adj., 
daily: 1. 

cotidie or quotidie, adv., daily ; 
16. 

Crassus, a Roman name; M Cras- 
sus, a wealthy and influential 
Roman and friend of Caesar, 21. 


* 


408 


| 


1 


déicere 


creare, to make, to elect ; 16. 

cremare, to burn; 4. 

crescere, crévit, crétus, intrans., 
to grow, increase, 20, cf. the trans. 
augére. 

cultus, -üs, culture, way of living, 
civilization; 1. 

cum, prep. with abl., with, 1. 

cum (quum), conj., when, while, since, 
although ; 1. 

cupere (cupid), cupivit or -iit, 
cupitus, to long for, desire, be well- 
disposed toward (in the last sense 
it takes a dat.); 18. 

cupidé, eagerly; 15. 

cupiditàs, desire, cupidity ; 2. 

cupidus, desirous, fond; 2. 

ciirdre, to take care, 18. 

custos, -odis, a guard; 20. 


D. 


damnare, to condemn: 4. 

dare, dedit, datus, to give: 3 

de, prep. with abl., from, down from, 
concerning, for: 1 

débére, débuit, débitus (dé and 
habére, to have or keep, from some 
one), to owe, to be bound ; débet, 
he ought ; 11. 

decem, indecl, ten; 4. 

décipere (décipió), -cépit, -cep- 
tus, fo catch away, deceive; 14. 

decurio (decem), the commander 
of a company of ten cavalry, a 
decurion, 23. 

dedit; see dare. 

déditicius, one who has surrendered, 
a captive ; 27. 

deditio (dédere, to give up), a sur- 
render; 27. : 

defendere, -fendit, -fénsus, to 
ward off, to defend; 11. 

défessus (partic. of défetisci, to 
crack open), exhausted : 25. 

déicere or déiicere (déici6), 
jécit, iectus, to cast down: 8. 


deinde 


deinde (dé and inde), from thence, 
thereafter, next; 25. 


déliberare (dé and libràre, to 


weigh), to weigh well, ponder; 7. 
déligere, legit, lectus, to choose 
from, select; 3. 
déminuere, -minuit, -minütus 
(dé and minus), to lessen; 18. 
dém6nstrare, to show; 11. 


démum, adv., at last ; 17. 


dénique, adv. at last, finally; 22. 

déponere, -posuit, -positus, to 
place aside, lay aside; 14. 

dépopulari, to (ay waste; 11. 

déprecator (deprecari, to beg off, 
to intercede), an intercessor, media- 
tor; 9. 

désignare (signum, a mark), to 
mark out, point out, describe; 18. 

désistere, -stitit, -stitürus, to 
stand off, desist; 8. 

déspérare, to be hopeless, despair; 18. 

despicere (déspicis), -spéxit, 
-spectus, to look down upon, to 
despise ; 13. 

déstituere, -stituit, -stitütus, to 
set away from, abandon ; 16. 

déstringere, -strinxit, -strictus, 


to strip off; of a sword, to strip of 


the scubbard, unsheathe, draw; 25. 

déterrére, to frighten away from, to 
deter ; 17. 

deus, a god ; 12. 

dexter, -tera, -terum, or more fre- 
quently -tra, -trum, the right; 
dextra (manus, fem., the hand, 

being understood), the right hand ; 
20. | 

dicere, dixit, dictus, to say, tell ; 1. 

dictio (dicere), a saying, plead- 
ing; 4. 

didicit ; see discere. 

diés, -€1, masc., sometimes fem., day, 
time: 4. 

differre, distulit, dilatus, to bear 
apart, differ; 1. 


difficilis, difficult ; 6. 


409 


effeminare 


dimittere, misit, -missus, to send 
apart, dismiss; 18. 

discedere, -cessit, -cessürus, io 
go apart, depart ; 14. 

discere, didicit, to learn; 13. 

disicere or disiicere (disicio), 
jecit, -iectus, to cast apart: 25. 

disponere, -posuit, -positus, to 
place apart, place here and there; 8. 

ditissimus, richest ; 2. 

diü, adv., long (used of time, not of 
space); 14. 

diüturnus (dit), long (of time) ; 14. 

Divico, a Helvetian; 13, 14. 

dividere, -visit,-visus, to divide;1. 

Divitiacus, a Haeduan; 3, 16, 18, 
20. 

dolére, doluit, to feel pain, to grieve 
for; 14. 

dolor, pain, grief; 2. 

dolus, craft, deceit; 13. 

domus, -üs, fem. (has some forms 
of the -o decl.), a house, a home; 5; 
domi, at home. 

dubitare, to doubt, to hesitate ; 17. 

dubitatis, doubt ; 14. 

dubius, doubtful ; 3. 

ducenti (duo and centum), two 
hundred ; 2. 

dücere, düxit, ductus, to lead, 
draw, consider; 8. 

dum, conj., while, until ; 7. 

Dumnorix, igis, a Haeduan ; 3, 9, 
18-20. 

duo, duae, duo, irreg., two; 6. 

duodecim (duo and decem), in- 
decl., twelve; 5. 

dux, cis (dücere), a leader ; 13. 


E. 


6; 5; see ex. 

édiicere, -düxit, -ductus, to lead 
out; 10. 

efféminàáre, to make effeminate, ener- 
valer 


efferre 


efferre, extulit, élátus, to bear 
out ; 9. 

egit; see agere. 

ego, J; 14; see mihi, mé, nos. 

egredi (egredior), -gressus, to go 
out ; 27. 

égregius (8 and grex, -gis, a herd), 
out of the (common) herd, hence, 
eminent, excellent ; 19. 

emere, emit, emptus, to buy ; 16. 

émittere, -misit, -missus, to let go 
forth, send out ; 25. 

enim, for: placed generally after the 
first word of the clause ; 14. 

énüntiàre, to speak out or openly, 
make known; 4. 

ed; see ire. 

eO, adv., to that place, thither; 25. 

eodem, adv., to the same place; 4. 

eques, equitis (equus, a horse), a 
horseman, a knight; see p. 321; 
15. 

equester, equestris, equestre, 
adj, belonging to a horseman, 
cavalry; 18. 

equitatus, -üs, « collection of horse- 
men, cavalry ; 15. 

equus, a horse ; 22. 

eripere (eripio), ripuit, -reptus, 
to snatch away ; 4. 

esse (sum), fuit, futürus,!o le; 1. 

et, and; 1; et... et, both .. . and. 

etiam, even, also; 1. 

évellere, -vellit, -vulsus, to tear 
out; 25. 

ex or 6, prep. with abl., out of, from ; 
2; exis used before both vowels 
and consonants, 8 only before con- 
sonants. 

excipere, (-cipió), -cépit, ceptus, 
to take out, to catch up, to re- 
ceive ; 25. 

exemplum, cn example ; 8. 

exercitus, -üs, an exercised and 
disciplined body, an army ; see p. 
269; 3. 

exire, -iit, itum, to go out; 2. 


410 


fieri 


existimáre (ex and aestimare), to 
estimate, think; 6. 

existimátió (existimare), estima- 
tion, opinion ; 20. 

expedire, to set free from (some- 
thing); the pf. pass. partic. is 
commonly used like an adj. in all 
respects, and means unencumbered, 
without baggage, open; 6. 

explorator (explordre, to search 
out), a spy, a scout ; 12. 

expügnare, to take by storm ; 11. 

exsequl, -secütus, to follow out, 
follow up, enforce, 4. 

exspectare, to wait fur, expect; 11. 

extra, prep. with accus., beyond ; 10. 

extremus, outermost, extreme, the 
end of; 1. 

exürere, -üssit, -üstus, to burn out. 
burn up, 5. 


F. 


facere (facio), fécit, factus, tc 
make or do; 2. 

facile, adv., easily ; 2. 

facilis (facere), capable of being 
done, easy; 6. 

facultàs, opportunity ; T. 

fames, -is, hunger ; 28. 

familia, a body of slaves, household, 
retinue; 4. 

familiaris (familia), belonging to 
the household, private, intimate ; 18; 
as noun, a friend ; 19. 

favére, favit, fautürus, to favor; 
takes dat of person; 18. 

fere, adv., almost ; 1. 

ferre, tulit, látus, irreg , to bear; 
13. 

ferrum, iron; 25. 

fidés, -et, faith, a promise, a promise 
of protection, protection ; 3. 

fieri, factus, to be made, to be done, 
to happen : used as pass. of simple 
verb facere, but not when facere 


filia 


is compounded with a preposi- 
tion; 2. 

filia, daughter ; 3. 

filius, son; 3. 

finis, masc. by exception, the end ; 
in plur. boundaries, territory ; 1. 

finitimus (fines), bordering upon, 
neighboring ; plur. as noun, neigh- 
bors; 2. 

firmus, firm, strong; 3. 

flagitare, to «sk repeatedly or ear- 
nestly : 16. 

flere, flevit, flétus, to weep ; 20 

fluere, flüxit, fluxus, to flow, 6 

flümen, a river; 1. 

fortis, brave; 1. 

fortitüdo (fortis), bravery; 2. 

fortüna, fortune (either good or bad); 
in plur goods, possessions ; 11. 

fossa, that which has been dug, a 
ditch ; 8. 

fráter, -tris, brother; 3 

fráternus, of a brother, 
fraternal ; 20 

frigus, -oris, cold, coldness ; 16. 

früctus, -üs (frul, to enjoy), enjoy- 
ment, what one enjoys, fruit ; 28. 

frümentáürius (frümentum), be- 
longing to grain, fruitful; 10 

frümentum, grain; 3. 

fuga, flight ; 11 

fugitivus, a runaway, deserter , 23. 

fuit; 2; see esse. 


brotherl y, 


G. 


Gabinius, a Roman name, 6. 

Gaius ; see Caius. 

Gallus, a AF. 1 

Gallia, Gaul ; 

Gallicus, Eo 22. 

Garumna, masc., the Garumna ; 1. 

Gendva or Genua, Geneva; 6. 

gerere, gessit, gestus, fo carry on, 
wage, do ; 1. 

Germàni, the Germans; 1. 


411 


Idem 


gladius, a sword ; see p. 335; 25. 

gloria, glory ; 2. 

gloriari, to boust, glory ; 14. 

Graecus, adj., Greek; as a noun, 
a Greek; 29. 

Graiocell, an Alpine tribe; 10. 

gratia, fuvor either shown or re- 
ceived, hence, either kindness or 
popularity ; 9. 

graviter, heavily, severely: gravi- 
ter ferre, to bear heavily, be an- 
noyed at, be angry at; 14. 


H. 


habére, to have, hold; 2. 

Haeduus, « Hueduan; 3. 

Helvétius, adj. or noun, Helvetian, 
of the Helvetians, an Helvetian ; 1. 

hibernus (hiems, winter), belonging 
to winter; hiberna, -orum (with 
castra understood), winter quar- 
ters; 10. 

hic, haec, hoc, this ; 1 

hiemare, to pass the winter, winter ; 
10. ) 

Hispania, Spain: 1. 

homo, -inis, a human being, man ; 2. 

honor, honor, office ; 18. 

hora, an iud. 26. 

hortàri, to urge ; 19. 

hostis, a stranger, an enemy; in 
plur. the enemy: 11. 

hümaünitàs, refinement ; 1. 


I 


iactare, to throw about; when used 
of words, to discuss ; 18. 

iam, adv., at this time (as contrasted 
with the past or future), at last, 
alread y ; 5 

ibi, there: 10; cf. ubi, where, when. 

ictus, -üs (icere, strike), a blow ; 25. 

idem, eadem, idem, the same; 3. 


Idüs 


Idüs, uum, fem. by exception, the 
Ides, the 13th of the month, except 
in March, May, July, and Oct., 
when they came on the 15th; 7. 

ierant, for Iverant, from ire. 

Ignis, masc. by exception, fire; 4. 

ignorare (in neg. and root of (g)n6s- 
cere), not to know, be ignorant ; 27. 

ille, illa, illud, that; used of what 
is remote in contrast to what is 
near; 3. 

illic (ille), in that place, there, yon- 
der ; 18. 

immortalis (in neg. and mors), 
undying, mortal ; 12. 

impedimentum (impedire), that 
which impedes, a hindrance ; in plur. 
the heavy baggage of an army (in- 
cluding the beasts which drew it) ; 
24, cf. sarcinae. 

impedire, pedivit, -peditus (in, 
against, and pes, foot), to impede, 
to place at a disadvantage; 12. 

impendeére, no pf. nor pf. partic., 
intrans., to orerhang , 6. 

imperare, fo command ; provinciae 
milites imperdare, to give orders 
to the province for soldiers, to levy 
soldiers upon the province ; 7. 

imperium, supreme power ; 2. 

impetrare, to obtain one’s request, 9. 

impetus, -tis (in prep. and petere), 
an attack; 22. 

importare, to bring in, import; 1. 

improbus, beyond or below the proper 
standard, base, excessive, wicked ; 17. 

improviso, adv. (in neg., pro, Le- 
fore, fore, visus, seen), unex- 
pectedly , 13. 

impüne, adv., without punishment, 
with impunity; 14. 

impünitàs, /mpunity ; 14. 

in, prep., into, with accus.; in, with 
aL T. 

incendere, -cendit, -cénsus, to set 
jire to; cf. combürere; 5. 

incitàre, to urge on, incite; 4. 


412 


insolenter 


incolere, -coluit (in prep. and co- 
lere, to cultivate), to inhabit; in- 
trans., to dwell ; 1 

incommodus, inconvenient; as a 
noun in the neut., an inconvenience, 
a mild term for misfortune ; 13. 


incredibilis (in neg. and crédere. 


to believe), not to be believed, in- 
credible, remarkable ; 12. 

inde, from that place, thence; cf. ibi, 
there; 10. 

indicium, information ; 4. . 

indücere, -dixit, -ductus, to lead 
into, induce ; 2. 

inferior, lower ; 1. 

inferre, intulit, illatus, to bear 
into or upon, to wage upon, to bring, 
or inflict, upon ; 2. 

inflectere, -fléxit, 
bend ; 25. 

influere, -flüxit, fluxürus, to flow, 
or flow into; 8. 

inimicus (in neg. and amicus), 
unfriendly ; 7. 

initium, beginning ; 1.. 

initiria, injustice, wrong; 7. 

iniüssü, found only in abl., without 
command ; 19. 

inopia (in neg. and ops, help; cf. 
copia, from con and ops), want, 
scarcity, helplessness; 27. 

inopinans, adj, wnexpecting, un- 
aware, 12. 

inscieéns (in neg. and scire, fo 
know), simple adj, though pres. 
partic. in form, not knowing, un- 
aware; 19. 

insequi, -seciitus, to follow up; 15. 

insidiae, nom. plur. (in, im, and 
sedére, to sit), an ambush, treach- 
ery; 13. 

insignis (in, upon, and signum, a 
mark), marked, remarkable; 12; 1n- 
signe, neut. as noun, a mark, badge 
of office, uniform; 22. : 

insolenter (in neg. and solére, to be 
accustomed ), strangely, insolentl y ; 14. 


-flectus, fo 


Instare 


instare, -stitit, statirus, to stand 
upon, to approach, to be near at 
hand, to press upon; 16. 

_Instituere, -stituit, -stitutus, to 
arrange, construct, instruct ; 14. 

institütum, custom, institution ; 1. 

instruere, -struxit, -structus, to 
build into, set in order, draw up; 
22. 

intellegere or -ligere, -léxit, 
8ctus (inter, letween, and le- 
gere, to choose), to understand, lo 
know; 10. 

inter, prep. with accus., 
among , 1. 

intercedere, -cessit, .cessürus, 
to go between, interrene ; T. 

interclüdere, -clisit, -clüsus 
(inter, between, and claudere, to 
shut), to shut off, cut off; 23. 

interdiü, adv., by day; 8 

interdum, adv., sometimes; 14. 

intereà, adv., meanwhile ; 8 

interesse, fuit, -futtirus, to be be- 
tween or among, to take part in; 15, 
interest, it makes a difference, it 
interests. 

interficere (interficis), 
fectus, to kill; 12 

interim, meanwhile; 16. 

intermittere, -misit, -missus, fo 
cause to go between, leave off, in- 
terrupt ; 26 

internecio, 
tion ; 13. 

interpres, -etis, an interpreter ; 19. 

intervallum (inter, between, and 
"vallum, the breastwork of a camp), 
a distance between, an interval; 
22. 

intulit; see inferre. 

invitus, unwilling: 8. 

ipse, ipsa, ipsum, intensive or em- 
phatic pron., se/f; 1 

ire (e6, J go), 1vit, itum, to go; 6. 

is, ea, id, dem. pron., this, that; he 
she, it; 1. 


between, 


-fécit, 


destruction, extermina- 


413 


lacus 


ita, adv., so; 11. 

Italia, Jialy ; 10. 

itaque, and so, therefore; 9. 

item, adv., likewise, also, 3 

iter, itineris, neut., journey, route, 
march ; 3 

iubére, iüssit, iussus, to order ;. 5 

iüdicare, to judge; 12. 

iüdicium, a judgment, a trial, a 
court of justice ; 4. 

iugum, that which joins, a yoke (con- 
quered armies, in token of sub- 
mission, were often compellel to 
pass under a yoke consisting of a 
spear set on two uprights, cf. Eng. 
subjugate) ; a (yoke-shaped) hill, a 
ridge, 7 

iimentum, a yoke or draught animal, 
beast of burden; 3 

iungere, iunxit, iunctus, to join; 8. 

Iüra, a mountain chain extending 
from the Rhone to the Rhine; 2. 

itis, iüris, right, law, justice; 4. 

iüsiürandum (really two words, 
ius and iürandum, and declined 
as two), an oath ; 3. 

iüstitia (iüstus, just), justice, sense 
of justice, uprightness ; 19. 

iuvare, iüvit, iütus, to help; 26; 
iuvat, impersonal, it pleases. 


RS 


Kalendae, -arum, the Calends, the. 
Jirst day of a month; 6. 


L. 


L.; see Lücius. 

Labiénus, a lieutenant of Caesar; 
10, 21. 

lacessere, lacessivit or lacessiit, 
lacessitus, to provoke, assail ; 15. 

lacrima, a tear; 20. 

lacus, -üs, a lake; 2. 


largiri 


largiri, largitus, to give bountifully, 
give bribes ; 18. 

largiter, largely, bountifully ; 18. 

largitio, lavish giving, bribery, lber- 
ality ; 9. 

late, widely ; 2. 

laàtitüdo, width ; 2. 

Latovici, a Germanic tribe which 

joined the Helvetians ; 5, 28, 29. 

latus, wide, broud ; 2. 

latus, -eris, a side; 25. 

latus, pf. pass. partic. of ferre. 

legatio, embassy; 3; cf. legatus, 
ambassador. 

légatus, lieutenant, ambassador ; 7. 

legio, a legion; the Roman legion 
was à body of soldiers, numbering 
in the army of Caesar about 3600 
men; 7. 

Lemannus, the name of a lake, 
Leman or Geneva; 2. 

lénitas (lenis, smooth), smoothness, 
gentleness ; 12. 

léx, legis, /aw: 1. 

liberalitàs (liber, free), the quality 
of a freeman, generosity ; 18. 

liberé (from adj. liber), freely ; 18. 

liberi (the sing., meaning child, not 
found), children; 11. 

libertas, freedom, liberty ; 17. 

licéri, fo bid (at an auction) ; 18. 

licet, it is permitted ; e licet, it is 
permitted to him, he may ; T. 

Lingones (has a Greek accus. Lin- 
gonas), a Gallie tribe living near 
the head-waters of the Seine, 26. 

lingua, a tongue, language; 1. 

linter, -tris, fem. by exception, a 
boat ; 12. 

Liscus, a Haeduan ruler; 16, 17, 18. 

littera or litera, « written sign, a 
letter of the alphabet ; in plur. letters, 
a letter (epistle), literature ; 26. 

locus, a place ; loca, nom. plur. (as 
if from nom. sing. locum); 2. 

longe, adv., far ; 1. 

longitüdo, length ; 2. 


411 


medius 


loqui, locütus, to speak, 20. 

Lücius, a Roman first name, usually 
represented by L.; 6. 

lux, lücis, liyht ; 22. 


M. 


M.; see Marcus. 

magis (comp. of magnopere), more ; 
13. 

magistratus, -üs, a civil office, « 
civil officer, magistrate; 4. 

magnopere, adv. (magno and 
opere), with great toil, greatly ; 13 ; 
magis, comp., more, 13, max. 
ime, sup., very greatly, most, espe- 
cially ; 3. 

magnus, great, large; 2. 

maior (comp. of magnus), greater ; 
maiores nati or simply mà- 
idrés, those greater by birth, an- 
cestors, elders, 13. 

maleficium (male, badly, and fa- 
cere), wrong-doing, an evil deed ; 7. 

mandare (manus, and dare), to 
give into one’s hand, commit; 12. 

manus, -üs, fem. by exception, a 
hand, an armed force (as the instru- 
ment by which war is waged) ; 25. 

Marcus, a Roman first, or individual, 
name, usually represented by the 
initial M. ; 2. 

matara, a juvelin used by the Gauls; 
26. 

mater, -tris, mother; 18. 

matrimonium, marriage; 3. 

Matrona, masc., the Matrona ; 1. 

mattrare, to hasten; 7. 

mátürus, ripe, early ; 16. 

maxime, very greatly, most, es- 
pecially ; 3. 

maximus, irreg. superlative of 
magnus, greatest; 3. 

mé, accus. or abl, me; 14; see ego. 

medius, adj., the middle of ; 24 ; cf. 
the meaning of summus and ex- 
trémus. 


memoria 


memoria, memory ; 7. 

ménsis, -is, masc. by exception, a 
month ; 5. 

mercátor, merchant ; 1. 

meréri, meritus, to merit, deserve, 
earns 

meritum (meréri), desert, merit ; 
14. 

Messàla, masc., a Roman name; 2. 

métiri, mensus, (o measure; 16. 

mihi, dat., me ; 14; see ego. 

militaris (miles), be/onging to a 
soldier, military ; 21. 

miles, itis, so/dier ; see pp. 238 and 
364; T. J 

mille, the nom. plur. is milia or 
millia (in sing. usually an indecl. 
adj.; in plur. a neut. noun), a 
thousand ; 2. 

minimé, adv. in superlative, least, 
by no means; 13; cf. minus. 

minimus (irreg. superlative of par- 
vus), least, very small ; 8. 

minor (comp. of parvus), smaller, 
less ; 14. 

minuere, minuit, minütus (mi- 
nus), to lessen; 20. 

minus, adv. in comp.,/ess; minime, 
superlative, least; 2. 

mittere, misit, missus, to let go, 
send ; 7. 

modo, adv., only : 16. 

molere, moluit, 
grind; 5. 

monére, to remind, warn, advise ; 20. 

mons, masc. by exception, a moun- 
tum: 

morari, trans. or intrans., fo delay ; 
26, distinguish mori, to die. 

mori (rarely moriri) mortuus, to 
die; 4. 

mors, death ; 4. 

mos, moris, masc., custom; in plur. 
customs, manners, character ; 4. 

movere, movit, motus, to move ; 
15. 

mulier, -is, a woman; 29. 


molitus, to 


415 


nolle 


multitüdO, a great number, multi- 
tude; 2. 

multus, much; plur many; 3; plüs, 
comp. (neut.); plürimus, super- 
lative. 

münire (moenia, walls), to wall, to 
fortify ; 24. 

münitiO, a fortifying, fortification ; 8. 

muürus, a wall; 8. 


N. 


nam, conj., for; 12. 

Wamméius, a noble Helvetian ; 7. 

natura, nature, disposition ; 2. 

navis, a ship, a boat; 8. 

né, conj. that . . . not, not to; after 
words of fearing, that, lest ; 4. 

nec, 20; see neque. 

necessarius, necessary : as noun, a 
close friend or near relative ; 11. 

negare, (o say . . . not, to deny; 8. 

némo, némini dat. (n6 and homo), 
no man, no one; 18; the gen. and 
abl. sing. of this word are supplied 
by nüllius and nüllóo. 

neque or nec, adv and conj. and 
not; neque... neque, neither 
oe nor; 4. 

nervus, a sinew, tendon, nerve; in 
plur. power, strength ; 20. 

néve or neu (né, and ve, or), or 
not ; 26. : 

nex, necis, death, especially a violent 
death ; 16. 

nihilum, nothing; nihil, the indecl. 
form, is more common; 5. 

nisi, if not, unless ; 22. 

niti, nisus, or nixus, to rest upon, 
rely upon, strive; 13. 

nobilis, well-known, high-born, noble 
by birth; 2. 

nobilitas, nobility; cf. nobilis, high- 
born; 2. 

noctü, adv., by night ; 8. 

nolle, noluit (n8 and velle), to be 
unwilling; 16. 


nomen 


nomen, a name; 13. 

nominatim, adv., by name, 29. 

non, adv, not; 3. 

nonaginta, ninety; 29. 

nondum, not yel; 6. 

nonnüllus, not none, some; 6. 

16nnumquam, nol never, sometimes , 
8; cf. nónnüllus. 

Noréia, a town in the territory of 
the Noricans, who lived in a part 
of what is now Austria; 5. 

Noricus, of ihe Noricans, Noric; 5. 

nos, nom oraccus. plur., we orus ; 13. 

noster, tra trum, our; 1. 

novem, indecl., nine: 8. 

novus, new ; novae rés, new things, 

. revolution; 9. 

nox, noctis, night, 26. 

nübere, nüpsit, nüptus, to veil 
one's seif, hence, to marry (said of 
the woman); 18; Marco nübere, 
to veil one's self for Marcus, marry 
Marcus. 

nüdus, naked, unprotected ; 25. 

nüllus (gen. ius, dat. I), adj. (n6, 
not, and üllus, any), not any, no, 
none; 7. 

num, interrogative particle; in direct 
questions ex pects a neg. answer ; 14. 

numerus, à number; 3. 

nuntiare, to announce ; 7. 

nüntius (perhaps akin to novus), 
new), a bearer of news, messenger. 
news ; 26. 

nüper, recently; 6. 


O. 


Ob. prep with accus., on account of ; 
in composition,. in the way cf, 
against , 4. 

obaeratus, one bound to service for 
debt, a debtor; 4 

Obicere or iicere (obicio), -iécit, 
-iectus, to throw in the way or 
against ; 26. 


416 


ops 


oblivisci, -litus, to forget; takes 
gen. ; 14. 

obsecrare (ob and sacrum, sa- 
cred), to ask on religious grounds, 
to beseech ; 20. 

obses, obsidis, a hostage ; hostages 
were human beings given by one 
person or nation to another, in 
order to guarantee the fultilment 
of an agreement; if the agreement 
was broken, the hostages might be 
kiiled ; 9. 

obstringere, -strinxit, -strictus, 
to bind ; 9. 

obtinere, -tinuit, -tentus, to ho/d, 
possess, occupy ; 1. 

occasus, -üs, a falling, setting: 1. 

occidere, -cidit, -cisus (ob and 
caedere, to cut), to cut down, 
kills. 

occultare, to conceal ; 27. 

occupare, to seize, take possession 
of; 3. 

Oceanus, the ocean; 1. 

Ocelum, a town in Cisalpine Gaul; 
10. 

octo, indecl, eight; 21. 

octodecim, indecl, eighteen ; 23. 

octoginta, indecl., eighty; 2. 

oculus, aneye; 12. 

odisse, Odit, to hate, found only in 
the pf. system, and in the pf. is 
pres. in sense; 18. 

offendere, fendit, -fénsus, to hit 
against, stumble, blunder, offend ; 19. 

offensio (offendere), a striking 
against, a stumbling, offence ; 19. 

omnino, adv., altoyether, in all; 6. 

omnis, al/, every; 1. 

oportet, impersonal verb, it is neces- 
sary, it behooves ,.4. 

oppidum, a stronghold, town; 5. 

oppügnaàre, to fight against, storm, 
besiege; 5. 

(ops) opis (no nom. or dat. sing.), 
help, ability ; in plur. means. re- 
sources ; 20. 


“opus 


opus, -eris, a work, piece of work ; 8. 

Ordre, to entreat, beg ; 20. 

Gratis, a speech, oration; 3. 

Orgetorix, -igis, an  Helvetian 
chief; 2. 

oriens, adj., rising; 1. 

oriri, ortus, to rise; 1. 

ostendere, ostendit, ostentus 
(obs for ob, and tendere, tv 
stretch), to stretch in the way of, 
show; 8. 


P. 


pabulatio (pabulari), a getting of 
food, a foraging; 15. 

pabulum (pàscere, to feed, pas- 
ture), that which feeds, food, espe- 
cially for animals, fodder ; 16. 

pacare, to pacify, to subdue ; 6. 

paene, a/most ; 11. 

págus, canton, district ; 12. 

par, paris, adj., equal; 28. 

parare, to make ready, prepare; 5. 

parátus (pf. pass partic. of parare), 
prepared, ready ; 5. 

párére, to appear at call (as a serv- 
ant), to obey. takes dative, 27. 

pars, part, direction; 1. 

parvus (minor, minimus), little, 
small; 18. 

passus, -üs, a pace: the Roman 
mile was a thousand paces, and the 
Roman (double) pace was a little 
less than five feet, 2. 

pater, -tris, father; 3. 

patére, patuit, fo lie open, extend; 2. 

pati, passus, to endure, permit; 6. 

pauci (sing very rare), few ; 15. 

pax, pacis, peace; 3. 

pellere,pepulit, pulsus, to drive; 7. 

per, prep. with accus., through ; 3. 

perdücere, -dixit, -ductus, to 
lead through, draw out, prolong, 
extend ; 8. 

perfacilis, very easy ; 2. 

perficere. (perficio), -fécit, -fec- 
tus, to accomplish, finish; 3. 


417 


plirimum 


perfringere (per and frangere, to 
break), -frégit, fractus, to break 
through ; 25. 

perfuga, masc. by meaning, a run- 
away, deserter; 28, 

perfugere (perfugio), -figit, to 
run away, desert; 27. 

periculum, that which 
peril; 5. 

peritus (periri, to try), experienced, 
skilled ; 21. 

permovére, -movit, -motus, Jo 
move thoroughly or deeply, to in- 
fluence strongly; 3. 

pernicies, -61 (nex), destruction; 
20. 

perpaucus, very 
very few; 6. 

perrumpere, -rüpit, -ruptus, fo 
break through; 8. 

persequi, -secütus, to follow up, 
pursue; 13. 

persevérare, to continue, persist ; 13. 

persolvere, -solvit, -solütus, fo 
loose thoroughly, to pay in full; 12. 

persuadere, persuasit, persua- 
sum, /o persuade; 2. 

perterrére, to frighten thoroughly: 
18. 

pertinére, -tinuit, stretch out, tend, 
pertain; 1. 

pervenire, -vénit, -ventum, to 
come through, arrive ; 7. 

pés, pedis, a foot of man or beast, 
and also the measure of length, 8. 

petere, petivit, petitus, to aim at, 
seek ; 19. 

phalanx, -gis, a close battle array, a 
phalanx; 24. 

pilum, a heavy javelin; see p. 378; 
25. 

Piso, a Roman name ; 2, 6, 12. 

plébs, plébis, plebeians, common 
people; 3. 

plürimum, adv. (irreg. superlative 
of multum), very much, most, espe- 
cially ; 3. 


tests, a 


little, in plur. 


plürimus 


plürimus, (irreg. sup. of multus), 
very much, most; in plur, very 
many. 

plüs, plüris (neut. comp. of multus 
adj., and comp. of multum, adv.), 
more; in plur. plüres masc. and 
fem., plüra, neuter (gen. plüri- 
um); 17 

poena, punishment, penalty ; 4. 

pollicéri pollicitus, to promise; 14. 

ponere, posuit, positus, to place ; 
16. 

pons, masc. by exception, a bridge; 6. 

populari, to (ay waste: 11. 

populàátio (populari), a laying 
waste, ravaging; 15. 

populus, people; 3. 

portare, to carry; 5. 

portorium (portàre), a tar, espe- 
cially a tax paid on goods im- 
ported, a duty: 18. 

poscere, poposcit, to ask urgently ; 
demand ; 27. 

posse, potuit (potis, able, and 
esse), to be able; 2. 

possessiO, a possession ; 11. 

post, prep. with accus, and adv., 
after, behind: 5. 

postea, adv., after that, afterwards ; 
21. 

posterus (post), coming after, fol- 
lowing: 15. 

postquam, conj. /ater than, after, 
as soon as, 24. 

postridie. adv. (posterus and 
diés , cf. pridié), on the day after ; 
postridie eius diel, on the day 
after this day, on the following day; 
23. 

potens, being able, powerful: 3. 

potentia (poténs), power; 18. 

potestàs (posse), power, lawful au- 
thority ; 16. 

potiri, potitus, to obtain, 
abl 9! 

praecédere, -cessit, -cessus, to 
precede, surpass; 1. 


takes 


418 


pridié 


praecipere (praecipio), -cépit, 
-ceptus, to take oeforehand, to 
anticipate, to give rules, instruct, 
direct ; 22. 

praeesse, -fuit, to le over, to com- 
mand; 16; cf. praeficere, to put- 
in command; 10. - 

praeferre, -tulit, -latus, to bear bc- 
fore, prefer, choose ; 17. 

praeficere  (praeficio), -fécit, 
fectus, fo put before, set over, put 
in command ; 10. 

praemittere, -misit, -missus, to 
send before; 15. 

praeoptare, to choose rather, prefer ; 
25. 

praeséns (in form, a partic. from 
praeesse), present; 18. 

praesentia (prae and esse), a being 
present, presence ; in praesentia, 
at present; 15. 

praesertim, especially; 16. 

praesidium, a sitting before, a 
guard, garrison ; 8. 

praestare, -stitit, status, to stand 
before, excel, furnish; praestat, it 
is better; 2. 

praeter, prep. with accus., along by, 
beyond, except; 11. 

praeterire, iit, itus, fo go by, pass 
by; praeterita, things gone by, the 
past : 20. 

praeterquam, adv, further than, 
beyond, besides ; 5. 

praetor (prae and ire), a leader, 
praetor, judge, governor; 21. 

precés (the nom. sing. prex not in 
use), prayers, requests; 16. 

prendere (also written prehen- 
dere), prendit, prénsus, (9 
grasp; 20. 

pretium, a price; 18. 

pridié, adv. (primus and diés ; cf. 
postridié), on the day before; 
pridie eius diéi, on the day be- 
fore this day, on the preceding day; 
23. 


primum 


primum, adv. in the first place, 
Jirst ; 25. 

primus, first; 10. 

princeps, -cipis, adj. 
chief; 7. 

principátus, -üs, leadership; 3. 

pristinus, former ; 13. 

prius, adv. in comp., sooner ; 18. 

priusquam or prius... quam, 
conj., sooner than, before; 19. 

privátim, privately, as a private citi- 
zen; 17. 

privatus, belonging to an individual, 
private; 5. 

pro, prep. with abl, in front of, in 
behalf of, instead of, for, in propor- 
tion to ; 2. 

probare, to test, prove, approve; 3. 

Procillus; see Valerius. 

prodere, -didit, -ditus, to put 
forth, to betray; transmit, hand 
down; 13. 

proelium, battle; 1. 

profectio, a setting out, departure ; 3. 

proficisci, fectus (pro and fa- 
cere, to make forward, make head- 
way), set out, depart; 3. 

prohibére, to keep away, prevent, 
check; 1. 

proicere or -iicere (proicio), 
écit, -iectus, to throw before or 
forth, fling away ; 27. 

prope, adv., and prep. with accus., 
near; 22, superlative proximé. 

propellere, -pulit, -pulsus, to 
drive before ; 15. 

propinquus, near; as noun, a rela- 
tive; 16. 

proponere, -posuit, -positus, to 
put or set forth, declare ; 17. 

propter, prep. with accus., on ac- 
count of; 9. 

propterea, adv., for this reason; 1. 

prospicere (pr6spiciG), -spéxit, 
-spectus, to look forward, look out 
for; 23. 

provincia, province; 1. 


or noun, 


419 


quidem 


proxime, aáv., latest, last, next ; 24. 

proximus, nearest; 1. 

publicé, by public authority; 10. 

publicus, public; 12. 

Publius, a Roman first name, usually 
represented by the initial P.; 21. 

puer, -eri, a child, boy; 29. 

pügna, a fight ; 25. 

pügnare, to fight: 25. 

pulsus; see pellere. 

pürgare, to make clear, clear; 28. 

putare, to think; 7. 

Pyrénaeus, Pyrenean, of the P yre- 
nees; 1. 


Q. 


qua, where; 6 

quadraginta, indecl. adj., forty, 2. 

quadringenti, adj, four hundred; 
5; cf. quadraginta, indecl., forty. 

quaerere, quaesivit or iit, quae- 
situs, to seek; 18; cf. queri, to 
complain; 16. 

quàális, adj., of what sort ; 21. 

quam, adv. and conj., how, as, than; 
with superlative denotes the highest 
possible degree; 3. 

quantus, adj (quam, how), how 
great, as much as ; 17 ; aftertantus 
(so great), quantus may be trans- 
lated as. 

qu&re (quà and r8), on account of 
which thing, wherefore; 13. 

quartus, fourth; 12. 

quattuor, indecl. four; 12. 

quattuordecim, indecl, fourteen; 
29. 

-que, conj., and; enclitic; 1. 

queri, questus, to complain; 16. 

qui, quae, quod, who, which, what ; 
1; also interrogative adj.; 15. 

quidem, indeed ; in Caesar mostly 
in the phrase n8... quidem, 
enclosing the emphatic word ; thus 
né Caesar quidem, not even 
Caesar ; 16. 


quin 


quin, conj. ; when used with the ind , 
but, nay more, in fact ; 17 ; when 
used with the subjv., that, but that, 
that not ; 3. 

quindecim (quinque and de- 
cem), indecl., fifieen ; 15. 

quingenti, five hundred ; 15. 

quini, distributive, five to each, five 
at a time ; 15. 

quinque, five; 10. 

quintus, //i/?h ; 6. 

quis, quae, quid, indefinite pron, 
any one, anything ; 7. 

quis, quae, quid, interrogative 
pron., who? which? what? 21. 

quisquam, quaequam, quid- 
quam or quicquam, any one, 
anything ; used in neg. clauses, 19. 

quisque, quaeque, quidque or 
quodque, each one, every one; 5. 

quod, conj., because ; 1. 

quoque, conj , a/so ; 1. 

quotidianus or cótidiànus, daily. 

quotidie or cotidie, adv., daily. 
quum, conj., see cum. 


R. 


rapina (rapere, to seize), plunder- 
ing : 15. 

ratio, a reckoning, account, considera- 
tion, plan, reason ; 98. 

ratis, a raft : 8. 

Raurici, a Gallic tribe, neighbors to 
the Helvetians; 5, 29. 

recens, fresh, recent ; 14. 

recipere (recipiG), -cépit, -cep- 
tus, to take back, receive; 5; sé 
recipere, to betake one’s self, to 
retreat; 11. 

redimere, -€mit, -emptus, to buy 
back, buy up ; 18. 

redintegráre, to make whole again, 
renew: 25. 

redire, ii, itürus, to go back: 29. 

reditio, a going back, return ; 5. 


420 


retinere 


redücere, -düxit, -ductus, to «ad 
back, withdraw; 28. 

referre, -tulit, -látus, to brisug back, 
report ; 25. 

regnum, royal power, kingdom; 2. 

réicere or réiicere (reicio), -iécit, 
iectus, to throw back; 24. 

relatus ; 29; see referre. 

relinquere, -liquit, -lictus, 
leave; 9. 

reliquus, adj, the rest of, remain- 
ing;cl) 

reminiscl, fo remember; 13. 

removere, -movit, motus, 
move back, remove ; 19. 

renüntiàre, to bring lack word, re- 
port; 10. 

repellere, -pulit, -pulsus, to drive 
back ; 8. 

repentinus, sudden ; 13. 

reperire, repperit or repcrit, re- 
pertus, to find out ; 18. 

reprehendere, -hendit, -hénsus, 
to hold back, blame; 20. 

repügnare, to fight back, be opposed ; 
19. 

res, rei, a thing (in the widest 
sense): its translation will vary 
widely with the context; 2. 

rescindere, -scidit, -scissus, fo 
cut away, break down ; 7. 

resciscere, -scivit or -sciit, -cci- 
tus, to find out; 28. 

resistere, -stitit, to stand back, stop, 
resist ; it takes the dative; 25. 

respondére, -spondit, -sponsus, 
to answer; 7. 

responsum, a thing said in reply, 
a reply , 14. 

r&spüblica (also written as two 
words, rés püblica, and always 
decl. as two), the commonweal, state, 
republic, 20. 

restituere, -stituit, -stitütus, to 
set up again, restore; 18. 

retinére, -tinuit, -tentus, to hold 
back; 18. 


lo 


to 


reverti 


reverti, -versus, dep., to return; 7; 
in the pf. tenses, the stem of 
act. form revertit was used by 
Caesar; 8. 

Rhénus, the Rhine ; 1. 

Rhodanus, the Rhone ; 1. 

ripa, the bank of a river; 6. 

rogare, to ask; 7. 

R6manus, adj. or noun, Roman, a 
Roman; 3. 

rota, a wheel ; 26. 

rürsus, adv. (for reversus, from 
revertere), turned back, back, 
again; 25. 


8. 


saepe, adv., often; 1. 
salüs, -ütis, a sound condition, health, 
welfare, safety ; 2T. 

Santones or Santoni, a tribe on 
the west coast of Gaul; 10, 11. 
sarcinae, sacks, bundles, especially 
soldiers’ packs (carried by each 
soldier); see p. 332 and cf. im- 

pedimenta; 24. 


satis, adv. or adj, sufficiently, 
enough; 3. 
satisfacere (satisfacióO), -fécit, 


-factürus, to do enough, satisfy, 
apologize ; 14. 

scelus, -eris, a crime ; 14. 

scire, scivit, scitus, to know; 20. 

scütum, a shield, oblong, wooden, 
and covered with leather; see 
p. 361; 25. 

$8; 1; see sul. 

sécréto, separately, in private; 18. 

secundus, following, second, favor- 

able (a wind following or right 

astern would be a favorable wind); 
14. 

sed, conj., but ; 12. 

sédecim (sex and decem), indecl. 
numeral, six and ten, sixteen; 8. 

séditidsus, full of discord, seditious ; 
17, 


421 


solum 


Segusiávi, a Gallic tribe near tlie 
Rhone; 10. 

sementis, a sowing, planting ; 3. 

semper, a/ways ; 18. 

senatus, -üs, a body of old men, a 
senate; 3. 

senex, senis, an old man; 29. 

seni (sex), distributive, siz to each, 
six ata time; 15. 

sentire, sensit, sénsus, to feel, 
perceive, think ; 18. 

séparatim, separately; 19. 

septentriO or septentridnés, the 
Great Bear, in the northern part 
of the heavens, the north ; 1. 

septimus, seventh ; 10. 

sepultüra, a burying, burial; 26. 

Séquana, fem., the Seine; 1. 

Séquani, the Sequanians ; 1. 

sequi, secütus, to follow ; 4. 

servitüs, -ütis (servus), 
tude; 11. 

servus, a slave; 27. 

seu; 23; see sive. 

sex, indecl., six; 27. 

sexügintà, sixty ; 29. 

81-co01.37.: 57. 

signum, a mark, signal, standard ; : 
see pp. 228 and 269; 25. 

silva, a forest ; 12. 

simul, adv., at the same time, at 
once; 19. 

sin (si and né, not), but f£; 13. 

sine, prep. with abl, without; 7. 

singuli, one to each, one at a time; 6. 

sinister, -tra, -trum, on the left side, 
left; sinistra (manus), the left 
hand ; 25; cf. dextra. 

sive, conj. (si and vel), or 7f; sive 
... Sive, whether... or, either 
shea OF UL. 

socer, -eri, father-in-law; 12. 

socius, anally; 5. 

s6l, masc. by exception, the sun; 1. 

solum, adv., only; nón solum, . .. 
sed etiam, not only, , . . but also; 
12. 


Servi- 


solum 


solum, the soil, the ground ; 11. 

solus (gen. -1us, dat. -1), alone; 18. 

soror, sister; 18. 

spatium, extent, either of space or 
time; 7. 

spectare, to loók, face; 1. 

spérare, to hope, expect; 3. 

Spes, -el, hope; 5. 

spontis gen., sponte abl, wanting 
in other cases; in abl, with sua, 
it means of one's own accord, by 
one's self; 9. 

statuere, statuit, statütus, to 
cause to stand, establish, decide; 11. 

studére, studuit, to be eager for, 
desire; takes the dative; 9. 

studium, zeal, devotion, a pursuit ; 19. 

sub, prep. with accus. or abl., under ; 
with accus., 7, with abl., 16. 

subdücere, -düxit, -ductus, to 
draw from below, draw up, with- 
draw ; 22. 

subesse, -fuit, fütürus, to be un- 
der, be near; 25. 

subicere or subiicere (subicio), 
-iécit, -iectus, to throw under, 
place beneath ; 26. 

subire, -iit, itus, irreg., to 7o under 
or near, to undergo; 5. 

sublatus; 5; see tollere. 

sublevare, to lift up from beneath, 
aid; 16. 

submovére ; see summovére. 

subsistere, -stitit, to make a stand, 
resist ; 15. 

subvehere, -véxit, -vectus, to 
carry from below, i.e. to carry up; 
16. 

succédere, -cessit, -cessürus, to 
go under, march up, take the place 
of; 24. 

Sul, gen. sing. or plur., of himself, 
herself, itself, themselves ; 1. 

Sulla, masc., a Roman name; Lü- 
cius Cornelius Sulla, a great 
Roman general; 21. 

Sum; see esse. 


42 


€) suus 


ded 


.Sümere, sümpsit, sümptus, to 
take up, assume; 7. 

summa (the fem. of summus, as a 
noun), the highest (part), the top, 
the sum; 29. 

summus (irreg. superlative of su- 
perus), highest; 16. 

summoveére or submovere, -mó- 
vit, motus, to remove, dislodge ; 
25. 

sümptus, -üs (sümere), a taking 
from one's means, outlay, erpense ; 
18. 

superare, to overcome, surpass; 17. 

superesse, -fuit, -futtrus, to be 
over (i.e. left over), to survive; 23; 
cf. praeesse; 16. 

superus, superior, suprémus or 
summus, high, higher, highest ; 10. 
superior, when used of time, 
means former. 

suppetere, -petivit, -petitürus 
(sub and petere), to be on hand, 
be in store; 3. 

suppliciter (supplex), suppliantly, 
as a suppliant ; 27. 

supplicium (sub and plicáre, to 
fold, bend, as the knees in kneel- 
ing), a kneeling, supplication, pun- 
ishment ; 19. 

supra, adv., above, before ; 24. 

suscipere (suscipio), -cépit, 
-ceptus (subs for sub, from un- 
der, and capere), to take from 
under, take up or upon, under- 
take; 3. 

suspicio or suspitio, suspicion ; 4. 

sustinere, -tinuit, tentus (subs 
for sub, from under, and tenére), 
to hold up, hold out against, support, 
sustain; 24. 

Suus, possessive pronominal adj. 
his, her, its, their; 1. 


4 


T. 


T.; see Titus. 

tabula, a board; hence, from the 
practice of using for records 
boards covered with wax, a writing- 
tablet, or the writing on a tablet ; 29. 

tacére, to be silent; also sometimes 
transitive, to be silent about, pass 
over in silence; 17. 

tam, adv., so (used mostly before 
adverbs and adjectives); 14. 

tamen, adv., yet, nevertheless ; 7. 

tandem |tam, so, and termination 
-dem (cf. idem)], just so far, at 
length; 25; in a question, pray. 

tantus (tam), adj., so much, so 

: great; 15. 

tibi, dat. sing., fo you, you; LX XXVI. 

telum, a weapon used for fighting at 
a distance, a missile, dart; 8. 

temperantia (temperdre), self 
control, moderation ; 19. 

temperare, to govern one's self, re- 
frain; 1. 

temptàre or tentàre (tenére), to 
handle, try ; 14. 

tempus, -oris, time; 3. 

tenére, tenuit, tentus, to hold ; 7. 

tertius, third; 1. 4 

testis, masc. or fem., a witness; 14. 

Tigurinus, noun or adj. Tiguri- 
nian, or one of the Tigurinians, a 
people inhabiting one of the four 
parts of Switzerland; 12. 

timere, timuit, to fear; 14. 

timor (timere), fear, alarm ; 23. 

Titus, à Roman first name, usually 
represented by initial T. ; 10. 

tolerare, to bear, endure; 28. 

tollere, sustulit, sublatus, irreg., 
to lift up, remove, destroy; 25. 

Tolosates, a Gallic tribe in the 
Roman province; 10. 

totus (gen. -ius, dat. -1), the whole, 
the whole of, entire ; 2. 


9 


mà 


ut 


9 


tradere, -didit, -ditus, to hand 
over, hand down, surrender ; 27. 

tradiicere or transdiicere,-duxit, 
-ductus, to lead across; 11; cf. 
transire; 5. 

tragula, a heavy Gallic javelin; 26. 

trans, prep. with accus., across ; 1. 

transfigere, -fixit, -fixus, to pierce 
through, transfix; 25. 

transire, -iit, -itus, to go across ; 5. 

trecenti, adj., three hundred ; 29. 

trés, three; 1. 

tribuere, tribuit, tribütus, 
assign, ascribe ; 13. 

triduum, the space of three days; 
26; cf. biduum ; 23. 

triginta, indecl. adj., thirty ; 26. 

triplex, -icis (trés and plicare, to 
fold), threefold, triple ; 24. 

Tulingi, a Germanic tribe which 
joined the Helvetians; 5, 25, 28, 
29. 

tulisse; 14; see ferre; 13. 

tum, adv. of time, then; 14. 

tuus, thy, thine, your; 13; cf. suus. 


to 


U. 


ubi, when, where; 5. 

ulcisci, ultus, to avenge, punish ; 12. 

üllus (gen. -Ius, dat. -3), adj., any ; 7. 

ulterior, adj. (positive wanting, 
ultimus, superlative), farther; 7. 

una, adv., together; 5. 

unde, from which place, whence ; 28. 

undique, adv., from all sides, on all 
sides; 9. 

ünus (gen. -Ius, dat. -1), one; 1. 

urbs (urbis, gen.) a city; to a 
Roman, often the city of Rome, just 
as “the city" means Boston to 
one living in the suburbs of that 
citys: 7 s. 

ut or uti, conj., that, in order that, so 
that ; if followed by the ind., as or 
when ; 2. 


uter 4 


uter, -tra, -trum (gen. -fus, dat. -1), 
adj., which (of two)? 12. 

uti; 5; see ut, 

iti, üsus, to use; takes the abla- 
tive; 5. i 

uxor, wife; 18. 


IV 


vacare, to be empty, vacant; 28. 

vadum, a ford, a shallow ; 6. 

vagarl, to wander ; 2. 

valére, valuit, valitürus, to be 
strong or powerful, to avail ; 17. 

Valerius, a Roman name; C. Va- 
lerius Procillus, a Gallic friend 
of Caesar; 19. 

vallum (vàállus, a stake), a line of 
stakes, a palisade, generally with 
earth behind it, a wall of earth, a 
rampart ; cf. p. 251; 26. 

vastare (vastus, empty), to make 
empty, to lay waste ; 11. 

vectigal, -alis, neut., a tar; 18. 

vel, or; vel... vel either... 
or ; 6. 

velle, voluit, irreg , to wish ; 7. 

venire, venit, ventum, to come; 8. 

Verbigénus, one of the four dis- 
triets of the Helvetians; 27. 

verbum, a word ; 20. 

vereri, to feel awe of, fear; 19. 

vergere, to slope, be situated ; 1. 

vergobretus, the title of the chief 
magistrate among the Haeduans; 
16. 

Verucloetius, a high-born Hel- 
vetian ; 7. 

vérus, true, right; 18. 

vesper, -erl, the evening; 26. 

vester, -tra,-trum, your, plural; 14; 
cf. tuus, thy or your, singular; 13. 

veterànus, old, veteran; 24; as 
noun, a tried soldier, a veteran. 


4 vulnus 


vetus, -eris, old, former; 13. 

vexdre, to annoy, vex, harass ; 14. 

via, wa; 9. 

victoria, victory ; 14. 

vicus (cf. -wich in Norwich), a group 
of houses, village, street ; 5. 

vidére, vidit, visus, to see; in 
pass., often, to seem ; 6. 

vigilia, watchfulness, a watch of the 
night; the Romans divided the 
night from sunset to sunrise, what- 
ever its length, into four equal 
watches; 12. 

viginti, indecl., twenty ; 13. 

vincere, vicit, victus, to conquer ; 
25. 

vinculum or vinclum, that which 
binds, hence, a rope, chain, fetter ; 4. 

virtüs, -ütis, virtue, valor; 1. 

vis, gen. vis, force, violence; 6; in 
plur. virés, strength. 

vita, life; 16. 

vitare, to shun; 20. 

vix, adv., with effort, with difficulty, 
scarcely ; 6. 

vObis, dat. and abl. plur. of vos. 

vocare, to call, summon ; 19. 

Vocontii, a Gallic tribe in the 
Roman province; 10. 

volébat; see velle. 

volo; see velle. 

voluntàs (volent(i)-, stem. of pres. 
partic. of velle, to wish, and -tàs), 
willingness, will, good-will, desire ; T. 

v Os, nom. and accus. plur., you; 14; 
cf. poss. adj. vester; 14. 

vulgus or volgus (of the -o decl, 
neut. by exception, and hence hav- 
ing nom. and accus. alike; wanting 
in plur.), the publie, the crowd, the 
mob; 20. 

vulnerdre or volnerare, to wound ; 
26. 

vulnus or volnus, -eris, a wound ; 
25. 


—9 Aor ————ÁÁ"— PST 


oy 


N a; : | 


i 


* 


MOM 


v i AXE. 7 Py ? 
* EAE 
di. iMi ae t Á 
; TES wold "x 
NO TS 
l 3 d 4 


-URBANA 


UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS 


oci 
et 
—— 
SS 
———— 
SSS 
—— 
———— 
EZ 
I———— 
TIES 
aS 
——————— 
—————— 
—————— 
SSS 
SSS 
es 
SSS 
[iid 
— 
SSS 
SSE 
————— 
—————— 
a 
———S 
Loo mid 
——————— 
———————— 
Se 
qa 
ea 
———— 
LLL 
ae SS 
SS 
LL 
ass 


ae ae 
Esse SSmi et Ss 


Sp npo ah pee se eas i ie gs 
He a emet s s 


zem 
U ee 


SPR A eee 
E 
tse n Anm @, 


o Lip Spa s i E 
eas ay PEs 29. ie Ln Sr m 
Ea My tio ists 0. dor AA Atti mr, res Mis 
rg Oa SEA] RC oot eg 


Pup fof 3» ots x, 
es asd e Dr uto fret RU ER 


irum) i uai 
s 5 daa Re! 


E enin ur deg ij s LA - 
: Mee eU eem dum lese Myra eka ania +425 ; M tard 
m rnt rit rie ' z : s " mdp iu 
: 5 s i 


ice 
Dis timesbent eU my 


fepe A - Se reri i RU ut 
ee ERES eap hic 


js pores I 2 ais one oo COP iiiter 
Pig tee! m Lire mrt at a my eas tee ee : 
yep nnllo: "ut ^ itn a Nore meee ae : 
eet yoy en 6t np one SAAS pte cgi DK Mmm tm ms í sa mad site i : 
T Lieder eai rape ees mma Terr ‘ E ADOS s Mti som Le: Bia be ae E . : Ae MM d - pM 
qe rir ath c E aw uei : + 5 " Y E P inti rat eese reU s prat e i — AA AM HUE COLOR. pi 


rpm dmt a goin stis 
rens 


